Home

2 - Lakewood Automation

1. BATTERY PERIPHERAL Host S9DIAVQ JEJOUCIIOd BIGe D9UUOD RS 232C cable 15m max RS 485 RS422 cable 500m max Ethernet 2 With NB Designer Software installed RS 232C cable USB cable 1 Ethernet 2 USB memory NB Unit Running Windows XP Vista 7 1 When using USB to connect NB Unit with the computer please refer to 2 3 2 Connecting by USB in NB Series Setup Manual 2 When connecting NBLILI TWO1B and the Host through the Ethernet the Host should support the Ethernet communications NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 1 7 1 Introduction 1 4 Procedures for NB Series PTs Operation Perform the following procedures to operate the NB Series PTs Installation on the See 2 1 2 Installation onto the Operation panel Startup of NB Designer Peripheral connecti
2. Screen property Title FrameO No O Protect key mapping on common sheet screen Switch to the lowest security level when screen closed Screen Attribute Keyboard Security Level po Position E O xO Yo Background ES SIrenT olor Width 800 Transparency os y k 3 n a Pop up screen Type lf Tracking Modal lf Clipping Fired Frame Color The Security Level is only valid for the Base Screen One project has 3 Security Levels i e High 2 Common 1 and Low 0 by default The default security level is Low when creating a new screen You can set different passwords for each security level in the PT Property The user with higher security level can access the screen with the lower security level while the user with the lower security level can t access the screen with the higher security level Such kind of method is helpful to the security management For example we can place the important switches into the screen with the higher security level so the user can t access them after they enter this screen and the contents can be accessed only after the password for the higher security level is input Here is an example about security level usage Firstly select File New and double click PT in the Project Work Space then set The number of Security Levels to 3 1 level Password to 1111 and 2 level Password to 888888 in Security Levels Setting tab of PT Pr
3. AlarmLib csv save as type Unicode Text txt oe TEKEE a SA KML Spreadsheet 2003 xmi 3 Microsoft Excel 5 0 95 Workbook xls CSV Comma delimited csv d Change the extension of the saved file to csv 1 Not Display Frame of Component The frame of the component is not displayed when the component uses the graphics but displayed when the component doesn t use the graphics as shown below B 1 Gradation of Static Graphics Gradation adds the effects to fill the graphics And this function is useful for drawing the Vector Graphics such as the piping with the gradation effect as shown below Horizontal Vertical C Radiate to Edges Radiate from Center C Oblique Oblique from Bottom 3 366 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer 1 Polygon Overall Zoom The Overall zoom in out added to the polygon allows the resizing without changing the shape After the component is clicked to turn into selecting state one more click allows the editing the top of the polygon In the case the cursor is turned to be appeared as as follows When the cursor is appeared as lt gt Overall zoom out in can be performed p O O r gt D zi c 3 O ct fe 5 D 1 Graphics Library The display area is divided into two parts All the graphics in the g
4. 3 336 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer 4 Create two recipe data transmission components with both addresses of 4X100 and one component is used to download the recipe data and the other is used to upload the recipe data 5 Design two Command Button components Up and Down for the user to retrieve and change each group of recipe data conveniently After the Up button is pressed for retrieving data upwards the system will subtract 5 from LW9000 Because each group of recipe data is made of 5 words each time the Up button is pressed RWIO displays the Recipe data with a smaller Recipe No group After the Down button is pressed for retrieving data downwards the system will add 5 to LW9000 Because each group of recipe data is made of 5 words so each time the Down button is pressed RWIO displays the Recipe data with a larger Recipe No group The upper limit of recipe data is 45 10 groups of recipes as shown below EN N A D Q 5 D O D r D Basic Property Command Button Label Graphics Control Setting Display Setting Basic Property Command Button Label Graphics Control Setting Display Setting Priority Nomal Type Add value Addend 5 Max Value 45 Read Address Write Address gum MAIE a PLC E PT HMIO No 0 PT HMIO No 0 Change m Change E Station No 9 St
5. r Display Control Touching is invalid when Components are not displayed Display i Not Display Touching is invalid Conditional Display Security Level Control User Permission Control IW Indirect Reference Bit On OF hi PLC No O l Change Station No 0 Data Format BIN z Use Variable Format Range DDDD 0 9999 Word Length 1 Use index Perform the offline test When LB10 is Off the number input component is hidden as shown in the following left graphics When LB10 is On the number input component is displayed as shown in the following right graphics NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 79 poy w ubisag dIseg s e 3 JUBUOKWUOD Jo Buines Aejdsiq Z S 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 6 Parts Parts are designed to meet specific needs Generally speaking one component can realize one function but some components should be combined with the related components or PLC to realize some specific functions as shown below Components Related Components Descriptions Number Input Function Key To create the keyboard by Function Key Text Input Function Key To create the keyboard by Function Key Indirect Screen The created screen Direct Screen The created screen Alarm Setting Alarm Alarm Display To display
6. Take the communication between OMRON CP1H and NB5Q as example and the operation procedures are as follows 1 Open the NBManager and select Pass Through Communication 2 Specify the Communications path to control the Pass Through Communications with the Com munications settings Select USB port in this case The Serial port cannot be used to control the Pass Through Communications USB port is used to control the start and end of the pass through communication Set the Source port and Destination port as shown above NB Series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 4 17 gt U fev n a i c ro gt O O 3 3 O fe cr O gt 4 Functions of NBManager The communication parameters are consistent with the settings of the Communications in OMRON CP1H Connect the data transmission cable Connect the communication cable of OMRON CP1H to COM2 of PT and connect the COM1of PT and COM port of PC with the cable Note NB3Q TWULB has only 1 COM port so the pass through communication cannot be carried out Wiring of twisted cable PT connector ent 9pin D SUB female PC connector 9pin D SUB male After Start pass through communication is clicked PT will be in Pass through mode and Pass through communication set successfully dialog box will pop up in NBManager a e DUE Open CX programmer for OMRON CP1H Sele
7. PT HMI0 Part COM Fort COM1 Change Bi Change 7 m Station No 0 Station Na 0 Area Warable LWV T Address 9406 M System Memory Address U System Memory Dia BN Med ge Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 F Use Variable D Use Variable l Use index T Use index Secondly place one Number Input component for inputting the password with the address of LW9502 the word length of 2 and the data type of password User Login x Ea User Name if Priorty Nomal Password Login B Out Read Address Write Address l Site P 5 _ PE z PT HMIO Ww l PT HMIO No Port COMI Port COMI Change 7 Change z z Station No 0 z Station No 0 Area Variable LW Address System Memory Data Word Fomat BN 1 Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 Use Variable l Use Variable Use index Use index 3 304 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer Thirdly place one Bit Button component to perform user login with the address of LB9165 type of Set and the label content of Login User Login y Basic Property Bit Button Label Graphics Control Setting Display Setting User Name Password IONO Write Address HMO Port COM1 Change z Station No 0 sJajowejed W JS S 0 Area Variable LB9165 Userlogin 5et i Address 3165 W System Memory Data Format 3 BIN _ Use Variable _ Use Variable Use index l Us
8. Width Pen Size 1 8 Unit pixel If the input value is less than the minimum value 1 or greater than the maximum value 8 the system will automatically set it to the minimum value or the maximum value respectively P D D O 5 49 om J iq N O O O N Color Pen Color 0 65535 It is recommended to use Macro RGB r g b to set the color and the range for r g and b is 0 255 The system will convert the value of RGB r g b according to the color parameters of PT screen b Brush Structure BrushParam typedef struct brushparam int type int foreColor int backColor BrushParam BrushParam is mainly used to set the type of the brush the foreground color and background color Brush type is mainly used to set the filling styles used by the brush graphics filling and gradient filling And the value range is as follows Parameter Name Descriptions Type Brush type BFS_NOBRUSH No filling Proua AEri BFS_DENSE1 Eaa e eTA NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 275 3 Functions of NB Designer Parameter Name Value Descriptions BFS_DENSE2 BFS_DENSE3 BFS_DENSE4 BFS_DENSES5 BFS_DENSE6 BFS_DENSE7 BFS_DENSE8 BFS_DENSE9 BFS_DENSE10 BFS_DENSE11 BFS_DENSE12 BFS_FDIAG1 BFS_BDIAG1 BFS_FDIAG2 BFS_BDIAG2 BFS_FDIAG3 BFS_BDIAG3 BFS_VER1 BFS_HOR1 BFS_VER2 BFS_HOR2 BFS_VER3 BFS_HOR3 BFS_DIAGCROSS BFS
9. Storage Device USB DISK1 V Restoration during outages 7 Data Encryption 0 V Export to CSV File Save as ms DDDDDD Subfolder XY_CHART Storage Type Daily file X Buffer Storage Default x Storage Period 0 Note 1 No limit when storage period is zero 2 Subfolder name must be unique T Indirect Subfolder Reference PT HMIO PLC 0 Area Variable yw Address 9 Data Format pin Use Variable Word Length 9 Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 Save to Recipe Data Field Checking this option means the data will be saved into the 3 102 address of memory for recipe memory in the PT i e RW memory NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer End Address Starting address 20 Sampled pages x sampling points page x 4 Channel numbers 6 Press the OK button to complete the setup of the XY Graph component Example When the maximum value and minimum value of a line graph Drawing method Standard are specified indirectly Descriptions The coordinate position of sampling point 1 and sampling point 2 correspond to X y LW10 LW11 and x y LW12 LW13 and the minimum values and maximum values of y coordinate and x coordinate are LW20 amp LW21 and LW22 amp LW23 respectively YY Plot Standard A xY LYV10 Bottom layer mol LW10 LW10 TATU TXT4 TXT2 w TXT3 A TXT4 TXT5 TXT6
10. e 6 6 b aje ejs oja 3 400 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer e Input Data in Data Area and Binary Browser Directly input data in data area and right click the mouse in the address where the bits to be browsed or click 6 Binary Browser icon to perform the bit browsing with selected the address which should be checked the state of the bit 10 1p3 d 9 Y ZL 3 In this case the value of RW2 is 9 and bit addresses of 03 and 00 indicate the status of ON in binary browser NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 401 3 Functions of NB Designer Usage of RecipeEditor 1 Add Data format Data Type and Adjustment of Data Start Address and Data Length Procedure of Adding Data Format Procedure of Adding Data Type TestDataFormat 7 ID Length w D Description Desci Add Field Modify Field Delete Field Delete All Fields mydataformat Single precision float number E Double precision float number mydataformat String Data TestDataFormat mydataformat 3 402 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer 2 Creating new Recipe file and Saving the file When new Recipe file is created the data type is needed to be specified When the existing Recipe file
11. 2 fe The first digit indicates the PLC No currently used The second digit indicates the Station No of PLC currently used Screens Preview Click Screens Preview in the Project Work Space to display the preview of the corresponding screen This makes browsing the thumbnails quite conveniently 90eds YONA pP fold E E F Screens Preview O Frame mM 1 Common Window 2 Fast Selection 3 HUM Keyboard Co PLC and PT replacement e Supporting PLC Model Replacement Note PLC replacement must be carried out through the Change PLC Modell option If you do not use this function and delete all the settings of PLC to reconnect with the new PLC the PLC area is replaced with all the local addresses of PT NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 39 3 Functions of NB Designer It provides a parameter setting dialog box for the PLC to be replaced and other PLCs in the navigation mode for the user to make replacement operation Select a PLC and right click it in the Configuration and Setup Window to make the pull down menu popup and then click Change PLC Model 44a eee aeue ae Ctrl X Copy Ctrl C Delete H Paste Ctrl V Repeat Change PT Model ese Feder amp amp Edit Logo Screen J Import Recipe Edit 84 Property Then the Change PLC Model dialog box will pop up as shown below Current PLC OMRON CPIHAL E
12. ES Download Operati EJ Upload Operation System Operation a ee Get Version Decompile Operatior aL Pass Th h FB Pas Through Communication Setting seo ex Communication Method Serial port p Download FAW Data Recipe Editor NULL Fort NULL PotNo COMI m Select Data LOGO Setting Download Project Files Show LOGO Hide LOGO Download LOGO m Clear Data Download Recipe l Clear Recipe Clear FRW Data Clear Data History I Clear Event History l Clear ERW Data NB Series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 4 Functions of NBManager If the setting is failed please modify the Communication Setting again after the Error occurs dialog box pops up coe x Communication Setting Communication Method Serial port IP NULL Pott NULL Select Data LOGO Setting Decompile Operatior Download Project Files Show LOGO 23 Hide LOGO Pass Through ey Conmvamication Download LOGO Clear Data Download Recipe l Clear Recipe l Clear FAW Data Clear Data History l Clear ERW Data Download FR W Data I Clear Event History Recipe Editor Clicking the BACK and Next buttons can make switching among the Download Operate Upload Operate System Operate Get Version Decompile Operate and Pass Through Communication Click the Exit
13. NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 7 3 7 PictBridge Printing 7 2 Setting Method for Using Printing Function 1 After the project being completed compile it with the Enable Print option in the Print Setting tab in the PT Property dialog box being checked _ System Information Setting Security Level Setting User Permission Setting Event History Setting PT PT Extended Property COM2 Setting Extemal Memory Print Setting Paper Size A4 210 0mm 297 0mm z Print Setting of Event Print Order No Full page Print Print Time I Print Date 2 Set the DIP switches SW1 and SW2 on the back side both to ON Then press the Reset switch and restart the NB Unit to enter the System Setting Mode Then download project to the NB Unit after the compilation is completed Check the Enable Printer Function option to enable the printing operation The locations of Enable Printer Function in the System Setting Mode for different PTs NB10W is the same as NB7W and NB3Q is the same as NB5Q are shown as follows 7012 09 04 17 46 58 NB7W TWOLB SETUP NS7W TWO0O0B SETUP Options Ars ate Options Suhnet Maek Starttip T m ow No 9 Enable Prmler Funcion 2612 69 64 a r NE5Q TW01B SETUP 612 097 64 Wf 45 59 NBSQ TWOOB SETUP Options Backlight Saver Time hin Startup inco ho Enable Printer Function Bome E Options Backlight Saver Ti
14. The Date of Occur is indicated e nnfmd represents the start symbol nn represents the addresses of the internal memory LW from 00 to 99 f represents that the displayed number includes the decimal part m represents the digit of the decimal digit d represents the end symbol If Yonnd is entered the value excluded the digit of decimal digit will be displayed For example if you want to display the value stored in LW20 with one decimal digit enter 20f1d If the stored value in the PLC memory should be displayed transferred it to internal memory LW to display it Use Buzzer When the event is triggered the buzzer will be enabled The Buzzing Time can be set with the unit of second P P D m lt 49 5 m Cp O 3 Q Open Text Opens the text library editing dialog box Library Open Variable Open the variable editing dialog box Table Please refer to 3 9 3 Macro Triggering Page 3 268 3 Clicking OK allows the specified event setting added in the List of the Event Setting dialog box The registered event setting can be deleted by Delete button or modified by Modify button Click OK button to finish the registration of the event setting pape ge a a5 No Type PTNo Address inform Condition _ Messag 0 0 0 HMIO0 PLCO 0 LB 0 Off LBO ON 1 0 0 HMIO0 PLCO 0 Liw 30 gt 0 Temper 4 m r Add Delete Delete All Modify Impo
15. Add User Operation Confirmation Place one Bit Button component with the address of LW9167 and switch type of Set for confirming the added user permission S74 Bit Button property Basic Property Bit Button Label Graphics Control Setting Display Setting Add User Message window compilation Done Warning Error 0 3 310 Priority Nomal Change Station No Area Variable LE Address System Memory Address 1167 IW System Memory Data Word Data Word F Pi BIN lengh 1 aaa BIN Lengh 7 Use Variable Use index Change E Station No Area Variable LB9167 Add userSet or Format Range DDDD 0 3999 Use Variable T Use index NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer Perform the test and the effect is as shown below User Manager User Home Adni nistrator Eng i neer Add User o pilin Delete User sJajoWesed Waj sAS QL 3 nu Task Bar User Home uias UOISSIWIAd JOS 9 OL Administrator Eng i neer Dperator Menu Task Bar NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 311 3 Functions of NB Designer Input the User Name to be added set the Password and the Password Confirm and then set the Logout Time for this user and assign the Permission After the setting click ADD to complete Add User operation U
16. PT HMIO PLE p PT HMO o Port COMI Port COMI Change Change E Station No 0 Station No 0 Area Variable LWW Area Variable LW Address 0 System Memory Address 0 D System Memory Data Word Data Word aad BIN q 1 Fad BIN far Format Range DDODDD 0 102255 Use Variable Use Variable Use index Use index Read Address The address specifying the display of the alarm is specified All the alarm information is displayed from the latest to the oldest i e if the value of the read address is N the Nth alarm will be displayed on the first line the alarm of the smaller No than N will be removed Address Refers to the word address using for controlling display Word Length Displays the data length of the read address which is 1 by default 3 148 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer 2 Go to the Alarm tab as shown below Basic Property Alarm Display Setting W V o r WIE 8 9 Row Spacing and Column Spacing Specifying the row space and column space of the displayed alarm Display Range 0 To 255 are available When memory the alarm information you need to assign a type for each piece of alarm information For example 3 pieces of information are registered with 0 1 and 2 as their types Add an Alarm component in the screen and set the Display Range to
17. lt o Le z U Operating procedure 1 After the USB slave for the NB Unit and the computer are connected by the USB cable Found New Hardware Wizard will be displayed on PC After selecting Install the software automatically Recommended click the Next button How do you want to search for driver software gt Search automatically for updated driver software Windows will search your computer and the Internet for the latest driver software for your device unless you ve disabled this feature in your device installation settings Browse my computer for driver software Locate and install driver software manually 2 USB driver is being installed Installing driver software NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 2 5 2 Installation and Startup of NB Designer 3 After the completion of installation the following dialog box will be displayed Click the Close button Windows has successfully updated your driver software Windows has finished installing the driver software for this device OMRON HMI USB When the above mentioned installation methods don t work 1 After the USB slave for the NB Unit and the computer are connected by the USB cable Update Driver Software will be displayed on PC After selecting Browse my computer for driver software How do you want to search for driver software Search auto
18. 0 00 eee es 5 4 5 3 Abnormality Handling 260 cc0 sv tcee err ew edt ee ee eee eed ew ees 5 6 5 4 Unit Replacement Precautions 0 000 cee es 5 9 NB Series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 5 1 5 Maintenance and Abnormality Handling 5 1 Maintenance Please perform the maintenance to ensure the NB Series always in the optimal status Do not attempt to take the product apart and do not touch the product inside while the power is being supplied Otherwise it may result in electric shock Always ensure that the personnel in charge confirm that installation inspection and maintenance were properly performed for the NB unit Personnel in charge refers to individuals qualified and responsible for ensuring safety during machine design installation operation maintenance and disposal Ensure that installation and post installation checks are performed by personnel in charge who possess a thorough understanding of the machinery to be installed Do not use the input functions of the touch switch etc of the NB Unit in applications that involve human life in applications that may result in serious injury or for emergency stop switches Do not attempt to disassemble repair or modify the NB Unit Otherwise it may impair the safety functions Never press more than two points on the touch panel of the NB Unit at a time Otherwise it may activate a switch somewhere between the two poin
19. Data Format BIN Word Length 3 Use Variable Fomat Range DDDDD 0 1055 It is used to save the time when the latest sampling point is performed Time option in Control memory Setting is valid only when the Save Time is checked The default memory is LW and the Word Length is 12 cw Time PT Hmo PE og No Area Varable LW ha Address 70 Data Format BIN Word Length 1 Use Variable Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 As shown as above when the allocated address is specified to LW70 each data is stored as below e The sampling time of the oldest data within the displayed page Second LW70 Minute LW71 Hour LW72 Day LW73 Month LW74 Year LW75 e The sampling time of the newest data within the displayed page Second LW76 Minute LW77 Hour LW78 Day LW79 Month LW80 Year LW81 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 Switch to the Channel tab and set the parameters related to each graph Basic Property Scope Chart Channel Extended Property Display Setting T Indirect Max Min Reference 1 epi soned E a 16 bit signed n 16 bit unsigned 32bit signed 32 bit unsigned float double W ez V few a yde1Boj I9SO LZ 9 Color Specifies the color for each track line Line Width Refers to the thickness of the line and 8 kinds of line width are available here Storage Format S
20. Use Variable Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 Addvaive ooo Set values when screen is unloading Set values when screen is maximized Set values when screen is minimized Set values when backlight is OFF Set values when input suceeded Set values when input failed COM1 Setting Mode is as follows Type Set Values Set values when screen is loading Set values when screen is unloading Set values when screen is maximized Set values when screen is minimized Set values when backlight is OFF Set values when input suceeded Set values when input failed Add value Subtract value Descriptions The preset constant will be written to the specified word address when this component is pressed The preset constant will be written to the specified word address when one screen is opened The preset constant will be written to the specified word address when one screen is closed The preset constant will be written to the specified word address when the screen is maximized The preset constant will be written to the specified word address when the screen is minimized The preset constant will be written to the specified word address when the backlight is Off The preset constant will be written to the specified word address when the number or text is input successfully Input the constant to be set in Set Value The preset constant will be written to the specified word add
21. Z D gt a 2 D a TI c 3 O fe 0 The new added memories related to the recipe are as follows memory Descriptions ERWO ERW2 Refers to the absolute addresses of the recipe word addresses saved in the external memory AJOWSBW PSAJOSOY W JS S Z 9 NB Series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 6 3 6 Descriptions of New Functions Added into NBLILI TW01B 6 1 4 Download through Ethernet e Precautions for download through Ethernet and setting methods of IP address The IP address of PC and that of PT should locate in the same network segment with the first 3 parts being same and the last part not being overlapped If the LAN is used the IP address can t be modified to prevent the conflict with the other IP addresses in the network First set the network IP address in the Control Panel for Windows to the same network segment as that for PT Unit The IP address of PT Unit can be checked from the PT in the System Setting Mode with the DIP switches SW1 and SW2 on the back side both set to ON Then make various settings in the Project Option Setting dialog box In the NB Designer select Ethernet from the Download Device option in Project Option Setting dialog box after clicking Transmission Setting option _ in the Tools menu and then set the IP address to be same as that of PT Unit At that time the project created in NB Designer can be downloaded into the PT
22. r 7 J J N 949 VL 9 W Target Value 50 Permissible Error 10 E Color Minimum 0 Masirnurn 100 100 100 60 60 50 7 50 7 40 i 0 0 D100 30 D100 40 D100 60 D100 70 Meter Width When the Level Meter is of a Circle shape the width of the fan can be set with the unit of pixel point Start Angle When the Level Meter is of a Circle shape the Start Angle of the fan can be set End Angle When the Level Meter is of a sector shape the End Angle of the sector ring can be set If the start angle is different from the end angle shape of the meter will be fan shaped NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 131 3 Functions of NB Designer Detailed descriptions of the Level Meter Properties Color This option is used to set the colors for the normal state warning the upper or lower limit value border and background of the Level Meter Flash Over When the value of the specified memory exceeds the set Alarm Upper the filled area of the Max Level Meter flashes Flash Under When the value of the specified memory falls below the set Alarm Lower the filled area of the Min Level Meter flashes Minimum Sets the upper and lower limit values of the display area for the Level Meter The percentage of Maximum filled area in the Level Meter can be derived from the following formula Percentage of filled area in the Level Meter Value read by the memory Minimum value Maximum value Min
23. sane Polen fF fon fe Magnification aE gmg SE E pm Print page Custom Color p Print Text Current Page IV Print Text V Print Analog Meter V Print Data Log V Print All Bitmap V Print All Vector Map Print Background Colors Change Paper To Print Landscape Portrait A f c Pen Size Sets the thickness of pen from the available 1 the thinnest to 8 the thickest as shown below d Clear Clears the contents in the whole Notepad NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 217 3 Functions of NB Designer Create a Notepad 1 Makes Frame 0 as the Note pad screen Of course you can make the other screen as the Note pad screen And later you just need to drag the Notepad component to the screen Notepad Display Setting Frame Width 4 B FremeColor V Background Color Background Color E Pattem Color 2 Firstly set the Properties of the Notepad component as shown below Frame Width Select 4 here from the range of 1 to 16 Frame Color Background Color and Pattern Color Select the colors you want to use here 3 Then adjust the screen to the required size as shown below NFO 4 Later add several Function Keys in the left and bottom of the Notepad component respectively i e select Function Keys FKO FK1 FK2 and FK3 to be as Pen Eraser Clear Block and Clear Screen respectively select the Fu
24. 0 To 1 Then when all of the 3 alarms occur set to the TypeO and Type will be displayed in the screen 3 Press the OK button to complete the setup and adjust the position and the size of the Alarm component 3 149 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer Example of Alarm component Use a Vector Graphics VGO as the rectangle background and another Vector Graphics VG1 as the sunken display area Use 2 Command Button components SWDO SWD1 to increase or decrease the starting lines of alarm information displayed i e controlling the increase or decrease of the Read Address data Two command button components SWDO and SWD1 allow the start line No Read Address of the alarm increased or decreased to scroll the displayed alarm The Data Log component acquires some PLC data and displays it in the manner of a Data Log at regular intervals When each sampling period comes to an end new data will be read from the PLC and displayed on the right of the Data Log which ensures the real time display Vector Graphic Scale Trends The latest data shows on the left and the track moves right A typical example of Data Log is as above shown Use one Vector Graphics as background and use the Scale component to express the information on the related Data Logs Then place the Data Log component above the Vector Graphics When the trend curve sho
25. 3 Functions of NB Designer m Graphics Library System Graphics Library C User Defined Library Path vr Type All images vg bg 7 fan image lamp meter motor arrow button car nature people pump radar tank toggle valve warning Graphics for Each State z Refresh Import Exit State In the same project the bitmap and the Vector Graphics are placed in the same location i e VG folder under Project File folder And all the imported bitmaps are stored in project lt project file name gt image folder Don t delete these pictures otherwise the graphics library will not be displayed normally Note There is no limitations for the size of the graphics imported BMP JPG GIF PNG and the graphics will be compressed according to the maximum used size The maximum used size Maximum length x Maximum Width in the project during the compilation 3 5 7 Creating Label Label refers to the text displayed in the surface of the components such as switch lamp or the other components Label Addition 1 Select Label in the Property page of the selected component 2 Check Transport Font NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 66 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 As shown below write the contents to be displayed for the label in Message Label Graphics Control Setting Display Setting
26. 4 p Copy Text to All State Font Type Vector Font Bitmap Font Font Attribute Font DFNB EN Size 24 v Position Left Color Language English USA 7 ttalic T Bold Copy Font Attribute to NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 181 3 Functions of NB Designer 9 Place one Command Button component LW9150 with Type Addend and Max Value of Add value 8 and 100 respectively in Command Button tab and the Label of PgDn Basic Property Command Button Label Graphics Control Setting Display Setting Basic Property Command Button Label Graphics Control Setting Display Setting Priority Normal Type Add value Addend 8 Max Value 100 Read Address v Write Address pate ee s PT HMIO Mo 0 PT HMIO No 0 Port COM1 Port COM1 HA Indirect Reference Change m Change 5 PLC z Station No 0 Station No 0 PT HMIO No 0 X Area Varnable LW X Area Variable RYE RO ESE le Port COM1 I Change Station No 0 r Address 0 7 System Memory Address 9150 V System Memory Area Variable LW X Dia gy Wor Ota pn Woi yy Format Length Format Length Address 0 Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 Puss Feast BIN z T Use Variable I Use Variable Word Length 2 X Use index I Use index Use Variable Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 10 Place one
27. By clicking the or symbol on the left of the icon the folder tree can be unfolded or folded By double clicking a specific file the editing state can be entered Note The recipe file RCP can only be imported and deleted but not be edited in the Edit Window Graphics The Graphics mainly indicates this project contains how many Vector Graphics and bitmaps If a new Vector Graphics or bitmap is created in this project it will show up immediately here If a created Vector Graphics or bitmap is double clicked the screen will be switched to the graphics edit window immediately For Vector Graphics and bitmaps refer to 3 5 5 Vector Graphic Page 3 58 and 3 5 6 Bitmap Page 3 63 3 3 3 Project Work Space The Project Work Space is mainly intended for displaying the structure of the project and contains two parts PT and PLC as shown below NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 37 3 Functions of NB Designer And the schematic diagram is shown as below Part 0 Screen 0 Part 1 Project Name HMI O Screen 1 Part n HMI HMI 1 Screen n HMI n PLC 0 PLC PLC 1 PLC n PT It mainly displays stores the number of PT used in the project each of which also has a subfolder Every folder stores its own structure PLC It mainly displays stores the number of PLC PLC No and Station No addresses used in the project Tree View ites view O HMI 0 AmO
28. Language Language 1 sd g ol OO fe o O O 1 o Q gt z r gt ie Q Font type Vector Font Bitmap Font Font Attribute Font DFNB EN Pasition Left Color Language English USA T talic T Bold Copy Font Attribute to joqe7 Buea 7J S 4 Set the display Properties such as the alignment method font size and color etc 5 Press the OK button to complete the setup State Number State number is only effective for the component with multiple states The text for every state can be displayed independently The text font color and alignment method for the corresponding state can be set after the state is selected Message Input the text to be displayed in the component surface here If there are several lines you can use Enter key to break them Font Size The size of Bitmap Font is as follows 8 16 24 32 48 64 72 96 120 and 144 pixels Position When the input text for the label is 2 lines or more Left Right or Center can be selected for the alignment between the upper line and the lower line NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 67 3 Functions of NB Designer Color You can select color among 40 colors 65536 colors which include supplementary colors Default Color palette contains the most commonly used colors Custom Color palette allows the users to customize the palette 65
29. PLC No option Basic Property Bit Switch Label Graphics Control Setting Display Setting Prionty Normal Make Read Address and Write Address the Same PT HMO ng 0 PT HMO 10 Fort COM1 Port COM Change z Change C SationNo 9 C Sain No 2 Area Variable CIO_bit ki Area Wanable G B Address 0 00 System Memory Address 10 0 System Memory NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 57 3 Functions of NB Designer The internal memory can be also selected And the descriptions of internal memory are as follows Type Descriptions Bit 0 9999 The address of the local memory Bit 0 0 261000 F 1 The index address of the recipe memory that is stored in the flash memory in D H format and H ranges from 0 to 15 Bit 0 0 261000 F 1 The absolute address of the recipe memory that is stored in the flash memory in D H format and H ranges from 0 to 15 Bit The index address of the FLASH memory in D H format and H ranges from 0 to 15 Bit The absolute address of the FLASH memory in D H format and H ranges from 0 to 15 Bit LW B 0 0 10255 F The address of the local memory in D H format and H ranges from 0 to 15 Word The address of the local memory Word RWI 0 261000 2 The index address of the recipe memory that is stored in the flash memory Word RW 0 261000 2 The absolute address of the recipe memory that is stored in the flash memory Word FRW 0 134217727 The index
30. PLCNo g J Use Variable Area Variable pw Area Variable jy Address 0 Address 0 Data Format BIN WordLength 2 X Data Format BiN WordLength 4 Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 When sampling cycle is referenced indirectly and sampling cannot be canied out in specified time system will use the previous sampled values Lok cca When the sampling cycle and the sampling points are specified indirectly if the value of the reference address cannot be obtained the value obtained previously can be used The extended properties of the data log are as follows Channel Properties Channel o p Display Style Line Style _ Display LINE 7 Indirect Reference of Sampling Cycle Style Line Width erence amp PT um PLCNe g JF Use Variable Marker Properties Marker Marker Size 10 z E Marker Color Area Vanable yy r Address 0 IV Use Grid Dat Fi at i op Word Len Lines 5 Columns 9 X E Background Color oo BIN gh 2 Gid une Width 7 Gd ne Sie N e J Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 3 362 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer The effect of the screen is as shown below O 2 Q f el H z ad O c m SUOI JOUN 19430 OL Timeline Current sampling time T
31. RS232 RS485 RS422 or Ethernet jO DINJONAJSG pue SUOI IUN L L w 02 D g v N Sending Data to the Host The data entered from the touch panel ON OFF button status numeric data and character strings can be sent to the host Sld S S gN Jo suoyes do Z ON OFF status numeric data etc NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 1 3 1 Introduction 1 2 Communicating with the Host With NB series PTs data required for display can be accessed and the words and bits where the entered data will be stored can be allocated to any area in the PLC The operations include the direct reading and writing of the allocated words and bits the modification of the display status for the functional objects on the PT screen and the control and report of the PT status NB Series PT PLC DM area I O area Auxiliary area timers counters NB Series PTs can be connected to the PLC manufactured by OMRON using the Host Link method 1 2 1 What s the Host Link The Host Link is a kind of optimized and economical communication method for FA system which is applicable to link one PT with one PLC or more The PC can be used to transfer programs to the PLC monitor the data area of PLC and control the operation of PLC In the system using Host Link system one PT sends Host Link commands to the PLC and the commands processing is completed followed by returning the resul
32. Select New in the File menu or 4 icon to create a new project Ci et E Open Corto Close P lel save Ctri s i Save As I D Project Password G 1 C NBProject car car nbp 2 DemoProject_NB7W nbp 3 C Program Files car nbp Exit A new project is created when you press OK after inputting the project name Open Select Open in the File menu or a icon to open an existing project a Hew _ Lock in jy car e aa Open Hva image Close P oll k Save Bane Save As Project Password 1 C NBProject car car nbp 2 DemoProject_NB7W nbp 3 C Program Files car nbp a oe Exit Fes of type ND Oeegner Project fiet be Cancel Select the project file to be opened and press Open or double click this project file NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 7 3 Functions of NB Designer Save Select either of Save and Save As Project Password 1 C NBProject car car nbp 2 DemoProject_NB W nbp 3 C Program Files car nbp Exit Close Select Close in the File menu to close the current project m Save Save As Project Password 1 C NBProject car car nbp 2 DemoProject_NB W nbp 3 C Program Files car nbp Exit NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer All the current windows will be closed after Close being pressed and the display s
33. The prerequisite for the decompile operation is Allow Decompilation is checked and the pass word is set in the PT Extended Properties tab during the project creation The default decompi lation password is 888888 4 16 NB Series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 4 Functions of NBManager 4 7 Pass Through Communication Pass Through Communication provided by NBManager allows the PLC programming software on PC to connect the PLC directly via PT In this case PT functions just as the converter so the user can monitor or modify the PLC via PT and the user can perform upload or download of PLC programs The only Communications available through the Pass Through Communications is the ones with Serial port The connection is as shown below Please set the Source port and Destination port of the Pass Through Communications Source port refers to the serial port of PC for connecting PT while the Destination port refers to the serial port of PT for connecting the PLC Communication Setting ES Download Operation Communication Method HE port Upload Operation Uy aii IP NULL pot NULLS 24 System Operation Get Version Source port PC gt PT Destination port PT gt PLC Decompile Operatior Type AS232 Type As232 Fort No COM Fort Mo COMA Communication Setting BaudAate 5600 i Parity Data Bit a a Stop Bit Start pass through communication Stop pass through communication
34. W Int Width of the circumscribed rectangle of arc Unit pixel h Height of the circumscribed rectangle of arc Unit pixel start The starting angle of the arc Unit degree end Int The end angle of the arc Unit degree pen Arc border pen 3 280 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer g Sector DrawPie x y w h start end pen brh The description of the parameter is as follows Parameter Descriptions xX Int X axis coordinate of the upper left corner of the circumscribed rectangle of sector Unit pixel y Int Y axis coordinate of the upper left corner of the circumscribed rectangle of sector Unit pixel W Int Width of the circumscribed rectangle of sector Unit pixel b h Int Height of the circumscribed rectangle of sector Unit pixel S start The starting angle of the sector Unit degree 3 end Int The end angle of the sector Unit degree 3 e gt pen PenParam Sector border pen brh BrushParam Sector filling brush For the drawing functions RGB values can be used directly for the colors For the corresponding relationship between 65536 Color and RGB the system will handle it directly int MacroEntry PenParam pen P a D O e 5 49 J iq N O O O 3 o BrushParam brh Point pts 5 short buf 2 0 pts O x 0 pts O y 0 pts 1 x 100 pts 1 y 0 pts 2 x 120 pts 2 y 150
35. filled Color 3 20 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer Here you can select any color you want to have In addition there are also several color Properties as shown below available to you Filled Color IBR Colors basic colors hue saturation and luminance miser hue saturation and luminance basic hue hue saturation and luminance roller red green and blue cube red green and blue mixer gray scale mixer cuan magenta and pellow cube cyan magenta and yellow miser ted amis green anis blue axis Cyan aris magenta axis ellow axis g N D 5 o Mer Cancel Curent Select Component The selection methods of the components are as follows 1 Direct selection The component can be selected by using the mouse directly to click it 2 Selecting all the components All the components in the current screen can be selected by using Select All in the Edit menu 3 The multiple components can be selected by clicking them consecutively while pressing the Shift key Note The copy operation can be performed by clicking the component to be copied while pressing the Ctrl key NU NW M IA c Modify Component Size The modification of the component size can be made by clicking the component The specific method is as follows select any one of the eight green points on the component as shown below after the comp
36. icon can make the screen minimized to the task bar And clicking the task bar again will make the screen return to the state before it is minimized 6 Clicking the Close i e XY icon to close the screen The PinYin Input for the Note Book is similar to that for the Text component and many Properties of the Note Book component are realized through the function keys 3 6 25 Word Neon Lamp W ez V Q or 7 Word Neon lame The text string which is specified as Label is displayed in loopy moving way and it supports the label contents corresponding to 256 max states in the loopy moving way Process of adding one Word Neon Lamp component 1 Press the Word Neon Lamp component icon drag it to the screen then the Basic Properties of Word Neon Lamp component will pop up Basic Property Neon Lamp Label Graphics Display Setting dwe UOaN PIOM SZ 9 Priority Normal Read Address Write Address PLC PLC PT GO yo OO PT ms 5 Port COM1 Port COM1 Change Change m Station No 0 Station No 0 Area Variable LW z Area Variable LV Address 0 System Memory Address 0 System Memory Data lt Word Data Word Faai BIN i 1 Format BIN Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 Use Variable Use Variable Use index Use index 2 Switch to the Neon Lamp tab and make settings of Moving Type State No Step and Speed
37. pen type 1 pen width 0 pen color RGB 0 0 OxFF brh type BFS_ODWNGRDT_FRTTLD brh foreColor RGB O 0 0 brh backColor RGB 255 255 255 DrawRect 0 0 400 400 pen brh NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 281 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 282 Example of how to use the local variable functions When the Macro is created as below the variables read from the value LB100 and LB101 in the PT local memory are written to LB102 and LB103 in the PT local memory The codes are compiled as follows int MacroEntry _Bool buf 2 0 ReadLocal LB 100 2 void buf 0 WriteLocal LB 102 2 void buf 0 return 0 Where The buf is defined as _Bool and it can also be defined as short because each bit address in local LB memories occupies one word 16 bit space but in fact only one bit in each word is used ReadLocal LB 100 2 void buf 0 indicates that the values read from LB100 and LB101 are written to buf 0 and buf 1 respectively 2 located in the center of the parenthesis indicates the number of bit that the LB100 reads WriteLocal LB 102 2 void buf 0 indicates that writes the read values to LB102 and LB103 respectively Firstly add 2 Bit Switch components with addresses of LB100 and LB101 and then add 2 Bit Lamp components with addresses of LB102 and LB103 Finally add a Funct
38. placed before the Title to see the text string ia 1 a V 2 D H w e3 D o fe D Add Delete Delete All Language Import Export OK 4 Input the text in each language for each state as shown below T P Language E one 4 0 OFF 1 ON P C 3 lt 4 ii i Add Delete Delete All Language Import Export OK 5 If you use 2 states it just needs to input the corresponding text to state 0 and state 1 respectively for each language and then click OK after the completion of the text addition Language Elonos a ene D OFF x 1 ON F 4 1 r Add Delete Delete All Language Import Export OK NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 235 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 236 Note 6 Checking in Use Text Library check box in the Label tab of dialog box for each Property allows using the text string which was registered to the Text Library Transport Font Text Library J j Ed a Language Languagel Graphic Font Font Copy Text to All State Font Type Vector Font Bitmap Font Font Attribute Font DFNB EN Size 16 v Position Left z Color Color Language English USA l ttalic Bold Copy Font Attribute to State Language All If you haven t added the text to
39. respectively Moving Step 10 Pixel Speed 10 X100ms State No From right to left Data Mapping Eombotomtoto aye OOOO iE 0 0 1 1 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 185 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 6 26 Bit Neon Lamp 3 186 Switch to the Label tab and add the text corresponding to the state Switch to the Graphics tab and select the Vector Graphics or bitmap representing the touching area and touching state Press the OK button to complete the setup of the Word Neon Lamp component The text string which is specified as Label displayed in loopy moving way and it supports the label contents corresponding to State 0 and State 1 in the loopy moving way The difference of the Word Neon Lamp and the Bit Neon Lamp is the controlling method and the former selects the different states ranging from 1 to 256 by changing the memory value while the latter changes the display state only 2 states available by changing the state of the control bit Process of adding one Bit Neon Lamp component Press the Bit Neon Lamp component icon drag it to the screen then the Basic Properties of Bit Neon Lamp component will pop up Basic Property Bit Neon Lamp Label Graphics Display Setting Priority Nomal Read Address e Write Address PLC PLC PT Ee y PT HMIO ye 0 Port COM1 Port COM1 Change Change z E Station No 0 Station No 0 Are
40. the digits after the decimal point and the digits before the decimal point are 2 and 3 respectively so the converted value is displayed as 123 45 and the last digit is cut 2 Hexadecimal System hex The data is displayed in hexadecimal format O F and the conversion ratio and the decimal point are eliminated Data Length WORD Decimal 0 Bs Over Max in Min 0 N m F D 3 Binary System bin The data is displayed in binary format 0 and 1 and the conversion ratio and the decimal point are eliminated w P z Storage Format Binary Data Length WORD og Integer 16 Decimal 0 x J 5 Max Min Value Setting Over Max Max 65535 Min 0 Pale 3 In the hexadecimal and binary formats the input maximum value or minimum value are treated as unsigned integer 4 Password password Only can be displayed and all the values to be read are hidden and it is used to input the password Its conversion ratio and the decimal point are eliminated 5 Single precision Floating point Value float The data in the controller will be converted into the decimal data from the data in 32 digit IEEE floating format and will be displayed in decimal format 6 Double precision Floating point Value double The data in the controller will be converted into the decimal data from the data in 64 digit IEEE floating format and will be displayed in decimal format Fo
41. Address Change if Direction 4 f s Direction z ie s if E id Interval between components t Direction fal Direction a z Interval 1 aye From start point specifies the top in the upper left corner of the component to the starting point to copy Make this point as the start point Repeat ag Copy Type Offset Address C From start poini f Increase C Decrease f From end point Note Address auto change is invalid for Copy Quantity Word Address 4uto Change Bit i Direction amp z Address Change E i Y Direction 4 z f g Direction Z a inei i i i Interval between components f Direction ll Direction 2 2 Interval 1 Y Direction J Z 2 Conveniently Use System memory If you want to use or check the System memory check in the System Memory check box in Basic Property dialog box The descriptions of all the bit system memories or word system memories are listed in Area Variable as shown below NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 387 3 Functions of NB Designer 2 Write Notice Word 3 388 Read Address PT HMO Jag 0o gt Fort COM1 Change 0 z Station Mo Data pin Word je LW9004 ann of numberic input ee R M LW S006 Operation mode of note book O Brush 1 Eraser 2 Block clear 1 word LW 9007 Brush width Range 1 8 piels 1 word RAN LW S008 Brush color deer 69535 rie _ RAN Simultaneously Open Multiple Projects Cross
42. Control bit LB9163 Screen flip display Control bit LB9163 Normal displa Screen flip disple Common Sheet Screen Attributes Determines the Common Sheet for the project program to be displayed above or below the Base Screen Pop up Screen Attributes Specify the pop up screen whether if it is displayed on top of the screens or not Initial Screen The screen is displayed at first by the PT after the unit is started in user project mode The default is Frame 0 Common Sheet Refers to the No of Common Sheet of the project The default is Frame 1 Menu Screen Refers to the No of Menu Screen of the project The default is Frame 2 File Browser Screen Refers to the No of Browser File Screen of the project The default is Frame 5 Confirmation Screen Refers to the No of Confirmation Screen of the project The default is Frame 7 Login Screen Refer to the No of Login Screen of the project The default is Frame 9 Unable to Input Display Color The role of invalid component marks When the enable condition isn t met or is invalid using this option can set invalid component mark to indicate this component can t be used currently and the touch is not effective Only the control components such as switch and Command Button component etc can use invalid component marks and the display components such as Lamp and Word Lamp component etc don t support the invalid component marks 3 294 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designe
43. Cut and Paste NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 201 p Tl c 5 O ot S y 9 er a y uoioun4y Z J 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 202 Example Making NUM Keyboard Number 0 to 9 keys Float Minus sign Enter CLR and Backspace keys are required in the keyboard Step 1 Create a new project and make the layout of the NUM keyboard Firstly add the new screen Frame 10 and open Screen Property then perform the screen operations such as setting the Width Height and the border width to be 160 200 and 2 respectively setting the Frame Color checking Screen Attribute and setting it to be Keyboard page Finally divide Frame10 into three areas i e Screen control area Input Display area and Keyboard area as shown below Screen control area Display area Keyboard area Step 2 Add the required components for the keyboard 1 Firstly add one Function Key as screen title bar into the Screen control area in this case select Title bar on Pop up Screen 2 Add two Text Display components for displaying the ranges of the maximum and the minimum for the Number Input where the Read Address are LW9180 LW9180 LW9187 is the system special memory for displaying the maximum of Number Input and LW9190 LW9190 LW9197 is the system special memory for displaying the minimum of Number Input respectively and Word Length are both 6
44. PT Task Bar PT Extended Propemy PT Task Bar PT Exended Propeny System information Setting Security Level Setting Liser Permission Setting Event History Setting System information Setting Securty Level Setting Liser Permission Setting Event History Seting o Pant Setting COM1Seting COM2 Seting Etema Mamoy Pint Setting COMI Setting COM Seting Etema Momoy lyme RS2722 gt PLC Communication Time Out 3 lype RS gt PLC Communication Time Out 3 2 Baud Rate S600 Protocol Time Cut tima 1 Baud Rate S600 Protocol Time Out time 50 Data Be gt 5 Pntocel Time Qut 2s 1 Date Be 5 5 Protocal Time Out 2s 0 3 PetyOwck oven ru Max terval of word block pack 0 Pedy Chuck even Max terval of word block pack o Mex interval of bt block peck 16 Mex interval of bt block 8 Stop Bt 2 Stop Be pam S Max site of word block package 1 ae Max site of word block package 16 D l a sh Boadcast 555l Max size of bt block package 16 Max size of bt block package 6 D Use Delaut Setting 3 Bumes ZNOO LWOO 8 0L Co ce Co There are COM1 Setting and COM2 Setting here because NB Unit has 2 serial ports You can make the connection to 2 PLCs through these two serial ports Type Selects the communication method between the PT and PLC from RS 232 RS 422 and RS 485 Baud Rate Data Bit Parity Check and Stop Bit Selects the communication parameters matching the PLC PLC Communicatio
45. Right click the Action List to select Insertion Before or Insertion After option to change the execution order of the component NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 229 p T c 5 O as fe S aa 9 er Z UOIJEWIOJU J SN CL Z 3 Functions of NB Designer 2 According to the order to be executed change the position of the action which was added Right click the Action List to select Move Up or Move Down option to change the execution order of the component 3 In order to delete the action which was added right click the Action List to select Delete option to delete this component Basic Property Label Graphics Control Setting Display Setting Action List edit by right click Insertion Before Insertion After gt Move Up Move Down Delete ange Station Numbe em memory I Use Variable Area Varable Word Length Exit when execution fails T Use index 4 Edit the Property of the Action The Property of the Action which was added Bit Set and Word Set can be set for each Action at the right area in the Basic Properties tab Basic Property Label Graphics Control Setting Display Setting Action List edit by right click Write Address PT HMIO PLCNo 9 Port COM1 Change Station Number 0 System memory I Use Variable Area Variable Addres
46. Storage Type Daily file 4 Buffer Storage Defaut Save asms Storage Period 0 Day Note no limit when storage period is zero Cursor Color vv HE Unableto input Display Color Common Sheet Screen Display below base screen X Pop up Screen Attributes Display in foreground X File Browser f Initial Screen 0 FrameO 5 File List Window Common Sheet 1 Common Window Confirmation Screen 7 Confirm Action Windo Menu Screen 2 Fast Selection Login Screen 9 Login Window X 2 Function Key Using Execute Macro function of Function Key to trigger the Macro is a kind of common triggering method 3 Timer Executing the Execute Macro function by the Timer function allows the combination of the Macro and the Timer function 3 268 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 4 PLC Control 3 Functions of NB Designer Specify the PLC Control as follows and select the Execute Macro and then the Macro will be executed when the specific bits are matched to the condition previously specified PT Executing PLE Control FT HRIO Area Varable LB Data Format BIN Word Length Execution Event Function Mode Execute Macro HID T PLC Ho 0 Address _ Format Fange DODD 0 3333 4 Use Variable macro _O c ON lt gt OFF Setting the Execute Macro as below allows the Macro execution when a certain condition is
47. Use Etemal Clock Buffer Storage Defaut Saveasms Subfolder Record Storage Type Daily file ki V Vector Font Smooth Display Storage Period 0 Day Fip Screen Display Ws Unableto Input Display Color Common Sheet Screen Attributes Display below base screen Note no limit when storage period is zero Pop up Screen Attributes Display in foreground Initial Screen 0 Frame0 rs le Browse 5 File List Window Common Sheet 1 Common Window Confirmation Screen 7 7Confim Action Winda Menu Screen 2 Fast Selection Login Screen Login Window Z NB Series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 4 11 4 Functions of NBManager When Logo file and recipe file need to be uploaded you can check Logo File and Recipe File Manager foe hs Communication Setting Communication Method USB pot lee MULL Pot NULL Download Operation System Operation Port Ho NULL Set Se Get Version Select Data Decompile Operation Upload Project Files Pass Through Communication Project Datalrequired O Logo File O Recipe File Communication Setting Communication Method USB pot Select Data T S Upload Froject Files Save in W car 7 de jE ee Pass Through Ji HMD Communication Upload Recipe J image di sound E tar Upload FRW Data J temp diva Lj carpkg Upload LOGO File name Po 4 12 NB Series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Man
48. When the reverse scaling is selected the relation is as shown below Minimum i en x Maximum i Minimum Input Value Value Proportianal Value Proportianal Value Maximum Input Value Minimum Input Value Display Position Current Position Indirect Max Min Reference The upper limits and lower limits of X axis and Y axis are directly read from the memory address For example It is assumed that the type of the Moving Component is X Reverse Scaling Y Reverse Scaling and the type of indirect address is LW10 then the Minimum of X and Maximum of X are the values of LW10 and LW11 respectively and Proportional Lower Limit of X and Proportional Upper Limit of X are the values of LW12 and LW13 respectively and the Minimum of Y and Maximum of Y are the values of LW14 and LW15 respectively and the Proportional Lower Limit of Y and Proportional Upper Limit of Y are the values of LW16 and LW17 respectively as shown below a Basic Property Moving Component Label Graphics Display Setting Type X Reverse Scaling Y Reverse Scaling State No 3 he Maximum of X 640 Minimum of X 0 Proportional Max of X 320 Proportional Min of X 0 Maximum of Y 480 Use Variable 0 Minimum of Y Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 3 Switch to the label tab and add the corresponding texts to be displayed NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer
49. i No Area Vanable LW Area Variable LW X Address 0 Address 100 Data Format BIN X Data Format BIN X Word Length 3 Use Variable Word Length 12 Use Variable Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 3 158 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer 2 The function of query of sampling time is only enabled by LB9110 when the zooming function is used And when the LB9110 is turned ON the zooming and checking functions can be activated When the above functions are enabled even if the sampling is performed the user can choose the sampling point s in the real time Data Log directly and the time for sampling point will be stored to LW9200 to LW9205 at this time And the time query is also available with the sampling point s from the Data Log being selected after the zooming in of one selected section Description list of related addresses memory Address Addr Type LB9110 Bit address LW9200 Word address D LW9201 Word address N LW9202 Word address J LW9203 Day Word address LW9204 Month Word address LW9205 Year Word address Query of sampling point value Addresses of Special memories LW9210 LW9210 N Displays values of each channel N represents the channel number and the of browsed points sampling value of browsed points for each channel is stored For example if the channel number is 2 the sampling value o
50. pe 0 PT mom E o PT Hmio e iau et No No l Change Station No Port COM1 Port COM1 0 Change 7 Change z n Station No 0 Station No 0 Area Variable LW Bi Avea Variable LB 7 Area Variable LB w Address 0 0 0 wr A Address System Memory Address System Memory Data Fomat BN y Data a Word hd Data Y Word Y Y a Foe M 1 a E 1 Word Length 2 Format Range DDDD 0 9999 Use Variable Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 T Use Variable Use Variable I Use index l Use index Descint P P N U D Q ama ep Q D D gt 2 Switch to the Direct Screen tab and select the Destination Screen No to be ejected in Screen Indirect Reference of Display Position Checking it means the position coordinates of the popup Direct Screen are read by the specified memories and Not checking means the position coordinates of the popup Direct Screen will depend on where the component is placed in the screen X Coordinate of Pop up Screen Y Coordinate of Pop up Screen First address First address 1 The position of the pop up screen is controlled by 2 memories i e the X coordinate is controlled by the First address while the Y coordinate is controlled by the First address 1 But for some special PLCs such as S7 200 etc the address must be an even number For example VW80 is the memory controlling X coordinate and VW82 is that controlling Y coordinat
51. 2 2 1 Installation Procedure 1 Start Windows XP Windows Vista Windows 7 ia N 3 m r D D ct 5 Cc J 5 m r D D ct 5 2 Double click Setup_NBD_VOOU to perform the installation Note For download the application programs please access your local OMRON website If local site cannot be found please access OMRON IA global site http Awww ia omron com at first and select the area where you are Select your language to use the program in the Choose Installation Language window and click NEXT Click the Next again to display the Select the Destination Location dialog box After selecting default of the installing location click the Next BINPSIOJd UOleI je SU Z Z available folder to install NB Designer Then click the OK and followed by Next When Ready to install the program dialog box appears click Install to start installation When InstallShield Wizard is completed dialog box appears click Finish to complete the 6 To select another available location to install click Browse After a folder list appears select an installation Start NB Designer on Windows XP Windows Vista or Windows 7 The NB Designer supports Windows XP Windows Vista or Windows 7 If you use NB Designer on Windows Vista or Windows 7 note the point as follows a If you use NB Designer on Windows Vista or Windows 7 run NB Designer as the administrator b If you have a compatibility pro
52. 3 Add one Function Key to close keyboard screen i e to check Key Button and select Escape 4 Add one Text Display component to input display box in the Display area with Read Address set to LW9070 LW9060 LW9075 is the special memory which works as the buffer of Number Input or Text Display Input and Word Length set to 6 5 Add twelve Function Keys as Character Input Keys in the Keyboard area Take an example to input 1 Select Unicode after selecting Keyboard Function then input 1 in Input area And the operation for the other characters is similar to this operation Key Button Unicode 1 Add three Function Keys as the special keys i e select Clear Backspace and Enter respectively after selecting Key Button for the three Function Keys Key Button Enter ki The final effects of the editing screen and the test are shown as the lower left and lower right graphics respectively Has Min NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer Example Create Unicode keyboard by the combination of Text Input and Function Key The Unicode keyboard can be created by using Unicode option which is available in the related Property screen of Text Display component Text Input component and Note Book component in combination with the Key Button Unicode option in the Function Key Property Basic Property Font Keybo
53. A Switch to the Graphics tab and select Vector Graphics or bitmap to move or display the state 5 Press the OK button to complete the setup of the Moving Component If it is Scaling Type specify the Max Min value The maximum value and minimum value of Moving Component supports Indirect Max Min Reference hia F 166 W ez V few or a x min HHH State Number F I Indirect Max Min Reference x scale louver HHT Maximum of X 1 PT HMI0 PLCNo 0 ae Hitt Minimum of X 0 Pot COMI I Use Variable Proportional Max of X 1 Change Station No 0 2 Proportional Min of X 0 Area Variable LW gt j Maximum of Y 1 Address 10 5 Minimum of r 0 Data Format BIN 3 Proportional Max of Y 1 Word Length 4 3 Proportional Min of Y p Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 amy Pa A scule xX scule ii lover ie upper 300 wm State aakit 999 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 111 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 6 9 Animation a Animation The Animation component is used to put the component into the position with the specified track in the PT and this position is determined by the preset path and the data of PLC The status and absolute position of the component in the PT is determined by the data in the 2 consecutive PLC memories Generally speaking the Read Address and the Read Address 1 are used to store the state and the position in the preset path respe
54. COM1 PLC Connection Port COM1 PLC Connection Port COM1 PLC Connection Port COM1 Change Station No 0 Change Station No 0 5 Change Station No 0 Change Station No 0 Area Vanable LW Area Varnable LW v Area Variable LW Area Va able LW X Address 2 Address 0 Address 20 Address 10 Data Fomat BIN Words 2 Data Foma BIN Words 2 Data Format BIN Words 2 DataFormat BIN Words 2 v Use Variable Use Variable Use Variable Use Variable Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 Min Value LW 20 Max Value LW 21 Lower Value LW 10 Upper Value LW 11 3 136 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer il e ow U rst r i Variable Bar picture Alarm word e Normal and Offset When the Offset is selected only the greater part of the values set by the offset value For example setting 50 to Offset value and storing 60 in the communications address only the area corresponding to 50 to 60 of level meter will be filled J J N 949 PL 9 Bar Type Normal Normal Wem Undiener Comparison of display effects between Normal and Offset Normal Offset BarType WETE 7 Bar Type CZS Offset Value 50 Indicating the range from the current value to Indicating the range from the current value to lower limit value the O
55. Component No BL Bit Lamp g O U D o O o amp D r 0 2 Parts SB Bit Button BL Bit Lamp SW Bit Switch DW Direct Screen SWD Command Button WL Word Lamp MSW Word Switch SCR Scroll Bar MV Moving Component ANI Animation AD Alarm TR Data Log XY XY Graph BR Level Meter MT Analog Meter RCP Recipe ED Event IDW Indirect Screen ND Number Display TD Text Display NI Number Input Tl Text Input OS Oscillograph NB Note Book NL Word Neon Lamp BNL Bit Neon Lamp TT Touch Trigger GR Table HDD Data History ON CI NOGY 72 G E NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 55 3 Functions of NB Designer Function Parts SC Scale FK Function Key AB Alarm Display TM Timer BG Bitmap VG Vector Graphic NP Notepad DT Data Transmission VM Freeplotting DTM Date Time Display DG Indirect Shape UID User Information CO Multifunction EB Event Display 3 5 3 Additional Comments Descriptions If necessary you can add comments to each component The comments are used for entering remarks or descriptions of the program on creation Therefore the descriptions entered as the comments will be referred in future or the text entered will be used to describe when the text is printing The entered comments will not cause any effects to the program The NB Designer does not support printing Bit
56. Conformance to EC Directives cccccccccececsccceccecececcecececescsceceneeceaeeeaceaeeneaneaeas 22 Related Manuals gine eee cet oes nse tee ccs enmnsssticwnien dan tancaceeaneedeacucestaewestesastsacaaennes 23 SeC 1 Introduction 20 0 2 2c ccc cceccececceceeccncecceccncencscenceneecesceaeensensseenseass 1 1 1 1 Functions and Structure of NB SerieS PTS cccccecececeeeececececececececececececeeacececaeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeaes 1 2 1 1 1 How NB Series PTs Work at FA Production Sites 2 0 0 0 cece cece cceccecececeecececeeeeeecececeeaeaeceseeaeaeseeas 1 2 1 1 2 Operations of NB Series PTS sacsscadcd ex tececectceicesceteee detexeuandeacesedeeebosesedsaedactntbtccheedesideedtedesesat eda 1 2 1 2 Communicating with the OSU iiss cesccscicieedi ca deneseeedendscecendindrectentecsdcccteeusceducsinetiatueedvecassedacucs 1 4 1 2 1 What s the Host LINK 0 0 0 cece ec cece ec ecececeeeeeecececeeecececueaeaesesececaeaecececueueaeseceeueaeaeseseeeeauseeaeanaees 1 4 1 2 2 Connecting NOS acces tac aes ve ares cad een on oh EERE REA E eeunSeeeteeieareseaee 1 5 1 2 3 Communicating with the PLC Manufactured by Other Companies ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 6 T3 System Configurator caicsccad ees seececcccacscetd anani ENA NAASE a ER RAEE iai 1 7 1 3 1 Connectable Peripheral D VICES ccccccseeccseececeececceueeecaueeecaeseecaeeessuecessueeeseuseesaueessuesesanaees 1 7 1 4 Procedures for NB Series PTS Operation c cccc
57. D 5 0 The horizontally tile window is shown as below HMIO whe NUS MOPUIM 6 c 3 31 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer The vertically tile window is shown as below E HMIO whe Mala kar nbp Ha E TRTA iE 3 2 10 Help Menu The corresponding items in the Help menu are shown as follows Help Setup Manual Operation Manual Host Connection Manual Version Information 3 32 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 3 NB Designer Software Window NB Designer has quite a few windows which will be illustrated in this part 3 3 1 Project Library Window When starting the NB Designer you will see Project Library Window Project File Window and Project Work Space shown as below For the concept of the screen the brief will be provided in 3 4 Screen p oo T O o To 5 D 02 z4 r z D a fo z Concept Page 3 45 E C NBProject car car nbp HMI0 whe o eE File Edit View Screen Draw Components Tools Option Window Help f X ae araf 8 On Weoeos G O0 H Eem a y yle Sl tt e oF alH EY oh H amp Bm gt Gr Ge Gs or Gr GI OE p mE RREA BE HAA RMHRM Aarra R Ol 0 Frame0 2 9 10 PPE AAA AAS ALL WN YSZ Wl Bill d Project Library Window sl ae er er ae ee ee a RR
58. Display Setting p Switch Screens Change screen 0 Framel il Key Button Enter a e Map Key k Execute Macro macro_O c Map Keyboard Disable Touch Calibration C Cear Event Notepad Export Project from PT Function 5 Import Recipe Pen Color enipe When this function is selected touching the Function Key can realize the import or export of project data and recipe data This function needs to be used in combination with File List component and it is only applicable to the PT with USB Host Descriptions of Import Export Function Import Project To PT Imports the project pkg from the external memory into the PT After the project is imported the system will restart and the imported project will be operated Project dounload I Current s Path DEO PKG LOAD OK Export Project From PT Exports the project pkg from the PT into the external memory 6 16 NB Series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 6 Descriptions of New Functions Added into NBLILI TW01B Descriptions of Import Export Function Project up load Project upload Mox SARAAARARRARA Mint ARARARARARAA Input upload password Pop up Frame 5 and i select save path oo O fo 3 D fo D 5 r 3 3 o lt 3 D 3 r Project up oad x project Asy uonoun4 9 Import Recipe To PT Imports the recipe file rcp from the ext
59. Display The Event History Display component is used to search and display the event history information which is logged in Event Setting database and whose state meets the current triggering conditions in the table form Note 1 The Read Address for the Event History Display is the memory address used for searching the histor ical event records The default Word Length is 2 2 The Event History Display component only supports the PT with USB HOST 3 If the Event History Display component is to be used it needs to check the Save to External Memory option in the Event History Setting tab in the PT Property dialog box and set the path for storing the historical event information files NB Series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 6 Descriptions of New Functions Added into NBLILI TW01B Descriptions of Table Display Properties Display Item Time Checking it means the event occurred time checked time and canceled time will be displayed and the time format can be selected There are 3 formats available and HH MM SS and MS refer to the hour minute second and millisecond respectively Date Checking it means the event occurred date checked date and canceled date will be displayed and the date format can be selected among three formats such as DD MM YY MM DD YY and YY MM DD and YY MM and DD refer to the year month and date respectively Date Separator Three characters of delimiter are av
60. Draw menu and enter background in the Name option select 1 in State No option and check Bitmap in Type option after the Add Graphics dialog box pops up StateNo 1 f Bitmap width 100 Yector Graphics Height 100 File Name C Program Files SOMARONSNB Designersproject car D escription 6 2 NB Series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 6 Descriptions of New Functions Added into NBLILI TW01B 3 Specify the setting for graphics which is called from external memory in status editing area Gq p we ee ng Setting es b Cut Ctrl X iV Save File in External Memory 3 Copy Ctrl C External Memory Paste Ctrl V f USBI _ _ Delete a File Name E Lock Position background bmp Load Graphic Load Graphic from External Memory P Pee Cancel Note 1 File Name must be same as that of the bitmap to be called from the external memory 2 The formats of the graphics which can be called from external memory are BMP JPG and GIF only not PNG 3 The pictures must be saved in the root folder of the external memory 4 The creation of background picture is completed and then exit from this operation after save it 6 1 2 System Reserved memory The new added system reserved memory is as follows Type Addr Type Descriptions Word ERWO ERW2 0 2147483647 External Recipe Word Memory is available by connection with the external memory 6 1 3 Recipe I
61. Format Range DDDD 0 9999 Format Range DDDD 0 9999 f C State Setting Mode Set value PT a iC G 2 3 Memory Type p Bi Port COM1 Use Variable Value 9 Change Station Number Q s Area Variable g 7 N Address 0 TA a Data Format BIN 3 Word Length 4 g Format Range DDDD 0 9999 State Setting After the time set at Execution cycle passed when the value is written to the bit address or word address select the parameter Set Address After the time which was set at Execution cycle passed specify the bit address or word address to be written a Bit Address Setting Memory Type is specified to Bit NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 211 3 Functions of NB Designer Mode Includes Set value Periodic Toggle as shown below Timer Timer Function Display Setting Execute Macro z C Data Transmission Memory Type Bi DataLlength 20 m Source Address Destination Address PT mo PLCNo o PT umo PLCNo 9 Port COM1 I Use Variable Port COM1 I Use Variable Change Station Number 9 Change Station Number 9 Area Variable g Area Vanable g Address 20 Address 40 Data Format BIN Data Format BIN Format Range DDDD 0 9999 Format Range DDDD 0 9999 State Setting ae 0 L Penode Toggle Fe M1 Use Variable Change Station Number 9 Area Variable g x Address 0 Data Format BIN Word
62. Hew PLC AB CompactLogeControlloc Please tet area mapping Cancel A dialog box as shown above will pop up automatically and all the supported PLC names are included in the pull down list of the PLC names When the user select a PLC the memory address types supported by this PLC will be added to the address type box The default selections are LB amp LW but the user can select different address types according to the specific PLC After being confirmed by the user the PLC will be replaced and the corresponding PLC memory address in the project will also be replaced at the same time Note The function does not support the replacement from the unit type of the Ethernet connections to the unit type of the serial connections 3 40 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer An example of setting addresses for Current PLC and New PLC are as follows Current PLC OMRON CPIHALE Mew PLC Delta DWF Please set area mapping CIQ_bit AL bit T_FLAG C FLAG D_bit T oe T O D o 3 D ey z4 or D 2 fe e Supporting PT Model Replacement Note PT replacement must be carried out through the Change PT Modell option If you do not use this function and delete all the settings of PLC to reconnect with the new PLC the PLC area is replaced with all the local addresses of PT g0edsS YON Palod E E W
63. If the Macro does not exist Macro column is left to blank as the default 3 256 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer f Backlight On This operation uses one bit address to control the lighting of the backlight and when the bit address is ON the backlight turns ON ee OT a Ut PT Executing PLC Control HMI PT HMO PLUNo 0 Area arable LE Address Data Format BIN _ Format A ange DOCO 0 3333 P o 2 D O r O D r D o D m D Word Length Use Variable Function bode f5 ste 9 In the settings shown as above when LBO is ON and the back light will automatically turn ON At this time LBO is still ON if the user touches LBO again it will turn OFF thus returning to the state before the backlight lights on 8 Backlight On Write Back The operation of this option is similar to Backlight On but the address of this bit of PLC will be cleared to OFF while the bit address turns ON OJUOD Old G 8 Co OM o Li PT Executing PL Control HMI sd FT HbO PLC No O AraM anable LB Address U Data Format BIN _ Format A ange CEOD 0 393 Word Length Use Variable Function Mode p tea In the settings shown as above LB21 turns OFF automatically as well as the back light turns ON when the LB21 turns ON NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operatio
64. Microsoft Elegant Black characters used in the project will be changed to arbitrary font which is decided as optimal by the operation system go ol WO fe o O oO o Q gt z gt ie jor m m 09 3 5 10 Basic Properties of Component b O uJ Basic Properties of Component D Priority It is pre reserved for the function O Write If the component supports read only you cannot set to writing addresses The status of the components will o Address be displayed based on the reading addresses T PT Number of the controlled PT The numbers are allocated automatically when the PT is S placed on Configuration and Setup Window 9 PLC No Number of the controlled PLC The numbers are allocated automatically when the PLC S is placed on Configuration and Setup Window D Change Station This option can be used to access the specific PLC during the communication with Number multiple PLCs This option is applicable when editing only one PLC in the case one PT is connected with multiple devices or multiple PTs are connected with multiple devices Area Variable Refers to the memory of PLC device to be controlled or the internal memory of the PT For the internal address type of PT refer to 3 5 4 Read Write Address for PLC Page 3 57 Specifies address to be written to Data Format The code type includes BIN BCD and LSB When BIN or BCD code is used it allows to display 256 of statuses at maximum and when LSB
65. NB7W NB10W TWOOB Print Direction Landscape Portrait Landscape Portrait Method 2 Don t check Custom Print Options and make the setting through the corresponding bits of the system memories LW9054 and LW9055 Lw9054 Settings The value of LW9054 can be set with the Command Button component If all contents on the PT screen are to be printed place the Command Button component to the Common Sheet Select Set value when screen is loading in the Command Button tab of the Command Button Property specify Set Value to 255 and specify LW9054 to a value allow all the content printed Lw9055 Settings Bit No 0 The bit is OFF 1 The bit is ON Bit O Bit 7 Magnification Ranges from 1 to 50 with the meaning of magnifying 0 1 to 5 0 times respectively Bit 12 Reverse Color Print Example To print the content in the current page with a magnification of 0 3 in monochrome set LW B9055 0 LW B9055 1 and LW B9055 8 all ON and LW B9055 9 OFF or set LW9055 to 259 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 7 7 suol diu9sag dnjas pue Buljulidg 0 pajyejay sjuauOdWwO4 7 7 JO UOD Old b 4 7 PictBridge Printing 7 4 List of System memories Related to Printing Local Bit LB Address Function description Property LB9016 Printer error indication Read only ON Error OFF Normal LB9017 Printer control mask bit Read Write ON Disable OFF Enable default All the p
66. Only Text Input component and Not Book component support Pinyin Input method Chinese character display screen Touching a blank area allows the component moved Pinyin input text input Touch characters the element as a carrier completion of an operation The memory related to the Pinyin input method is described as follows LB9100 Used for input method switching i e LB9100 1 for Pinyin input method and LB9100 0 for English input method LW9150 Used for PageUp and PageDown operation to Chinese characters display screen Due to that 8 Chinese characters max can be displayed in one Chinese character display screen the PageUp and PageDown functions are needed to display more Chinese characters The value of LW9150 is the No of Chinese characters displayed in the current Chinese character display screen For example it is assumed that the number of Chinese homophones of Pinyin wo is M when the value of LW9150 is N then the Nth Chinese character and the follow up characters will be displayed in the Chinese character display screen LW9152 to LW916 7 Used to display the Pinyin characters input currently Usage Firstly switch to the Pinyin input method through LB9100 when the input is triggered by the Text Input component or Note Book component and input the Pinyin characters displayed in LW9152 to LW9167 later correctly and touch the corresponding Chinese character from the several Chinese characters d
67. Order of the Edit menu to change the display order of the components Firstly select the component and set the layer of the component by pressing the corresponding icon The component in the front layer is always displayed above that in the back layer Set Top Layer E Group UnGroup This function is used to make the multiple selected components or graphics combined together as a separate component To make multiple components combined together it just needs to select these components and then select Group in the Edit menu or press icon To cancel the combination it only needs to select this combined component then select UnGroup in the Edit g N D 5 o menu or press 4 icon nus WPA C c Horizontal Even Spacing This function is used to make the horizontal space between the multiple selected components or graphics same Select the graphics or components to be operated and then select Horizontal Even Spacing in the Edit menu or press H icon Clicking the icon allows the components lined as ELEI Eo Vertical Even Spacing This function is used to make the vertical space between the multiple selected components or graphics same Select the graphics or components to be operated and then select Vertical Even Spacing in the Edit menu or press Ae icon below NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 13 3 Functions of NB Designer Align Horizo
68. PT mio PLCNo Seer bee OFF gt ON Refresh Graph Aea LB eed HMIO o SPN 10 X100ms Pot COM1 eee Ol Trigger Format Range DDDD 0 9999 Area LB Trigger Type OFF sON ie Address 0 Format Range DDDD 0 9999 Port Change Station Number 9 2 Area LB Address 0 Format Range DDDD 0 9999 3 222 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer 2 Multicolor is selected for Type Draw graphics using word memory Set the component size to 50x50 the memory address to LWO and the values of 2500 memories i e LWO to LW2499 to be read by PT Then the pixel point of the component corresponding to the communication address which stored the values will be drawn into the corresponding 65536 true color according to the actual value read from the memory Freeplotting Graphics Display Setting Type Mutticolor Refresh Cycle Trigger Trigger Type PT LW Address 0 Word Length 2500 Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 PLC No p TI c gt O e gt Eo o or Port Change Station Number 9 Area LB Address 0 Format Range DDDD 0 9999 3 There are two refreshing methods for the components Refresh Cycle The graphics are updated at a certain period The minimum unit to update the graphics can be set at 100ms Trigger When the status of the bit address specified with T
69. TXT TxTS i TxT9 F NISC LW12 LWi2 NIST LW22 LW22 NIZE LW23 LW23 NI8 LW11 LW 11 NISC LW13 LW13 MILO LWO LW20 E NELLE LW21 LW24 E TxT10 W ez V e a 7 ydely AX L 9 XY Graph property E XY Graph property Basic Property XY Graph Channel Extended Property Save Data History Display Setting Basic Property XY Graph Channel Extended Property Save Data History Display Setting Type Multiple pa Property Horizontal Drawing method Standar Save Time Priority Normal Sampling Method Periodic sampling z Cycle 1 X Is v Sampling Points 2 Page No 1 Channel 1 Read Address Write Address m Control Memory Setting PT wwo Do EFT m FC E Trigger Memory Setting dW Pause Clear ClearAddr PauseAddr 1 i PLC PLC HMI X X X Port COM1 Port COM1 ga nm s id a Change Change Area Vanable LB Area Vanable LB v Station No 0 ss Station No 0 Si Address 0 Address 0 i X j W eee 3 LW Data Format BIN s Data Fomat BIN Address System Memory Address 0 System Memory Word Length 1 Use Variable Word Length 2 Use Variable Data Word on Data ii Word Format Range DDDD 0 9999 Format Range DDDD 0 9999 Format Length Format Length E Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 T Scroll I Time PT HMIO ta 0 gt PT HMIO i 0 Use Variable I Use Variable z z Area Varable LW Area Varnable LW l Use
70. USB When using the USB to perform download for the first time you should install the driver manually For the installation of the driver please refer to 2 4 Installation of USB Driver for NB Page 2 5 When you use USB you just need to select USB as download device and click the OK button to start the download Compressed Bitmap When this size is larger than the specified size compress way will be used to perform the compilation and download thus saving a lot of space Compressed Bitmap is checked by default Note1 Checking Compressed Bitmap can reduce the size of the edited project 2 Removing the check in the Compressed Bitmap option allows the switching speed of PT faster 3 In order to ensure the PT with a faster communication speed during the operation it is recommended not to use too many bitmaps during the project editing Use less raster fonts as far as possible The raster fonts occupy the same size as the normal graphics 5 When the Enable Printer Function option is checked in the System Setting Mode the USB Slave port can be used only for printing function rather than the download function in User Project Mode For details refer to Section 7 PictBridge Printing Page 7 1 in NB Designer Operation Manual 2 Serial Port Note The download through the serial port is slower for the edited project being too large therefore it is not recommended to use the serial port 3 Ethernet For more details of do
71. Use Buzzer we Uy I bee Extend Clock Buffer Storage Defaut D Save asme M Vector Font Smooth Display Storage Period 0 Day Alp Screen Display Cursor Calor T Subfolder Record Note no limit when storage penod is zen Common Sheet Screen Attributes Display below base screen Initial Screen O0 Framed Comman Sheet 1Common Window Menu Screen 2 Fast Selection 2 FRW FRB FRWI and FRBI memories FRW FRB FRWI and FRBI memories use FLASH to save the data not written frequently The data written to the flash memory will not be removed even if the power interruption occurs 3 390 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer 2 Index memory Index memory realizes the convenient address operation for the user You can modify the I O address of the memory during the machine operation without modifying the edit screen When the index memory is selected for the component the new I O address of this component the value of the index memory the original I O address of this component For example 1 Create a project and place 5 Number Input components in it The settings of Number Input component NIO are as in the lower left figure shown The settings of Number Input component NI1 are as in the lower right figure shown COty ge eS eeEeEeEEOO O Number Input property ES Basic Property Humeric Data Fort Keyboard Setting Graphics Control Setting Display Setti
72. graphic and label Write Address Bit address writes the status of On or Off controlled by the Bit Switch Address Refers to the Read Write Address corresponding to the switch 2 Switch to the Bit Switch tab and set switch type Sed 9 Types and Functions of Switch 3 Type Descriptions Set The specified bit address will turn On when the component is pressed The state remains even if the component is released Reset The specified bit address will turn Off when the component is pressed The state remains even if the component is released Alternate The state of the specified bit address will change once On Off gt On when the component is pressed each time Momentary The specified bit address state will turn On or Off when the component is pressed or released respectively uong puewwop 4 9 Switch to the Label and add the text corresponding to the state Switch to the Graphics tab and select Vector Graphics or bitmap to display the bit address state and represent the touching area Switch to the Control Setting tab and make the Security Setting and set the Triggering action on A Q Press the OK button to complete the setup of the Bit Switch component 3 6 4 Command Button Fi Command Button Command Button component also defines a touching area and the state value will be input into the specified word address when the area is enabled NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer
73. ip all Compile HMIO V Compressed Bitmap Size gt 1024 Bytes Download Download Device Ethernet v Port COM1 IP Address 192 168 250 1 Port No 21845 Edit Option Screen Grid Spacing x 20 i 20 a aman TE EA Changing Network Setting of PT Unit After confirming the download function set the IP option in the PT tab in the PT Property dialog box to the IP address and others and then download it into PT after Compile operation is performed At that time the IP address of PT is same as that set in the project If download through Ethernet is performed again please specify the modified IP address and port number in the Project Option Setting dialog box System Information Setting Security Level Setting User Permission Setting Event History Setting Print Setting COM1Setting COM2 Setting ExtemalMemory PT Task Bar PT Extended Property a FTP Password 900000 O00000 e Setting IP address in System Setting Mode For more details of Setting IP address in System Setting Mode refer to the NB Series Setup Manual SBSA 550 e Setting IP address by using Set IP Address Port in NBManager For more details of Setting IP address by using Set IP Address Port in NBManager refer to 6 1 6 NBManager Page 6 6 6 4 NB Series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 6 Descriptions of New Functions Added into NBLILI TW01B 6 1 5 Do
74. loosening it after dragging it to the end point of the curve I Query of Sampling Time When LW9200 to LW9205 are used to store the time for sampling points the user can place the Number Display components corresponding to these addresses to display the time for sampling points Procedures 1 Checking the Save Time option and Time check boxes Note this is not the sampled time in the Trend Graphics tab in the Data Log Property dialog box The Time option can be used to set the first address for saving the time which covers 12 word length address for saving the starting time of the Data Log the former 6 words and the time value of the current Data Log the latter 6 words in ssmmhhddmmyyyy format and BIN Data Format respectively Basic Property Trend Graphics Channel Extended Property Save Data History Display Setting Type Multiple pa Property Start from Left Sampling Mode Continu V Save Time Sampling Method Periodic sampling Cycle 1 X Is X Sampling Points 100 Page No 5 Channel 1 m Trigger Memory Setting Pause Clear ClearAddr PauseAddr 1 PT Ho RC oe rT mao fC OE Area Vanable LB Area Variable LB v Address 0 Address 0 Data Format BIN X Data Format BIN v Word Length 1 Use Variable Word Length 2 Use Variable Format Range DDDD 0 9999 Format Range DDDD 0 9999 Tt Scroll IT Time PT Hmo PLC 9g IIPT HMIO PLC 9g x
75. lt mm Q gt Q Please contact with OMRON service center t PLC response error t Yes Check if the PLC Type used currently and the one for the PLC on the project are correct Check whether the type and settings of the PLC are correct or not Yes Check whether the PLC area and range are correct or not Check the content of the Variable Table Check whether the PLC address supports the write operation Refer to the relevant PLC document Check the arrangement of 9 pin RS 232C female socket port When compile error occurs In the Output Window you can see the error number and error reason such as Address error for Parts or over limit NB Series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 5 7 5 Maintenance and Abnormality Handling 5 8 For some cases NB Designer will provide the information similar to Either address is beyond the range or the value cannot be set as shown below during the designing period Priority Normal Read Address PT For the settings of PLC address refer to 3 5 4 Read Write Address for PLC Page 3 57 and for information of PLC address refer to PLC manual Grammatical errors as C language are checked during compilation in Macro and if any problem occurs it will be displayed Ea nE File Edit View Screen Draw Components Tools Option Window Help Bek sR ae e VM GG azref m Eagal BAA F oka ee
76. medical equipment amusement machines safety equipment and other systems machines and equipment that may have a serious influence on lives and property if used improperly consult your OMRON representative e Make sure that the ratings and performance characteristics of the product are sufficient for the systems machines and equipment and be sure to provide the systems machines and equipment with double safety mechanisms e This manual provides information for connecting and setting up an NB Series PT Be sure to read this manual before attempting to use the PT and keep this manual close at hand for reference during installation and operation NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 1 NB series Manuals NB series manuals are organized in the sections listed in the following tables Refer to the appropriate section in the manuals as required Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual Cat No V106 This manual Section Section 1 Introduction Section 2 Installation and Startup of NB Designer Section 3 Functions of NB Designer Section 4 Functions of NBManager Section 5 Maintenance and Abnormality Handling Section 6 Descriptions of New Functions Added into NBOL TW01B Section 7 PictBridge Function Appendices Contents This section provides an outline of the NB series PTs including their functions features connection types and communication methods This section d
77. mmdd form and the Storage Period is the upper limits of the number of CSV files in this path if the Storage Period is exceeded the oldest file will be deleted If the Single File is selected the file will be named in Subfolder Name form the Storage Period is the upper limit of the records archived in the file the archived records are reached to the Storage Period the storage will not be continued yyyymmdd refers to the execution date Related Screen Setting File Browser Screen Sets the specified screen as the File Browser Screen with the default setting of 5 File List Window The File Browser Screen needs to be used in combination with Import Export function of Function Key NB Series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 6 Descriptions of New Functions Added into NBLILI TW01B 6 2 3 Event History Setting Print Setting COM1 Setting COM2 Setting ExtemalMemory PT Task Bar PT Extended Property System Information Setting Security Level Setting User Permission Setting Event History Setting Save to Recipe Data Field V Save to Extemal Memory Number of Event 9 Storage Device USB DISKI V Restoration during outages Start Address 0 MV Exportto CSV File Save as ms End Address 0 Subfolder Event Addr Fomat DDDDDD a a Buffer Storage Default Event Length 16 Words m retara m n e Note no limit when storage period is zero Descriptions of Historica
78. 0 V Background Color Y 0 MBackground Color II Pattem Color Transparency 0 Note Keyboard in Screen Attribute must be selected in Screen Property dialog box 5 Place one Number Input component in Frame 12 and select Specify Keyboard in Keyboard Setting tab as shown below HBa 8 ba ie Ba Bem HE GRea renee JE Aa oe aa oma Input property xi THEE z Basic Property Numeric Data Font Keyboard Setting Graphics Control Setting Display Setting gt Keyboard Setting Defaut Keyboard Specify Keyboard 11 Frame 11 Keyboard Pop up z l Position O O C PT Screen Pasition r rc fr fo NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 383 3 Functions of NB Designer 6 Perform the offline test and click the Number Input component to make the keyboard pop up aS shown below The usage of ASCII keyboard is described as follows 1 Support Case Pressing the Caps key in the keyboard can realize the case switching as shown below x e 2 Support Chinese and English Input Methods Pressing CH key in the keyboard can realize the switching between Chinese and English as shown below x 3 384 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer Note If the keyboard is called by the Pop up Screen Clipping in Pop up Screen Type m
79. 0 i Frame 10 H N Frame 0 Change After the Function Key is pressed the Common Sheet Frame 1 is the system default Common Sheet screen can be replaced by the specified screen which will become the new Common Sheet Common y 4 Common kS Sheet Sheet Frame 0 Frame Pas Frame 0 Frame 1025 Mni 0 Bhi 0 Change Menu After the Function Key is pressed the Menu Screen Frame 2 is the system default screen Screen can be Ala by the specified screen which will become the new Menu Screen Same a if Tano l Fast Selections Frame 0 Fast Selection Frame 0 L Pop up Screen After the Function Key is pressed the specified screen will pop up and be displayed above the current Base Screen and the current screen will not be closed Pop up 3 Frame 0 Screen Frame 0 3 198 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer Descriptions of Switch Screen Close Screen Closing the Pop up Screen which is displayed in the screen placed with a function key The screen operations with the function do not perform write of the data for the address of control which is set by the Direct Screen or Indirect Screen Therefore make sure that point when the Direct Screen or Indirect Screen is used Pop up S _ Screen Frame 0 6 raa Frame 0 Title bar on Pressing the Function Key can move the Pop up Screen to the specified posit
80. 10 2 Task Bar System Information Setting Security Level Setting User Pemission Setting Event History Setting Print Setting COM1Setting COM2 Setting ExtemalMemoy PT Task Bar PT Extended Property Ww M Display Task Bar Background Color 7 I Display Touch Indicator E Undefined Area Color I Display CPU indicator if CPU Indicator Color 2 Vi Display Aisma indicator i Alam Indicator Color y I Display Menu Button ig ak ae Col A s Boo o ee M Touch Unable Area Color 2 E Touch Area Color T Button Position Left d Button Size Width 240 Text Position Left Height 32 Menu Button Task Bar Button Menu es Col a Task Bar A E Font Size 24 Font Size 24 4 gt pP T N D n x WO o gt ox cm Men Task Bar iP Menu Button Menu Task Bar m N Alarm Indicator Task Bar Button Touch Indicator CPU Indicator Display Task Bar Determines whether to display the task bar or not If the Display Task Bar is selected the task bar as shown above will be displayed at the bottom of the screen Display Touch Indicator When the screen is touched the touch indicator will change the color If the Display Touch Indicator is checked the touch indicator will be displayed at the right side of the task bar as shown above The touch indicator is expressed by T in simulator and the PT Display CPU Indicator CPU Indicator is a Le
81. 25 T9 Dg j 100 No use show scale frame Use show scale frame Number of Main Sets the number of the main scale of the Analog Meter component 0 to 50 available Scales 3 140 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer Descriptions of Analog Meter Component Properties Length of Main Scales Sets the length of the main scale of the Analog Meter component The maximum length cannot be longer than the radius of the meter Number of Minor Scale Sets the number of the minor scale of the Analog Meter component 0 to 10 available Length of Minor Scale Sets the length of the minor scale of the Analog Meter component The maximum length cannot be longer than the radius of the meter Display Numbers Checking it means the scale notation needs to be displayed Font Clicking Font can set the font used by the scale notation Integer Refers to the number of integer places of the scale notation of the Analog Meter component not settable but adjusted automatically according to the number of places of the maximum value of the Analog Meter component Decimal Sets the number of decimal places of the scale notation of the Analog Meter component 0 to 8 available W ez V fen 7 Display Axis Checking it means the size and color of the dial axis of the Analog Meter component need to be set Axis Width Sets the size of the dial axis of the Analog Meter component Th
82. 3 216 3 7 8 Data Transmission naa ee eee eens 3 219 3 7 9 PICCDIOUING 2tdeec4 25 fee sa tesa ne Ss eee ote eee eee se E 3 222 3 7 10 Date Time c2ceeo bene ded abiei ane ee deed ene ted ad Sos eee ded 3 223 3 7 11 Indirect Shape o t 326454 catasewad teneseW erage eeeuG eta neeeubs ca se 3 225 3 7 12 User Information 2 lt 64 a0 6 lt 6054 de 6666 5600855684 264455448 58084 3 229 3 13 MUNMINGUON vcs oan 45eod o6e 3 hee mnnt beet eeeeeeee os bse54 betas 3 229 3 7 14 Event Display saucer edcaedeeabene bO5e bbb ace cae heb ee taee sede ee 3 232 Project Database lt lt ceicsie tears sec cee eee eee a eh oee eee BE ee 3 234 3 8 1 TOX LIDIA 2 0 ngewe sees eeeeeetatee ctw ORI EEES EERE RELEE 3 234 S o 2 Wallable Table vecctecedtabscudeesatecad See S tected by adiesn see oa 3 240 3 8 3 Alarm Setting 222i 4 eee064 bed vee Gen Gb aed beeghd ee Eb eud beaker te 3 243 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 8 4 Event Setting icatcene tebe ce hae eee eae eoueeee abe e eee eee 3 248 3 8 5 PEG CONTON sega t hase Secuns ake eta ae dees net bene te ene 3 252 3 9 Macro PUNCUON cicdcw ccc hdcwd cede sawe sees tendeee dae saend wads 3 260 3 9 1 Create a Simple Macro Program 0 00 c eee eee eee ees 3 260 3 9 2 Macro and Specification of Operation with Read Write Variables 3 267 3 9 3 Macro Triggering 220 c lt nent eeneoeeu abound dosau besa deeeeeera hes 3 268 3 9 4
83. 3 259 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 9 Macro Function 3 9 1 3 260 Macro is the function allows the user to create and execute the simple and original programs The user can add the functions such a arithmetical operations or discriminant of the conditions which are not be supported by the basic functions of the NB Designer Using the Macro function the user also convert the display processing in the screen or the data processing used to be performed in the PLC This function allows the PC loading reduced The Macro of the NB Designer conforms to C Language ANSI C89 Create a Simple Macro Program This section provides a brief of the Macro variables The Macro variables are classified into two types such as internal variables and external variables e Internal variables The variables are available only within the Macro Program The internal variables can be defined in the Macro Variable Table or the Macro Editing Window e External variables The variables are to read and write the values with the external controllers The external variables are necessary to be defined in the Macro Variable Table in advance The defined external variables can be used in the Macro Editing Win dow Storage Format of the variables used in the Macro Variables Table Storage Format Data length Descriptions Bit Bit variable with 2 statuses of 0 and 1 Signed short 1 word 16 bits Signed short integer variable with a range of 32768 to 3276
84. 3 4 Operation Log 4 lt lt 60nkse50 lt 40 ee 4 Re lt 0 vedo 94 FS eee eee eee es 6 21 6 3 5 ReCiOe Dale cic essa bed pete ste ends dee e Ghe ae wena nee ne 6 24 6 3 6 PEG COMMON wie os owen bes deee ws oe Seek ees es Pan eee eee eee 6 25 Gor FIC LISE ereere ereer dose seganeress Sheree eeteudastaes 6 26 NB Series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 6 1 6 Descriptions of New Functions Added into NBLILI TW01B 6 1 New Added Functions 6 1 1 Using Graphics From External Memory NB Designer also supports the bitmap data directly calling the graphics from the external memory in order to save the memory space of the PT For example Create a background picture named background bmp and save it in the root folder of USB memory Here refers to USB1 Then the project will directly call the picture named background bmp from USB memory 1 Copy the picture named background bmp into the root folder of USB memory JQ aa gt Computer REMOVABLE F Search REMOVABLE F File Edit View Tools Help Organize v Share with Burn New folder Root Directory ae v wr Favorites Peet Ml Desktop E J exmem RB Downloads di historystore Recent Places J log Ji scr Libraries trend Documents background bmp m Music E Pictures GB Videne 7 items 2 Create new graphics Click the ka icon in the toolbar or select Add Graphics option in the
85. 3 5 12 Display Setting of Component 0 0 ce 3 78 POMS 26 sci ceberebica veces wes eseeeeteceeeceseee cate recuemeeees 3 80 3 6 1 Saet ae a ax25 ao ce cred pate bed bee ate ede bee akeeeeetene eee ne 3 80 2 02 DICAMD we gesceced one ulec ee one eee insu eee useage ay et 3 83 SES BIL OWNCN ge cece ecu ue cade acme cou hehe usec ssn eee eatoweeeas 3 86 3 6 4 Command Button 225226 on 5d o 0 bs swe bok ad dod bn Gad poe Gee BESS Res 3 87 30 VOR AW otto tg ec oo dee ere eee ole ee ee eee he eee oh a i 3 92 3 6 6 Word Switch 0 naaa aaaea eee eee 3 94 S67 AY Clan ebce5h2e 505 o rikka eee eee eat eee ee At ANTE cee hess 3 98 3 6 8 Moving Component 0 00 eee eens 3 107 3 6 9 Animation 22 2dcegeyes doar de uas db eeede wees ee ee odes Ghb ee gees ees 3 112 3 6 10 Number Input ook ccc dlewe dente s cae da weed eee a Wee ee bw Wee 3 114 3 6 11 Number Display nnna eed sce bee ons 04 e ete thn beeeeetie sewed 3 120 3 6 12 TeXUINOW 5 onc c ose cad sd doses cds den be bd 6 bso SS eo Oe Se HEH 3 123 3 13 TEX DISDIAY 2tcoe00 eheteoens eho tes ee eee kth beer eas nea ee eae 3 127 3 6 14 Level Meter 0 0 0 ee eee eens 3 128 3 6 15 Analog Meter 22o2 5240 ee 42 4 he ner eees Mae eores Sud thee es Kees 3 139 3 6 16 Indirect Screen sniacckcbenee a5 ee ebd abd sabes oad deee lead dou es 3 143 3 6 17 Direct Screen 2 252kGee8 ou ee bee Goad tee hen Sed Uae een Send eyees Sed 3 146 3 6 18 la pakut as ood wud eee od oo es
86. 5 2 Checking and Cleaning sec crtssc ccc ciades ance sete oe odes ee ersaeee te eeeeeaasetaeese 5 4 POMOMMIANTY Randlihig seousccnesccceccciccaenwetywonsccecutndecasseesuswcadactndssanondumasdesdsncubonsumedesntdaduddnaceswuceacebi 5 6 Unit Replacement PreCAUItlONS sisccocccececncccccteccsscdetesecsssdoeteedessecdcdessecseedeuedgessectcudevestexdineteeccixece 5 9 Descriptions of New Functions Added into NBLIL TWO1B 6 1 New Added FUNCUONS cides crcenrcscrscces tects aaa EOE ai aaraa 6 2 6 1 1 Using Graphics From External Memory vasiessciccasiasiceeneces sui ecucndaceactestnncasexsseedaacheabignsensebeenaceamscaeac 6 2 6 1 2 System Reserved MEMOLSY cccccccseecceececcececceueecsueeeceueeecseeeseeeessaeeessueeesueeeesesecsueeeseesessaaseness 6 3 6 1 3 EELE E E E A E E E E E T E TE E E E E usec O 6 3 6 1 4 Download through UGG bceisassicssecctcccsene tusceaacueancossvet lt ocuteensyodubessecacneseuaceee ies uectenedeveceussdceccenaeeweckt 6 4 6 1 5 Download TO USB Face sescies ne here ceandicuinasandicstincsinbiendcenndeesenasabntoeastalonienatamedtebncecassehGnesinnecnnacabaameaseetces 6 5 6 1 6 PU FNAB oe cecerceeecreeese ice wenrgsoreame sien dearissipeaeneausebewecesecesteesnande yeteniset supwemasl beacon teineeneueaea ye eesecenpenecens 6 6 6 1 7 BFE aa gel 61 01 0 re een eee nee en er ee ee eRe ee ene E eee eee eee ee 6 7 6 1 8 New Added Addresses for System MEMOS IS ccccssccceceseeeeceeeeeeccesseeeeseeseeesseaeeeeeee
87. 9400 0 a ie Mask all the self communication ty Communicate with the other PTs via PT Communicate with the other network PTs via PT network ee eee M p O r gt D T c 3 O ct fe 5 D LW 9264 9279 The communications with the PLC to connect COM 2 will be being masking 2 Mask System Prompt Information NB Designer provides the system information mask function which is controlled by the special memories LW9296 read write and each bit corresponds to one piece of system error information and the system error information will be masked when the corresponding bits are set to ON For example LW B9296 2 corresponds to the prompt information PLC No Response Note Place Bit Button component and others in the screen which should be being masking of error display and specify Set to ON when screen is open for Type and specify LW B9296 2 to On Take Mask of PLC No Response as example 1 Create one project and connect NB5Q TWOOB with SIMENS S7 200 for communication Firat 2 Place one Number Input component VWO One memory in SiemensS7 200 and one Bit Button component with the address of LW B9296 2 and Type of Bit Button in Edit Window 3 Actually PTO is not connected with Siemens S7 200 PLC The prompt information of PLC No Response should appear before but now the system error prompt information doesn t appear for the LW9296 mask function 3 395 NB series Program
88. Bar Sets the Name and Font displayed in the Title Bar of the table Note The vector font cannot be specified in the log contents Note When the User Permission function is used the name of user performing the current operation will be displayed on the User Name column 6 22 NB Series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 6 Descriptions of New Functions Added into NBLILI TW01B e Settings for related Properties of Operation Log component Storage of Operation Log When the Operation Log component is used the path for storing the log file should be set in the Operation Log Storage Setting option in the PT Extended Properties tab in the PT Property dia log box For the output file in CSV format if the Daily File is selected the file storage path is log subfolder name yyyymmdd csv and if the Single File is selected the storage path is log subfolder name subfolder name csv Where yyyymmdd is the created date of the operational records For example 20110101 Settings of the components for Operation Log For the component with the requirement of displaying the Operation Log in the Operation Log it needs to check the Operation Log option in the Security Setting part in the Control Setting tab in the property dialog box of the component on which should be operated 0 14 06 24 11 23 20 11 06 24 11 22 45 Start Running ih oo O fe 3 D e 5 D r 3 E e lt 3
89. CJ Series CJ1G H H CJ1M CJ1G Operation Manual SYSMAC CS CJ Series Programming Manual SYSMAC CS CJ Series INSTRUCTIONS Reference Manual SYSMAC CS CJ Series Programming Consoles Operation Manual SYSMAC CS CJ Series Communications Commands Reference Manual SYSMAC CJ Series CJ2 CPU Unit Hardware USER S Manual SYSMAC CJ Series CJ2 CPU Unit Software USER S Manual SYSMAC CS CJ Series CS1W CJ1W ETN21 100Base TX Ethernet Units Operation Manual Construction of Networks SYSMAC CS CJ Series CS1W CJ1W ETN21 100Base TX Ethernet Units Operation Manual Construction of Applications SYSMAC CS CJ Series CS1W CJ1W EIP21 100Base TX EtherNet IP Units Operation Manual SYSMAC CP Series CP1L EL EM CPU Unit Operation Manual NJ Series CPU Unit Hardware USER S Manual NJ Series CPU Unit Software USER S Manual NJ Series CPU Unit Built in EtherNet IP Port USER S Manual NJ Series Troubleshooting Manual External Tool CX Programmer Ver 9 0 Operation Manual Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 Manual No V106 V107 V108 V109 W462 W451 W450 W479 W480 W302 W303 W322 W317 W352 W353 W356 W339 W336 W393 W394 W340 W341 W342 W472 W473 W420 W421 W465 W516 W500 W501 W506 W503 W446 W504 23 24 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 Introduction This section provides a
90. Change Station No 0 Area Variable LW Address 3 Data Format BIN Words 2 Use Variable Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 Color l Aash Under Min Alam Under 20 AlamOver 80 Indirect MaxMin Reference 2 PLC PT HMIO No 0 PLC Connection Port COMI _ Change Station No 0 Area Variable LW Address 1 Data Format BIN Words 2 Use Variable Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 3 Functions of NB Designer Detailed descriptions of the Level Meter Properties Bar Type Normal Indicates the percentage relationship between the actual value and the set range by means of a Level Meter Bar Type Normal Display direction Bottom totop 7 Minimum 0 Maximum 100 100 50 0 D100 70 Offset Displaying the value over the Offset for the actual value by means of a Level Meter Example Maximum 100 Minimum 0 Offset Value 40 Bar Type Offset Display direction Bottomtotop BarShape Rectangle v Bile Under Mr Noel ile Over Mex Ot Vave 40 Minimum 0 Maximum 100 100 100 90 Ty 50 7 7 40 40 0 0 D100 20 D100 70 Bar Shape Rectangle Rectangle ire Display als to Top to Right to left Left to Right Clockwise Counterclockwise direction Bottom Target Value When the value of the specified memory falls to the range target value allowable gap specified to the Allowable gap the fill area of the Level Meter will be displayed in the specified color W ez V fen
91. Command Button component LW9150 with Type Subtrahend and Min Value of Subtract value 8 and 0 respectively in Command Button tab and the Label of PgUp Basic Property Command Button Label Graphics Control Setting Display Setting Type Subtract value Subtrahend 8 Min Value 0 PT Hmo MC o gt Port COM1 Change Station No 0 z Area Va able LW Address 0 Data Format BIN Word Length 2 Use Variable Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 3 182 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer After all the components are placed well the operation are as follows 1 Trigger the Text Input component to make the cursor appear as shown below PinYin Input Window Please input your name o ao V fen a 7 2 Click the English Chinese Switch once then the input bar for Chinese input will appear as shown below PinYin Input Window Please input your name yoog SION VZ2 9 Several homophones will appear in the Chinese input bar after the PinYin character is input and you can use the PgUp or PgDn button to realize page turning and trigger the related Chinese character to complete one Chinese character input process As shown below for example if needs to be input you just need to enter zhang through the character keyboard PinYin Input
92. D r Saving the related information into the external memory The related information can be stored in the external memory by using the Operation Log Storage Setting option in the PT Extended Properties tab in the PT Property dialog box as shown below Operation Log Storage Setting 6o07 uonessdO 9 Storage Device USB DISKI Subfolder Record r Save asms Storage Period 0 Day Note no limit when storage period is zero NB Series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 6 23 6 Descriptions of New Functions Added into NBLILI TW01B 6 3 5 Recipe Data Saving the related information into the external memory Select the external memory in the External Memory tab in the PT Property dialog box as shown below Basic Property Recipe Label Graphics Control Setting Display Setting Type Upload from PLC to Recipe Upload from PLC to Recipe Data Length Download from Recipe to PLC Upload from PLC to ERWO0 Download from FRW to PLC The following functions can be realized Upload from PLC to ERWO0 Transfers the data in memory specified by PLC or controller to the ERWO memory of the external memory Download from ERW0 to PLC Transfers the data in ERWO memory of the external memory to the memory specified by PLC or controller Upload from PLC to ERW1 Transfers the data in memory specified by PLC or
93. DD 0 00 511 15 W_RELEASE_STATUS 0 00 511 15 ClO_RELEASE_STATUS 0 00 6143 15 H_FORCED_RELEASE 0 00 511 15 H_FORCED 0 00 511 15 W_FORCED_RELEASE 0 00 511 15 W_FORCED 0 00 511 15 ClO_FORCED_RELEASE 0000 00 6143 15 ClO_FORCED 0000 00 6143 15 TK_FLAG 0 31 C_FORCED_RELEASE 0000 4095 C_FORCED 0000 4095 DDD DD DDDD DD DDD DD DDD DD DDD DD DDD DD DDDD DD DDDD DD U U DDDD DDDD T_FORCED_RELEASE DDDD 0000 4095 T_FORCED 0000 4095 DDDD CIO 0000 6143 W 000 511 A 000 959 H 000 1535 T 0000 4095 C 0000 4095 D 00000 32767 IR 00 15 DR 00 15 TK 00 31 DDDD U J U JU U J DDDD DDDD DDDD DDDDD UID J J J J NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 Appendices Note Name Operation Forced Reset Turns OFF 0 the bit flag and places it in forced status Forced Set Turns ON 1 the bit flag and places it in forced status Forced Set Reset OFF Release Turns OFF 0 the bit flag and releases the forced status Forced Set Reset ON Release Turns ON 1 the bit flag and releases the forced status Forced Set Reset Release Releases the forced status while retaining the ON OFF status 91d NONNO Aq payioddns s mow w jo sI7 Y gt O NB Series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 A 15 Appendices A 16 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 Revision History A man
94. Data format TestDataFormat Wl olan ana w amp 1 wl nl eR 5 o Oo o Oo o oO Oo Oo ray So Add data format Delete current data for Current data format details ID _ Length w Storage Format Description 16 bit signed n Desci i Read Address setting area Data Format area and Current data format details area Data format TestDataFormat X Add data format Delete current data format Read Address Setting Start Address Number of records read Current record length Current data format details 16 bit saree n T NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 399 3 Functions of NB Designer The red frame is the boundary of the setting area and data area and the former is in the left side while the latter is in the right side Move the cursor to this boundary and click it then the setting area will be hidden and if you click it again the setting area will appear again RecipeEditor NoName File View File Merge Help D Sheo Read Address setting Stat Address Number of records read Current record length Data format TestDataFormat Add data tormat Delete current data format Current data format details ID Length w Storage Format Description 16 bit signed n Desc ir RecipeEditor No Name Oeil 6
95. Data opin Word g Dia ee Woi Format Length Format Length 1 Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 Use Variable Use Variable T Use index l Use index Read Address Refers to the address controlling the scroll of the event display All the information is classified according to the triggered time of the event and the new event is displayed on the top while the old event is displayed on the bottom For example the value of the read address is N the Nth event will be displayed on the first line and the events on the lines with the smaller No than Nth line will be removed in the screen Address Refers to the word address to support the controlling the scroll Word Length Displaying the word length of read address fixed as 1 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 167 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 168 2 Go to the Event Information tab Basic Property Event Setting Display Setting Display Range 0 Row Column Check To 255 5 Display 5 LI Sequence number U Time of Occur U Time of Cancel Ll Checked Time Click J Extended Time Format D H M Short Time Format H M Ll Short Time Format H M C Precise Time Format H M 5 MS L Etended Date Format M D C Date or Occur M D Ll Time ascending Order Display L Show only ongoing events Row Spacing and Column Spacing Refers to the distances between two neighbo
96. Display Setting Function Key Label Graphics Control Setting Display Setting Switch Screens Change screen 0 FrameO x 7 Transport Font Use Text Library one Text Library Key Button Enter a Map Key X si _ Language Language 1 v Execute Macro directaccesslocala 7 U Graphic Font ER Map Keyboard v Disable z E Touch Calibration Save Screenshot to EtemalMemory sd Z State Mesac oo s C Function Pen 7 Pen Color E Pen Color Pen Size 1 H C Clear C Print Mode Black ani SIIT Black and White Reverse Color Font Maanificati 20 DFNB EN Print page Print Content Size 16 Position Left X O Current Page V Print Text Change Paper To Print V Print Analog Meter Color H Color Language English USA V Print Data Log Landscape z 7 Print All Bitmap T Italic T Bold Portrait Z Print All Vector Map Copy Font Attribute to J Print Background Colors State Language All ess Change to the Frome 10 enu Tosk Bor Pressing the Function Key button can t switch to Frame 10 It is because the current security level is 0 while the security level of Frame 10 is 1 so the screen with the higher security level can t be accessed from the screen with the lower security level We can access the higher security level screen only after inputting the password corresponding to
97. Edit Window Current Screen Property To display the Properties of the current Edit Window Previous Page The previous Edit Window Current Page The title of the current Edit Window Next Page The next Edit Window Magnify To magnify in the current Edit Window Zoom 25 50 75 100 150 200 and 300 available Dwindle To dwindle the current Edit Window 1 1 The current Edit Window displayed in 100 Line Style Toolbar 1p T Gr Gs Gs Ge Gt TI gp 7p 6p op They are used for the selection of line width NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 23 3 Functions of NB Designer System Toolbar iio be Ere I Compile To only compile the parts with changes in the current project and to check whether there is an error or not The project must be compiled before the download or test otherwise the download or test will fail Recompile To recompile the items in the current project Clear Compiled Result To clear the result of the current project Download To download the project into PT Transmission Setting To set the transmission method Either of the Ethernet USB port or serial port can be set Offline test To perform offline test of the project Indirect Online test To perform online test of the project indirectly Direct Online test To perform online test of the project directly Decompile To decompile the project Code Edit Toolbar Mac
98. FA Staff PTs can be used to notify system operators if there is a system or device error and to indicate countermeasures and necessary information e Controlling Panel Switches NB Series PTs allow the users to create various kinds of switches on the displayed screen The values allocated to the switches can be sent to the host by clicking the switches 1 1 2 Operations of NB Series PTs Transferring Screen Data The screen data displayed on NB Series PTs is created by using NB Designer in the PC The screen data is transferred to the NB units through the USB Ethernet and the RS 232C or using USB memory Create screen data USB Ethernet RS 232C Computer or USB memory a NB Designer Screen data Only when transferring screen data or using the NB Designer the computer can connect with PT Displaying Screens The data to be displayed on the screens is created by using NB Designer in PC and the data is transferred to the PT The required screen can be displayed by a command from the host or by operating the touch switches The required screens can be displayed by using commands from the host or touch switch operations 1 2 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 1 Introduction Reading Data from the Host NB Series PTs can be connected to the host by using communication methods such as RS 232C RS 485 RS 422A or Ethernet to automatically read the required data from the host
99. Fi i BIN i 1 P BIN Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 Use Variable l Use Variable si Use index Use index on Q Qa m Q 3 O Read Address Refers to the PLC address controlling the displayed information such as the state graphics label and so on of the Word Lamp component Address The first address of word address corresponding to the Word Lamp component Word Length Displays the data length of the Read Address and 1 and 2 are available i e word or double word 2 Switch to the Word Lamp tab and set the state for the Word Lamp component You can set the state from 1 to 256 in the dropdown box corresponding to State No Basic Property Word Lamp Label Graphics Display Setting State No CM Data Mapping Map Value Refers to the value corresponding to each state When the value of read address is equal to the map value the state number corresponding to this value will be displayed 3 Switch to the Label tab and add the different displayed texts corresponding to the different states 4 Switch to the Graphics tab and select Vector Graphics or bitmap to display the graphics corresponding to the state of the Word Lamp component 5 Press the OK button to complete the setup of the Word Lamp component NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 93 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 6 6 Word Switch _ Word Switch is the component which changes th
100. Format Range DDDD 0 9999 Cl Scroll IFT Hmo PLC p No Area Varable LWW Address 0 Data Format BIN Word Length 3 0 Use Variable Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 7 1 Time al IFT Hmo PLE p No Area Varable LV Address 0 Data Format BIN Word Length 12 Use Variable Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 3 Functions of NB Designer 2 Go to the XY Graph tab and set the parameters related to the XY Graph W ez V few a ydely AX L 9 Type Includes Single page and Multiple pages If Single page display is selected only the data change information of the sampling value in the current page is displayed and the points out of the sampling points in single page will not be saved and displayed If Multiple pages display is selected the old data can be displayed by scrolling and the data in the past can be saved In this way when the XY Graph is scrolled forward the previous sampling data will not be lost The history data is stored in the memory for the reference in future Property it is available option when Trend is selected for Draw Type Refers to the horizontal direction and vertical direction i e the graphics is displayed in horizontal direction or vertical direction when the sampling data is displayed Sampling Methods They are shown as below Sampling Method Descriptions Periodic sampling The data is sampled p
101. Functions of NB Designer If Menu Screen is checked one Menu Screen will pop up when the Menu Screen button at the left side is pressed Function keys put in the Menu Screen allow the different screen switched Because the Menu Screen is always displayed on all of the screens therefore it can be operated at any time If you want to switch to a certain screen it just needs to press the function key pointing to the destination screen once thus avoiding the boring process of looking for the screen poy w ubisag sIseg S 3 In the task bar 16 icons can be arranged at the same time The functions keys of Minimize or Title Bar in Pop up Screen included in Pop up Screen allow the screens to minimize in the task bar For details refer to 3 7 2 Function Key Page 3 197 Process of Operation Button Setup Double click PT in the Configuration and Setup Window Then the PT Property dialog box will appear and set Display Task Bar whether the operation button will locate in the left side or right side of the screen the background color and the text position method of the taskbar in Task Bar tab If the label isn t displayed completely you can adjust the width or the height of the button area and the font size of the label to solve this problem suong uonesado pue seg ysel g S System Information Setting Security Level Setting User Permission Setting Event History Setting Print Setting COM1Setting COM2
102. HMIO ye 0 PT A yo 9 Port COM1 Port COM1 Change n s Change n n Station No 0 E Station No 0 Area Variable LW X Area Variable LW Address 0 l System Memory Address 0 System Memory Data Word z Data Word p an BIN Fi BIN 1 Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 Use Variable Use Variable Use index Use index Write Address Specify the starting address of the PLC which transmits the Recipe data The address for Data Length specified in the Recipe tab of the Recipe Property dialog box are used for the data transmission with the Read Address on the top Address Specify the starting address at the PLC to transmit the Recipe data Word Length The function does not support the parameter NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 329 T N A D Q 5 D O D r D yu uodwo d o y BUC uea JO SSBD01qg ZL 3 Functions of NB Designer 2 Switch to the Recipe tab and set the Function and Data Length Recipe property Basic Property Recipe Label Graphics Control Setting Display Setting Type Upload from PLC to Recipe Upload from PLC to Recipe Data Length Upload from PLC to FRW Download from FRW to PLC Function Upload from PLC to Recipe Transfers the data from PLC to the recipe memory of PT Download from Recipe to PLC Transfers the data from the recipe memory of PT to PLC Transmit from PLC to FRW Transmit the data
103. LW20 Y coordinate max LW21 Perform the test and the effect is as shown below YY Plot Standard a Plot Track 4 Plot Trend 3 106 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 6 8 Moving Component X neat Moving Component can be used to put one Vector Graphics or bitmap into the position specified by PLC in the PT The state and absolute position are provided by the 3 consecutive memories in PLC The read address controls the status of the component the address of the Read Address 1 controls the coordinate position X and the address of the Read Address 2 controls the coordinate position Y W ez V fen 77 Process of adding one Moving Component 1 Press the Moving Component icon drag it to the screen then the Basic Properties dialog box of the Moving Component will pop up yuauodwo BulAo 8 9 Basic Property Moving Component Label Graphics Display Setting Priority Normal Read Address Write Address PLC PLC PT A y 9 gt PT HMI0 o 0 Port COM1 Port COM1 Change 5 Change m Station No 0 a Station No 0 Area Variable LW X Area Variable LW Address 0 System Memory Address 0 System Memory Data Word E Data Word ae BIN i 3 aaa BIN Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 Use Variable Use Variable Use index Use index Read Address Controls the first addre
104. LW9502 Used to input Area Variable LW z Address 9502 JV System Memory Address 0 System Memory lt a bie BN Wed ae Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 Format Range DDDDD utes Sy eT ae Serer on 3 308 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer Password Confirm Place one Number Input component by which the password is entered again for confirmation with the address of LW9510 the word length of 2 and the data type of password here Add User a a Basic Property Numeric Data Font Keyboard Setting Graphics Control Setting Display Setting Priority Normal P W Make Read Address and Write Address the Same AS Read Address Write Address PLC Y r V PT HMIO a i o Port COMI S Change T Change E A m Station Mo 0 Station No o S Area Vanable LW9510 Used to input 7 Area Vanable LVV9502 Used to inputi 3 Address 9910 V System Memory Address 9502 I System Memory Data Word E Data Word m Fa BIN i 1 Be BIN ee 1 Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 Message window Use Variable Use Variable Compilation Done Warning O Error O T Use index l Use index Logout Time Place one Number Input component with the address of LW9508 the word length of 2 and the data type of unsigned int here Add User SMAI Nembertnput propery O uias UOISSIWI9dq JOS 9 OL Basic
105. Lamp property 5 mos i Jea i E Ty T Use Variable Use index 3 56 Basic Property Bit Lamp Label Graphics Display Setting Prionty Normal Read Address e Write Address PT mmo PE o PT mmo PE o No No Port COMI Pot COM1 Change Change x C Station No 0 E Station Mo 0 Area Warable CIO_bit Area Warable LB 7 Address 0 00 System Memory Address 0 System Memory Data pin Word q Data pin Wod Format Length Format Length Fomat Range DDDD DD 0 00 6143 15 T Use Variable T Use index OK Cancel NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 5 4 Read Write Address for PLC The correct area and address range vary with the PLC In the following figure PLCO is manufactured by OMRON while PLC1 is manufactured by SIEMENS so their addresses are different Basic Property Bit Switch Label Graphics Control Setting Display Setting Priority Normal Make Read Address and Write Address the Same poy w ubisaqg s1seg S 3 Area Variable CIQO_bit Address 0 00 System Memory Data pin Word q Data py Word Format 7 Length Format Length Format Range DDDD DD 0 00 6143 15 Format Range DD 0 0 0 15 7 Use Variable Use Variable T Use index T Use index Old JO SSSIPPY S UAA PESY P G E All the available PLC devices can be displayed in the pull down menu corresponding to
106. Length Format Range DODDD 0 10255 l Use Variable L Use Variable T Use index T Use index Write Address Refers to the address of word memory of the current browsing index value for the Scroll Bar component Address Refers to the first address of the word address corresponding to Scroll Bar Word Length Displays the data length of the write address which is 1 by default 3 164 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer 2 Go to the Scroll Bar tab Word Length of Index Number Word Direction Left to right Background Image Background Image Not Use Vector Graphics Bitmap State No hi Import Graphics W ez V few a 4 Button Image Button Image f Not Use Vector Graphics Bitmap Jeg IIOS Cc 9 Word Length of Index Number Word and double word are available Direction Refers to the moving direction of the Scroll Bar and it includes Left To Right Right To Left Up To Down and Down To Up Background Image Refers to the background images used by the Scroll Bar It includes Not Used Vector Graphics and Bitmap If Vector Graphics or Bitmap is selected you can select the Vector Graphics or bitmap you want to use in Image and you can also select the State Number corresponding to the Vector Graphics or bitmap mentioned above Button Image Refers to the button imag
107. Length 4 x Format Range DDDD 0 9999 The detailed description of each function is as follows Mode Set Value Periodic Toggle b Word Address Descriptions After the time which was set at Execution cycle passed specify the value of the bit address to 0 or 1 After the time which was set at Execution cycle passed switch the value of the bit address 0 with 1 Setting Memory Type is set to Word Mode Periodic JOG loop Periodic JOG one way Periodic Bounce repeating after reaching Step up loop Step Down loop Constant Setting and Periodic JOG one way as shown below _ State Setting Use Variable 3 212 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer Mode Descriptions Periodic This mode makes the address value of the memory for the specified word JOG loop increase automatically by the increment at the interval of each Execution Cycle and makes it return 0 again when the upper limit value is reached oO N Periodic This mode makes the address value of the memory for the specified word S JOG one way decrease automatically by the decrement at the interval of each Execution 2 Cycle and makes it stop at the lower limit value after the lower limit value is S reached or a PLSD Periodic This mode makes the address valu
108. List for All PLCs Supported by NB series Section 2 Connecting to SIEMENS PLCs Section 3 Connecting to Mitsubishi PLCs Section 4 Connecting to Schneider PLCs Section 5 Modbus Connection Section 6 Connecting to Delta PLCs Section 7 Connecting to LG PLCs Section 8 Connecting to Panasonic PLCs Section 9 Connecting to Allen Bradley Rockwell PLC Section 10 Connecting to PLC of GE Fanuc Automation Inc Contents This section lists all PLCs supported by NB Units This section describes the connection to SIEMENS PLCs This section describes the connection to Mitsubishi PLCs This section describes the connection to Schneider PLCs This section describes the connection on Modbus protocol This section describes the connection to Delta PLCs This section describes the connection to LG PLCs This section describes the connection to Panasonic PLCs This section describes the connection to Allen Bradley PLC This section describes the connection to PLC of GE Fanuc Automation Inc Programmable Terminals Startup Guide Manual Cat No V109 Programmable Terminals Startup Guide Manual Cat No V109 Section Section 1 NB Overview Section 2 System Design Section 3 Installation and Wiring Section 4 Screen Creation Section 5 Run Section 6 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Contents This section provide specifications of the NB Unit describes its names and functions of the various parts This sectio
109. Meter ii Recipe Event Ee Indirect Screen j Number Display S Text Display E Number Input ltz Text Input i Oscillograph j Mote Book W Word Neon Lamp W Bit Neon Lamp ze Touch Trigger Table Fel Data History al Operation Log E Event History Display Change Change a Station No 0 a Station No 0 Area Variable LB X Area Varable LB Basic Property Bit Button Label Graphics Control Setting Display Setting Priority Nomal v Read Address Write Address PLC PLC PT HMO e 0 PT A o x Port COM1 Port COM1 Address 0 System Memory Address 0 System Memory Data Word Data I _ Word ar BIN 1 a BIN 1 Format Range DDDD 0 9999 I Use Variable I Use Variable T Use index Use index 3 After the various Properties of this component are set click the OK button And you can see this component has been placed in the screen after exiting from this dialog box If required you can adjust the size of the component by changing settings in Position in Display Setting tab or drag it to the desired position 3 54 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 5 2 About ID No ID No is the number automatically assigned to the component for differentiating the components on the PT The designer cannot change component ID number artificially The contents represented by ID No are as follows VA BLO 0
110. NB Designer Indirect Screen can make an already created screen pop up on the current screen Please refer to 3 4 3 Screen Creation Generally the screen called by the Indirect Screen is smaller than the full screen but it can also be of the same size as the full screen In Indirect Screen specifications pop up displays the screen of the screen No supporting the stored value of the word address specified to the Read Address The number arranging indirect screens is not restricted in NB Designer but the pop up screens can be displayed simultaneously up to 16 screens at max Value 0 is used to close the screen and value 1 means to make screen 0 pop up while the values other than 0 or 1 mean to make the corresponding screens pop up Sed 9 3 Command Button write address is LW100 setting Indirect screen read address is mode is Set Constant LW 100 UBBIOS P IPU 9 9 Press this button pop up screen 20 screen 20 screen 21 Press this button pop up screen 21 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 143 3 Functions of NB Designer screen 0 Press this button pop up screen 0 Press this button close indirect screen Process of adding one Indirect Screen component 1 Press the Indirect Screen component icon drag it to the screen then the Basic Properties dialog box of the Indirect Screen component will pop up Basic Property Indirect Scr
111. No 0 7 Pot COMI Use Variable Change Station No 0 Area Varable LW Address 10 p O O r gt D T c O ct fe 5 D Data Format BIN Word Length 1 H Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 T Use index Perform the offline test and the effect is as shown below Before data written into LWO After data written into LWO LWO 7s LW1110 LWO W0 9 9 555 190 l f i L l i Before write value to LWO LW10 0 defaut value After written value to LWO LW10 has been noticed to be written value 2 Specify Auto show login screen to the Component controlled by operations The Touch Enabling Setting in the Control Setting tab of the Component Property includes Auto show login screen function NB Designer makes the Frame9 as the password input screen Login Screen which is convenient for the user to call it when the security level or user permission is used Login Screen includes USER ACCESS LOGIN and USER LEVEL LOGIN screens You can input the correct USER NAME and ACCESS PASSWORD and then click Login or Logout in USER ACCESS LOGIN screen to complete the login or logout when the user access function is used and you can input the correct LEVEL PASSWORD in the USER LEVEL LOGIN screen to complete the level login when the user level login function is used USER ACCESS LOGIN Input box for user name USER NAME AAAAARAAAAARAAAAAAAL erect eO Input box for password of user perm
112. Node List Displays all the numbers and coordinate values for all the track nodes and No 0 is for the 1st moving node and No 1 is for the 2nd moving node and so on The total number of the moving node is determined by the number of moving node when you put the component in the PT at the beginning X Y represent the coordinate position corresponding to the moving node and you can reset the coordinate position for each moving node here 5 Switch to the Label tab and add the corresponding texts to be displayed NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 113 3 Functions of NB Designer 6 Switch to the Graphics tab and select Vector Graphics or bitmap to move or display the state 7 Press the OK button to complete the setup of the Animation component 3 6 10 Number Input Muntar EE The Number Input component can be used to display the current data contained in word address inside a specified PT or of PLC to input data through the pop up keyboard and to change the data contained in this address by pressing ENTER button Process of adding one Number Input component 1 Press the Number Input component icon drag it to the screen then the Basic Properties dialog box of the Number Input component will pop up Basic Property Numeric Data Font Keyboard Setting Graphics Control Setting Display Setting Priority Normal W Make Read Address and Write Address the Same Read Address
113. ON during the execution of Macro reading and writing of memory and to OFF after the execution is completed read When this bit is set to ON buzz a long beep After the beeping the bit turns OFF read write When this bit is set to ON buzz a short beep After the beeping the bit turns OFF read write When this bit is set to ON the starting item of Alarm component will display the alarm count read write When this bit is set to ON the input components in the Base Screen will be triggered read write When this bit is set to ON the RW clearing The start address and word length are determined by LW9260 and LW9262 will be triggered read write When this bit is set to ON the Number Input components will be automatically triggered after the screen is opened read write When this bit is set to ON the cursor will be locked at current Input component and can be switched to other input components only after the input is completed read write When this bit is set to ON the PLC communication without response is filtered read write When this bit is set to ON the bytes will be displayed with the endian reversed i e the low bytes are displayed on the right side of the Text Display component read write When this bit is set to ON the Text Display component only displays the character codes from 0x21 to 0x7F encoded to the space 0x20 read write Set at screen switching This bit is set to ON during
114. Operation Manual V106 3 403 3 Functions of NB Designer gt s ad DLL Ie FONT 16 bit Hexade Desci g 8 2 8 8 2 2 2 2 2 SS EEE O S Orage For Hexade 3 404 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer JEg RecipeEditor NoName se aa ih Y Eyi Fil Mi rg Hel JO pyedioey ZL 3 After the completion of number input it would better to have the Enter key pressed and it must be saved If the file is not saved and click the Update Data button the data which was entered before clicking the button will be lost The value exceeds the data type and range of digits cannot be input Single data and Array data The data shown in the previous case is single data i e a group of data Provide a brief of array data Array data i e the data belonging to the same classification is placed together which is helpful to the data edition as shown below NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 405 3 Functions of NB Designer 16 bit signed number 7 lt j Besa storage rorm Des IQEA Wad SOTA e FOr al Escriproon 16 bit Hexade esc 16 bit signed n Array 3 406 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer File Merge Function File merge function is mainly applicable to the 2 recipe files with the differe
115. Ox7300FFFA Printer busy Trigger another print job when printer is printing Ox7300FFFB Driver amp UI Printer Settings Disable Ox7300FFFC UI Printer Setting Disable Ox7300FFFD USB Cable not Connect on Ox7300FFFE Others Reason A 0x7300FFFF Driver is not configured s 0x73010000 Paper related error default 3 0x73010100 Paper is empty 0x73010200 Load Error paper not loaded correctly A 0x73010300 Eject Error paper not ejected correctly g 0x73010400 Media Error paper not detected paper skewed roll paper cannot be cut or torn off 5 0x73010500 Paper jam 2 0x73010600 Paper nearly empty 0x73010700 The combination of paper type and paper size is not supported or paper set in Printer does not match request 0x73020000 Ink related reason default 0x73020100 Ink empty 0x73020200 Ink low 0x73020300 Waste ink error waste ink reservoir full 0x73030000 Hardware related error default 0x73030100 Fatal error 0x73030200 Service call 0x73030300 Printer unavailable performing maintenance or processing jobs 0x73030400 Printer buffer memory full 0x73030500 Lever error lever position not correct 0x73030600 Cover open 0x73030700 No print unit e g missing print head 0x73030800 Ink Cover open 0x73030900 No ink Cartridge 0x73040000 File related error default 0x73040100 Printinfo error the size of information set to lt Printinfo gt is too large 0x73040200 File decode error picture format of specified image cannot be
116. Pause function stops temporarily the refresh of the graph and the sampling operation will not be stopped temporarily When Pause Clear is checked as shown blow and the state of the specified bit address LBO is set ON the screen will stop refreshing temporarily When the specified bit address LBO is set OFF the graph will be refreshed and displayed ci Pause Clear ClearAddr PauseAddr 1 PT Hmo PLE og No Area Variable LB Address 0 Data Format BIN hi Word Length 2 Use Variable Format Range DDDD 0 9999 Clear corresponds to the address allocated temporarily to Pause 1 Specifying the parameters as above the bit address LBO functions as Pause and the bit address LB1 functions as Clear Displayed graph can be cleared only the changes occurred in LB1 state The default value is 3 For example if the specified memory is LWO LWO LW1 and LW2 will be the current browsing index value the newest index value is 0 and the value is greater the data is older the starting browsing index value and the maximum browsing index value of Scroll Bar respectively This option is valid only when Multiple pages is selected Scroll can be used to browse the multiple graph and can be in combination with the Scroll Bar For the specific using method of Scroll Bar refer to 3 6 22 Scroll Bar Page 3 164 4 Scroll PT Hmo PLO p x No Area Variable LW Address 0
117. Place Group Components buttons as shown below Edit Group Components Library Preview Group Preview Group AAAAAAAAAAAA F aa o E fan 1 2 3 CLR HEs 5 71 HE 5 T2 HE 5 73 a lt a a 4 5 6 lt HE _M_T HE M _T2 Group Components Group Operation Save Group Components Export Library Import library Delete Group Components Mew Library Delete All Group components Delete Library 2 Click the Yes All button in the Confirm Replace Dialog Confirm Replace Graphics Library file used in group componentslTAL_BAROOS volt already exists Do you replace it Source Project Destination Project State 3 382 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 Close Edit Group Components Library and one keyboard will appear in the screen AAAAAAAAAAAA nope 000g ooga DECI 4 Place this keyboard in Frame 11 double click the mouse and change Width and Height select Keyboard after Special Attribute being checked and make the other settings in Screen Property dialog box as shown below O r gt D 7 c gt O e gt HA PMN oP BEMAARaRE CE igj us B Z A i A A Al Es 4 B Bas ae oS Title No 11 Protect key mapping on common sheet screen Switch to the lowest security level when screen closed V Screen Attribute Keyboard Security Level
118. Project Library Window 6 columns in the Project Library Window are available Connector Selects the communication cable type PT Selects the PT type PLC Selects the PLC type Parts Selects various kinds of configuration parts Function Parts Selects various kinds of multi function parts Project Database Selects some special functions Project Work Space Project Work Space adopts tree view chart to show the relations of the PLC PT PT internal screens and components in the whole project Project File Window Project File Window adopts tree view to show the correlations between the PT and bitmap files related to the project and all the information of the files such as the recipe files macro files and graphics library files etc contained in the project Output Window For details refer to 3 3 4 Outout Window Page 3 43 Component List Window For details refer to 3 3 1 Project Library Window Page 3 33 Configuration and Setup Window Edit Window Users setup configurations or create drawings in the window 3 6 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 2 Menus eC There are various kinds of menus in NB Designer You can set the object graphics chart macro data block etc and create the screen data displayed on the NB Unit The pull down menu list and the purposes of each item are as follows 3 2 1 File Menu New g N D 5 a
119. Read Write Variables In this part we will provide the description about specification of the operating Macro and we will also provide the description that should be noted when you use Macro The Macro can be regarded as a black box for input and output Taking the example of the division program which was mentioned in the first part of this section the flow of the procession is as follows Macro eS O Read variable int MacroEntry Write variabie Read only Write only S LWO_R lf LW1_R 0 Lw2 W O LW1_R LW2_W double LWO_R LW1_R E Return 0 a 5 gt The specification of the operation is as follows Before the program is executed the value from the memory for LWO and LW1 will be assigned to Read variables LWO_R and LW1_R then Macro will be executed Later after Macro function returns the value of variable LW2_W will be written into LW2 Therefore the variables of the Macro performs like the copy of the memory and even if the variables are modified the value of the memory is not be changed Note 1 Since the read variables do not read the memory value during executing the Macro the read value remain the same as the one when the Macro read during operating Even if the memory value is modified from the external device during the Macro executing result of the operation is not be affected 2 Even if the memory value is written with a value from the external device during the Macro executing the memory
120. Setting IV Vector Graphics Button6 17 vg M R A Function Key Label Graphics Control Setting Display Setting Switch Screens Minimize gt r a C Key Button Enter ya X Map Key a Execute Macro C Map Keyboard Disable Touch Calibration Save Screenshot to Ettemal Memory Clear Event Import Export Import Project to PT z Note Pad Function Pen Pen Color E Pen Color z C PenSize 1 Clear amp Print Mode Black and white Color Black and White Reverse Color eee aa 5 7 Use Original Size epost Graphics Print page Pint Tet Save to System Graphics Library Current Page IV Print Text Change Paper To Print IV Print Analog Meter Landscape inp ali Portrait V Print All Vector Map Print Background Colors NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 179 3 Functions of NB Designer 4 Place one function key with the Property of Switch Screen of Close Screen in the Function Key tab Check Vector Graphics in the Graphics tab and select one Vector as shown below Function Key Label Graphics Control Setting Display Setting 0 Framed IV Vector Graphics Button6 15 vg e O A C Execute Y v Button6 15 vg Button6 17 vg CLOSEO01 vg CONFIRM vg CT
121. Setting ExtemalMemory PT Task Bar PT Extended Property Display Task Bar Background Color J Use Touch Indicator E Undefined Area Color I CPU Indicating Lamp Hs CPU Indicating Lamp Color V Alam Indicating Lamp Alam Indicating Lamp IV Menu Screen I Touch indicating Lamp Frame Color Boa laa Touch Unable Area Color E Touch Area Color Button Size Width 125 Height 20 Task Bar Button Task Bar Note The Menu Screen is displayed on the left side or the right side of the panel during the operation In edit window state the Menu Screen is an independent screen and it is Frame 2 by default For details refer to 3 10 2 Task Bar Page 3 285 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 69 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 5 9 Fonts 3 70 Type and Characteristics of Font NB Designer provides 3 available fonts i e Bitmap Font graphic font and vector font The characteristics of these three fonts will be described as follows Bitmap Font One bitmap font is prepared for each character But this method has obvious disadvantages a Only SimSun is supported b The scaling effect is poor For each character 3 kinds of bitmaps i e 8x8 16x8 24x16 height x width are reserved respectively so the effect is very poor when the larger font is displayed as shown below Fontsize 16 24 32 48 64 f2 example 123 123 123 1
122. Spacing Ctrl L AE Alignment amp Left Size d a Right Order it Top E Group Ctr4G at Bottom 4 UnGroup Ctr u 4 Vertical Midline H Horizontal Even Spacing Ctr R Horizontal Midline E Vertical Even Spacing Ctrl L Size To make the multiple components with the same width height or size you just need to press the corresponding icons for adjusting the size of the component or to select the options in the corresponding menus The corresponding icons are shown as H Z 4 and they are Width Height and Both respectively Unify the size for all components according to the size of the component is located in the left end among all the components If you want to specify a certain component as the reference select other components after pressing the shift key to select the reference H Width 1 Height Both Order rs 4 Group Ctrl G 44 UnGroup Ctrl U H Horzontal Even Spacing Ctri R Order Height W Group Ctrl G fj UnGroup Ctrl U H Horizontal Even Spacing Ctr R lt Vertical Even Spacing Ctrl 3 12 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer Order When the multiple components are overlapped together you can use the icons shown as a i 4 Bring to Front Send to Back Bring Forward Send Backward or select Bring to Front Send to Back Bring Forward Send Backward in
123. System Language option in the Option menu is selected Change System Language Language English 6 1 10 Usage of Forced Address Bit 6 10 When the OMRON PLC is connected via Ethernet there are some special bit addresses L FORCED L FORCED_RELEASE and L _RELEASE_STATUS Usage example W_FORCED W_FORCED_RELEASE and W_RELEASE_STATUS function as follows W_FORCED will enforce the address bit to 0 or 1 and then retain it in the forced status W_FORCED_RELEASE will enforce the address bit to 0 or 1 but it releases the forced state W_RELEASE_STATUS will release the forced status and make no change Usage example Place two Bit Switch components and one Bit Button component with settings as follows Perform the test Operation 1 Firstly touch switch 1 to specify the value to O forced and then touch switch 2 to modify the value to 1 and it causes the bit to be released of the forced state at the same time Also when the bit is specified to 1 forced with switch 1 touch switch 2 to modify the bit to O and is causes the bit to be released of the forced state at the same time Operation 2 Firstly touch switch 1 to specify the value to O forced and then touch switch 3 but the bit will be remained as 0 and it causes the bit to be released of the forced state Also when the bit is specified to 1 forced touch switch 3 but the bit will be remained as 1 and it causes the
124. TI c gt O F e gt a ie r Ae dsiq wiely 2 3 Functions of NB Designer Process of adding one Alarm Display 1 Press the Alarm Display icon drag it to the screen then the Alarm Display Property dialog box will pop up Alarm Display Display Setting Moving Step Figel Refresh Rate 10 x100 ms Display Range To 255 Moving Step Set the Moving Step in the unit of pixel The larger the number of moving step the faster the speed of scroll display The value is between 1 and 255 Refresh Rate Refers to the interval of each movement with the unit of 100 ms The larger the value of moving speed the slower the speed of scroll display The value is between 1 and 10000 i e 0 1 s to 1000 s Display Range Set the range of alarm types to be displayed between 0 to 255 Restricting the alarm types at this moment allows the display only optional alarm information Description The descriptions can be entered to explain the Alarm Display components the descriptions will not be displayed in PT screen 2 Press the OK button to complete the setup 3 206 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer Example of creating one Alarm Display component 1 Create a new project firstly 2 Click the Alarm Setting icon in Project Database to display the logon list of alarm setting and then add two pieces of alarm setting as shown below N
125. We ea o0 H LJ a open Look in D NB Designer c E di bg_vg_lib dJi RecipeEditor dO cygwin resource di doc D system Jb driver d unifont a lib 4 usrlib di MinGW di VectorFonts d picture defaultlog bmp J project E LockBmp bmp Projects Fiename fdefautiogbmp ss CS sSsSsS Files of type Graphic Filet bmp gif jpg png Ne Cancel 4 3 64 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer Use of Bitmap 1 Double click the component where the bitmap will be used and then enter Graphics tab Htimap oroper nap property Graphics Display Setting Vector Graphics poy w ubisaqg s1seg S METER_01bg dewyig 9 SG Use Original Size 2 Check Bitmap option and select the bitmap you want to use then click OK button to close the dialog box Import of Bitmap 1 You can import the bitmap just like importing the Vector Graphics Click Import Graphics icon and select Bitmap image bg in the Type in the pop up dialog box You can also import the bitmap used in the other project or the System Graphics Library The system graphics library is located in bg_vg_lib VG directory in which the NB Designer was installed and all the graphics are stored in the folders for each item NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 65
126. Window T X ERRS BPRS Please input your name BEAR EOEROOOa oe Re ee Be Bo ie es os Boe Be ee he Bee a BHEOOOODOES Ea Later when H E 2 Se XS uk is triggered 3 will be displayed in the Text Input component as shown below 3 183 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer PinYin Input Window Please input your name ogagogoagoangogngogng oR Be ee Be Bo Bo Be Bes DEOGoEOAoaGe a BOGOOGODOSS Ea Trigger after PinYin san is input will be displayed in the Text Input component PinYin Input Window Please input your name Press ENT button in character keyboard to complete this input Addition1 Ifthe character needs to be changed during the input process the function keys of BACK or Clear in the keyboard can be used to realize this operation E Jj triggering the blank area of the Chinese Character Display screen can realize the movement of this screen which is similar to the screen console of the function key Clicking the PinYin Input Window bar can realize the screen movement as shown below PinYin Input Window Press the blue title bar can be move Please input your name the screen English PgDn 3 184 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer 5 Clicking the Minimize i e
127. a Connector a Project File Window x Graphics Project File Window a i BlueF i CLOSEOOL vg ig CONFIRM vg i CTRL_BAROO1 vg fi CTRL_BAR009 vg 2 ig DISP_BAROO1 vg WwW Project Library Window Bit Button Bit Lamp DISP_BAROO2 vg Project Work Space at E Tree View Bit Switch Direct Screen a U MOpUIM AseJQI O98 Old L E E Command Word Lamp Button E E DOE T A E cae E nn O A AEN E re EE ES EN OO SA ET rT Function Parts ee S we 6 a as ee ae et a hee see ee eens Prieto space Output Window x Login Window Ready Mouse x 302 y 31 The Project Library Window contains Connector PT PLC Parts Function Parts and Project Database Connector Serial Port Ethernet PT NB3Q TWOOB NB3Q TW01B NB5Q TWOOB NB5Q TW01B PLC OMRON SIEMENS MITSUBISHI Schneider Parts Bit Button Bit Switch Word Lamp Data Log XY Graph Number Input Text Input Function Parts Scale Function Key Alarm Display Timer Project Database Text Library Variable Table PLC Control NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 33 3 Functions of NB Designer Directions 1 Connector Just click Serial Port and drag it to the Project Work Space 2 PT Check your PT type find and drag the PT with the same type in the PT to the Project Work Space 3 PLC Check your PLC type find and drag the PLC with the same type i
128. a O Framed 0 1iCommon Window A 2 Fast Selection 3 NUM Keyboard TP 4 45CIl Keyboard IP 5 File List Window 6 Password Window UP zi Confirm Action window IP 6 HEX Keyboard S Login Window I 10 Wait IF 11 0pen IF 12 Close IP 13 5top UF 14 Fully open IF 15 S5ensor Check UF 16 5witch Check TF 17 Check ii PLC i PLCO O All the components contained in each screen will be displayed here and if there is no component in a screen nothing will appear below it aco By clicking the or symbol on the left of icon the folder tree can be unfolded or folded Directly double click the Screen or the component No in the Screen to skip to the edit page involving the component When a Screen or component is selected pressing the DELETE button can delete the related screen or component 3 38 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer Explanation about the characters on the top of the PLC Property window Pic property Project File Window x Graphics i BlueFrame vg Station Number t CLOSE001 vg CONFIRM vg PLC CTRL_BAROO1 vg oi CTRL_BAR009 vg DISP_BAR001 vg DISP_BAR002 vg i DISP_BAR005 vg DISP_BARO06 vg Project Work Space x Tree View EE car HMI om PDS oo Z i O D o 5 D O 2 r S
129. and O level is the lowest When the security level is 0 it means no password 0 can t be used for setting the password Number of Security Levels is 3 by default in PT Property and Security Levels Setting tab it can be opened to 16 levels in the COM2 Setting COM1 Setting Task Bar Print Setting PT Number of Security Levels NULL 0 Password After the security level password is set the user can use each group of specified passwords to perform screen and component managements For example after the screen security level is set to 2 the erwise this screen can t be entered during screen can be switched to by inputting the user password oth the operation Extemal Memory PT Extended Property System Information Setting Security Level Setting User Permission Setting Event History Setting Screen Title Framed No 0 Protect key mapping on common sheet screen Switch to the lowest security level when screen closed Screen Attribute Keyboard Security Level E Position T Background Color x0 Yo Background Color E Pattem Color Width 800 Height 480 Transparency 0 z 3 298 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer Example Set 16 level security passwords for the project 1 Set Number of Security Levels in PT Property to 16 accompanying the password
130. be retained Multiple The extension of Data Log is allowable In this type even if the Oscillograph is pages scrolled the data displayed before the scrolling will be retained Property Refers to the start movement direction of Oscillograph track Cycle Refers to the interval to perform sampling with the unit of s or 100 ms Sampling Rate When the Sampling Rate is selected the Oscillograph component will read the group data with the sampling rate and display them at a time For example when the Read Address is LW10 Sampling Rate is 2 and channel is 3 the values stored to the memory from LW10 to LW15 for each sampling rate can be read And the assignment is as follows two of the data is read for each sampling The values will be read in the order of LW10 LW13 for channel 1 LW11 LW13 for channel 2 LW12 LW15 for channel 3 When the sampling time is 1 s the above mentioned two group data will be read each second And when the sampling rate is used the chart is more accurate and smooth Sampling Points Refers to the number of sampling point displayed in each screen Page No This option is valid only when Multiple pages is selected Channel Refers to the number of the graph to be displayed 16 channels at max NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 161 3 Functions of NB Designer Pause Clear Scroll Time 3 162 Descriptions of Scope Chart The default Word Length is 2
131. by you at the designing time will always be displayed For the creation and usage of Vector Graphics refer to 3 5 5 Vector Graphic 1 Press the Vector Graphics icon drag it to the screen then select the Vector Graphics you want to use as shown below Y T c 5 O ct fe 5 9 er a Vector Graphics property Graphics Display Setting i Vector Graphics CTRL_BARO09 vg Button6 15 vg Button6 1 vg CLOSED01 vq CONFIRM vg CTRL_BAR E O os r DISP_BARO DISP_BARO DISP_BARO DISP_BARD Bitmap s lydelg JOIOS A 9 Use Orginal Size pane Import Graphics Save to System Graphics Library Graphics for Each 2 Press the OK button and then adjust the position and the size of the Vector Graphics in the screen as shown below NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 215 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 7 7 Notepad Notepad Notepad is designed specially to provide the users with a space for the message reservation and transmission thus allowing the users to write any text on the PT freely And its function is similar to that of the drawing board Process of adding Notepad 1 Press the Notepad icon drag it to the screen then the Notepad Property dialog box will pop up Note Pad Display Setting Frame Width E Frame Color 0 Background Color Frame Width Refers to the frame width of the Notepad Back
132. case of the NB Series when grounding the positive terminal of power supply of 24 V to the NB do not ground functional grounding terminal at NB side Some functions of a PC connected to the NB may cause a short circuit and the NB Unit may cause damage e Caution Depending on the types of PC SG terminals of RS 232C port or USB port and contour of connector can be connected As the contour of tool port of the NB and the functional grounding terminal are not insu lated they are connected Therefore connecting the PC allows GND terminal and functional grounding terminal of the NB to be connected If the power supply of 24V to the NB is grounded positively ground ing the functional grounding terminal allows a short circuit as shown in the diagram below and may result in damage Contour Contour Do not ground the functional grounding Test Function The Test Function is performed on PC so that a problem may occur affected by the timing or the differences with communication route When the test function is performed considering possible unexpected circumstances on PC confirm that any dangerous event will not occur beforehand 18 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 Precautions for Safe Use e When unpacking the NB Units and the peripheral devices check carefully for any external scratches or other damages Also shake the Units gently and check for any abnormal sound e The NB Unit must be inst
133. code is used it allows to display 17 of statuses at maximum Refer to 8 LSB Type Page 3 361 in the section 3 16 Word Length Refers to the number of the occupied memories The default number is 1 and it varies with the different component or area variable System memory Refers to the internal memories provided by the PT for some special purposes For details refer to 3 11 Address of System Memory Page 3 317 Format Range Refers to the formats of the address types of the PLC memories or the internal memory address of the PT Use Variable Determines whether to use the addresses registered in the variables For details refer to 3 8 2 Variable Table Page 3 240 Use the index Determines whether to use the specified memory as the index memory for the control memory memory of the current component The new Read Write Address the specified Read Write Address Index Address For example when the specified written address is D100 and the index memory address is LWO if LW0 10 the new write address is D100 10 D110 Read If the component supports write only you cannot set to reading addresses The status of the components Address will be displayed based on the writing addresses Description Refers to the reference name assigned to the current component not displayed NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 73 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 5 11 Control Setting of Component Control
134. companies which is the most common communication protocol standard adopted by the existing LANs PT uses the standard UTP as the transmission media for the Ethernet The NB Series use UTP cables The network communications between PT and PLC can be realized through the Ethernet connection Connecting the PT and the PLC manufactured by OMRON through the Ethernet allows the data read and written What s more connecting the PT with PC via the Ethernet can also perform the project upload download and the system processing NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 1 5 1 Introduction 1 2 3 Communicating with the PLC Manufactured by Other Companies 1 6 Besides the connection with the PLC manufactured by OMRON NB Series PTs can also communicate with the devices manufactured by SIEMENS Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Schneider Electric Ltd Delta Panasonic Allen Bradley GE Fanuc Automation Inc LG and the PLCs supporting Modbus protocol For the manufacturers and the models of the PLCs that can be communicated with refer to NB Series Host Connection Manual NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 1 Introduction 1 3 System Configuration _ I w O lt m r D 3 O e 5 gt To o ot fe 3 1 3 1 Connectable Peripheral Devices omron SYSMAG CP1H
135. controller to the ERW1 memory of the external memory Download from ERW1 to PLC Transfers the data in ERW1 memory of the external memory to the memory specified by PLC or controller Upload from PLC to ERW2 Transfers the data in memory specified by PLC or controller to the ERW2 memory of the external memory Download from ERW2 to PLC Transfers the data in ERW2 memory of the external memory to the memory specified by PLC or controller 6 24 NB Series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 6 Descriptions of New Functions Added into NBLILI TW01B 6 3 6 PLC Control Save Screenshot to External Memory PT Executing PLC Control HMIO v Pr HMIO PLENo 0 v Area Variable LB Address 0 DMa Fama BK _ Format Range DDDD 0 9999 WordLength 1 Use Variable Function Mode Save Screenshot to External Memory Backlight Off Write back a Screen Hard Copy Marco Macro Execute Macro Backlight On Execution Backlight On Write Back General purpose PLC control Expansion Sound Ctrl OFF gt 0N Sound Ctrl ON gt OFF Current Soul Sound Ctrl OFF lt gt 0N Sound Reset OFF gt 0N Reset ON gt 0 Select gagungd D Save Screenshot to External Memory Change screen ignore screen U J Custom Print Options T Black and White Reverse Color rh oo O fo 3 D fo D r 3 3 o lt 3 D 3 r Mode Black and White Color
136. e one host communicating with multiple PLCs or PTs The maximum number of PLCs or PTs that can be connected to the host is up to 32 and the maximum transmission distance is 500 meters RS 485 is half duplex communication method that cannot allow the transmission and receiving to be performed simultaneously l RS 422A It is unnecessary to control the data direction due to 4 wire RS 422A interface using separate transmission and receiving channels Any necessary signal exchange among the equipments can be performed by using software method XKON XOFF Handshaking or hardware method control wires RS 422A standard with its full name Electrical Characteristics of Balanced Voltage Digital Interface Circuits specifies the characteristics of the interface circuit Actually there is also a signal ground total 5 wires Because the receiver uses high input impedance and the driving performance of the transmission driver is more powerful than that of RS 232C therefore the same transmission wire can be connected with multiple receiving nodes and the number of the connectable node is up to 10 That s to say one is the master and the others are the slaves Due to the RS 422A which is impossible to communicate between the slaves therefore the RS 422A supports one point to multiple full duplex communications i Ethernet Ethernet is a kind of baseband LAN specification established by Xerox company and jointly developed by Xerox Intel and DEC
137. fe o O oO o Q gt z gt ie jor Use of Vector Font The functions and components related to the vector font are as follows 1 Text Library Using the text library can realize the reuse of the text and the multi language project The operation instructions related to the font a Maximum language number setup S UO4 6 G E The maximum language number can be set up to 32 If smaller capacity of project file is preferable set the maximum language number to the least necessary number b Default font setup for each language The user can set the default font for each language and when the user uses the text library he doesn t need to reselect the font each time 2 Text Component Text component can display the character information statically And the user can use the multi language text when the text library is used a The text component can use 3 kinds of fonts i e Bitmap Font graphic font and vector font b In the text library mode the text component can reset the font for each language by changing the language displayed currently 3 Label Most of the components can use the label The text string can be directly input and the text library can also be used in the component label When the text library isn t used different fonts can be set for text string in each state ad lt When the text library is used fonts can be set for the text string of each language and in each
138. file upload from PT to PC The communication parameters must be set before the upload The Communication Setting is same as that of download Select Data Upload Project Files Enter descriptions to PT Information if necessary Firstly check Project Data required and click the OK button to select the path for saving the data then click the Save button after inputting the file name After the Password Upload pops up input 888888 and press the OK button to perform the upload Note The default password for upload is 888888 N oo Cc a D 2 O D D ct fe 5 If you want to modify the upload password please double click the PT in Project Work Space and modify Password corresponding to Allow Upload in PT Extended Properties tab System Information Setting Securty Level Setting User Permission Setting Event History Setting Print Setting COMI Setting COM2 Setting ExtemalMemory PT Task Bar PT Extended Property I Backlight 10 mins Video Mode PAL Auto backlight during alam event Screen Saver 0 mins Screen Saver Screen O Frame Retum to Orginal Screen When Screen Saver Ends Number of Languages I Allow Upload Password 8868688 Default Language 1 hi Allow Decompilation Password 888888 Chinese Font Box Height 24 Operation Log Storage Setting System Scroll Bar Width 20 Storage Device USB DISK1 M Use Macro when loading project macro_O c Use Buzzer
139. index I Use index 0 2 Data Fomat BIN z Data Fomat BIN X Word Length 3 Use Variable Word Length 12 7 Use Variable Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 103 3 Functions of NB Designer XY Graph property Basic Property XY Graph Channel Eaended Property Seve Data History Display Setting FP bed Han Whet Relan Memory ackkees odar ix Y bia Y Max X Mn X Ma Y coordinate min LW20 Y coordinate max LW21 X coordinate min LW22 X coordinate max LW23 Example When the maximum value and minimum value of a line graph Drawing method Track are specified indirectly Descriptions The position coordinate is allocated as below There is only 1 sampling point whose coordinate value corresponds to x y LW10 LW11 and the minimum values and maximum values for y coordinate and x coordinate are LW20 amp LW21 and LW22 LW23 respectively yee g kY Plot Track Refresh B Lock T Group G Ctr G Groups Rotation Line Width Line Style ArrowStyle NI12 LW10 LW10 NI14 LW22 LW22 S aint nunn E anne mm NIIS LW23 LW23 ENTO CLUS Nel LW11LW11 f annn anne nnm f xY Graph property l Es xY Graph property Basic Property XY Graph Channel Extended Property Save Data History Display Setting Basic Property XY G
140. method d Check in the Clear Event History option in the NBDownload dialog box and execute the download again The event information data stored in the recipe memory and the event information files stored in the external memory can be cleared simultaneously by this method as shown below 3 204 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer E NBDownload Select PT gt Select Data PT Information Project Data O O LOGO File C Clear Data History CI Clear ERW Data Download Project cAcarncar pkg C Clear FAW Data Download to 0 USB1 Communication Method USB port IP NULL PORT MULL Download Pot NULL pps MULL Exit 3 7 3 Alarm Display Alarm Pisplty Alarm Display icon can be used to display the triggered preset alarm information by using the Neon Lamp in the area where the Alarm Display locates The alarm information must be related to node address of a certain bit and it will scroll from the right to the left when the bit address is triggered to the alarm state The alarm information will continue to scroll until this bit address is switched to the non alarm state The alarm information must be logged in the Alarm Setting database in advance This component only displays the alarm information and the component to be displayed must be logged in the Alarm Setting database NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 205 p
141. normal will still be displayed in the event list unless the event list is cleared NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer N Date of Time of Checked Timeof Event j 2 b Oecute U Occurred mE A Cancel Content ressure Tenp Abnornal Pressure Abnormal Tenp Time ascending Order Display When this option is checked the latest occurred event will be displayed on the bottom and the event sequence No and the time will ascend from top to bottom as shown below oo U st or n Ascending order by time new trigger events are displayed on the following When this option is not checked the event will be displayed in the descending order i e the latest occurred event will be displayed on the top and event sequence No and the time will descend from top to bottom as shown below JUBAF EC 9 E Descending order by time new trigger events are displayed on the top 3 Press the OK button to complete the setup and adjust the position and the size of the Event component 3 169 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer Example of Event 1 First create a new project and Save it 2 Add two events in the Event Setting as shown below No Type PT No Address inform Address Trigger Condition Message HMIQ PLCO 0Q Lit a0 Temperature HM10 PLCO 0 LB 10 LB
142. of Languages The Text Library supports up to 32 kinds of languages with the Default Language of 8 If the user needs more than 8 kinds of languages the Max No of Language should be increased Current Lang Refers to the language being edited currently Font type Sets the font type of the language used currently to Vector Font or Bitmap Font Font Attribute Sets the related attributes of the language used currently such as the Font Size Position Color and Italic and Bold Copy Font Attribute To All Language Copying the font attribute which is edited currently to all the other languages Language The description of the language which is edited currently The entry procedure to the OS of the current PC is displayed Note 1 Although the font attribute for each language specified to Language Setting is specified to all the compo nent as default the font attribute specified individually for each component attribute in the Label tab has a high priority 2 Changing the Font Attribute setting in Language Setting will not affect the component specified already the Text Library as the font attributes of label To use the Font Attribute modified in Language Setting it needs to recheck Use Text Library in Label tab after the checking being cancelled in order to refresh the Font Attribute setting in Language Setting 4 Import Export of Text Library Text Library has the functions of importing amp exporting the registered
143. of the NB Unit is 5V 5 and the maximum current is 150mA Before connecting a USB connector to a device make sure that the device is free of damage Commercially available and the recommended USB HUBs are different from the general specifications of the NB Unit The unit may not function well in an environment subject to noise static electricity Therefore when using a USB HUB employ sufficient noise and static electricity insulation measures or install it at a site free of noise or static electricity While uploading or downloading screen data or system programs do not perform the following operations that may corrupt the screen data or the system program e Turning OFF the power supply of the NB Unit e Pressing the PT s reset switch Dispose of the Units and batteries according to local ordinances as they apply yn TE E E iA Do not dispose the product into a fire Doing so may cause the damage with the battery or electronic components Do not apply an impact with the lithium cell charge it dispose it into a fire or heat it Doing either of them may cause an ignition or a bursting When exporting products with lithium primary batteries containing perchlorate at 6ppb or above to or delivering them through California USA the following precautionary measures have to be publicized Perchlorate material applicable through special processing Refer to http www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate NB Series products con
144. of the specified bit address is ON the selected Macro ID will be triggered PLC Control PT Executing PLC Control HMIO hi PT Heo PLENo 0 AraM arable LE Address 10 Data Format BIN _ Fomat A angel DODO 0 3333 word Length 1 Use Variable Function Moe aAa Marco Macro macro Oc Execution ON lt gt OFF Area Variable and Address Refers to the address to trigger the Macro program execution The Macro program will be executed when this bit is 1 while not executed when this bit is 0 Macro ID Select a Macro to be executed Execute Method ON lt W7OFF When the specified bit turns OFF from ON or vice versa the Macro will be executed OFF ON When the specified bit turns ON from OFF the Macro will be executed ON OFF When the specified bit turns OFF from ON the Macro will be executed ON When the specified bit is ON the Macro will be executed OFF ON Reset When the specified bit turns ON from OFF the Macro will be executed and the specified bit will be forced into OFF ON OFF Reset When the specified bit turns OFF from ON the Macro will be executed and the specified bit will be forced into ON Note Only when the Macro is added within the project this function is available If the Macro code is removed after specifying the Execute Macro in the Function Mode option the PLC Control dialog box by the Function selection the code is converted automatically to the Macro in the default
145. on Address Refers to the first address of the word address corresponding to the graph Word Length It is determined by the sampling channels If the channel number is N where 1 lt N lt 16 the Word Length will be N 2 Go to the Scope Chart tab and set the parameters related to the Oscillograph component r Oz w ez Basic Property Scope Chart Channel Extended Property Display Setting or Type Single pag Property Startfrom Left Sampling Cycle 1 Save Time F Sampling Method Periodic sampling Cycle 1 X Is X Sampling Points 10 Page No 1 Channel 1 Control Memory Setting Trigger Memory Setting Pause Clear ClearAddr PauseAddr 1 PT HMIO ag 0 PT HMIO 0 w Area Variable LB Area Va able LB 0 0 Address Address O Data Fomat BIN z Data Fomat BIN Q Word Length 1 Use Variable Word Length 2 Use Variable ne Format Range DDDD 0 9999 Format Range DDDD 0 9999 A T Scroll 1M Time PT Tee PC p PT ma PC p gt HMIO No 0 HMIO No 0 Area Variable LW Area Variable LW Address 0 Address 0 Data Fomat BIN z Data Fomat BIN 7 Word Length 3 Use Variable Word Length 12 Use Variable Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 Descriptions of Scope Chart Type Single Only the data change information of the sampling data in the current page is page displayed In this type the data which was scrolled and removed from the screen will not
146. on the selected project file Project Text Library Specify the necessary text strings in advance thus preventing the label with Database the same text from being input frequently Variable Table It is a useful address library which prevents the inconvenience resulting from repeated input of address Alarm Setting Specifying the message displayed in Alarm or Alarm Display and the bit address and the trigger conditions applied to the trigger If the bit address registered to Alarm Setting matches the specified trigger condition the registered message will be displayed Event Setting Specifying the function operated with the message displayed in Event or Event Display the communications addressed which should be the trigger and the trigger condition If the bit address or word address registered to the Event Setting are matched the specified trigger condition the registered function can be operated or the registered message can be displayed PLC Control Specify the communication address allocated to the specific functions as follows It is available to select among the screen switching writing the data the current base screen in the PLC general PLC controlling turning OFF the back light and turning ON the back light and others Screen Base Screen It is the general screen Type Common Sheet There is only 1 Common Sheet which can be set to above or under the Base Screen The maximum number of Base Screen ejected in 1 Com
147. or 100 ms Sampling When all the sampling points end the sampling still continues Mode When all the sampling points end the sampling will stop which means sampling is only performed once Sampling Refers to the number of sampling point displayed in each screen Points Page No When the Type in the Trend Graphics tab is set to Multiple pages the page No which displayed initially can be specified Channel Refers to the number of the track line to be displayed And the channel can be set is up to 16 Trigger It is valid when Trigger sampling is selected as Sampling Methods As the parameters are set memory as follows when the state change of the specified LB100 conforms to the settings in Sampling Setting Methods the sampling will be triggered Trigger Memory Setting PT Hmo PE p No Areas Variable LB hi Address 100 Data Format BIN ka Word Length 1 gt Use Variable Format Range DDDD 0 9999 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 153 3 Functions of NB Designer Descriptions of Data Log Properties Pause Clear The default Word Length is 2 Pause function only stops to refresh the changes in the curve Scroll Time 3 154 temporarily and the sampling operation will not be stopped temporarily When Pause Clear is checked as shown blow and the state of the specified bit address LBO is set ON the screen will stop refreshing temporarily When
148. or the moving keys in the keyboard X Y Refers to the coordinate value of the vertex in the upper left of the component Width Height Refers to the width and height of the component The unit is pixel point Display Checking this option means the current component is always in displayed state Not Display Checking this option means the current component is always in hide state and the touching is Touching is invalid invalid when the component is hidden Conditional Display Security Level Control Checking this option means the current component can be displayed only when the security level of the operator is higher than the minimum security level already set User Permission Control Checking this option means the current component can be displayed only when the operator has the set permission Indirect Reference Checking this option means the current component can be displayed only when the state of the specified bit memory or word memory meets the set conditions 3 78 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer Example of Display Setting Example Set LWO to the address of number input component make display setting and keep LB10 as On RI E T ai eit j u Number Input p perty Basic Property Numeric Data Font Keyboard Setting Graphics Control Setting Display Setting r Position l Width amp 0 Lock Position Height 40
149. port 3 348 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 15 Download 3 15 1 Transmission Setting After the project is edited it can be downloaded to the PT to perform the actual operations NB Designer provides 3 download methods i e USB serial port and Ethernet The Ethernet is only applicable to NBLILI TW01B Before the upload and download you must set the communication parameters firstly You can select Tools Transmission Setting menu to set the communication parameters After the Project Option Setting dialog box pops up click the Download Device drop down list and select the required download way Project Option Setting ae PT Compile HMIO V Compressed Bitmap Size gt 1024 Bytes Download Download via USB Download Device USB Port COM1 y a a mem Compile V Compressed Bitmap Size gt 1024 Bytes Download Download via serial port used to select the correct PC Serial No Port Download Device Compile V Compressed Bitmap Size gt 1024 Bytes Download Download Device Ethernet IM Port COM1 Download via Ethernet used to set the current IP Address and Port No of PT IP Address Port No NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 349 ol fo fo ie 2 uias uolssiwusuel GL 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 350 1
150. r D 3 D O lt LB Refers to the local bit address of PT which can t be retained when power is OFF RB Refers to the absolute address of bit address saved in the recipe memory that is stored in the flash memory which can be retained when the power is OFF Even if the battery is dead in PT the data stored in the recipe memory will not be lost RBI Refers to the index address of bit address saved in the recipe memory that is stored in the flash memory which can be retained when the power is OFF Even if the battery is dead in PT the data stored in the recipe memory will not be lost LW B Refers to the bit address corresponding to the local word address of PT which can t be retained when the power is OFF FRB Refers to the absolute address of bit address saved in Flash which can be retained when the power is OFF When the battery is dead in PT the data saved in Flash will not be affected but the number of write operations in Flash is limited FRBI Refers to the index address of bit address saved in Flash which can be retained when the power is OFF When the battery is dead in PT the data saved in the Flash will not be affected but the number of write operations in Flash is limited Descriptions of internal WORD memory LW Refers to the local word address of PT which can t be retained when power is OFF RW Refers to the absolute address saved in the recipe memory that is stored in the flash memory whic
151. respectively For example Inputting 20110624 into the specified memory can call out and display the event history information saved on June 24th 2011 Border Setting Border Color Style and Width for each row or each column and the Row Spacing and Column Spacing with the unit of pixel point Checking Horizontal Line means the separator will be displayed horizontally and checking Vertical Line means the separator will be displayed vertically Status display Occurring Display the information indicates that the event is occurring in the status column Although it is set to O by default it can be modified Checked Display the information indicates that the event is checked in the status column Although it is set to 1 by default it can be modified Canceled Display the information indicates that the event is canceled in the status column Although it is set to 2 by default it can be modified Title Bar Setting Sets the Name and Font displayed in Title Bar of the table NB Series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 6 19 i oo O fe 3 D e 5 D r 3 E e lt 3 D 5 r Aejds q juan pue Aejds q JO SIH U344 U34434 Z 9 6 Descriptions of New Functions Added into NBLILI TW01B 6 3 3 Data History Data Log and XY Graph Saving the related information into the external memory When the sampling data is being saved into the external memory if y
152. satisfied Triggered FT HMIO Address PT PLC Mo Memon Type Area arable Address 0 Format Range ODODD 0 9999 Data Format BIN Use Variable Attribute Detection Pattern On tf Off Condition Value Range Min Value Max Value l Print O On Trigger Return to Normal gt Type oe Function macro O c Pop up Screen O Frametl f Confirm Dialog Write Value 0 Trigger Dialog PT HMIO a PLE No Ti Area Variable LE Address 0 Use Variable Format Range OOOD 0 9999 Use Buzzer Buzzing Time 1 z Message Temperature is too high 4 T Use Text Library Select Sound Use Vector Font E Sound T Use Sound Open Text Library Open Variable Table NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 269 uoljoUN oJen 6 3 BHuaebbuy ose 6 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 9 4 Other Descriptions 3 270 1 The Macro Editing Window can display the emphasis of the keywords In the top of the default Macro a demo program is described for explanation include macrotypedef h include math h fF Read Write Local address function Int ReadLocalf const char type int addr intnRegs void buf int flag 3 Int WriteLocalf const char type int addr intnRegs void buf int flag Parameter return value type is the string of Li LB etc address is the Operation address nRegs is the leng
153. simultaneously during operation The closing or opening of the Direct Screen is only determined by the bit address of the Read Address that control it while Function Key can t be used to close it When this bit address is ON the screen will pop up and when it is OFF the screen will be closed a Direct screen read address is LB11 Bit Switch read write screens No is 20 address is LB11 Screen20 Press this button set all the bit of read wirte address memery to 1 and popup screen 20 Process of adding one Direct Screen component 1 Press the Direct Screen component icon drag it to the screen then the Basic Properties dialog box of the Direct Screen component will pop up Read Address When the specified read address is ON the content of the specified screen will be displayed in the Direct Screen component area If the pop up screens is closed using a function key the value of the address specified by the read address cannot be turned OFF When closing the pop up screen set 0 to the read address 3 146 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer Address Specifying the address controlling the display of the pop up screen Basic Property Direct Screen Display Setting Basic Property Direct Screen Display Setting Screen 0 FrameO Priority Normal E Indirect Reference of Display Positior Read Address Write Address PT HMIO
154. starting source screen ID and the starting destination screen ID can be set and the destination screen ID will increase automatically according to the copied number in this case which means the screen and Properties of the source screen will be copied into the screens between the starting destination screen and the end destination screen respectively 3 26 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer Operation Type Copp screen amount 1 Delete Screen Source Screen Copy Single Screen Copy Multi Screens From ramet To O Frame g N D 5 a Destination Screen From 10 Cancel e Copy Multi Screens When the number is 1 both the starting source screen ID the end source screen ID and the starting destination screen ID can be set and the end destination screen ID will increase automatically according to the number of the source screen which means the screens and properties of the screens between the starting source screen and the end source screen will be copied in order into the screens between the starting destination screen and the end destination screen respectively When the copy number is greater than 1 the starting source screen ID the end source screen ID and the s
155. state oO lt 4 Component dealing with numbers Number components include number input component and number display component After the vector font is set for the number input component the content of the number input component will be displayed as vector font to realize the better display effect 5 Component dealing with text strings Text components include text string input component text display component and note book component NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 71 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 72 a Limitations to ASCII codes for the vector font The text contents used for the component dealing with text string often can t be decided during the compilation of the project and due to the limitations to the storage capacity all the characters that may be used can t be downloaded to the PT Therefore these components can only use ASCII characters The matrix information supporting all the ASCII characters for this font have been downloaded to the PT by the software when using the vector font Unicode character encoding When the Bitmap Font and the Unicode are selected simultaneously you can use the function key to input Unicode character to the text input component Time Component Time component can display the information such as year month day hour minute second and week etc of the current system in the simplest way When the vector font is selected the time w
156. state number the value of the memory for write address is equal to the value mapped by the set maximum state number List All the set states will be displayed in the list form and the current state is differentiated by the specified color Dropdown List All the set states will be displayed in the dropdown list form and the current state is differentiated by the specified color and the first information displayed in the dropdown list represents the current state YOUMS PIOM 9 9 For the control modes of Add and Sub Unloop is not checked by default State No All 256 statuses can be set at maximum When BIN or BCD code and LSB code are used or when LSB code is used the status of 256 at maximum and the status of 17 at maximum will be displayed respectively Refer to 8 LSB Type Page 3 361 in the section 3 16 The line spacing for the list and the dropdown list can be set Basic Property Word Switch Label Graphics Control Setting Display Setting Type List z State No 2 olor when selected Line Spacing 2 Background Color Frame Color a 0 11 1 12 Map Value When the value read by the read address is equal to a certain value in the Map Value the Word Switch component will display the label and the graphics corresponding to the state number of this value When a certain state number is switched to the value corresponding to this value will be written into the write address 3 Switch
157. successfully Notice After Writes the write value into the specified address after the Written current operation is performed successfully Bit Notice Before Writes ON OFF signal into the specified address before Written the current operation is performed successfully Notice After Writes ON OFF signal into the specified address after the Written current operation is performed successfully Please refer to 3 9 3 Macro Triggering Page 3 268 3 74 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer Example of Control Setting Basic Property Bit Button Label Graphics Control Setting Display Setting Security Setting ON Delay X100ms 0 I Confirm Operation 7 Operation Log SB Min Interval seconds 0 a i l Macro Write Notice P a Ww D o O w D A amp 5 D r 2 ok Cancel Example Setting the parameters as below to enable the value input to LWO when LB10 is ON JUBUOGWOYD Jo Bulyjas jOujUOD p S NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 75 3 Functions of NB Designer 1 Perform the offline test When LB10 is OFF the input by the number input component is invalid and the icon indicating Unable to Input is displayed as shown in the following left graphics 2 When LB10 is ON the input by the number input component is valid and the icon ind
158. the System USB slave port can t be used for Since settings of the NB unit and Setting Mode Unchecked printing because it is in download the project are not set in printing mode mode printing is not available In conclusion the printing is available only after the printing function in NB Designer and NB Unit are both enabled uonjouny Huyjuid BuisnN 104 poya Guiza Z Z 7 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 7 5 7 PictBridge Printing 7 3 Components Related to Printing and Setup Descriptions Related Components List Component name Function Trigger address Print contents PLC Control Screen Hard Copy Bit Prints the current screen 7 3 1 PLC Control Screen Hard Copy Screen Hard Copy is to control the printout of the current screen allocated to the bit address of PLC control When the address of the specified memory is turned from OFF to ON the current screen contents will be printed out The print content output mode setting Method 1 Check Custom Print Options g PT Executing PLC Control HMIO X Hi HMIO FLENo 0 Area Variable LB Address 0 Dats Format BIN _ Format Range DDDD 0 3999 WordLength 1 Use Variable Marco Macro macro_O c Execution ON lt gt OFF Sound i Select Sound Play Sound Stop Play V Custom Print Options Black and White Reverse Color Mode C Black and White Color Magnification 2 0 y P
159. the Vector Graphics contained in the current project will be listed in the selection box of Vector Graphics and all the states of the selected graphics will be displayed in the Graphics of Each State selection box as shown below Basic Property Bit Switch Label Graphics Control Setting Display Setting V VectorGraphics CTRL_BAR001 vg BlueFrame vg Button1 93 vg Button3 50 vg CLOSE001 vg CONFIRM vg Se TF LL CTRL H CTRL_BAR Dashedvg DISP_BARO DISP_BARO T Bitmap 7 Use Original Size Save to System Graphics Library Graphics for Each State Basic Property Bit Switch Label Graphics Control Setting Display Setting Vector Graphics CTRL_BAROOS vg METER_01 bg _01bg Use Original Size Save to System Graphics Library Graphics for Each State m E 3 370 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer If new graphics needs to be added click Import Graphics Role of Save to System Graphics Library is to save the current graphics to the software for the convenient call during the creation of other projects There are 2 methods for Save to System Graphics Library 1 Enter the Graphics tab and click Save to System Graphics Library Basic Property Bit Switch Label Graphics Control Setting Display Setting Vector Graphics CTRL_BAROOS vg SUOI JDUN
160. the event is triggered Extended Time Format D H M The time format is displayed as Day Hour Minute Short Time Format H M The time format is displayed as Hour Minute NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer Standard Time Format H M S The time format is displayed as Hour Minute Second Precise Time Format H M S MS The time format is displayed as Hour Minute Second Millisecond Extended Date Format Y M D The date is displayed as Year Month Day Date of Occur M D The date is displayed as Month Day Time ascending Order Display Checking this option means the event time ascends from the front to back with the latest event information at the end as shown below 2010 12 07 16 46 12 Event 2010 12 07 16 46 13 Eventi Not checking this option means the event time descends from the front to back with the latest event information at the front as shown below 2010 12 07 16 50 19 Eventi 2010 12 07 16 50 18 Ewent2 3 k Note 1 The Event Display only displays the occurring event and dose not support Sequence No Time of Can cel and Check Time r TI c 5 ot O 5 aa D a 2 Once the triggered event information is unmatched the unmatched event will not be displayed in the Event Display anymore The effect of offline test is as shown below 5 2010 12 87 16 55 23 4 2010 12 07 16 55 21 3 2010 12 87 16 55 18 2 2018 12
161. the external memory can be searched by address of the word memory specified in Data History Query setting The Word Length of the specified memory address is 2 by default Query by File With the Query by File Name being checked it means to call out the Name data history sampled today or in the latest day when the value of specified memory is 0 while the data history sampled in the last time when the value of specified memory is 1 and so on Query by Date When Query by Date is checked the date will be input into the specified memory and the data history corresponding to the date will be called out The date format is yyyymmdd where yyyy mm and dd refer to year month and date respectively Indirect Reference When Indirect Reference is used the sampling time will be read from the specified of Sampling Cycle memory Note When the variable is specified in the sampling cycle if the value cannot be obtained within the regulated time the value which was obtained previously will be used NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Switch to the Sampling Property tab and make the settings of Sampling Method 3 Functions of NB Designer Sampling Points and Pause Clear and etc Basic Property Sampling Method Periodic sampling Sampling Points 10 Channel Properties SaveDataHistory Title Bar Properties Display Setting Sampling property Display Propert
162. the icons here in the standard toolbar to the options in the menus are shown as below a e7 kil Ga ape New Project Z Display Component s Name Open Project Property Print Save Project 4 ah Paste UnDo Print Preview Delet Repeat oa ReDo New Project To create a new project Find Replace Open Project To open an existing project Save Project To save the current project Cut To perform cutting operation Copy To perform copy operation Paste To perform paste operation Repeat To perform Repeat operation Delete To delete the component Redo To restore the latest cancelled operation Undo To cancel the latest operation procedure Find Replace To search the memory addresses used in the current project screen or macro and perform the replacement Print Preview To preview the print effect The NB Series do not support this function currently Print To print The NB Series do not support this function currently Property To show the object Properties Display Component s Name To display hide the component s name About To describe the version information of NB Designer NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer Repeat With this function one component can become multiple components through the copy operation thus saving a lot of time You can make the multiple components available by clicking L icon or r
163. the maximum time allocating to the execution of a Macro The time multiplied with the value specified to the default value will be the maximum time read write 9470 File name of the screen shot The prefix text string of 16 words naming the screen shot which is stored in USB memory 9486 9501 User name Inputs the login user name of up to 32 characters read write 9502 9503 User password Inputs the password corresponding to the login user read write 9504 9505 Current user permission Displays 32 authorities corresponding to current login users read NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer Adresses Comments 9506 9507 Authority setting Double words and 32 authorities assignments LW9506 to LW9507 corresponds to 32 authorities No 0 to No 31 and LW B corresponds to each bit in LW9506 to LW9507 For example LW B 9506 0 represents the authority of No 0 and LW B 9506 A represents the authority of No 10 write 9508 9509 Automatic Logout Time setting Sets the unit of automatic logout time to minute during the addition of user information write 9510 9511 Password Confirm Inputs the password again for consistency confirmation during the addition of user information write 9520 9521 Refers to the curser position X Y in input component read 9535 The multiplication factor of the If it is specified to N the maximum communication communi
164. the opposite Scaling direction When the value of position coordinate increases the component moves leftward When it decreases the component move rightward Y Reverse This option functions are similar with Y Scaling but the component moves toward the opposite Scaling direction When the value of position coordinate increases the component moves upward When it decreases the component move downward JUSUOdWOY ulnon 9 9 X Scaling Y The Moving Component moves horizontally along X axis and Y axis and the relative position can Scaling be set through the input value and the proportion value For example set the parameters as below When the stored PLC address specified to X axis ranges from 0 to 640 but should set the value to be moved relatively in the range from 0 to 320 and the stored PLC address specified to Y axis ranged from 0 to 480 but should set the value to be moved relatively in the range from 0 to 240 loving component property Basic Property Moving Component Label Graphics Display Setting X Scaling Y Revere Scaling Indirect MaxMin Reference State No PLC FT HMIO No 0 7 Maximum of Pot COMI Minimum of X Change Station No 0 g SA ti ii i Mrea Variable LW Proportional Min of X Paiiress 1 Word Maximum of Y Data ENEG iengh E Use Variable oa i Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 Proportional Max of Y Proportional Min of Y X Scaling Y The Moving Component moves horizontal
165. the registered alarm information by Alarm or Alarm Display Alarm Alarm Setting To display the alarm information registered by Alarm Setting component Alarm Display Alarm Setting To display the alarm information registered by Alarm Setting component Event Setting To display the registered event by Event component Event Event Setting To display the event registered by Event Setting component PLC Control PLC To make PLC program control the operations of the functions Most of the PLC part support bit or word addresses Double word operation can be performed by some components such as Number Input and Scroll Bar etc Due to some PLCs have double word addresses so some PLC drivers will make conversion between double word and word and the user must pay special attentions to the instructions of PLC driver 3 6 1 Bit Button ons Bit Button l l i i Bit Button component defines one touching area When this area is activated the bit address inside the PT or in the PLC can be switched to On or Off forcefully 3 80 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer Process of adding one Bit Button component 1 Drag the Bit Button component after it is pressed will make the Basic Properties of Bit Button component pop up Basic Property Bit Button Label Graphics Control Setting Displ
166. the specified bit address LBO is set OFF the changes in Data Log will be refreshed and displayed Pause stop temporarily the update of the graph so that the sampling is stopped temporarily cl Pause Clean ClearAddr PauseAddr 1 PT Hmo PE p No Area Vanable LB sf Address 0 Data Format BIN k Word Length 2 Use Variable Format Range DDDD 0 9999 The address can be the trigger for Clear is temporarily allocated address 1 If the parameters are specified as above the bit address LBO functions as Pause and the bit adress LB1 functions as Clear Setting in this way the displayed Data log screen can be cleared only the changes occurred in LB1 state The default value is 3 For example if the specified memory is LWO LWO LW1 and LW2 will be the current browsing index value the newest data on the index value is 0 and the value is greater the data is older the starting browsing index value and the maximum browsing index value of Scroll Bar respectively This option is valid only when Multiple pages is selected Scroll can be used to browse the multiple Data Logs and can be in combination with the Scroll Bar For the specific using method of Scroll Bar refer to 3 6 22 Scroll Bar Page 3 164 iv Scroll PT Hmo PLE g Na Area Varnable LV h Address 0 Data Format BIN T Word Length 3 Use Variable Format Range DODDD 0 10255 It is used to sav
167. to complete the setup of the Level Meter component e Level Meter Word WEDA Min Variable E Max Min Current nna Bar picture arm E word NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer Level Meter property Level Meter property x Basic Property Color Shape Scale Graphics Display Setting Basic Property Color Shape Scale Graphics Display Setting Bar Type Normal Display direction Bottomtotop BarShape Rectangle Bar Type Normal Display direction Bottomtotop BarShape Rectangle E Under Mini E Nomal Bm Over Max Bm Under Mini E Nomal Bm Over Max Target Value Target Value VV Frame icolor y Background Color 7 M Frame Wcoo V Background Color 7 Aash Over Max Alash Under Min Aash Over Max Flash Under Min Minimum 32768 Maximum 32768 Alam Under 1000 Alarm Over 10000 Indirect Max Min Reference Indirect Max Min Reference V Indirect Max Min Reference IV Indirect Max Min Reference PLC P PT HMO wy 0 PrT mo fe p PT HMO po 0 PT Hmo E o o PLC Connection Port COM1 PLC Connection Port COM1 PLC Connection Port COM1 PLC Connection Port COM1 o Change Station No 0 Change Station No 0 Change Station No 0 Change Station No 0 5 a Area Varable LW Area Variable LW Area Varable LW Area Varable LW an Address 3 Address 1 Address 2 Address 0 Data Format BIN Words 2 DataFormat BIN Words
168. to turn the screen reversely to obtain the same display effect as viewed from the front T amp U m gt x lt mp i J Q 99 U O O 49 D n There are 2 methods for Flip Screen Display Method 1 Enter PT Extended Properties tab in PT Property check Flip Screen Display and the display is reversed after it is downloaded to the screen And the screen will keep as Flipped Display after the power failure or restart of the screen Perform the offline test and the effect is as shown below a Screen flip display Control bit LB9163 Screen flip disple Method 2 The flipping of the screen is controlled by the local special memory LB9163 LB9163 is read write type When LB9613 is turned ON the screen is displayed vertically flipped When the flipped screen display function is controlled by LB9163 the flipping function can t be maintained after the power failure or restart of the screen Example Place a Bit Switch with the address of LB9163 and Property of Alternate in the screen NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 293 3 Functions of NB Designer fl Toe oe oe oe oe CICA A A CA AA Aa aA L Screen flip display Control bit LB9163 Normal dise lay When LB9163 is ON the display is flipped while LB9163 is OFF the screen is displayed in the normal direction Perform the offline test and the effect is as shown below Screen flip display
169. value will be updated to the result of the execution of the Macro after the Macro completed 3 The read variable is read only and the write value is write only Therefore writing the value to the read vari able or reading the writing variable by using the Macro are not impossible Similarly when one address is used for reading and writing at the same time use two different names by contrast for the variables such as LWO_R and LWO_W for LWO 4 The global variables or the static variables are not available in the Macro If the data should be retained using the global variables use the PT internal memories such as LW or LB 5 The values which output the result of the Macro should be prepared The description of the other functions are provided as follows a Modify or delete the variable in Macro Open the Project File Window and double click the Macro file corresponded to open the Macro Variables Table dialog box Right click the variable to select Delete variable or Modify Variable T 7 N lt seb O O jab Qa N O oO O h O je O o gt O O oO o n O mr J oO Q mr OD S jab ej OD n Mice Vinain T Horg be lie PLC h Sua Right click the variable to select Delete variable or Modify Variable Please be careful because the deleted variables can t be restored b Delete the whole Macro file Open the Project File Window press Delete key
170. will display the data in the address of RW300 as shown below ezed adicay ZL E 3 Input QWERTYUIOP to 4X200 and 300 to LW9000 then you will find the data displayed by RWIO RW300 and 4X200 is the same after the Upload button is pressed as shown below which means the upload is successful Jowan adiDay Z Z How to download the 5 words with the start address of RW300 to the position with the start address of 4X200 The specific operation process is described as follows Add one recipe data transmission component in the project just mentioned above with the Area Variable of 4X Address of 200 Function of Download from Recipe to PLC Word Length of 5 and Label of Download NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 333 3 Functions of NB Designer Perform the offline test change LW9000 to 300 and input 123456 to RWIO as shown below Press the Download button then you will find the text data will be transferred to 4X200 from RW300 Whether we upload the data from PLC to recipe or download the data from recipe to PLC the start address of data in recipe is always the value corresponding to LW9000 3 334 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 12 3 Upload Download of Recipe Data between PT and PLC The recipe data is significantly useful For example the production device can operate differently acco
171. words After the Save Compile and Offline test operations are performed the effect is shown as the lower left graphics Pressing Change screen button is invalid for the current level is 0 and when the password of 1111 is input the current security level becomes 1 as shown below NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 343 p W wn D O c 3 rr lt ad lt 2 3 Functions of NB Designer Now the current security level has become 1 the screen will switch to Frame 10 successfully when the Change screen button is pressed as shown below When the current security level is High how to switch to Low level LW9043 reserved by the system is used to perform the switching from the higher level to lower level And the switching from lower level to higher level is impossible Place one Number Input component in Frame 0 as shown below Basic Property Numeric Data Font Keyboard Setting Graphics Control Setting Display Setting Priority Normal V Make Read Address and Write Address the Same Read Address Write Address PT HMIO ag 0 eT HMIO iog 0 Port COM1 Port COM1 Change 0 2 Change 0 7 Station No Station No Area Variable LW9043 Force to switcl Area Variable 4X X Address 9043 Iv System Memory Address 0 System Memory Data Word a Fa BIN 2 Format Range DDDDD 1 65535 Use Variable M Use Variable Use inde
172. written to the system EE Setting LB9050 to ON will make the specific system parameter back to the factory settings NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 321 3 Functions of NB Designer About Keyboard Display Bits NB Unit divides the whole screen into 4 areas with the same size from the center as shown below upper left upper upper right LB9062 LB9080 LB9066 LB9060 LB9068 LB9065 lower left lower lower right LB9063 LB9081 LB9067 Task Bar For each area there is are one or more address bit s corresponding to it When the Text Input or Number Input in the screen is triggered the corresponding address bit s will be turned ON For example When the Text Input or Number input in the left side of the screen is triggered a keyboard will pop up in the position where the specified Direct Screen locates and at the same time LB9060 LB9061 LB9068 and LB9069 will be turned ON by the system If the component is in the upper left side LB9062 and LB9080 will also be turned ON Note LB9060 and LB9061 have the same display function i e to turn ON or OFF simultaneously and it is the same with LB9064 and LB9065 LB9068 and LB9069 3 11 2 Local Word LW 3 322 Addresses Comments 9000 9001 Index address of recipe data RWI and RBI use this index address to access the recipe data with low byte address of 9000 and high byte address of 9001 read write 9002 9003 Ma
173. 0 00 ees 4 4 System Operation 0 0 cc ee 4 5 GEL VGISION 2 csctccebbeieuderes esticceseierascetess 4 6 Decompile Operation nananana nn eee 4 7 Pass Through Communication 000 eee aes NB Series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 4 Functions of NBManager 4 1 4 2 Introduction of NBManager NBManager is a tool managing the whole NB Designer software which includes 6 operates i e Download Operation Upload Operation System Operation Get Version Decompile Operation and Pass Through Communication Clicking Start All Programs OMRON NB Designer Tools NBManager will make NBManager dialog box pop up as shown below ES Download Operat Upload Operation System Operation Get Version Decompile Operation Pass Through Communication Communication Setting Communication Method Serial port IP NULL Pot NULL ce a Select Data LOGO Setting Download Project Files Show LOGO Hide LOGO Download LOGO Clear Data Download Recipe Clear Recipe Clear FAW Data Clear Data History Clear ER Data Clear Event History Download FA Data Recipe Editor lt BACK NEXT gt gt NB Series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 4 Functions of NBManager 4 2 Download Operation Download Operation is mainly used for the download from PC to PT The Communication Setting must be set before the download 4 2 1
174. 0 1 Read Write Yes 16 Prepare array variables in bit format allocated L W B 0 0 to 0 f and create a Macro which writes 1 to all the elements in the array Place 16 Bit Switches with the addresses of LW B 0 0 0 f as well as 1 binary Number Input component with the address of LWO m nine Ao nin 7 annn MO ann ae ir Po Perform the offline test f After Macro is clicked the display will be shown as below 1111111111111111 3 274 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer 6 Supports Direct Drawing in the Screen Description of PT Drawing Function The Macro executing function allows the user to call drawing function Drawing functions adopt rectangular coordinate system of screen point of origin locates in the upper left corner and the X axis extends rightward while the Y axis extends downward 1 Definition of Struct Add 3 structs PenParam BrushParam and Point a Pen structure PenParam typedef struct penparam 3 7 short type 2 short width S int color PenParam PenParam is mainly used to set the type width and the color Properties of the pen And the value range is as follows Parameter Name Value Descriptions Type Pen type PS NULL No pen PS_SOLID Smooth line _________ PS_DASH Dash line PS_DOT bled store PS_DASHDOT Dash dotted line PS_DASHDOTDOT Dot dotted line
175. 06 3 191 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 192 Descriptions of Display Properties Channel Refers to the channel number of the memory to be sampled and the channel is up to 16 Sequence number Determines whether to display the No of the sampling data information Ascending When this option is checked the sampling data information will be displayed in the ascending order i e the latest sampling data will be displayed on the bottom Date Time Display Date Checking in the checkbox allows the sampling date displayed in the selected date format The 3 formats are available and YY MM and DD refer to the year month and date respectively Date Separator Selects the data separator with 3 formats available For example 11 06 24 Time Checking it means the sampling time will be displayed and the time format can be selected There are 3 formats available and HH MM SS and MS refer to the hour minute second and millisecond respectively Color Setting Sets the Background Color and Title Bar Color for the table respectively Frame Setting Sets the Frame Color and Width for the table Border Setting Set the color types and width of Border row spacing and column spacing with the unit of pixel point Checking in Horizontal Line check box means the border will be displayed horizontally and checking Vertical Line means the border will be displayed vertically Data History Query The historical sampled data stored in
176. 1 Port COM1 an Change a Change 7 Station No 0 I Station No 9 Area Variable LW Area Variable LW Address 0 I System Memory Address 0 System Memory Data en Wod 4 gy Word T Format Length Format Length Q Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 NY w Use Variable I Use Variable I Use index I Use index IL n 5 lt 2 Switch to the Display Properties tab and make the settings of display format and color etc a Save Data History Title BarProperties Display Setting Display Properties Sampling property Time pa e TE Ascending m Date Time Display MV Date DD MM YY DateSeparator JV Time HH MM x Color Setting Frame Setting Background Color Frame Color Width 3 f8 Border Setting HN Border Color Sye r wih I Horizontal Line JV Vertical Line Row 10 Column 20 H dv Data History Query Indirect Reference of Sampling Cycle PLC PLC PT HMIO No 0 PT HMIO No 0 Area Variable LW Area Variable LW Address 0 Address 0 Word _ Word E Data Fomat BIN Lenth 2 Data Format BIN 2 I Use Variable Use Variable Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 Query by File Name When PLC address is used and sampling cannot be camied out in specified time system will use Query by Date the previous sampled values NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V1
177. 1 to Frame 9 are all the default screens for the system and they are not allowed to be deleted uoi aj q UB8IDS G p 3 4 6 Components Related to Screen The function keys which are directly related to the screen operations include Change Screen Backward Change Common Screen Pop up Screen and Change Menu Screen Components which are directly related to the screen operations include Direct Screen and Indirect Screen For the contents of these components refer to 3 6 16 Indirect Screen Page 3 143 and 3 6 17 Direct Screen Page 3 146 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 53 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 5 Basic Design Method 3 5 1 Designing Components Generally speaking one screen includes various kinds of components such as switches lamps number input and shapes It is simple to add one component to the screen and it is basically divided into 3 procedures as shown below Component Addition 1 Drag the component icon from Project Library Window Parts to the Edit Window 2 When the Property dialog box of this component appears set the various Properties for this component such as PLC Read Write Address Vector Graphics or Bitmap Label and Position etc Parts ge Bit Button Bit Lamp a Bit Switch im Direct Screen 3 iCommand Button J Word Lamp ii Word Switch 9 Scroll Bar se Moving Component sc Animation of Alarm 4 Data Log 27 KY Graph lil Level Meter 4 Analog
178. 10 ON Where the 1st event is the pop up screen 4 and the 2nd event is the pop up screen 5 3 Add one Indirect Screen in screen 0 of the newly created project and its Read address of LW5 4 Add one Event component in screen 0 as shown below Basic Property Event Setting Display Setting Basic Property Event Setting Display Setting Priori iia Display Range 0 To 255 X Row 5 Display Read Address Write Address Column 1 Z Sequence number Check M Time of Occur PT mo FLC ge PT Hmo NC g asa Time of Cancel i C Checked Time a aaah ao Ty Gheckeg E tended Time Format Change Change Short Time Format H M a Station No 0 id Station No 0 i C Short Time Format H M Area Variable LW C Precise Time Format H M S MS 4 Area Vanable LW z E Emaii E C Extended Date Format Y M D Address 10 System Memory Address 0 System Memory Date or Occur M D C Time ascending Order Display Data Word r Data Word A C Show only ongoing events T BIN i 1 a BIN i 1 Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 I Use Variable Use Variable Use index I Use index Place one Vector Graphics under the Event component to enhance the display effect 3 170 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer 5 Add one Bit Switch to control the ON OFF state of LB10 6 Add one Text component with the con
179. 154 Inserting and Ejecting USB memory When USB memory is inserted it will turn ON and it should be turned OFF before removal to ensure the safe removal of USB memory read write 9161 Align left display on keyboard When this bit is set to ON the display component LW9060 on the keyboard will be displayed in left aligned way during the input read write 9162 Vector font optimized display When this bit is set to ON the vector font edge display effect will be optimized read write 9163 Screen display state When this bit is set to ON the screen will be displayed vertically reversed read write 9165 User login When this bit is set to ON the user login operation is performed and later the bit will be set to OFF automatically write 9166 User logout When this bit is set to ON the user logoff operation will be performed and later the bit will be set to OFF automatically write 9167 Add user When this bit is set to ON the user addition operation will be performed and later the bit will be set to OFF automatically write 9168 Delete user When this bit is set to ON the user deletion operation will be performed and later the bit will be set to OFF automatically write 9251 Printing event manually not currently When it is set to ON forced printing of triggered events support up to now will be executed read write Setting LB9044 to ON will make the communication settings including IP address and port number
180. 16 bit signed n Desci NB Series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 4 7 4 Functions of NBManager 4 2 3 LOGO Setting It is used to set the display of LOGO screen at the PT startup Show LOGO The specific operation is as follows Select Show LOGO and click the Set button as shown below If the setting is successful Set Successfully dialog box will appear Once the setting is successful The transfered LOGO screen will be displayed at the next startup of PT m Communication Setting ES Download Operati Communication Method Serial port Upload Operation cm meen p NULL Port NULL System Operation ee Get Version m Select Data LOGO Setting Decompile Operatior Download Project Files Show LOGO Hide LOGO Pass Through ere Communication Download LOGO r Clear Data Download Recipe Clear Recipe Clear FRW Data Dowriosd FR Lata l Clear Data History I Clear Event History Recipe Editor Clear ERW Data If the setting is failed please modify the Communication Setting again after the Error occurs dialog box pops up Hide LOGO The specific operations are as follows Select Hide LOGO and click the Set button as shown below If the setting is successful Set Successfully dialog box will appear Once the setting is suc 4 8 cessful LOGO screen will not appear during the startup of PT next time
181. 19430 OL lamp 01 bg lamp l bg METER M bg 3 Use Original Size Save to System Graphics Library Import Graphics Graphics for Each State 2 Enter the Graphics in Project File Window select the current graphics and right click the mouse to select Save to System Graphics Library oo DISP_BAROO2 vg Rename Macro Save to System Graphics Library Delete Use Original Size is intended for the user to conveniently make the graphics return to its Original size after it is Zoomed out or in NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 371 3 Functions of NB Designer 1 Support Graphics in GIF or PNG Format The graphics in gif or png format can be imported directly during the creation of new graphics Using the graphics in gif format can create the animation effect easily Using the graphics in png format can create the transparent effect easily For example if the Level Meter is added into the reaction vessel to show the current liquid level then one reaction vessel in png format is needed For example Use one graphics in gif format with the effect like E 1 Click Draw menu to select Add Graphics and set the Name to next Type to Vector Graphics and other options to the defaults New Graphics Type Bitmap width 100 C Vector Graphics Height 100 File Name C Program Files OMAONSNE Designersproject gt cal Descript
182. 2 formats available where HH MM and SS refer to the hour minute and second respectively 12 hour The time will be displayed in 12 hour format after this option is System AM PM checked For example 3 PM will be displayed as 3 00 PM or 15 00 when this option is checked or not checked respectively The Date Time component can only read the time of the internal RTC of the PT but not modify the time If the time of the internal RTC of the PT needs to be modified you can calibrate the system time by using the system setup screen of the PT or modifying the values of system special memories LW10000 to LW10006 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 7 11 Indirect Shape shape The Indirect Shape component can modify the positions and sizes of the rectangle ellipse or line by changing the value of the memory Indirect Shape Properties 1 Indirect Shape tab Sued uonouny J E E Indirect Shape Fosition Display Setting Type Shape Rectangle K Rectangle Ellipse Line 3 Frame Line Color Line Width Line Sle r Fil edeus yoosipu L Z E Pattem Color g Venn I Gradation Type Sets the shape type from the available types of the Rectangle Ellipse and Line Frame Line Sets the Line Color Line Width and Line Style for the rectangle and ellipse and line Fill Sets the fill color and the fill style fo
183. 2 j Data Format BIN Words 2 Data Foma BIN Words 2 gt Use Variable Use Variable Use Variable Use Variable Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 Min Value LW 2 Lower Value LW 0 Max Value LW 3 Upper Value LW 1 vid P D E iq lt 2 z iQ mpe 0 s Max Min W Welatcle isam 39009 zooo EDA Min Oha 20000 Bar picture Alarm word E NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 135 3 Functions of NB Designer e Level Meter Double word Max AEEA Variable g Max Min Min EEU Current Gi Level Meter property Bar Type Normal v Mem Under Min E Normal Target Value M Frame fl Color Background Basic Property Color Shape Scale Graphics Display Setting Display direction Bottom totop v z Bsn Over Max Color xy Level Meter property Basic Property Color Shape Scale Graphics Display Setting Bar Shape Rectangle Bar Type Normal Display direction Bottomtotop BarShape Rectangle Blam Under mn E Normal Bam Over Max Target Value WM Frame P Color Background Color Fash Over Max Fash Under Min Fash Over Max Alash Under Min Minimum 2147483 Maximum 2147483 Alarm Under 1000 Aam Over 100000 V Indirect Max Min Reference V Indirect Max Min Reference PT HMO po 0 PT HMO o PLC Connection Port
184. 23 123 1 oo c Single byte character may be treated as double byte character ASCII code is treated as a single byte character but the other character are converted to double byte character in the software Therefore a character varies in its width for each character Such as Russian cannot be displayed correctly KOXNGe OP TGate Therefore this method has the obvious disadvantages for the project with multiple languages Graphic Font Graphic font is converted to one bitmap and stored in the project This method can make full use of the fonts installed in Windows and the display effect is good a The capacity of the project becomes greater There are 2 reasons for the large space needed for saving the character string as bitmap First bitmap format itself needs a large space For example Four characters 242A 4 displayed in Zero SimSun needs 1824 bytes as shown below ZH AS AKT In addition the bitmap font should be intercepted again if the content size or colors vary slightly thus causing a linear increase in the occupied space When a character is converted as a bitmap it is converted as the unit of character string not the unit of the character Even if a similar character is different with its content font size color the character is converted as an individual bitmap As the converted bitmaps are stored in the NB project file for each character string with different properties as above the capacity occupied w
185. 35 ag Signed int Signed integer variable with a range of 2147483648 to 2147483647 z Unsigned int 2word 32bits Unsigned integer variable with a range of 0 to 4294967295 a Float 2word 32bits Single precision floating point variable with a range of 3 3 4E 38 to 3 4E38 o Double 4word 64bits Double precision floating point variable with a range of 1 79E 308 to 1 79E 308 Create a Macro program with basic arithmetical function in the following figure Read 2 signed data from LWO and LW1 make LWO divided by LW1 then place the result of the division in the 4 words from LW2 to LW5 Press the Add Macro icon in the database toolbar or click Macro in the Option menu then the following dialog box will pop up Option Project Path AIt F8 Compress graphic AIK F Communication Setting Import Recipe Text Library Hi Variable Table dd Sound Library y P O pmj D D r D v i 3 D lt D Q G an T 3 a ns g 3 let Cancel Change System Language Select the PT No and input the file name then click OK to enter the Macro Editing Window i e macro_0 c as shown below 5 Read Write Local address function a Project File Window x 6 int ReadLocal const char type int addr int nRegs void buf int flag eC test 7 int WriteLocal const char type int addr int nRegs void buf int flag i 8 O PT 9 Parameter ty
186. 4 soo 2121 BLOX S 4 2 8 Geen ean eee en eee eee eee ee eee ee 3 45 3 4 1 Sor Wy OS occ cdg oe seed E EE syeeeeere rane aduteniessecdssuceacacssceesaue E eer 3 45 3 4 2 CIO OIE FOC BY zien saccade EAA EAEAN eieectetce 3 48 3 4 3 Screen Creaton sesura E ee ee eee a 3 52 3 4 4 BOS SUNN eea aR E E E EAEE 3 52 3 4 5 ole 215 am B15 e E A ET E ARAE E E ET E EN 3 53 3 4 6 Components Related to SCree n cccccccccsseccceeseecescecseeceeseeeeceueesseueeesausessueeessuaeessueeeseasessages 3 53 Basit Design M thod cocirier raa aS 3 54 3 5 1 Designing C ONNDONMIGINS sse5s ceca shed erscccseecesceacctcetensdcennedeecsse2idesnsecbadacesdocuecinceceetoicjoreeebnedies ariran 3 54 3 5 2 ADOUCID NO ce occas Seem ecceceinas oars canaseuraecnnuussetinwna esse agen stuisosacenmoceiacheasianetccauuuhscaesmcesonceceeteueess 3 55 3 5 3 Additional Comments DE SCIIPTIONS ici cccccciectcccedecnncbsntensie sacceuedeseadecatatendeiedenseeededededeadelednnevies 3 56 3 5 4 Read Write Address for PLG ene remem eee ete tr a etd nee eee neon ee 3 57 3 5 5 E a EED S E nen EA etre eet ete A ste ee en eee EN E EE eee eee ee eee ee 3 58 3 5 6 BUD I eee e E neice reeceeediemtun seeicw usieteedeutioandtewsceaeantencpatrelseneaues E 3 63 3 5 7 Creating UA ie ceercnc eopdeve cet crsec eerste orceremtiiocedmecetlonmecse sexeaeistmanssenemiae seatnmeoesaen renee rains oiawentoeoneneceeaee 3 66 3 5 8 Task Bar and Operation Buttons osceriecchcnicuserniseanubeeuddetusideacaes
187. 42 tH Write Address PLC i ee PIC i Jala No 4 daai No Port COMI Port COMI Change Change E Station No 0 Station No o Area Variable LW Area Varable LV Address 0 System Memory Address D System Memory en pei Daa M Word Data Format Length Format i Length Fomat Range DDDDD 0 10255 Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 l Use Variable Use Variable Use index l Use index Read Write Addresses Refers to the specified word address read and written by the Number Input component Address Refers to the first address of the word address corresponding to the Number Input component Word Length Displays the data length of the address 3 114 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer 2 Go to the Numeric Data tab Basic Property Numeric Data Font Keyboard Setting Graphics Control Setting Display Setting Storage Format nsigned integer 7 Storage Format Unsigned integer Detalengh WORD Integer Unsigned integer Integer 4 Decimal 0 Hexadecimal sida s Max Min Value Max 9999 Min 0 sas color f Fash Indirect Max Min Reference PT HMIO PLC No 0 Pot COM1 M Use Variable w Under Min 7 Change Station No 0 X o Area Variable J Q LW ita Color T Aash a Address 0 Data Format BIN Word Length 2 Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 Proportional Conversion Min Value 0 Max V
188. 506 to LW 9507 corresponds to 32 authorities No 0 to 31 and LW B corresponds to each bit in LW 9506 to LW 9507 For example LW B 9506 0 represents the authority of No 0 and LW B 9506 A represents the authority of No 10 LW9508 LW9509 Logout time Double word Unit minute LW9510 LW9511 Add Delete user confirmed Double word password LB9167 Add the user permission After it is turned ON the operation is completed and later it is turned OFF automatically LB9168 Delete the user permission After it is turned ON the operation is completed and later it is turned OFF automatically LB9169 Modify the password After it is turned ON the current user password will be modified and later it is turned OFF automatically Setting Permission Control of Component Select the Conditional Enabling option in the Control Setting tab of Bit Button Component Property and check Use Permission Control as shown below l PrOpEILY A Basic Property Bit Button Label Graphics Control Setting Display Setting Touch Enabling Setting Secunty Setting Enable Input Show Unable o Input ON Delay X100ms Disable Input Auto show login screen Confirm Operation Operation Log Min Interval seconds Conditional Enabling ox ca Setting Use Permission Control for the component means only the user having this operation authority can operate the component restricted by t
189. 536 kinds of colors available l Color E Color Language English Ital Default Color Fall st ETTET Custom Color 3 5 8 Task Bar and Operation Buttons NB Designer provides a simple method i e the Task Bar to make the screen pop up or be minimized to change the display of the screen and fast switch the screen display etc Task Bar has 2 operation buttons one of which is used to control the Menu Screen and the other is used to control the Task Bar You can set the Properties such as the Task Bar whether to use the Menu Screen color and position and so on in the PT Property in the Configuration and Setup Window By default all the options in the Display Task Bar are checked System Information Setting Security Level Setting User Permission Setting Event History Setting Print Setting COM1 Setting COM2 Setting EtemalMemoy PT Task Bar PT Extended Property 7 __ Background Color v L Undefined Area Color I cPU Indicating Lamp Color L Alam Indicating Lamp M Menu Screen I Touch indicating Lamp Frame Color z l Only Display Menu Button E r Unable Arca xj Touch Area Color Button Position Align let Button Size Width 240 Position Alignlet Height 32 Menu Screen Button Task Bar Button Menu Task Bar a Eo coo E cow FontSize 24 FontSize 24 4 p 3 68 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3
190. 5H CS1G CPU42H 43H 44H 45H CS1W SCU21 V1 CS1H CS1H CPU63H 64H 65H 66H 67H CS1W SCB21 41 V1 CPU63H 64H 65H 66H 67H CJ1H CPU65H 66H 67H CJ1H CPU65H 66H 67H CJ2H CPUG4 65 66 67 68 EIP 0 1 Connect using conversion cables CPM2C CN111 type or CS1W CN114 118 type the RS 232C adaptor CPM1 CIFO1 type or the RS 422A adaptor CPM1 CIF11 type 2 The CQM1H CPU11 model does not have the RS 232C port built in the CPU therefore it requires a peripheral port to be connected to a PT through a conversion cable CS1W CN118 type SI PON JO 3SI7 V gt O NB Series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 A 3 Appendices Units at the host side which can be connected using the serial port of the NB Unit in the RS 422A mode through Host Link CPU Unit with built in Host Through Serial Communication Options required for PLC Series A i Link function units boards connection CP Series CP1L L14 L20 M30 M40 M60 CP1L L14 L20 M30 M40 M60 CP1W CIF11 CIF12 CP1H X40 XA40 Y 20 CP1H X40 XA40 Y 20 CP1W CIF11 CIF12 CP1E N30 N40 N60 NA20 CP1E N30 N40 N60 NA20 CP1W CIF11 CIF12 CP1L EL20 EM30 EM40 CP1W CIF11 CIF12 C200HE CPU32 42 C200HW COMO03 06 V 1 C200HE CPU32 42 Z C200HG CPU33 43 53 63 C200HW COM03 06 V11 C200HG CPU33 43 53 63 Z i C200HX CPU34 44 54 64 C200HW COM03 06 V11 CPM1 10 20CDR O CPM1 CIF11 C Series C200HX CPU34 44 54 64 65 85 Z CPM1A 10 20 30 40CDUI U CPM1 CIF 11 CP
191. 6 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 17 RecipeEditor Description of RecipeEditor Function RecipeEditor is an Editor attached in the NB Designer and it is mainly used for the user to check edit or create the recipe file conveniently and visually The supported formats currently are as follows files in rcp format uploaded from or downloaded to NBManager the specific files in csv format and the file of FRW memory in frp format TEJ Save As Savein Ji car sti f HMO Ji image m sound Ji tar B temp Ev T A D o 5 D m 2 The Recipe Editor supports the functions as below The following functions are supported currently 1 Display the data in recipe file 2 Modify the data in recipe file 3 Import the CSV file in specific format and export the recipe data as the CSV file in specific format Method of calling RecipeEditor 1 Click Recipe Editor in the Tools menu in NB Designer software Tools 4 Compile Ctrl F7 8 Recompile Do Clear Compiled Result cCtrHe CS Download Ctrl D GA Transmission Setting Alt F7 fia Offline Test F5 i Indirect Online Test Shift F5 fiz Direct Online Test Ctrl F5 System Manager PT Version Setting Upload Manager DownLoad Manager Upload Logo Screen Download Logo Screen Upload Ik Decompile NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 397 3 Functions of NB Designer 2 Click Recipe Editor in
192. 7 Unsigned short 1 word 16 bits Unsigned short integer variable with a range of 0 to 65535 Signed int Signed integer variable with a range of 2147483648 to 2147483647 Unsigned int 2 word 32 bits Unsigned integer variable with a range of 0 to 4294967295 Float 2 word 32 bits Single precision floating point variable with a range of 3 4E 38 to 3 4E38 Double 4 word 64 bits Double precision floating point variable with a range of 1 79E 308 to 1 79E 308 Read Write type of Macrocode Variable Read Write Type Descriptions Read The values of Macro are read before being executed and reading operation is not performed during Macrocode execution Write The values of Macro are written to the specified variable at one time after being executed and writing operation is not performed during Macrocode execution Read Write The values of Macro are read before being executed and written after being executed NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer Storage Format used in Macro Variable Data Type Descriptions Bool Bit variable with 2 statuses of 0 and 1 Signed char 1byte 8bit Signed short integer variable with a range of 128 to 127 Unsigned char Unsigned short integer variable with a range of 0 to 255 Signed short Signed short integer variable with a range of 32768 to 3276 7 Unsigned short Unsigned short integer variable with a range of 0 to 655
193. 87 16 55 16 Aeidsiq ua 4 Y Z 2010712707 16 55 21 Value lt 1 2616 12 87 16 55 18 4 Current trigger event is displayed in the Event Display Ei NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 233 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 8 Project Database 3 8 1 Text Library Text Library Text Library can be used to store the text contents needed by the project thus preventing the label with the same text from being input frequently In addition Text Library can be used to the conditions with the requirement of multi language support to realize the switching among the multiple languages for the PT Edit screen NB Designer currently supports up to 32 kinds of languages setting 1 Text Input 1 Pressing Ima icon or clicking Text Library in the Project Database of the Project Library allows the Text Library to pop up Language4 Languaae Add Delete J Delete All Language Import Espot OK 2 When the following Add Text dialog box appears after Add being clicked fill in the Title State No and click OK to proceed to the next step Title me Note Once the text title is registered it cannot be modified in the Text Library dialog box 3 234 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 The text added just now has been in the Text Library already and click the
194. Address 9 Data Foma py D Use Variable Word Length 9 Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 e When the Data History component and the Data Log component are used in combination and their addresses are the same it just needs to set Save to Recipe Data Field for either of them 3 194 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer e Ifthe Data History component is needed to display the value of the Data Log the value in PLC can be transmitted to the LW of the local memory by the Timer or the Data Transmission com ponent e If the user needs to save the data for a long period and has low requirement of the interval for the data saving it is recommended the sampling time will be as long as possible 6 Switch to the Title Bar Properties tab and make settings of Title and column font etc Sed 9 3 AJOSIH 8ed 6Z 9 r4 Press the OK button to complete the setup of the Data History component NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 195 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 Function Parts 3 7 1 Scale Scale t is applicable to the conditions with the requirement of equal division notation Process of adding one Scale component 1 Press the Scale component icon drag it to the screen then the Scale Property dialog box will pop up Scale Display Setting Type Arc X Type Includes Vertical Horizonta
195. Address the Same r Read Address Write Address ae z A PC j m PT HMIO i 0 PT HMIO No 0 Port COM1 Port COM1 Fama ae 7 M Station No Index0 LW3416 K v Station No 1 A Area Variable LW Address 0 Address 10 System Memory Data Data Word ae BIN BIN 1 Format Range DDD Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 Use Variable Use Variable Use index Use index 7 PT Mask and PLC Station No Mask PT Mask function LW9400 to LW9415 totaling 256 bits correspond to PT Station No 0 to 255 When these bits are set to ON the access to the corresponding PT numbers will be masked PLC Station No Mask Function 9264 9279 Mask code of PLC Each bit corresponds to one Station No of COM 2 i e 9264 0 Station No COM 2 corresponds to Station No 0 and 9279 F corresponds to Station No 255 When the bit is turned ON the communication corresponding to Station No will be masked read write 3 394 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer Taking an example the case using masking function for HMIO the corresponding of LW memory and masking object is displayed as below The address after LW9000 doesn t support the access over different PTs i e the address after LW9000 corresponding to each PT is only valid for itself and invalid for the other PT r PN HMO gt HMII HMI2 HMI255 see see Self communication Koo LW B
196. Area Timer Release Forced Status Area Holding Release Forced Status Area Work Release Forced Status Area CIO Release Forced Status Area Holding Set Reset Forced Release Area Holding Forced Set Reset Area Work Set Reset Forced Release Area Work Forced Set Reset Area DDDD D_bit 00000 00 32767 15 EO_bit 0 00 32767 15 C_FLAG 0000 4095 DDDDD DD DDDDD DD E18_bit 0 00 32767 15 C_RELEASE_STATUS 0000 4095 T_RELEASE_STATUS 0000 4095 H_RELEASE_STATUS 0 00 511 15 W_RELEASE_STATUS 0 00 511 15 DDDD DDDD DDD DD DDD DD DDDD DD DDD DD ClIO_RELEASE_STATUS 0 00 6143 15 H_FORCED_RELEASE 0 00 511 15 H_FORCED 0 00 511 15 W_FORCED_RELEASE 0 00 511 15 W_FORCED 0 00 511 15 DDD DD DDD DD DDD DD NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 Appendices Format Device Bit Address Word Address CIO Set Reset Forced ClO FORCED RELEASE DDDD DD Release Area 0000 00 6143 15 CIO Forced Set Reset ClO FORCED DDDD DD Area 0000 00 6143 15 Task Flag Area Counter Set Reset Forced Release Area Counter Forced C_FORCED DDDD Set Reset Area 0000 4095 Timer Set Reset T_FORCED_RELASE DDDD Forced Release Area 0000 4095 Timer Forced T_FORCED DDDD Set Reset Area 0000 4095 Extension Data EO 0 32767 DDDDD Memory n E0 E18 E18 0 32767 s CIO Area CIO 0000 6143 DDDD A Auxiliary Area A 000 11535 DDDDD Holding Area SS H 000 1535 DDDD D Tim
197. Back button in the Basic window 0 allows the screen returned to Basic window 4 12 When Pop up Screen is pressed in Basic window 0 Pop up window 7 will pop up as the upper right graphics shown 3 200 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer 13 Pressing Fast selection window 5 in Menu Screen will make the screen switch to Fast selection window 5 as shown below Menu Task Bar Menu Task Bar Menu Task Bar 2 Keyboard Function Enter Back Space Clear Escape Unicode Cursor Select text Text operation Descriptions of keyboard function Equivalent to the function of Enter key in the keyboard When entering numbers or Text strings in the component Number Input or the component Text Input by Function Keys remove one character which is placed immediately before the input cursor Clears the contents input to Number Input and Text Input components Cancels the input operation equivalent to the function of Esc key in the keyboard Sets the input characters including 0 1 2 on the number keys ASCII codes like a b c etc or Unicode characters for Number Input and Text Input components Includes Up Down Left Right Line head Line tail First position and Last position Includes Start selecting and Finish selecting Includes Copy
198. But if use the dry soft cloth to clean forcefully when it is too dirty the front panel may be damaged In this case use the wet cloth to clean it in advance e When the dirt cannot be cleaned by dry cleaning please dip the cloth into the diluted neutral washing agents concentration of 2 completely first and then perform cleaning after the wet cloth is wringed out e Waste ethylene products or tape sticking to the Unit for a long period will generate dirt If there is dirt sticking to the Unit please remove it during the cleaning Precautions for Safe Use Do not use benzene paint thinner or other volatile solvents and do not use chemically treated cloths Checking method Please perform checking once every 6 months to 1 year But the frequent checking should be necessary when the Unit is used in the extreme environments such as the environment with high temperature high humidity or more dust etc Checking items Please check the following items for the criterion If the item doesn t conform to the criterion please improve the surrounding environment retighten the screw etc to make it conform to the criterion Checking Items Checking Contents Checking Method Supply voltage Voltage fluctuation at Allowable voltage Multimeter power terminal fluctuation range DC24V 15 to 15 Surrounding environment Ambient temperature Thermometer state temperature inside operation panel Ambient humidity 10 90 RH witho
199. Check the Enabled tab and set the User Name to Engineer Password to 222222 and Logoff Time to 10 minutes Assign 1 Authority i e Process Permission to the Engineer User 1 Besides the User Permission Setting in PT Property using the following internal memory allows the operations concerning the user permission Addresses LW9486 LW9501 Input the login user name 32 characters max LW9502 LW9503 Input the password corresponding Double word to the login user LW9504 LW9505 Display the current user authority Double word read only component the corresponding 32 authorities LB9165 Execute the user login After it is turned ON the login operation is performed and later it is turned OFF automatically LB9166 Execute the user logout After it is turned ON the logout operation is performed and later it is turned OFF automatically 2 Dynamically Add Delete User Permission during operations Descriptions Perform adding or deleting the user permission during operations in the PT The following internal memory is used for adding or deleting the user permission during operations NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 301 3 Functions of NB Designer LW9486 LW9501 Input the login user name 32 characters max LW9502 LW9503 Input the password Double word corresponding to the login user LW9506 LW9507 Assign the user authority Double word Read Write component 32 authority assignments LW 9
200. Clear FRW Data Clears the data in the FRW 9 Download to USB1 Download the project file to the external memory inserted to NB unit USB1 For the details of download to USB1 refer to 6 1 5 Download to USB1 Page 6 5 You can also select whether to clear the recipe data FRW data ERW data data history or event history by using the Download Operate in NBManager Communication Setting ES Download Operati Communication Method Peral part Upload Operation LS System Operation COM Get Version Decompile Operation Download Project Files Show LOGO LOGO Setting Hide LOGO ss E Pass Through a nalii Download LOGO Clear Data Download Recipe Clear Recipe Clear FR W Data Clear Data History Clear ERM Data Clear Event History Download FR Data Recipe Editor lt BACK NEXT gt gt 3 354 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 16 Other Functions 1 Editing component function For the Copy and Paste operations if a component is copied in the same screen the copied component will be placed in the position deviated 10 pixel away the original position If the component is copied in different screen the copied component will be placed in the position of the original position If multiple components are operated by the functions such as Arrange Width Arrange Height and Arrange Size the specific operation proce
201. Color E Pattem Color 7 Width 800 Height 480 Transparency 0 z 3 Perform the offline test or download it to the screen to check the password level function 3 10 6 User Permission Setting The software opens 32 users and 32 operation permissions for free use The users and operation permission can be set separately and the operation permission is not limited to the users And the online user addition deletion and permission modification can be done in the PT 1 User Permission Setting Check the Enabled option and input the contents to the User Name Password Logoff Time and Authorization User Name Refers to the login name and the defaults are usrO to usr31 The user name supports any characters Password Refers to the login password and the default is 888888 The password only supports the number instead of the other characters The password ranges from 1 to 4294967295 And 0 can t be used for setting password Logout Time Refers to the valid time for this user permission and the default is 10 minutes After 10 minutes this user permission will be automatically cancelled and the operation permission can be obtained by inputting the password again The logoff time ranges from 0 to 4294967295 minutes When the Logout Time is specified to 0 minute the user permission is always valid 3 300 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer For example 1 For the User P
202. Communication Setting The setting of Communication Setting is the same with the settings of project options in the edit window For details refer to 3 15 Download Page 3 349 Communication Setting e The Communications Type with Serial Port Click the Set button and select Serial Port and the Serial Port of your PC from Serial No in the popup Communication Setting dialog box then click the OK button T N O fe oO D 2 O D D ct fe Cormmanication Setting Communication Method Serial port Upload Operation sin a IP NU Port NULL J System Operation z si Port Mo uias uonedUNWWWOD Z 7 gt Corimunication Method m Corarmunication Setting Ethemet Serial Port O USB Part IP Address We Poort Port Na Recipe Editor NB Series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 4 3 4 Functions of NBManager e The Communications Type with USB USB Port is the system default type If you use the USB to perform the download it doesn t need to make settings again r Communication Setting Communication Method USB port jp L o Pog NU 2c Communication Method i IP Address we p or 2D Serial Port Fort 21845 USB Pot Hi ia COMI e The Communications Type with Ethernet When using NBLILI TWO01B you can select the download via network interface For details refer to 6 1 6 NBManag
203. Control Setting tab and make the Security Setting and set the Triggering action Press the OK button to complete the setup of the Text Input component The storage method of the text input is explained as below 1 Select Left in Alignment of Font Property When the character A is input 4 Highest Word Lowest Word Word 0 Werder A E G S G E Hih bye When characters AB are input AB Highest Word Lowest Word Word 0 werd Wert OOO T T T T e 3 125 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer When characters ABC are input ABE Highest Word Wom2 Womit LowestWord Word 0 OO T T e e 2 Select Right in Alignment of Font Property When the character A is input A Highest Word Wom Woni LowestWord Word 0 Figh byt Low byt Highest Word werd Wort High byt At When characters ABC are input HAE Highest Word Wom Wont LowestWord Word 0 High byt E fe ee ee E 3 126 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 6 13 Text Display iL Text Displa The Text Display component can display data in the specified word memory which is analyzed through the standard ASCII character table in default settings Low byte character codes are displayed on the left while high byte character codes are displayed on the righ
204. Download Operate tab of NBManager screen Communication Setting ES Download Operat l Communication Method Serial pot CF Upload Operation ii NULL Pot NULL a COM1 Sat a A System Operation Select Data LOGO Setting ae Get Version ib Decompile Operatior Download Project Files Show LOGO Hide LOGO Pass Through ere r ala Download LOGO Clear Data Download Recipe Clear Recipe Clear FAW Data Download FAW Data Clear Data History Clear ERW Data er Clear Event History Cres Introduction of RecipeEditor Screen The screen corresponding to the initial operation of program is as shown below Jig RecipeEditor File View FileMerge Help D Ske 7 Read Address Setting _ Start Address Number of records read Current record length ssesesesesssssrsssssssessssen Data format TestDataFormat Add data format Delete current data for Current data format details ID Length w Storage Format Description 0 16bitsignedn Desc Ready ee Nib et 3 398 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer e Toolbar and Menu Bar amp Click New then the initial screen will pop up as below x A D RecipeEditor NoName _ X 2 File View FileMerge Help m Oe ae eee Read Address Setting Start Address 3 Number of records read Current record length
205. ER Data C Clear FR w Data Download to o USB1 Exit After the download is completed Download succeed will be displayed Download Window Select PT PT Information Hbl E ein Download Project c program filestomroninb designerprojectcarcar pkg Communication Method Ethernet IP 192 168 2501 PORT 21845 Port NULL pps NULL NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 Select Data Project Data LI Recipe File O LOGO File O Clear Recipe Clear Evert O History 0O Clear Data History O Clear ERW Data O Clear FAW Data Download ta a USB Download 3 353 peojumog S 3 U9 U0D Hulpeojumog Jo uoneoyinoedsS G1 3 Functions of NB Designer Each function is described as follows 1 Data File It is used to download the current project 2 Recipe File It is used to download the rcp file in the project Firstly the rcp recipe file needs to be added to the project The NB Series does not support this function 3 LOGO File Download the graphics used for LOGO screen When the graphic is modified in LOGO Screen Edit you need to check in the LOGO file option to download the modified LOGO file to the PT Clear Recipe If this check box is checked the Recipe memory will be cleared to 0 Clear Event History Clears the saved events Clear Data History Clears the saved sampling data Clear ERW Data Clears the data in the ERW O NOQA
206. F O WRG orr AE S E E E E EE 3 197 3 7 3 Alam NS ONY pha2 tics aces tees sreccune gen acceeneesissesaieRtesuaton anne coseaagarssuiebtecisnagaboe ea rescuonanaercuteenesteasauneante 3 205 3 7 4 WEE ee eee eee ch eee eon ee ene ee ee ee eee eee ee eee eee ee eee 3 209 3 7 5 BUMIDA pec pee ype O avai de eee ance toec gece 2c Gancee E aeevaeceesa oosceteee 3 214 3 7 6 VOCO 15 2 Caan ene ene ere et oe eat ete a ee eR oe ee eee eee ee ee ere 3 215 3 7 7 NOED A ecenin E ES esuceeeansce EE N E E EA iE EE ESS 3 216 3 7 8 EVE TE ASIANS SOI EAE 3 219 3 7 9 Fro POA eis ce te ne ect E E E aesececen ceseeseeeiesectoeuorenaaesect 3 222 oo od 0 Dato 8B a gt eee ne eee ee ee eee eee Pe ae neces Sere ee Cerrar eee Tener eee 3 223 3 7 11 Indirect SINAD Cs sass cos cnccce sc ceucschccasiesceanaceasancepadecens ceededeczenendegadeeeadtensnanepacnie decode haceneievesieteenetece 3 225 3 12 MISS IMO MMA OI eceecteacscendes xe seasetaseaceacee sens AEE ETa iaa inea 3 229 SA NT O testcase cr sereete EE EE E EE EE 3 229 3 7 14 Event Display sirimiri nnsa ii rari Enkis rN EEEE Ee REENE Aa EAEN EE A EREE EN EEEE 3 232 36 Project Daa DI SE siuii r iiaa 3 234 3 8 1 EAR i E E E E A os ec N A E E E E smepnenetaeseeeeendenscncte 3 234 3 8 2 NPS TADIC sperra a S A EE 3 240 3 8 3 E EE UN cae ec AE E E ATE EIE E sence as E T T 3 243 3 8 4 EVENOU eea a E EE E r E E E 3 248 3 8 5 PEG FU ce E A E E AA 3 252 F9 Macro Func aseina aE EAE 3 260 3 9 1 Create a Simple Macro Prog
207. Fa BN pot n pi Font DFNB EN Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 Size 16 gt Post Left m 7 Use Variable Use Variable Col i Englsh USA T Use index I Use index I talic 7 Bold Copy Font Attribute To All Languages 3 180 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer N Place another Text Input component LW20 with the Word Length of 4 8 Create one Bit Button component with the Write Address of LB9100 in the Basic Properties tab Type in the Bit Button tab of Alternate Transport Font being checked together with the State 0 and State 1 of English and wz respectively Basic Property Bi Button Label Graphics Control Setting Display Setting we CO AY Basic Property Bit Button Label Graphics Control Setting Display Setting Priority Normal I Oo PT Hmio RC g PT mo Fe go y e Port COM1 Port COM1 mi Change z Change n E Station No 0 E Station No 0 Area Varable LB 7 Area Var able Anene Address 0 System Memory Address 9100 V System Memory 3 Dan BN Oy Mod 7 Om pay Wed j lt gt rie NO N Z O 0 W O O x Basic Property Bit Button Label Graphics Control Setting Display Setting T Tanat Font Te E V Auto Resize Language Lanquage1 X N ce Fo Label List 8 cpa a
208. Graphics Control Setting Display Setting Keyboard Setting Default Keyboard Other Input Methods Function Keys etc J Use Input Order Input Order 1 M Group 2 12 Import Export of Background Component The background component including Variable Table Text Library Alarm Setting Event Setting and PLC Control has the function of importing or exporting the file in csv format This function is convenient to edit the related contents through the csv directly Note Please pay attention to the following points when saving the file in CSV format after it is edited a When the csv file is saved in Excel click Save and select Yes as shown below Nicrosoft Office Excel E the workbook in this format To see what might be lost click Help NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 AlarmLib csy may contain features that are not compatible with Unicode Text Do you want to keep To keep this format which leaves out any incompatible features click Yes To preserve the features click No Then save a copy in the latest Excel format 3 365 p O O r gt D a c 3 O ct fe 5 D 3 Functions of NB Designer b After selecting File Exit in the menu a dialog box as follows will be displayed and select Yes Hicrosoft Office Excel c Unicode Text txt must be selected from Save as type File name
209. Graphics or bitmaps simultaneously is not supported and only one graphics in the same folder can be selected at a time before Import is clicked All the imported or created Vector Graphics or bitmaps by the user in the whole project will be displayed in the Vector Graphic in Project File Window to facilitate the user to view and use them Graphics Library System Graphics Library Type All images vg bg X C User Defined Library Path E D E Alarm1 O1 vg larm1 02 vg Graphics for Each State State Refresh Import Exit The vector graphics can be used as static images or the images representing the status of various components NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 59 3 Functions of NB Designer Procedure of Vector Graphics addition 1 Select Add Graphics in the Draw menu or click ba icon in the toolbar and then the following dialog box will appear Draw Line Arc Rect Round Rect PolyLine Polygon Name Middle State No 2 gt Type Bitmap width 100 Ellipse Sector Text Add Graphics Import Graphics Vector Graphics Height 100 File Name C Program Files OMRON NB Designersproject De IERE Fn Description OK Cancel Group components Load Graphic Transparent Color Multicolor Gray switch 2 Input the Name State No and Description for the Vector Graphics For examp
210. J Series CJ1G CPU42H 43H 44H 45H CJIW ETN21 a E E CJ1M CPU11 12 13 21 22 23 CJ1W ETN21 ee eee CJ1H CPU65H R 66H R 67H R CJIW ETN21 ee ea OJIWEIPZ CJ2M CPU31 32 33 34 35 CJ2M CPU11 12 13 14 15 CJIW ETN21 CJ1W EIP21 CJ2H CPUG4 65 66 67 68 EIP S NJ Series NJ501 301 a NB Designer version information Version Remarks V1 0X February 2012 PT with model number of NB5Q TWOOB_ OS Windows XP SP3 or higher and NB 7W TWOOB supported Windows Vista Windows 7 32 64 bit V1 1X June 2012 PT with model number of NB5Q TW01B_ The NB Designer incorporates a and NB7W TW01B added transmission program and a standard V1 20 August 2012 PT with model number of NB3Q TW00B SYStem program specified for the NB TW01B and NB10W TWO1B added Series Units For download the AB GC PLC supported application programs please access English version added your local Omron website If local site Wo Ocensoom lBscdeseacisnanacmmiedcnness eee ee oe Omron IA global site 7 languages supported Traditional http www ia omron com at first and Chinese Korean Spanish Italian l o l i lect th h Portuguese Turkish and Russian select the area where you are V1 22 December 2012 PictBridge printing supported Japanese version added V1 23 December 2012 OMRON PLC serial port communication protocol optimized The compatibility of the firmware upgrade SI PON JO 3SI7 V gt improved Related connecting object
211. LC to Week Effective value ranges from 0 to 6 read 9017 een AGRONI Millisecond Effective value ranges from 0 to 999 advance read 9020 Interrupt The low byte of the LW will be sent as interrupt byte ranging from 0x20 0xFE in MEMORY_LINK protocol when it is not 0 The LW will be cleared to zero when the transmission is completed successfully read 9030 9031 Touch coordinate Records the touch coordinate taking the upper left side of screen as origin read 9034 9035 System time Double word The time calculated with 0 1s as unit is displayed read 9040 9041 Security level password Double word Refer to 3 13 Security Level Page 3 340 for details write 9042 Security level Displays the security level of current Base Screen Refer to 3 13 Security Level Page 3 340 for details read 9043 Switch security level forcefully Forcefully switches from higher security level e g level 2 to lower security level e g level 0 Refer to 3 73 Security Level Page 3 340 for details write 9050 Display Screen No The number of Display Screen No is specified Synchronizing with the PLC by Data Transmitting Component allows the PLC to execute the screen transition 9057 Size of each item of the event history The recipe memory is used to save the size of each item by the event log data read 9058 9059 Size of event log data The recipe memory is used to store the size of event history including management informa
212. M1 Port COM1 Change Change Station No 0 E Station No 0 Address 0 System Memory Address 18 0 System Memory Data Word 3 Data Word e BIN i 1 oe BIN 1 Use Variable Use index Note 1 The addresses having been logged in the Variable Table can t be changed in the other places that s to say they can only be used If they are needed to be changed you just need to enter the Variable Table dialog box to change the address 2 Note the following points when using the Variable The Variable specified Bit for the Memory Type can be allocated only to the bit state component Also the Variable specified Word for the Memory Type can be allocated only to the word state component 3 242 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 8 3 Alarm Setting GQ Alarm setting To display the information on the Alarm component or Alarm Display component the logon in the list of Alarm Setting database is needed One bit address can control whether one piece of information will be displayed or not If the logged bit address is triggered ON or OFF the related information will be displayed on the Alarm component This component is only responsible for the logon of Alarm Setting and the display needs to be done by Alarm component P o 2 D O r O D r D o D m Add Modify Alarm Setting 1 Clicking the icon located in the Datab
213. M2A 30 40 60CDUIL U CPM1 CIF11 When a peripheral port is connected CPM2C 10 20000000 O0 cy CQM1H CPU51 61 CQM1H SCB41 CS1G CPU42 43 44 45 V1 CS1W SCB41 V1 CS1H CPU63 64 65 66 67 V1 CS1W SCU31 V1 CS1G CPU42H 43H 44H 45H CS1W SCB41 V1 CS1H CPU63H 64H 65H 66H 67H CS1W SCU31 V1 CJ Series Le CJ1G CPU44 45 CJ1W SCU31 41 V11 CS Series CJ1G CPU42H 43H 44H 45H CJ1W SCU31 41 V1 CJ1H CPU65H 66H 67H CJ1M CPU11 12 13 21 22 23 CJ1W SCU31 41 V1 CJ2M CPU31 32 33 34 35 CP1W CIF11 CIF12 CJ2M CPU11 12 13 14 15 CJ2H CPU64 65 66 67 68 EIP 1 Connect using conversion cables CPM2C CN111 type or CS1W CN114 118 type the RS 232C adaptor CPM1 CIFO1 type or the RS 422A adaptor CPM1 CIF11 type A 4 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 Appendices Units at the host side which can be connected using the Ethernet port of the NB Unit CPU Unit with built in Ethernet Options PLC Series I Through Ethernet Unit Option boards required for communication function p connection CP Series CP1L L14 L20 M30 M40 M60 CP1W CIF41 o CPIH X40 XA401 Y 20 CP1W CIF41 CP1E N30 N40 N60 NA20 CP1W CIF41 CP1L EL20 EM30 EM40 re CS Series CS1G CPU42 43 44 45 V1 CS1W ETN21 _fesiiiceuaesesoriy _ esimete CS1G CPU42H 43H 44H 45H CS1W ETN21 _fesinicrucatieaiestieaiem esimete CS1H CPU63 64 65 66 67 V1 CS1W ETN21 veer Sepa CS1H CPU63H 64H 65H 66H 67H CS1W ETN21 ae ee E C
214. Macros researched All Screens All the components in all the Screens in the selected PT will be searched Current Screens All the components in the current Screen in the selected PT will be searched All Macros Only all Macro in the current PT will be searched Descriptions of Find Type memory memory Type It means to find the device with Bit type or Word type Area Variable It represents the device type and device address in the controller where the search is performed Checking Range means the search will be performed in the set range of address Find Message Not checking Match Case and Full Match means the judgment of the case of the characters and the consistency in the whole text will not be done during the search It means the match of the case of the characters in the text to be searched is required Full Match It means the match of the text to be searched in the whole text is required Replace After this option is set the area and address found according to the set conditions will be replaced by the specified area and address Keep Offset in the Replace part will take effect once the Range in Find part is checked If Keep Offset is not checked the replace address is the same while if Keep Offset is checked the replace address is the consecutive address which will automatically deviate by making the set replace address as the start address When the above parameters a
215. Magnification X m Print Page Current Page Landscape C Change Page To Print Portrait m Print Content V Print Text M7 Print All Bitmap a V Print Analog Mete MV Print All Vector Map a V Print Data Log T Print Background Colors O y O Open Variable Table OK Cancel O O o For more details of Save Screenshot to External Memory refer to 6 3 1 Function Key Page 6 15 NB Series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 6 25 6 Descriptions of New Functions Added into NBLILI TW01B 6 3 7 File List File List The File List is used to display the file information of the external memory This component is divided into three parts the left part displays the information on the folder under the current folder the upper right part displays the information on the file under the current folder and the lower right part displays the PT information on the selected project file pkg or the recipe file rcp Information on the file exnems under the current z historystore directory logs n z M HMI information on the Information on airon selected file under the the ae under current directory the current directory The File List component a kind of special component needs to be used in combination with Import Export function of Function Key Frame5 File List Window is generated automatically when the new project is created conve
216. N E5 BBOUBOBAL Custom Color Undefined Area Color When you click the undefined area i e the area outside of working area for touchable components or without the components the Touch Indicator will change colors CPU Indicator Color Refers to the color of CPU Indicator Alarm Indicator Color Refers to the color of Alarm Indicator Touch Indicator Frame Color Refers to the box color of the Touch Indicator Touch Unable Area Color Refers to the Touch Indicator color shown when the nonclient area is touched including when expected effect is not realized after the component s being touched Touch Area Color Refers to the Touch Indicator color shown when the client area is touched including when related action s is are performed after corresponding component s or Menu Bar etc being touched Menu Button Task Bar Button Input the texts which should be displayed in the Task Bar and in the location which displays the Menu Screen of the Task Bar Button Position Refers to the positions of the Menu Button and Task Bar Button i e Left and Right If you select Right the Menu Button and the Task Bar Button will be placed in the lower right corner of the screen On the contrary they will be placed in the lower left corner of the screen Text Position The text alignment in the Menu Button and the Task Bar Button includes Left Right and Center Button Size Refers to the width and heig
217. NB Designer boze 3 4 rll PY etd li P o 2 D O r O D r D o D m D l0 U0O Old G 8 10 Change Screen Ignore screen 0 PLC Control PT Executing PLC Control HMIO X PT HMIO PLENo 0 Area Variable Lw Address 0 AAFO BIN _ Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 WordLength 2 Use Variable Function Model Switch Screens Bi Marco backlight OF Write bac Screen Hard Copy Macro Execute Macro Backlight On Execution Backlight Onfwrite Back General purpose PLC control Expansion Sound Ctrl OFF gt 0ON Sound Ctrl ON gt OFF Sound Ctrl OFF lt gt 0N Sound Reset OFF gt 0N Select Sd Sound Reset ON gt OFF Change s screen ignore screen D Black and White Reverse Color Sound Od T Custom Mode Black and white CI Color Magnification Print Page Current Page Landscape Change Page To Print Portrait Print Content V Print Text V Print All Bitmap IV Print Analog Mete V Print All Vector Map V Print Data Log Print Background Colors Open Variable T able OK Cancel The difference between Switch Screens and Change Screen Ignore screen 0 is as follows Switch Screens When the value of specified address is 0 it will be switched to Screen 0 Change Screen Ignore screen 0 When the value of specified address is 0 screen switching is not made NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106
218. NB series NB3Q TWOOB NB5Q TWOOB NB7W TWOOB NB10W TW01B Programmable Terminals NB Designer OPERATION MANUAL OMRON 2011 All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means mechanical electronic photocopying recording or otherwise without the prior written permission of OMRON No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein Moreover because OMRON is constantly striving to improve its high quality products the information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual Nevertheless OMRON assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in this publication Trademarks e Sysmac and SYSMAC are trademarks or registered trademarks of OMRON Corporation in Japan and other countries for OMRON factory automation products e Windows Windows 98 Windows XP Windows Vista Windows 7 and Excel are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the USA and other countries e EtherCATo is registered trademark and patented technology licensed by Beckhoff Automation GmbH Germany e ODVA CIP CompoNet DeviceNet and EtherNet IP are trademarks of ODVA e The SD logo is a trademark of SD 3C LLC SDP Other company nam
219. Note The screen No can t be changed once it is created but the name frame and background can be changed still Ay dolg U99JDS Z y Base Screen Base Screen Security Level Set the corresponding security level for the screen For details refer to 3 73 Security Level Page 3 340 Sheet Screen Set the corresponding Sheet Screens for the current screen The screen to be set as the Sheet Screen must be the created screen where the components used by the multiple screens together can be put Frame Refers to the frame recommended to be used by the Pop up Screen The width of the frame can be any number from 0 to 16 If the width is not 0 the color can be selected for the frame NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 49 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 50 Transparency It is only valid for the Pop up Screen and the Menu Screen Title FrameO No 0 Protect key mapping on common sheet screen Switch to the lowest security level when screen closed Screen Attributes Keyboard Security Level 0 s Position Background Color Background Color LI Pattem Color Example of transparency of Pop up Screen Placing one function key to Pop up screen Frame 10 with the property in Frame 0 as shown e When the transparency is 0 Set the width and height of Frame 10 to 200 each the Background color to Yellow an
220. Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 6 7 XY Graph 2 AY Graph this component When the sampling number with M channel per page is set to N the values are stored to the PLC e g X11 Y11 X12 Y12 X1N Y1N XM1 YM1 XMN YMN The number of the memory XY Graph reflects the correlation of two variables visually If you want to monitor the XY Graph reflecting the changes of address values the NB Unit can clearly displayed it out only by using addresses occupied by the PLC is MxNx2 Note For Xij Yij subscript i represents the channel number j represents the sampling point and Xij represents the coordinate position of X for sampling point j in channel i Process of adding one XY Graph component 7 Press the XY Graph component icon drag it to the screen then the Basic Properties dialog box of XY Graph component will pop up Basic Property XY Graph Channel Extended Property Save Data History Display Setting Priority PT Fort Address Data Format Change Station No Normal Read Address cOMI 0 Area Variable LW 0 System Memory Word i r BIN length 20 Fomat Range DDDDD 0 10255 l Use Variable l Use index Read Address Specifies the word address of PLC corresponding to the data of X axis trajectory and the word address corresponding to Y axis is read address 1 If the channel number is
221. Operation Manual V106 3 87 3 Functions of NB Designer Process of adding one Command Button component 1 Dragging the Command Button component icon after it is pressed will make the Basic Properties of Command Button component pop up Basic Property Command Button Label Graphics Control Setting Display Setting Priority Normal Read Address e Write Address PE TIA PLC z PT HMIO No 2 PT A No Port COM1 Port COM1 Change r Change T a Station No 0 a Station No 0 Area Variable LW z Area Variable LW A Address 0 System Memory Address 0 System Memory Data Word ke Data lt Word z Gaii BIN Fanmi BIN 1 Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 Use Variable Use Variable Use index Use index Write Address Refers to the word address controlling the Command Button component Address The first address of word address corresponding to the Command Button component Word Length Set word length of the write address Either of 1 single word or 2 double words can be specified 3 88 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer 2 Switch to the Command Button tab and set the Type for the Command Button component Type Port Basic Property Command Button Label Graphics Control Setting Display Setting Change Station No 0 Area Variable LW 7 Address 0 Data Format BIN Word Length 2 z
222. Other Descriptions aoc c ncnocdecd oo eee G 4u8 Beet weds whee ee woe 3 270 3 10 System Parameters 0 0 0 cece 3 283 G10 FT eeeceens sauces eoede E beanen Pees ee eee eee tan aee es 3 284 S 10 2 TaSk Bal eeii rrari 66 4508 donee dG 5 howd Gerad deh obo eed ome es 3 285 3 10 3 PT Extended Properties 0 0 0 cc eee 3 287 3 10 4 System Information Setting 0 0 cee ees 3 296 3 10 5 Security Levels Setting 0 0 ccc eens 3 298 3 10 6 User Permission Setting ss becededsstededetiusedeee send 3 300 3 10 7 Event History Setting a an naana aaea 3 314 3 10 8 COM1 COM2 Setting naana naana aaae 3 315 3 11 Address of System Memory 0 02 eee 3 317 eet LOeGal Bi 6 eye ees S55 eee vee been ease ede eames eee ate des 3 318 3 11 22 Local Word LW ciied cur cecdwdsw nad elwutestces en a E E E 3 322 3 11 3 Nonvolatile Local Word LW10000 10255 0 000000 3 325 3 11 4 System Information Table 0 ccc ees 3 327 3 12 Recipe DAlane tase dvnes o Chews CE we re eh Ew Ske ee he ee Ee ee ees 3 329 3 12 1 Process of Creating One Recipe Component 008 3 329 3 12 2 Recipe Memory 2 65sc44000c2o6e48 64 de bbe eeene sede meee ees bs 3 331 3 12 3 Upload Download of Recipe Data between PT and PLC 3 335 3 13 DCCUMEY LEVEL e eet see eu peergeb eae ee tease ees roo oe ee eee eons 3 340 oe ee OSU onra eee ee Re es eo eee ee oe Ree e
223. PLC Control 1 Press the PLC Control icon to make the list of PLC Control pop up Address inform PLC Address Control event 4 rT t Add tse Delete All Modify Import Export OF 2 Press Add button to create a new PLC Control or press Modify and Delete buttons to 3 252 modify the PLC Control and delete the selected setting respectively NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 Specify the options displayed in the PLC Control dialog box correctly PT Executing PLC Control HMO z PT HMIO PLCNo 0 X Area Variable Lw Address D DataFomet BIN Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 WordLength 2 Use Variable Co Function Mode Switch Screens z 5 Marco D O Macro X mr O Execution ON lt gt OFF X D Q oy m Sound F urent Sound Select Sound L Play Sound Stop Play HA Custom Print Options T Black and White Reverse Color Mode Black and White Color w P Magnification X on Print Page Current Page Landscape S Change Page To Print Portrait S o r Print Text V Print Text IY Print All Bitmap IV Print Analog Mete IV Print All Vector Map IY Print Data Log Print Background Colors mm Open Variable Table OK Cancel Area Variable Specifies the Area Variable of the devices performing the PLC control operations Addres
224. PRODUCTS UNLESS OMRON S ANALYSIS CONFIRMS THAT THE PRODUCTS WERE PROPERLY HANDLED STORED INSTALLED AND MAINTAINED AND NOT SUBJECT TO CONTAMINATION ABUSE MISUSE OR INAPPROPRIATE MODIFICATION OR REPAIR NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 13 Application Considerations SUITABILITY FOR USE OMRON shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards codes or regulations that apply to the combination of products in the customer s application or use of the products At the customer s request OMRON will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying ratings and limitations of use that apply to the products This information by itself is not sufficient for a complete determination of the suitability of the products in combination with the end product machine system or other application or use The following are some examples of applications for which particular attention must be given This is not intended to be an exhaustive list of all possible uses of the products nor is it intended to imply that the uses listed may be suitable for the products Outdoor use uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical interference or conditions or uses not described in this manual e Nuclear energy control systems combustion systems railroad systems aviation systems medical equipment amusement machines vehicles safety equipment and installations subject to s
225. Pad Language lt amp C Function Pen X Pen Color L Pen Color m Font Type C Pen Size 1 2 Vector font Bitmap font Ka Clear Font Attribute 3 Font DFNB EN am i Mode Black andwhite Colc Black and White Reverse Color Size 16 Position Left si Magnification 2 0 si Print page Print Text E Color Ii Color Language Englsh USA Bienes Z Print Text T Italic T Bold OS Ghenge Pap Print V Print Analog Meter G oe V Print Data Log Copy Font Attribute To All Languages r V Print All Bitmap z V Print All Vector Map _ Print Background Colors 3 178 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer Check Vector Graphics in the Graphics tab and select one Vector Graphics as shown below Function Key Label Graphics Control Setting Display Setting M VectorGraphics DISP_BAROO1vg lt EMN B CLOSEO01 vg CONFIRM vg CTRL_BAR CTRL_BAR EGS nts JEZE E manm m A mm nen m Amr nen mi Amm ri Tein merrem n o oa V e er 4 l Use Original Size F Save to System Graphics Library fie baat 0 400g 3JON VZ2 9 3 Place one function key with the Property of Switch Screen of Minimize in the Function Key tab Check Vector Graphics in the Graphics tab and select one Vector as shown below Function Key Label Graphics Control Setting Display
226. Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer Using the Use Input Order allows continuous input to Number Input component Text Input component and Note Book component Even if the Enter button is pressed the keyboard will not be closed automatically and will be kept to be opened and the cursor using Use Input Order keeps moving among the components until the screen is closed by pressing X in the top of the keyboard Group is used to classify the multi group of components needing consecutive inputs The components with the same group number belong to the same group and the cursor will be cyclic in the same group of components When the Enter is pressed the keyboard will not be closed automatically but will always be displayed in the screen until the close button X in the keyboard is clicked Setting of Use Input Order Go to the Keyboard Setting Property tabs for the Number Input component Text Input component and Note Book component respectively and check the Use Input Order ut property Basic Property Numeric Data Font Keyboard Setting Graphics Control Setting Display Setting Keyboard Setting Default Keyboard ard P edi e PT Screen Position o o o e o o Other Input Methods Function Keys etc J Use Input Order Input Order 1 Input property Basic Property Numeric Data Font Keyboard Setting
227. Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 19 3 Functions of NB Designer Draw Toolbar ae E The contents of the items in the Draw Toolbar are shown as below Select To select one component or multiple components Line To draw a line Arc To draw an arc Rect To draw a rectangle Round Rect To draw a rounded rectangle Polyline To draw a consecutive line Polygon To draw a polygon Ellipse To draw a circle or ellipse Sector To draw a sector Text To add the text Load Graphic To add the bitmap in the editing window Frame Color To set the frame color for the shapes Background Color To set the background color for the shapes Show Grid To make the grid displayed in the screen Transparent Color To add transparency to the added bitmap Multicolor Grayscale Switch To make the transformation between the color and black white Align with Grid After the component being selected click this button once to make the grid point as the moving unit and click it twice to restore the default pixel point as the moving unit of the component For the color setup there are 40 kinds of colors available as shown below na Fill EREEREEE B EEE EHOREBLUEAESE FHOBERBUEO Custom Color Besides the 40 kinds of colors shown above the custom colors are also available The following dialog box will be displayed after clicking Custom Color at the bottom
228. Property Numeric Data Font Keyboard Setting Graphics Control Setting Display Setting Priority Nomal I Make Read Address and Write Address the Same Read Address Write Address z PLE 7 PT PT HMIO No 0 Part COM1 Port COM1 Change Change a Station No Station No 0 Area Variable LVV9508 Usedto set au 7 Area Variable LW hi Address 08 M System Memory Address l L System Memory Data Data Word 2 JN BIN ko BIN pie 1 z z Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 Message window C ilati l i OE O ae pene eae seas Use Variable Use Variable l Use index l Use indesc NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 309 3 Functions of NB Designer Permission Place 4 Bit Switches with the addresses of LW B 9506 0 LW B 9506 1 LW B 9506 2 LW B 9506 3 respectively and switch type of Alternate here a Su tch _ i Add User X i ii m Basic Property Bit Switch Label Graphics Control Setting Display Setting AAA Priority Normal J Make Read Address and Write Address the Same Write Address gt r PLE r PT HMIO No 0 Port COM1 Change 0 E Station No Area Varable LB hi Address 9506 0 System Memory Address U L System Memory Data Data lt Word A TE BIN Lengi 1 hae BIN er 1 Format Range DDDDD H 0 0 10255 F Format Range DDDD 0 9999 Message window Compilation Done Warning O Error 0 Use Variable _ Use index
229. RL_BAR 3 Map Keyboard Disable X Touch Calibration Save Screenshot to Extemal Memory a E C om Clear Event Import Export Import Project to PT M a oT man mon Nann nicn Nann ncn NANN mOn Nann Notepad Bitmap O Function Pen hd C PenColor E Pen Color PenSize 1 H C Cear i Mode Black and White Color T_ Black and White Reverse Color T Use Original Size Magnification 2 0 X l Import Graphics Save to System Graphics Curent Page IV Print Text Change Paper To Print Print Analog Meter Print Data Lo Landscape A 7 V Print All Bitmap Rorre 7 Print All Vector Map Print Background Colors 5 Place one Text Display component LW9152 with the Word Length of 16 6 Place one static Text Display component with the contents of Please input your name Basic Property Font Graphics Display Setting Message Display Setting Priority Normal Swap high byte and low byte Unicode Fae Rist Please i re Read Address _ Write Address Transport Font Text Library PT mo FC ge PT Hmo FIC ge sore Pot COMI Pot COMI i el a Change m Change Language 1 gt R 7 E Station No 0 C Station No 0 Area Variable LW9152 Display the cu Area Variable LW m Font Type Vector font Bitmap font Address 9152 System Memory Address 0 System Memory Font Attribute Data Word pr p Data lt Word n
230. Screen C Copy Single Screen From G Password window To HES Keyboard Destination Screen From 11 test CJ HMI Hmo IE O Framed TF 1 Comnmon Window IE 2 Fast Selection IE ENUM Keyboard i S t on Note 1 The copy of screens is available within the same project or the same PT 2 When the multiple screens are operated the copying and deletion among the non continuous screens are not supported NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 2 5 Draw Menu 3 Functions of NB Designer The corresponding contents in the Draw menu shown as below have been described in 3 2 3 View Menu Page 3 15 ae OR M a n R A 3 2 6 Components Menu Line Arc Rect Round Rect PolyLine Polygon Ellipse Sector Text Add Graphics Import Graphics Group components Load Graphic Transparent Color Multicolor Gray switch For the corresponding contents in the Components menu shown as below refer to 3 6 Parts Page 3 80 3 7 Function Parts Page 3 196 and 3 8 Project Database Page 3 234 Components Button Switch Display Number Text Graph Alarm Screen Draw Shape Neon Lamp Scroll Bar Moving Component Animation Data Transmission Recipe f PLC Control NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 Level Meter Analog Meter Scale Function Key Touch Trigger Timer N
231. Setting of Component Option Descriptions Touch Enable Checking this option means the state value can be written into the controller by triggering the Enabling Input effective area for the current component Setting Disable Checking this option means the state value cannot be written into the controller even when Input triggering the effective touching area for the current component Conditional Security Level Checking this option means only when the security level of the operator is Enabling higher than the minimum security level already set the current component can be touched and the state value can be written into the controller User Permission Control Checking this option means the operator must have the permission to touch the current component and write the state value into the controller Indirect reference Checking this option means only when the state of the specified bit memory or word memory meets the set conditions the current component can be touched and the state value can be written into the controller Auto show login Checking this option means the Password Input Screen Frame 9 Login screen screen will pop up automatically for the user to login when the security level or the permission of the current user doesn t meet the requirement of the set level or authority Show Checking this option allows Unable to Input figure will be displayed when the component is in Unable to invalid to input This functi
232. Station No will be stopped read write 9296 9299 Mask code of error information Each bit corresponds to one piece of error information When the bit is turned ON the corresponding prompt error information will not be displayed e g PLC No Response is 9296 2 read write 9300 Name of path referred by File List The name of path currently referred 32 words by the component File List Component will be specified 9332 Name of file selected by File List The name of file selected 32 words by the File List component Component will be specified 9364 Setting Import and Export Specify the Import and Export of the project and the Recipe read write 9366 Description of processing File Browsing 1 indicates Copy 2 does Cut and 3 does Paste Component respectively write 9370 Confirm Operation method Confirm Operation method 1 Confirm 2 Cancel write 9380 9395 History value of Number Input Specify the data set before the input operation read component 9416 9431 Index memory for Station No variable Each word corresponds to the index 0 15 for Station No variable read write 9432 9447 memory for indicating communication Each bit corresponds to one Station No 9432 0 state COM 2 corresponds to O and 9447 F corresponds to 255 The relevant bit is set to ON when PLC is under time out condition and has no response otherwise it will be set to OFF read 9465 Time out ratio of Macro Specify
233. Storage Period is the upper limits of the number of CSV files in this path if the Storage Period is exceeded the oldest file will be deleted If the Single File is selected the file will be named in Subfolder Name form the Storage Period is the upper limit of the records archived in the file the archived records are reached to the Storage Period the storage will not be continued yyyymmdd refers to the execution date NB Series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 6 13 T N wn lt N r D 3 U o Q 3 r s Buijes 10 SIH UeAQ Z 9 6 Descriptions of New Functions Added into NBLILI TW01B 6 2 4 External Memory The External Memory tab allows checking the ERWO ERW1 and ERW2 areas which were defined as specific storage areas for the external memory PT Task Bar PT Extended Property _ System Information Setting Security Level Setting User Permission Setting Event History Setting Print Setting COM1 Setting COM2Setting ExtemalMemory ERWO File Name ew0 erp USBI ERW1 File Name wep USBI ERW2 File Name erw2 erp cy USB1 The data in ERW will be stored into the specified external memory with erp as the file format and the storage path of exmem erwx erp x 0 1 2 6 2 5 Communication Setting The Communication Setting option is used to make the Communication Setting for the Ethe
234. Switching Method The function of switching screen with Function Key allows switching the displayed screen to optional base screen common sheet screen menu screen Or pop up screen Entering the optional screen No to the communications address specified to the function of switching screen with PLC Control allows switching the screen to the screen with the entered screen No Macro Function The function to create the simple original program by the user and to execute it The user can add the functions such a arithmetical operations or discriminant of the conditions which are not be supported by the basic functions of the NB Designer Using the Macro function the user also convert the display processing in the screen or the data processing used to be performed in the PLC This function allows the PC loading reduced The Macro of the NB Designer conforms to C Language ANSI C89 Internal LB Refers to the local bit address of PT which can t be saved when power is Address OFF inside PT Refers to the absolute address of bit address saved in the recipe data that is stored in the flash memory even when the power turns OFF the data can be retained Even if the battery is dead in PT the data stored in the recipe memory will not be lost SI7 uoNoUNY J9U6ISeq gN Z Y Refers to the index address of bit address saved in the recipe data that is stored in the flash memory even when the power turns OFF the data can be retained Even if the bat
235. This operation uses one bit address to control the closing of the backlight and when the bit address is ON the backlight will be closed PT Executing PLC Control HMIO v PT HMIO PLCNo 0 Area Variable LB Address O DataFome Bil _ Format Range DDDD 0 3999 Word Length 7 Use Variable Function Mode Emaan E In the settings shown as above when LBO is ON the backlight turns off In this case when the user touches the PT the backlight will automatically light on and at this time the LBO is still ON If the user touches the LBO again it will be turned OFF thus returning to the state before the backlight is closed NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 255 3 Functions of NB Designer 5 Backlight Off Write Back The operation of this option is similar to Backlight Off but the address of this bit of PLC will be cleared to 0 while as well as the back light turns Off and then the bit address turns ON cS PT Executing PLC Control HMIO PT HMIO PLENo 0 Area Variable LB Address 21 fasFome Bil _ Format Range DDDD 0 3999 WordLength 1 Use Variable Function Mode FERETE ATEN In the settings shown as above when LB21 turns ON the backlight is OFF and LB21 is automatically turned OFF When the user touches the PT the backlight turns ON and LB21 turns OFF thus returning to the state before the backlight is closed 6 Execute Macro When the state
236. Touching the event information displayed in the event component the Screen specified screen will pop up And it needs to use the Close Screen function of the Function Key to close this Pop up Screen Trigger The specified screen will pop up when the event occurs And it needs Dialog to use the Close Screen function of the Function Key to close this Pop up Screen Write When the event log occurs the state of the specified bit memory will Value be set to 0 1 When the event log occurs the state of the specified bit memory will be set to 1 When the event log occurs the state of the specified bit memory will be reversed 3 250 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer Descriptions of Event Information Properties Message Inputs the contents of event or event display to be displayed Clicking Font can set the Font Type and the related attributes Determines whether to use the contents logged in the Text Library Library Language When using multi language Text Library you can select the language displayed as the event information here and click Font to set the font Property corresponding to text in each kind of language respectively g TIP The data and others stored in internal memory LW can be displayed in the event I information The available formats are follows zs e h mm s 3 The Time of Occur is indicated A e e y mm d
237. _CROSS oh oF oF P eee at pets et a T a s roo oF wr oF F oF i F oF F BFS_HORGRDT_FTTD 3 276 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer Parameter Name Descriptions BFS_HORGRDT_FDTT BFS_HORGRDT_FETC ri D Q a c O ct fe 5 BFS_HORGRDT_FCTE BFS_VERGRDT_FLTR BFS_VERGRDT_FRTL suodosaq JEUIO P 6 BFS_VERGRDT_FETC BFS_VERGRDT_FCTE BFS_OUPGRDT_FLTTRD BFS_OUPGRDT_FRDTLT NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 277 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 278 Parameter Name Value BFS_OUPGRDT_FETC BFS_OUPGRDT_FCTE BFS_ODWNGRDT_F RT TLD BFS_ODWNGRDT_F LDTRT BFS_ODWNGRDT_F ETG BFS_ODWNGRDT_F CTE BFS_CONGRDT_FLT TRD BFS_CONGRDT_FRT TLD BFS_CONGRDT_FR DTLT Pause NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 Descriptions 3 Functions of NB Designer Parameter Name Descriptions BFS_CONGRDT_FLD TRT BFS_CENGRDT_FETC mi D Q aa c 5 O ct fe 5 BFS_CENGRDT_FCTE ForeColor 0 65535 It is recommended to use Macro RGB r g b to set the color Pattern color and the range for r g and b is 0 255 The system will convert the value of RGB r g b according to the color parameters of PT screen BackColor 0 65535 It is recommended to use Macro RGB r g b to set the color Background color and th
238. a Varable LB v Area Vanable LB X Address 0 System Memory Address 0 System Memory Data Word z Data Word BIN 1 Eae BIN par 1 Format Range DDDD 0 9999 M Use Variable Use Variable Use index Use index NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer 2 Switch to the Bit Neon Lamp tab and make settings of Moving Type Step and Speed respectively Basic Property Bit Neon Lamp Label Graphics Display Setting Moving Tee Step 10 Pixels Speed 10 X100ms 3 Switch to the Label tab and add the text corresponding to the state W ez V fen r 7 4 Switch to the Graphics tab and select the Vector Graphics or bitmap representing the touching area and touching state 5 Press the OK button to complete the setup of the Bit Neon Lamp component 3 6 27 Touch Trigger b tigge The Touch Trigger component is applicable to the conditions where the several components can be triggered to act not through the triggering method When the triggering conditions for the specified memory of the Touch Trigger component are satisfied the components placed in the valid area for the Touch Trigger component can be triggered to act 1 3 and 4 locate in the valid triggering area while 2 locates in the invalid triggering area Therefore when the set triggering conditions for the specified memory of the Touch Trigger co
239. a pi Ee ba ch Pp Mein lp eg read the value of local lw200 and write it to the lw202 with the codetype i The code is i short buf 2 0 i ReadLocal Lw 200 2 void buf 0 WriteLocal LW 202 2 void buf 0 int MacroEntry te int 898 etu J Mouse x 11 y 0 For the Macro refer to 3 9 Macro Function Page 3 260 NB Series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 5 Maintenance and Abnormality Handling 5 4 Unit Replacement Precautions When the Unit should be replaced for the defectiveness found during the checking please pay attentions to the following points e Perform backup of the screen data of NB Unit in advance e The screen data may be deleted when the Unit is repaired by OMORN e Be sure to turn OFF the power supply before the replacement e After the replacement please confirm whether the abnormality still exists or not e When the defect device is returned for repair please attach the paper with the detailed description of the problem to the Unit and contact the supplier printed on the back cover m FN Cc A D D O D 3 D 5 r U O D 5 D NB Series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 5 9 5 Maintenance and Abnormality Handling 5 10 NB Series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 Descriptions of New Functions Added into NBLILJ TW01B This section describes the i
240. abel Graphics Display Setting Position T Lock Position Display Control Touching is invalid when Components are not displayed Display Not Display Touching is invalid Conditional Display 6 Press the OK button to complete the setup of the lamp component 3 6 3 Bit Switch Bit Switch Bit Switch is the combination of the Bit Lamp and the Bit Button component It defines a touching area and the bit address inside the PT or of the PLC can be switched between On and Off state when this area is enabled Process of adding one Bit Switch 1 Drag the Bit Switch icon after it is pressed then the Basic Properties dialog box of Bit Switch component will pop up Basic Property Bit Switch Label Graphics Control Setting Display Setting Priority Normal V Make Read Address and Write Address the Same Read Address Write Address PLC PLC PT Emo E HMO ye 0 Port COM1 Port COM1 Change Change f a Station No 0 O Station No 0 Area Variable LB v Area Variable LB x Address 0 l System Memory Address 0 System Memory Data Word z Data Word z as BIN i 1 Fam BIN 1 Format Range DDDD 0 9999 Format Range DDDD 0 9999 7 Use Variable Use Variable Use index Use index 3 86 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer Read Address Bit address controls the display information of Bit Switch such as the status
241. address of the FLASH memory Word FRWI 0 134217727 The absolute address of the FLASH memory RB and RW point to the same area For example RB5 0 RB5 15 and RW5 map the same area i e RB5 0 is the Bit0 of RW5 But the addresses pointed by LB and LW in the memory are different because they map the different areas The memory addresses of LB9000 LB9999 in LB LW B9000 0 LW B10255 F in LW B and LW9000 LW10255 in LW are reserved by the system internally for some special purposes and the users can t use them as the addresses for the common devices but should use their special functions according to the related manuals For details refer to 3 11 Address of System Memory Page 3 317 When the recipe memory is accessed by the index address the index address will begin to search from the address of the offset of the address displayed by LW9000 For example If LW9000 is 50 the index address RWI100 will access the data in the address of RW150 100 50 For details refer to 3 12 Recipe Data Page 3 329 1 When using NB3Q TWO01B or NB5Q TW01B the range of addresses is 0 0 to 130500 F 2 When using NB3Q TW01B or NB5Q TW0O1B the range of addresses is 0 to 130500 3 5 5 Vector Graphic NB Designer provides the powerful Vector Graphics and bitmap library and you can create any desired graphics such as switch lamp piping etc in the library and even you can add your own pictures to the library The graphics can be 256 color bitmap 16 col
242. after selecting the corresponding Macro file Select and press Delete key Please be careful because the deleted Macro files can t be restored NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 267 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 9 3 Macro Triggering There are many flexible methods for triggering Macro Using the triggering methods for Macro flexibly can realize more flexible and powerful functions conveniently NB Designer currently supports the following methods for triggering Macro 1 Macro when loading project Check in the Use Macro when loading project check box in the PT Extended Properties tab System Information Setting Security Level Setting User Pemnission Setting Event History Setting Print Setting COM1 Setting COM2 Setting ExtemalMemory PT Task Bar PT Extended Property M Backlight 10 mins Video Mode PAL 7 Auto backlight during alam event Screen Saver 0 mins Screen Saver Screen O Frame0 I Retum to Original Screen When Screen Saver Ends Number of Languages 8 e IV Vector Font Smooth Display Flip Screen Display I Allow Upload Password 888888 Default Language 1 Allow Decompilation Password 888888 Language Setting Chinese Font Box Height 24 m Operation Log Storage Setting System Scroll Bar Width 20 Storage Devices USB DISK1 x pesoeeeescsceccecossecesoossesosseececcsecesesossesosseseesssssesesesscesssose Subfolder Record
243. ages 8 Iv Allow Upload Password 888888 MV Allow Decompilation Password 888888 Chinese Font Box Height 24 Operation Log Storage Setting System Scroll Bar Width 20 Storage Device USB DISK1 i 7 Use Macro when loading project Subfolder Record Menu Screen macro_0 c z I Use Buzzer es ow fie 4 Use Etemal Cock Buffer Storage Defaut Saveasms V Vector Font Smooth Display Storage Period 0 Day Flip Screen Display Note no limit when storage period is zero Cursor Color Common Sheet Screen Attributes Display below base screen Pop up Screen Attributes Display in foreground F Initial Screen 0 Frame0 oo 5 File List Window Common Sheet 1 Common Window Confirmation Screen 7 Confirm Action Windo 2 Fast Selection Login Screen 9 Login Window NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer Use Macro when loading project Refers to the Macro file run firstly when the unit starts processing the project file after it starts Use Buzzer When the component of the PT is pressed or the Beep Function is set for the Alarm or the Event check in the check box Chinese Font Box Height Sets the height of text input box and the default value is 24 When inputting the characters in Pinyin form the Chinese font box height can be adjusted between 24 and 99 pixel Perform the offline test and the effect is as shown below When the Chinese font bo
244. ailable i e 11 06 24 Sequence Number Checking it the sequence number of each event information will be displayed Ascending When it is checked the event information will be displayed in the ascending order i e the latest event will be displayed on the bottom When it is not checked the event information will be displayed in the descending order i e the latest event will be displayed on the top Background Sets the Background Color Title Bar Background Color Frame Color and Frame Width for the Color Event History Display component table Event History Query by File Name When it is checked the value of specified memory being 0 means to Query call out today s or the latest event history information and the value of specified memory being 1 means to call out the event history information stored on the previous day and so on For example With two event history information files 20110621 csv and 20110624 csv stored in the external memory when the value of specified memory is 0 the event history information stored on June 24th 2011 can be called out while the event history information stored on June 21th 2011 can be called out and displayed when the value of specified memory is 1 Query by Date When it is checked the date will be input into the specified memory and the event history information corresponding to the date will be called out The date format is yyyymmdd Where yyyy mm and dd refer to the year month and date
245. al FRWI Address inside PT File Formats rcp Supported by fr RecipeEditor CSV Security Level User Permission i Descriptions of Function Refers to the index address of word address saved in Flash which can be retained when the power of PT turns OFF When the battery is dead in PT the data saved in Flash will not be affected It is the file format which is used by PT device It is the file format of Recipe data saved and used in the flash memory of the NB It can be imported exported with Microsoft Excel or others The security level is classified into 16 levels 0 to 15 The optional passwords can be specified every one pasword for each level wit eight digits And the greater the level number the higher the level 15 level is the highest and 0 level is the lowest When the security level is 0 password cannot be specified The number of the security level is specified to 3 by default User permission can be specified for 32 users at max Also all the 32 kinds of user permission can be specified for each user The same user permission can be specified to the multiple different users The addition and deletion of user or the modification of user permission settings can be performed on NB units using system memory The default valid time of user permission is 10 minutes When 10 minutes passed after the login this user permission will be automatically cancelled and the operation permission can be obtained by in
246. allations OMRON PTs conform to the related EMC Directives see note so that the devices and machines into which they are built can more easily conform to EMC Directives The actual products have been through inspections and are completely in accordance with EMC directives However when they are built into customers systems whether the systems also comply with these Directives is up to the customers for further inspection EMC related performance of OMRON PTs will vary depending on the configuration wiring and other conditions of the OMRON equipment or control panel The customer must therefore perform final checks to confirm that the overall machine or device conforms to EMC standards Note The applicable EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility standards are as follows EMS Electromagnetic sensitivity EN61131 2 2007 EMI Electromagnetic Interference EN61131 2 2007 Conformance to EC Directives NB Series Programmable Terminals are EC compliant Heed the following precautions in order to ensure that the customer s overall machine and device conform to EC Directives 1 The PT must be installed in a control panel 2 You must use reinforced insulation or double insulation for the DC power supply and the DC power supply must have minimal voltage fluctuations and provide a stable output even if the power supply input is interrupted for 10 ms 3 The PTs conform to the standard EN 61131 2 but radiated emission characteristics 10m r
247. alled in a control panel e The mounting panel must be between 1 6 and 4 8 mm thick Tighten the Mounting Brackets evenly to a torque of between 0 5 and 0 6 N m to maintain water and dust resistance If the tightening torque exceeds the specified value or the tightening is not even deformation of the front panel may occur What is more make sure the panel is not dirty or warped and that it is strong enough to hold the Units e Do not let metal particles enter the Units when preparing the panel e Do not connect an AC power supply to the DC power terminals e Use a DC power with a slight voltage fluctuation and reinforced or double insulation and that will provide a stable output even if the input is momentarily interrupted for 10 ms Rated Power Supply Voltage DC 24 V Allowable range DC 20 4 27 6 V e Do not perform a dielectric voltage test e Before connecting the power supply to the NB unit mount the cable on the terminal block Make the connection by using terminal screws crimping on a twisted pair cable with a crimping range of 12 26 AWG and only 6 5 mm of insulation peel of the cable needs to be peeled off Tighten the terminal screws at a torque of between 0 3 and 0 5 N m Make sure the screws are properly tightened Do not use the terminal block of NB3Q TW0O01B for other models NB3Q TW01B has different pin definitions on the terminal block e To prevent malfunctions caused by noise ground the Unit correctly e Do not touch t
248. als NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer Functions of Word Switch Type Descriptions Add Each time this component is pressed 1 will be added to the state number and the map value of the corresponding state will be written into the specified write address and the graphics corresponding to the state will be displayed according to the specified read address at the same time Unloop When it is checked and the value of the memory for write address is equal to the value mapped by the set maximum state number the component doesn t act when the switch is pressed again When it isn t checked and the value of the memory of write address is equal to the value mapped by the set maximum state number the value of the memory for write address is equal to the value mapped by the minimum state number Sub Each time this component is pressed 1 will be subtracted from the state number and the map value of the corresponding state will be written into the specified write address and the graphics corresponding to the state will be displayed according to the specified read address at the same time W ez V fen a a Unloop When it is checked and the value of the memory for write address is equal to the value mapped by the minimum state number the component doesn t act when the switch is pressed again When it isn t checked and the value of the memory of write address is equal to the value mapped by the minimum
249. alue 9999 ri m O Z 3 o 53 ge Data Format Sets the data format corresponding to data contained in specified word address and 7 types are available Max Min Value Setting Setting the range of input available value Over Max Under Min Specifying color of the value displayed when it exceeds the Max or the Min of the value Flash When the value of the specified word address is greater than the Max or less than the Min the value of the component will be flashed to make the transfinite alarm more visible Proportional Conversion The value of the specified word address will be converted according to the settings and displayed on number input component To select this function Min Value and Max Value must be set For example it is assumed that the original data is represented by A and the displayed data by B then the data B can be obtained by the following conversion formula B Minimum Proportional Value A Minimum Value of Original Data x Proportion Where Proportion Maximum Proportional Value Minimum Proportional Value Maximum Value of Original Data Minimum Value of Original Data Take the following graphics as example when the original data is 20 then the value after conversion is 15 20 0 x 55 15 100 0 23 so the value displayed in the component will be 23 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 115 3 Functions
250. ame Macro Save to System Graphics Library NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 377 SUOIJOUNY 19430 9L 3 3 Functions of NB Designer 1 Group Components Several components or the graphics are combined together and saved into the Group Components Library thus making them called by other projects conveniently The format of Group Components Library is pgl 1 Method of entering Edit Group Component Library Click Use Group Component in Group components in Draw menu or right click the mouse in the blank area of the window the select Use Group Component in Group Components then the Edit Group Components Library dialog box will pop up as shown below Edit Group Components Library c Preview Group Preview Group HE _5_T2 HE _5_T3 E x i HE M _T2 HE _M_T3 Group Components keyboard Group Operation Save Group Components Export Library Place Group Components Import library Delete Group Components New Library NUMERAL M_T1 NUMERALM_T2 NUMERAL_M_T3 Delete All Group components Delete Library o Export Library Clicking Export Library can make the Group Components Library saved to the folder specified Import Library The default path of group components is the usrlib folder under the installation path of NB Designer and the user can also import the group components library from the self defined pa
251. ammable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 6 24 Note Book g1 Note Book Note Book component can modify or display the data in the specified word memory The value of the communications address is dealt as ASCII character The input data is saved to a consecutive memory with the Read Address as the first address Low byte character codes are displayed on the left while high byte character codes are displayed on the right It supports the display of the multi line text content and page turning and can be used to make the operations such as Copy Cut and Paste etc for the text contents in the selected area Process of adding one Note Book component 1 Press the Note Book component icon drag it to the screen then the Basic Properties dialog box of the Note Book component will pop up HIT OUL j a E Basic Property Display Setting Font Keyboard Setting Graphics Control Setting Display Setting Priority Nonnal Read Address TE PLC PT HMO No 0 Port Change E Station No 0 Area Varable LV Address 0 System Memory Data gt ord pee BIN isa Fomat Range DDDDD 0 10255 8 Use Variable Use index 3 174 Swap high byte and low byte J Make Read Address and Write Address the Same Unicode C Extended ASCII e Write Address PLC PT HMO No 0 Port COM1 Change Station No 0 Area Varable LWW Address U System Memo
252. ammable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 213 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 7 5 Bitmap T Bitmap Bitmap component is used to call and display the bg form graphics registered in the system graphics library or the graphics library in Project File Window Bitmap component is not controlled by the memory and doesn t have multiple states thus the bitmap corresponding to the graphics state specified by you at the designing time will always be displayed For the creation and usage of bitmap refer to 3 5 6 Bitmap 1 First press the Bitmap icon drag it to the screen then select the bitmap you want to use as shown below Bitmap property Graphics Display Setting Vector Graphics e Bitmap motor 1 bg METER_01 bg motor 1bg Use Orginal Size Import Graphics Save to System Graphics Library Graphics for Each 2 Press the OK button and then adjust the position and the size of the Bitmap in the screen as shown below 3 214 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 7 6 Vector Graphics w Vector Graphics VVector Graphics component is used to call and display the vg form graphics registered in the system graphics library or the graphics library in Project File Window The Vector Graphics component is not controlled by the memory and doesn t have multiple states thus the Vector Graphics corresponding to the graphics state specified
253. ample Take an example of the data with word address to be displayed Number of Hexadecimal Binary consecutive 0 at State Number least significant bits 0200 0000 0010 0000 0000 3 9 D ee Disconnected Host can be Masked of the Station No The disconnected Host can be masked with the communication error If the settings are valid all the PLC No Response for the device behind can be masked 1 Data Log XY Graph and Oscillograph Data Log XY Graph Oscillograph components have extended Properties as shown below a Border Grid and Background Color etc b Display Type of sampling point NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 361 3 Functions of NB Designer c Sampling cycle can use the Indirect Reference d The style of XY Graph are scatter plot and shaded plot e Sampling points can use the Indirect Reference f The Data Log can be saved to the PT and external memory simultaneously Basic Property Trend Graphics Channel Extended Property Save Data History Display Setting Channel Properties Channel 9 Display Style Line Style m Display LINE z Marker Properties 5 Marker NULL Marker Size 1 z E Marker Color v IZ Use Gid Lines 3 Colums 2 E BackgroundColor AV Indirect Reference of Sampling Cycle Indirect Reference of Number of Sampling Points PT wei PLCNo g JF Use Variable PT m
254. anacteaclusneaacece deen aceeadame eve eedevenecccecucesenudeescet 3 26 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 T 3 5 3 6 3 2 5 DW MENU aspe aa A ninoomcesaseesaeenetecwatceasnesetesteneebereans 3 29 3 2 6 Components VIS NU ecstatic ere ctp cee crecios debe were sled eaealesatw ne dee binaectedndeineecisdebaeeedeiedpuecetyreieansemeieenineeeces 3 29 3 2 7 ONS MODU o E AA E A A 3 30 3 2 8 OPHOU oe R ee ctiateoncedielueuedasauednareneenss 3 30 3 2 9 Window Ment s sciceieid nce brpen teravecioe oseusecnee ose seceie ienememce eeecharieg axSeenncenttepesecta asians aipeeuectecmediesaeeteeaceia 3 31 3 2 10 Help MSU iositenetncssnunossnacendanrnaaanineteotenusatsysuntaaneecebendedetennsunlucwrademennodseneneibetedancsanvelacsndtecnenbetcasendsas 3 32 NB Designer Software WiNGOW cccscccseeceeeceeneeeeeceeeeceeecaneeeaeseanseaaeseasseaeesanesenessansneeses 3 33 3 3 1 Project ibrary WV INOW sree ssa clans sasdanan nanain anne ENa E AE AAEE NEINAR TENRAN AEAEE ERR 3 33 3 3 2 Project File WVIAC OW ace cecc stan cescernacsetconatcyeccccssapepeccee ete sesrensesatertasiene iat arinaa k anaana aaan annaa aoi 3 37 3 3 3 gj 82 161 Work PAICE soare E ce eo eee mee eet re ee ee ee 3 37 3 3 4 OU OI Oe cctediss tee cisos cesta Soe cncn sei secede sence tact enantio dace E ERR 3 43 3 3 5 Component List VVINGOW sccccensetectennuacandccsnsceunanseens ce nenniialsanddainedasiantecesmehdniesinsisanduisdspdgebceonedenneonaaanes 3 4
255. and White Color Black and White Reverse Color Magnification 2 0 Print page __ r Prit Text Curent Page I Print Text M Print Analog Meter I Print Data Log I Print All Bitmap S puii A Print All Vector Map Print Background Colors Change Paper To Print Landscape Go to the Label tab and fill in the text to be displayed Go to the Graphics tab and select the Vector Graphics or Bitmap to display the state Go to the Control Setting tab and make the Security Setting and set the Triggering action Q KR Q N Press the OK button to adjust the position and size of the Function Key NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 197 pm T c 5 O ot fe S aa 9 er Z Asy uonouny Z Z 3 Functions of NB Designer Function Key 1 Switch Screen Descriptions of Switch Screen Change Pressing the Function Key will make the current Base Screen including all of the pop up Screens screens closed and the Base Screen with the specified Screen No will be switched to Frame 0 Frame 10 d Backward Pressing the Function Key can make the current Base Screen closed and return to the latest opened Base Screen which is effective only for the Base Screen For example when pressing the Function Key in Frame 10 after Frame 0 has switched to Frame 10 Frame 10 will be closed and the Screen will return to Frame 0 Frame
256. and maximum value of the data corresponding to each track line in Y direction Indirect Max Min Reference Sets the display range of channel track to variable and specifies the memory address for reading range value For the multiple channels the memory can be specified independently and The Specified Indirect memory Address is Y Min and The Specified Indirect memory Address 1 is Y Max 3 155 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer 4 Switch to the Save Data History tab and determine whether to check Save to Recipe Data Field Data Log property Ex Basic Property Trend Graphics Channel Extended Property Save Data History Display Setting Save to Extemal Device Storage Device USB DISK Restoration during outages Data Encryption End Address Export to CSV File l Save as ms inc ees Subfolder History Trend Storage Type Daily file Buffer Storage Default Storage Period 0 Note 1 No limit when storage period is zero 2 Subfolder name must be unique Indirect Subfolder Reterence PT Hmo PE o Area Variable yy Address p Data Format gy D Use Variable Word Length g Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 Save to Recipe Data Field After this option is checked and the Start Address is set the sampling data can be saved to the Recipe Data Field RW Data History for the Data Log is saved in the Start Address as the top and the me
257. ange Station No 0 a Station No 0 Area Variable LW T Area Va able LW X Address 0 System Memory Address 30 System Memory Data lt Word 5 Data Word s BIN l F t BIN l 1 Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 I Use Variable I Use Variable T Use index T Use index 3 172 Type JOG Subtrahend 0 Min Value 0 Delay Time 0 1 sec JOG Speed 0 1 sec Ignore Delay Time TT Indirect Reference PLC PT HMIO No 0 z Port COM1 T Change Station No 0 z Area Varable LW X Address 0 Data Fomat BIN Word Length 2 7 Use Variable Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 T NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer 10 After Save Compile Online Offline test or Download is selected the operation effect of the program is as shown below Sed 9 3 JUBAF EC 9 E When LB10 or LW30 is triggered for its corresponding triggering conditions is satisfied the related event information will be displayed The popup screen 4 and screen 5 for the 2 events registered in the Event Setting are the pop up screens to be ejected when the event is triggered Note 1 For the pop up screen it will pop up only when the event is confirmed 2 For the pop up screen for the event triggering it can be closed by the lt Close screen gt for the Function Key or the triggering function lt Write Data No gt 3 173 NB series Progr
258. ange The bit address of the copied component increases decreases in X Y directions Interval To select the address increment among the copied components Property When changing the property of the components select and double click the component which is necessary to change the property Also clicking the g 4 icon and displaying Property dialog box allow the property of the component edited NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 17 3 Functions of NB Designer Database Toolbar The correspondences of all the items i e the icons here in the toolbar to the options in the menus are shown as below Text library 7 Variable Table A Edit Logo Screen Import Recipe Data File Add Macro Alarm Setting Sound library Event Setting Import Graphics PLC Control Add Graphics Text Library To register the text string for the labels Variable Table To register the variable information Alarm Setting To memory the alarm information Event Setting To memory the event information PLC Control To register the PLC control configurations Add Graphics To create the new bitmap or Vector Graphics Import Graphics To import the bitmap or Vector Graphics Sound Library To add the audio file The NB Series does not support the function Add Macro To add the Macro Import Recipe Data File To import the recipe file Edit Logo Screen Click this but
259. anmanestnssunseammeeessmesnneearecneect 1 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 11 12 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 Read and Understand this Manual Please read and understand this manual before using the product Please consult your OMRON representative if you have any questions or comments Warranty and Limitations of Liability WARRANTY OMRON s exclusive warranty is that the products are free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one year or other period if specified from date of sale by OMRON OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION EXPRESS OR IMPLIED REGARDING NON INFRINGEMENT MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE PRODUCTS ANY BUYER OR USER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT THE BUYER OR USER ALONE HAS DETERMINED THAT THE PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR INTENDED USE OMRON DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY OMRON SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES LOSS OF PROFITS OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED ON CONTRACT WARRANTY NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY In no event shall the responsibility of OMRON for any act exceed the individual price of the product on which liability is asserted INNO EVENT SHALL OMRON BE RESPONSIBLE FOR WARRANTY REPAIR OR OTHER CLAIMS REGARDING THE
260. ard ee i C e C oo oo Other Input Methods Function Keys etc l Group 1 3 176 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer 5 Switch to the Graphics tab and select the Vector Graphics or bitmap representing the touching area and touching state 6 Switch to the Control Setting tab and make the Security Setting and set the Triggering action 7 Press the OK button to complete the setup of the Note Book component The editing of Note Book is as shown below Cursor E a Kai v operating area Ee Selection operating area Extended operating area Priority Normal J Swap high byte and low byte I Unicode V Make Read Address and Write Address the Same Extended ASCII Read Address Write Address PT meo Eo EET Hmo MC o Pot COM1 Port COM1 Change Change E Station No 0 E Station No 0 Area Variable LW Area Variable LW Address 0 I System Memory Address 0 I System Memory Daa pn Wod g Data Format Length Format Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 Word 94 BIN pi o I Use Variable I Use Variable 7 Use index I Use index The specific Properties of the Note Book are set as shown below LW 9170 is used to realize page turning of the Note Book and its value represents the start line of the input area The user can change this value to realize the display of the No
261. ard Setting Graphics Control Setting Display Setting Priority Normal Swap high byte and low byte I Make Read Address and Write Address the Same Sed uonouny J Switch Screens Change screen 0 Framell Key Button Unicode y a Map Key hi 3 1 Make the following settings after adding two Text Input components D EA F E ae k 7 E f i Unicode Address Word Length y uonouny Z 2 2 Add the Function Key and set the character to be input 3 Add one Enter key i e select Key Button Enter in the Key Button tab Function Key Label Graphics Control Setting Display Setting Switch Screens Change screen 0 FrameD z Key Button Enter a Map Key id 4 The final effect is as shown below Unicode function currently only supports Chinese English Japanese and the common symbols NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 203 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 Execute Macro After this function is selected pressing the Function Key can execute the specified existing Macro code Refer to 3 9 3 Macro Triggering Page 3 268 4 Touch Calibration After this function is selected pressing the Function Key can make the system go to PT Touch Calibration Screen thus allowing the users to perform touch calibrations to the PT 5 Clear Event After this function is selected pressing the Function Key can
262. ars Undo The latest operation can be cancelled by using this function and the screen will return to the state before this operation Pressing J icon or selecting Undo in the Edit menu can cancel the latest operation Redo Using this function after performing Undo operation can restore the Undo operation done just now It just needs to press icon or select Redo in the Edit menu The operations supported by Undo and Redo are as follows 1 Dragging a part or a functional part from the Project Library Window 2 Drawing a component 3 Moving the object 4 Adjusting the object size 5 Performing all the operations with the Component Edit Toolbar 8 Selecting the object border color 9 Selecting the object filled color 1 1 7 Selecting the object filling style 0 Performing Set Top Layer and Set Bottom Layer operations 1 6 Selecting the line width line style or arrow yPerforming the Group and Ungroup operations 3 10 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer 12 Performing cut copy paste and deletion 13 Performing the Repeat operation An example of operation in which a bit switch component is added to the PT screen and Undo or Redo is performed to the addition is provided as below Press Undo Then press Redo Note The software only su
263. ase Toolbar or the Alarm Setting in the Project Database allows an Alarm Setting dialog box to pop up No Type PTNo Address inform Buas wely 8 4 l Ma r Add Delete Delteat Mody impot Export 0K NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 243 3 Functions of NB Designer 2 Select the Add button to add the setting or select the Modify button to modify the existing setting Triggered PT HMIO bd Type 0 z PLC Address PT HMIO PLCNo 0 Area Variable L W B Address 10 1 I Use Variable i as ii Open Variable T able Attribute Trigger C ON OFF V Use Buzzer Buzzing Time 1 Sec Message Message Water level is too high Use Text Library one Text Library Language Language Font Use Vector Font Font Sound Use Sound Select Sound Play Sound Stop Play LOK a Cancel Descriptions of Alarm Information Property Triggered PT Select one PT to specify the Alarm Setting when multiple PTs were registered to the project PLC Address Specifies the bit address of the memory that triggers the read of the alarm Property When the specified bit address is ON one piece of alarm information is generated OFF When the specified bit address is OFF one piece of alarm information is generated Use Buzzer When the alarm information is triggered the buzzer will be enabled The Buzzing Time can be set with the unit of secon
264. ation No PT Hmo fe ge Area Variable LW Area Varnable LW z Port COM1 7 Change Station No 0 Address 0 7 System Memory Address 9000 System Memory Area Variable LV Daa BIN Word Data pny Wod z Format Length Format Length Address 0 Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 Data Format BIN X 7 Use Variable I Use Variable Word Length 2 v 7 Use index J Use Variable Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 T Use index Basic Property Command Button Label Graphics Control Setting Display Setting Type Subtract value Subtrahend 5 Min Value 0 9d pue d usemjeq ejeq sdiosy Jo peojumoqd peo d ZL Indirect Reference PLC PT HMIO No Port COM1 7 Change Station No 0 Area Variable LW X Address 0 Data Format BIN Word Length 2 X I Use Variable Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 337 3 Functions of NB Designer 6 Show which group is selected currently Later create another two Command Button components with address of LWO for both of them and Setting Mode of Subtract value and Add value respectively And no graphics is needed Overlay the component of Add value on Down button which was created at the step 4 Overlay the component of Subtract Value on Up button which was created at step 4 The value of LWO will vary accordingly and it will display the group where the current recipe data loca
265. ay Setting Priority Normal Read Address Write Address PLC PLC W PT HMO Wo 0 PT A yo x b Pot COMI Pot COMI N Change i Change x a Station No 0 a Station No 0 Area Vanable LB X Area Vanable LB X Address 0 System Memory Address 0 I System Memory Data Word E Data Word m es BIN 1 pa BIN 1 N Format Range DDDD 0 9999 ER 7 Use Variable Use Variable w Use index Use index w 5 Write Address Refers to the bit address corresponding to On or Off state controlled by the Bit Button component 2 Switch to the Bit Button tab Set ON when Screen is open Set OFF when Screen is open Set ON when Screen is closed Set OFF when Screen is closed Set ON when Screen is maximized Set OFF when Screen is maximized Types and Functions of Bit Button Component Type Descriptions Set The specified bit address will turn On when the Bit Button component is pressed This state will continue even if the button is released Reset The specified bit address will turn Off when the Bit Button component is pressed This state will continue even if the button is released Alternate The specified bit address will change once On gt Off Off gt On Switched back and forth when the Bit Button component is pressed each time Momentary The specified bit address will turn On only when the Bit Button component is being pressed Similarly the bit address will turn Of
266. ay length of the value in unsigned short type cannot be specified to 4 The array length of the value in int type or float type cannot be specified to 2 The specification of the function is different from the one of the standard C language NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer In the example below the Properties of LWO_R are set as follows Hame Lo A FT HMD Storage Format signed short r PLE No Alea Lit Address l z Format Aange OODOD 0 10255 Data Format Word Length 1 T Ara Variable Fa Read Write Arap Length ox Cancel i D Q c 5 O ct 5 Here specify signed int from Storage Format Read from R W LW from Area and 0 from Address respectively After the specification click the OK button then this variable will be seen in Macro Variable Table macro_0 c window Macro Variable Table macro_0 c Storage For Name signed short LWO_R LW sCRRead WWrite No Note The variables used in the Macro are necessary to be registered to the Macro Variables Table in advance Specify LW1_R and make its address to LW1 then set the address of LW2_W to LW2 by the same method Note When the Storage Format is set to double the Word Length will automatically become 4 i e this variable will occupy LW2 to LW5 After t
267. be ssinccicseccedansnesxnde wei dbintonebedae esoagesenct 3 68 3 5 9 INNS ersssee sesso tee ec sry acts tset dees ened antec tesa E E 3 70 3 5 10 Basic Properties Of Component ccccscccceseeccsececeececsuececsueeeceeeceseueessaeesseeessaueessausessaeessaes 3 73 3 5 11 Control Setting OF COMP ONG IN ice ncczncctevcexacovascocnteraedesaseteneavacatevecias sce weqianeedscqxacencsedeaeexsederucguedatae 3 74 3 5 12 Display Setting of ON OING N race cts aes see eee scien dace se eseece aa aaa a aE aaRS 3 78 PANS TEE AEE A IA E EN AA O IA NE E EEE E A AE A NE AA ET 3 80 3 6 1 BEBEU erase eE E EEEE 3 80 3 6 2 SEET N S etn eter T E EERE E E A OEA P A N EA E T E A E P E ee 3 83 3 6 3 BN a ose E E E ES E aeseeaseannasoequeagtasesssecoas 3 86 3 6 4 Command BURO assenso e ee ee eee eee 3 87 3 6 5 NOVO ANNO E E E A T A A sere sca sone AEAN A AS AA EA A 3 92 3 6 6 NY OW esea E S E S E 3 94 3 6 7 A IN eee E E E E E E E EEE 3 98 3 6 8 Moving ONION AD sete eet oat etic sense ceeeneete edie so apa ciestaeeieewncmegsaencasttoet Seexnet tees nance teteaeateanatl 3 107 3 6 9 ARNI AL OU ge soe wt aps cee vind ecienve tein geen steeds E eesestene eo neance eye 3 112 9610 NumbDeEr MPU asirese E AREE E E E RARAN REPERA 3 114 3 6 11 Number Display issserisiisesci ee neem en ele eae ae eee E KaKa eee 3 120 Cs Lat TONNU emanate itera ene E ees eee E ee eer ee ee 3 123 IOo TFDS 1 Sone ene ee ee ne Cee ne ene ene nn ee ee eee ere eee 3 127 3 6 14 Level GUO ararci
268. bit to be released of the forced state Descriptions From the above results it can be concluded that the difference between W_FORCED_RELEASE and W_RELEASE_STATUS is the former sets the value of address bit to 0 or 1 and then releases its forced status while the latter only releases the forced status of address bit without changing its value NB Series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 6 Descriptions of New Functions Added into NBLILI TW01B 6 2 System Parameters 6 2 1 PT System Information Setting Security Level Setting User Permission Setting Event History Setting Print Setting COM1 Setting COM2 Setting EtemalMemoy PT Task Bar PT Extended Property Network Setting i IP Address 192 168 250 1 Communication Setting Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 FTP Password Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 388888 Display Setting Horizontal l a Display mode Field Bus Setting Vertical 1 Save Screenshot to Extemal Memory P N wn lt Gi r D USBI 3 D D 3 D er D T ld c 9 Descriptions of PT Tab Network IP Address Sets the IP Address of PT Setting Subnet Mask Sets the subnet mask of PT Default Gateway Sets the gateway for the LAN with the connection of PT Communication Setting When the PT communicates with the PLC or controllers through the Ethernet this option is used for set the communication protocol for Ethernet and th
269. ble J Use Variable I Use Variable I Use index I Use index I Use index T Use index 3 Create one Text Input component and one Number Input component to display and change the recipe data in PLC Basic Property Font Keyboard Setting Graphics Control Setting Display Setting Basic Property Numeric Data Font Keyboard Setting Graphics Control Setting Display Setting Priority Normal J Swap high byte and low byte I Unicode Priority Normal JV Make Read Address and Write Address the Same Extended ASCII IV Make Read Address and Write Address the Same Read Address Write Address Read Address e Write Address al PE E a PC a ate m PIC PT HMIO No 0 PT HMIO No 0 PT HMIO No 0 PT HMIO No 0 Port COM1 Port COM1 Port COM1 Port COM1 Change Change m Change z Change a Station No 0 m Station No 0 Station No 0 m Station No 0 Area Variable 4X z Area Variable RWI X Area Variable 4X T Area Variable RWI X Address 100 System Memory Address 100 7 System Memory Address 104 I System Memory Address 4 System Memory Data z Word S Data z Word Data Word 1 Data Word 1 al i 4 a 4 Format BIN por Format BIN Length Format Range DDDDD 1 65535 Format Range DDDDDD 0 261000 Format Range DDDDD 165535 Format Range DDDDDD 0 261000 I Use Variable I Use Variable Use Variable I Use Variable I7 Use index I Use index I Use index I Use index
270. blem when starting the NB Designer execute the software in com patible mode Right click on the icon of NB Designer exe and select Property Then select Compatibility tab and check the Execute the program in compatible mode check box in com patible mode option Select Windows XP Service Park 3 from the drop down list and click OK c If you startup the NB Designer for the first time right click NB Designer exe in the folder which you specified when installing the program and click Execute as the administrator to start the software 2 2 2 Uninstallation Procedure Perform Uninstall or change a program in Windows Note When using new version software to update a project created with software of an old version backup necessarily the project before update Precautions for Correct Use In order to use the product correctly when running the software do not perform definitely update restoration uninstallation and reinstallation NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 2 3 2 Installation and Startup of NB Designer 2 3 Startup amp Quit This section provides a brief for startup and quit of NB Designer Select Start All Programs OMRON NB Designer NB Designer The startup can also be realized by double clicking the shortcut icon on the desktop e The user should run this program as an administrator in Windows Vista or Windows 7 operating system e When the NB Designe
271. button to exit from the NBManager 4 2 4 Clear Data The option in Clear Data are consistent with the corresponding options in Select Section of NB Designer After checking the required options press the Execute button SSNBManager So Communication Setting Communication Method USB port IP NULL Port NULL Select Data LOGO Setting Decompile Operatior Download Project Files Show LOGO Hide LOGO a Pass Th h BB Pas Through Download LOGO Download Recipe Download FAW Data Recipe Editor Clear Data Clear Recipe Clear Data History Clear Event History l Clear FAW Data l Clear ERW Data NB Series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 4 9 gt N O O a O D ie ct O gt eyed Je8ID V C V 4 Functions of NBManager Select Data PT Information Project Data Hiig N O O Fine File O LOGO File O Clear Recipe Clear Event 0 History O Clear Data History Clear ER Dat Download Project c program files ormron nb designerproject car car pkg I Clear ee O Clear FAW Data Download to O USB1 Communication Method USB part IP NULL PORT NULL Port NULL pps NULL Download 4 10 NB Series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 4 Functions of NBManager 4 3 Upload Operation Upload Operate is mainly used for the
272. by clicking the Font on the right side of Graphic Font 3 22 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer Transport Font In this mode both Vector Font and Bitmap Font can be used and the font size alignment method or color etc can be changed Message Display Setting Message Display Setting Message Message Text a Tet p C Graphic Font Font Graphic Font Font Transport Font Transport Font Text Library Text Library Currently Displayed Language Currently Displayed Language Language 1 g gt Language 1 E gt v N Font Type m Font Type Nector font Bitmap font C Vector font Bitmap font p c Font Attribute Font Attribute 7 Font DFNB EN z Font DFNB EN Size 16 v Position Left z Size 16 v Position Left X Color Color Language English USA Color Color Language Engiish usa Italic l Bold T Italic T Bold oo N Copy Font Attribute To All Languages Copy Font Attribute To All Languages do lt iq lt Cc Load Graphic The icon can be used to add the graphic when you create a new bitmap For the creation of the bitmap refer to 3 5 6 Bitmap Page 3 63 Screen Toolbar Eo Eg 4E 1 Common wine gt se ag fox Add Screen To add the Edit Window Delete Screen To delete the current
273. c A brief provides of the Macro using the array variables The array variables can be defined only for the one dimensional array O i PT Ee Z HMO whe E macro_O c fee LE teste For example Create one array variable with the length of 8 The definition of variable is shown as below iii i ii is 0 then codetype is BIN is 1 then codetype is BCD 14 return value 1 Operation success 15 ii i i i i i 0 Operation fail 16 I7 eg read the value of local lw200 and write it to the lw202 with the codetype BIN 18 i The code is 19 l 20 short buf 2 0 21 i ReadLocal LW 200 2 void buf 0 22 i WriteLocal LW 202 2 void buf 0 23 et 24 int MacroEntry 25 26 Param 0 0 27 Param 1 1 28 Param 2 2 29 Param 3 3 30 Param 4 4 31 Param 5 5 32 Param 6 6 33 Param 7 7 34 return 0 35 36 X 4 mM p Macro Variable Table test c x Storage For Name PLC No Area Address Word R W Arra Array length signed short Param LW 0 1 Read Write Yes 8 1 Place 8 Number Display components LWO to LW7 with the consecutive addresses in Frame 0 and make the timer to execute test c 2 Perform the test and the values displayed in Number Display components are same as the values assigned in the Macro NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 9 2 Macro and Specification of Operation with
274. cape arc and circle Parts 7 l Function Key Used to provide functions such as Switch Screens Keyboard Function Execute Macro Touch Calibration Clear Event and Notepad etc The function key cannot be controlled by the communication address so the execution of specified function needs to be activated by touching this component SI7 uoNoUNY J9UBISeq gN Z Y gt O Alarm Display When the bit address specified with Alarm Setting matched to the trigger condition display the specified message The message will be displayed in loopy moving way at the site where the alarm display is placed The alarm information will continue to scroll until this bit address is switched to the non alarm state Timer When the specified duration is passed other functions such as the Macro execution writing the value or the data transmission are performed Bitmap Used to call and display the bg form graphics in the system graphics library or the graphics library in project file window The graphics in the formats such as jpg omp gif png can be imported into the bitmap and displayed Vector Graphics Call and display the graphics in vg format in system graphics library displayed or project file window Vector Graphics can be generated from the file in JPG BMP GIF or PNG formats Notepad Draw the texts or graphics manually and freely in the specified area Data Transmission Transm
275. car pkg O Clear FR Data Download to o USB1 Communication Method Serial pot IF NULL PORT NULL Part com pps 115200 If there are several PTs in your project firstly select the No corresponding to the destination PT to be downloaded and then click the Download button NB Series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 4 5 4 Functions of NBManager Download Recipe Firstly click the Download Recipe button and select the pre edited file with the suffix of rcp then click the Open button to perform the download x NBManager Communication Setting Communication Method Serial pot IF MULL Pot NULL Fort Ho COM a Select Data Download Project Fil Download LOGO w J System Operation Get Version Decompile Operation J HM Jnewrcp m image Pass Through Communication sound Download Recipe tar Ji temp vg Download FRM Data 4 IT F 0 Open as read only Download LOGO Click the Download LOGO button and select the edited project i e the file with the suffix of logo in PT folder under car folder and then click the Open button to perform the download me NEBManager Communication Setting Communication Method Serial pot IF MULL Port NOLL Fort Ho c m Le System Operation Get Version Decompile Ope
276. cation time for the Macro time of the Macro external value is N times as long as instruction the default read write w a gt a 2 on o o 9 lt m r D 3 D lt 9536 The multiplication factor of the If it is specified to N the maximum communication communication time for writing operation time for writing operation by the data transmission by the data transmission component component is N times as long as the default read write 3 11 3 Nonvolatile Local Word LW10000 10255 GGZOL OOOOLMT PLOM 2907 B e OAUON E L L RTC Addresses Comments 10000 RTC second BIN code with effective value ranging from 0 to 59 read write 10001 RTC minute BIN code with effective value ranging from 0 to 59 read write 10002 RTC hour BIN code with effective value ranging from 0 to 23 read write 10003 RTC day BIN code with effective value ranging from 0 to 31 read write 10004 RTC month BIN code with effective value ranging from 0 to 12 read write 10005 RTC year BIN code with effective value ranging from 0 to 9999 read write 10006 RTC week BIN code with effective value ranging from 0 to 6 read write Description of RTC Users can use the related Component to display the time Pay attention to the effective range For example second can not be written as 78 BIN otherwise RTC will continue in sequence 78 79 80 which may result in unexpecte
277. cise acrcconsssecrercachers tastes siaeidcsinnieiine ies emied ones ncemeecetuciinhbie sensiod gvedoaaanpededaioddenbeasedosecannersasaiencnael 3 128 3 6 15 Analog 21 ee ch ee oh eee eee renee cee meer anne Neon a eee ee eannee eenneenr EErEE nnr renren 3 139 3G Indirect o ChC I resect Aras cence care cts vctasecnisseuiam semtareertneuetidynvaceuteiiacsonecamoedancteeeacuensieenmatetinns aeracuancniuse 3 143 cAr 0 161 ve cs f 9 ne ee ean eT ee 3 146 OM PATI tees E ise se es esl nse eee ee eee eee eee eee 3 148 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 MO a an sense agree weise stag cbuseeyen ensued pactnaaces seston ceaseneb cua cacsuaaeenesuaweneoseansescquentecuecs A 3 150 3E2200 gc o 6s See eee ee ee ec eee ee ee ee eee ae ee ee ee eee eee 3 160 2G SOAD eese A R ee eee eee Pe On ere eee ee ee eee 3 160 loa a 2 b 2 ae ee A E ee res ee ee ee ee 3 164 SN aac steers cere aac rast aa icine aa eee cote AE E EE E E 3 167 3 6 24 Note seca Sette epee ccnp pesreins oeisere ona tienen cere bee am cigs oars nee tee ea seo osecetee iene EEEren Eeen 3 174 3 6 23 Word Neon Lamp aed cee ctcssete dence nach act ave tncoecetee nE arer raderer r aein ar oii 3 185 3620 BCNGON Lamp esses ERA R A E EEEE EEE RTEA 3 186 dO 7 Touch 0 8 sner a aa aa 3 187 Spe TBE e A E A E eee eee eee 3 189 20a Daa AEO e E E cee eee 3 190 Sat UCONN PANS siise a ESEETO 3 196 3 7 1 E PEE EET A AE A EA E E A A E A E 3 196 3 7 2
278. clear the event information stored in the recipe memory 6 Notepad Functions of Message Board Function Pen Pressing the Function Key means the current function is the pen in the Notepad Eraser Pressing the Function Key means the current function is the eraser in the Notepad Clear Pressing the Function Key can clear the contents in the area selected Block by the mouse of the Notepad Pen Color For setting the pen color Pen Size For setting the pen size from the eight size available Clear Removing all the contents in the Notepad For the procedures of operation method about the Notepad refer to 3 7 7 Notepad Page 3 216 There are four methods to clear the event information a By clicking the Function Key component to clear the event information after the Clear Event option in Function Key tab in Function Key Property dialog box being checked The event information data stored in the recipe memory can be cleared by this method b By restarting the PT to clear the event information after the value of special system memory LW10015 being set to 0 The event information data stored in the recipe memory can be cleared by this method c Check in the Clear Event History option in NBManager dialog box and execute the download the event information will be cleared The event information data stored in the recipe memory and the event information files stored in the external memory can be cleared simultaneously by this
279. closed at the same time The bit turns ON when the keyboard is displayed from the component placed at the upper left of the screen and the bit turns OFF when the keyboard is closed from it Read The bit turns ON when the keyboard is displayed from the component placed at the lower left of the screen and the bit turns OFF when the keyboard is closed from it Read The bit turns ON when the keyboard is displayed from the component located in the left of the screen and the bit turns OFF when the keyboard is closed from it The bit turns ON when the screen is displayed and the bit turns OFF when the screen is closed Read The bit turns ON when the screen is displayed and the bit turns OFF when the screen is closed Read 3 319 w n gt a 2 on o o i lt O r D 3 D O lt gq Wg 12907 L LL 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 320 9068 9069 Keyboard display bits Keyboard is 9080 9081 9093 9094 9100 9110 9116 9117 9118 9120 9121 9124 9129 9130 9131 9135 9136 9137 9138 9139 displayed from the component located in the screen Keyboard display bit Keyboard is displayed from the component located in the upper half of the screen Keyboard display bit Keyboard is displayed from the component located in the lower half of the screen Increase backlight brightness Decrease backlight brightness Switch input mode from Pi
280. components created by the user in PT screen Only after this option is checked the downloaded project can work normally LOGO File Download the initial screen LOGO screen displayed when starting PT If the update of the LOGO screen is needed check in the LOGO file check box and click Download to download the screen NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 351 3 Functions of NB Designer Editing LOGO Screen Press the amp icon in the toolbar or select and click the PT in the Project Work Space to display the Edit Window as below pte oe ene ee oe ee ee ee ana ee Project Library Window Connector PT PLE Parts gE Eit Button gt Bit Lamp Bit Switch im Direct Screen 5 i Command Button Word Lamp aul Word Switch Scroll Bar You can apply the optional LOGO screen And if you click the 4 icon in the toolbar the following dialog box will appear Find the required LOGO graphic and click it to open it 3 352 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 After the compilation check LOGO File and then click the Download button Select PT zal Information Download Project cAcarcar pkg Communication Method USB port ip NULL PORT NULL Pot NULL pes NULL 3 Functions of NB Designer gt Select Data Project Data O i C Clear Recipe Clear Event o History C Clear Data History O Clear
281. connection 9 pin type i PLC Series connectable to NB Series through the Ethernet Unit PLC Series Specifications CP Series Connecting through the Ethernet option board CP1W CIF41 CS Series Connecting through the Ethernet Unit CS1W ETN21 or CS1W EIP21 CJ1 Series Connecting through the Ethernet Unit CJ1W ETN21 or CJ1W EIP21 CJ2 Series Connecting through the Ethernet Unit CJ1W ETN21 or CJU1W EIP21 A 2 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 Appendices Units at the host side which can be connected using the serial port of the NB Unit in the RS 232C mode through Host Link PLC CPU Unit with built in Host Options required for Series Link function units boards connection eena o C Series C200HE CPU42 C200HE CPU32 42 C200HW C200HE CPU42 Z C200HE CPU32 42 Z2 COM02 04 05 06 V 1 C200HG CPU43 63 C200HG CPU33 43 53 63 C200HW C200HG CPU43 63 Z C200HG CPU33 43 53 63 Z COM02 04 05 06 V 1 C200HX CPU44 64 C200HX CPU34 44 54 64 C200HW C200HX CPU44 64 65 85 Z C200HX CPU34 44 54 64 65 85 Z COM02 04 05 06 V 1 CPM1 10 20CDR U CPM1 CIF0O1 CPM1A 10 20 30 40CDU U CPM1 CIF01 CPM2A 30 40 60CDUIO U CPM1 CIF0O1 When a peripheral port is connected CPM2C 10 20000000 0 1 CQM1H CPU11 21 51 61 CQM1H CPU51 61 CQM1H SCB41 2 CS1G CPU42 43 44 45 V1 CS1G CPU42 43 44 45 V1 CS1W SCU21 V1 CS1H CPU63 64 65 66 67 V1 CS Series CS1H CPU63 64 65 66 67 V1 CS1W SCB21 41 V1 CS1G CPU42H 43H 44H 4
282. creen is shown as below Be ESR vew seeen paw Components Too Qpton Window Heb ELETT EEEN GauTe R 1 HBO veca Sio m My ems iA PPAR at HICSS SS BHT biascals FOC OOCOGOODE ew kd le Pikeke ae em m og PRE ore FQm Sm Bh BARA B 9 RRB ERSRRERS ZRENZ Ii OBih a 2 C NBProject car car nbp 3 DemoProject_NB7W nbp 4 C Program Files car nbp Exit Exit the NB Designer software Note When Free editing multiple project screens adds the multiple project simultaneous opening function thus making the copy of the component in the editing screens of two projects available Modifies the zoom limit of the screen thus making 25 50 75 100 150 200 and 300 available The uniform zoom can be realized by dragging the mouse when the multiple components are selected simultaneously in the same screen NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 9 Snu N Z 3 nus ela b c 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 2 2 Edit Menu Undo Ctr Redo Ctr Find Replace Ctrl F Cut Ctrl X ia Copy Ctre Paste Ctr v Nudge Alignment Size Order Group Ctrl G UnGroup Ctrl U Horizontal Even Spacing Ctr R Vertical Even Spacing Ctrl L Align Horizontal Center Ctrl I Align Vertical Center Colo Flip Horizontally Ctrl B Flip Vertically Ctr k Rotate 90 Degree Ctrl Select All Ctrl A Show Grid Align with Grid Set Grid Spacing Lock Position Reset Toolb
283. creenshot to Extended Memory supports the offline test indirect online test and direct online test All the screenshot pictures got by this test method are stored in the disk usb1 scr file under the installation folder of NB Designer software ih oo O fe 3 D e 5 D 3 3 fe lt 3 D rr To save the screenshot to the external memory it needs to make settings in the PT tab in PT Property dialog box v Save Screenshot to Ectemal Memory f USBI Asy uonouny 9 The rmp pictures stored in the external memory is named in storage time form i e yyyy mm dd hh mm ss ms by default such as 2010 09 01 10 12 50 203 bmp But the picture name can be customized by the user through the system memory LW9470 to control the prefix text string of the graphics file For example if the text contents of 16 words from LW9470 to LW9485 are Version No No 20100001 then the bmp file will be stored with the name of Version No No 20100001 2010 09 01 10 15 28 421 bmp Note After the Save Screenshot to Extended Memory operation is performed for about 1 minute the external memory can be removed to ensure the successful storage of the screenshot NB Series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 6 15 6 Descriptions of New Functions Added into NBLILI TW01B Import Export Function Function Key Label Graphics Control Setting
284. ct Online Operation then the PLC data can be monitored or modified after the successful online Tatatled CE Progranaor Ros PLCI NewPrograat Section Dzagraa we OSM SR BOS aes ore Beas suo TALLI a QQA HSER Bw Fa Ritwww L OORL SF SH gt Marr PARRET REPED X 2387 Sni ANAPENDA s w 2 44 SS o Be wexProject GP Detit CPiX Offline Symbols Settings A Memory A roga BB detreg a 00 Section END zi 4 Project xis Bane idress or Value Comment For Kelp press Fi HewPLC1 et 0 Node 0 Offline rung 0 100 Classic Selecting Stop pass through communication will make Pass through communication stopped successfully dialog box pop up H Precautions for Correct Use e During the Communications with the Pass Through Communications NB unit can be accessed only within the system and the operations of the user project will be stopped e Besides the path of the Communications to communicate with PLC and others the Communi cations path which controls the Pass Through Communications should be prepared 4 18 NB Series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 Maintenance and Abnormality Handling This section describes the maintenance and check to prevent the abnormality occurrence and the handling of the abnormalities occurred in NB Unit 971 NiaINtCNANCe ssncancictetivreiecs twee nape be wee eee eee eee 5 2 5 2 Checking and Cleaning
285. ctively When the values in the position memory of PLC Read Address 1 change the Vector Graphics or bitmap will jump to the next position in the preset path ahii Q i Process of adding one Animation component res 1 Click the Animation component icon and drag it on the screen 2 Set the path and moving point for the component in the PT left click the mouse one by one on each moving node and right click the mouse after the setup of path and moving nodes to complete the setup 3 Enter the parameters in Basic Properties tab in the Animation Property dialog box Basic Property Animation Label Graphics Display Setting Area Variable LW X Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 Use Variable Use index Priority Normal Read Address Write Address PLC m cu PIC j PT A o O PT HMIO w oO Port COM1 Port COM1 Change m Change E Station No 0 Station No 0 Address 0 I System Memory Address 0 System Memory Data Word Data Word BIN 2 oe BIN Area Variable LW Use Variable Use index Read Address Refers to the word address controlling the state and label of the Animation Component in PLC and Read Address 1 refers to the word address controlling the poison of the Animation component The data in the memory will be converted into BIN or BCD format Refer to the Word Lamp component Here Word Length is limited to 2 3 112 NB series Programmable Terminal
286. d Message Inputs the contents of alarm setting to be displayed Clicking Font can set the Font and the related attributes Use Text Library Determines whether to use the contents logged in the Text Library For the use of the Library refer to 3 8 1 Text Library Language When using multi language Text Library you can select the language here and click Font to set the font attributes corresponding to text in each kind of language respectively 3 244 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 Press the OK button to make the alarm setting displayed in the list After the alarm setting is logged the existed alarm setting can be edited by Delete or modified by Modify buttons Press the OK button to complete the logon of the alarm setting Address information Alarm Message HMI0 FLCO 0 LW B 10 1 OF water le 1 HMIO PLCO 0 Ly B 0 0 Off Tempere P o 2 D O r O D r D o D m D I A Note In order to perform the communications effectively specifying the continuous address is recommended as read address of the alarm information For example when you specify the continuous addresses from M100 to M199 whole the addresses from M100 to M199 can be read in the communications only once Buas wely 8 Event Alarm Type The Event Alarm is divided into 256 types i e O to 255 in the NB Designer Event Alarm and Alarm Di
287. d After Trigger Address is selected it needs to specify the address to be the trigger Switch to the Timer Function tab Execute Macro The Macro code to be executed for each timing reached to the time set by the executing cycle Refer to 3 9 3 Macro Triggering Page 3 268 Data Transmission The data transmission will be performed The data will be transformed from the specified addresses as Source Data to the specified addresses as Destination Address for each timing reached to the time set by the executing cycle Source Address Refers to the starting address that the data will be transferred from Destination Address Refers to the starting destination address that the data will be transferred to Memory Type Used to select among Word or Bit for the memory type to be transmitted NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer Data Length Refers to the length of the data to be transferred Timer Timer Function Display Setting Execute Macro _ Data Transmission Memory Type Bi Data Length 29 Source Address Destination Address PT HMIO PLCNo 9 PT mo PLCNo go Port COM1 I Use Variable Port COM1 Use Variable oo I Change Station Number 9 z Change Station Number 9 is Area Variable p Area Varable 1p z Address 20 Address 40 2 fe Data Format BIN Data Format BIN 3 v
288. d Rate Double word 10038 10039 COM 2 Data Bit 10040 COM 2 Parity Bit 10041 COM 2 Stop Bit 10042 COM 2 Station No PT Station No 10043 COM 2 PLC timeout duration 10045 COM 2 Protocol Time Out 1 10047 COM 2 Protocol Time Out 2 Note If the address exceeds 10 000 the address cannot be modified during simulation But the read operation is available For example the Number Input component with the address of LW10005 will be displayed as 2006 during the test and it can t be modified to the other value during the test But it can be modified only after it is downloaded to the PT 3 326 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 11 4 System Information Table Address Descriptions Word Bit 9296 System Error It is system error which means the error occurs inside the PT 1 PLC Response Error PLC response error PLC responds with one piece of unexpected information which may caused by the read or write command Please check if the device functions well 2 PLC No Response cc pp d PLC No Response the 3 groups of numbers following PLC No Response represent the PT No PLC Station No and Serial Port No respectively w a gt a 2 on oO o O lt m r D 3 D O lt Reserved by system 4 Socket Connect Error Connection with the PLC and others failed Check if the devices function normally 5 Socket COMM Error An e
289. d error Others The following addresses will be valid after the restart They are retained even if power failure occurs in readable or writable addresses System parameter settings Addresses Descriptions Comments 10010 No of Initial Screen It ranges from 0 to 32767 10011 Screen saver Backlight 0 Disable Screen saver 1 to 600 minutes enabled 10012 Buzzer 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 10013 Common Sheet Pop up Screen 0 Normal 1 At the top of all the other screens NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 325 3 Functions of NB Designer 10014 0 At the bottom of Base Screen 1 At the top of Base Screen 10015 It ranges from 0 to 65535 If it is set to 0 the event data will be cleared after the restart 10016 0 PLC LW 1 Internal RTC 10017 It ranges from 0 to 3 10018 Security level Addresses Comments 10022 Password 0 Double word is occupied 10024 Password 1 Double word is occupied 10025 ee 10026 Password 2 Double word is occupied 10118 Password 3 to 15 Double word is occupied x 13 Initial Communications Parameters Addresses Comments 10030 IP Address of the NB Units If it is changed restart is needed 10033 i e IP Address 192 168 250 1 LW10030 1 LW10031 250 LW10032 168 LW10033 192 10034 Port Number of the NB Unit If it is changed restart is needed 10035 Reserved by system 10036 COM 2 operation mode 0 RS 232 1 RS 422 2 RS 485 10037 COM 2 Bau
290. d the Transparency to 0 as shown below Ee RE E iframe E Qn P M B a Title No 10 l Protect key mapping on common sheet screen Switch to the lowest security level when screen closed Screen Attributes Keyboard Security Level 0 Position a_n i 1 Background Color X 0 Yo Background Color J Pattem Color Width 200 Height 200 a 0 z Sheet Screen 2 n a v 3 n a Popup screen Type Ee A V Tracking Modal Frame Color 7 Clopi NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer Press the function key and pop up Frame 10 will cover the function key which is caused by the transparency of 0 for Frame 10 as shown below o FN ey a D 5 O O D o r e When the transparency is 20 G RAE Ormen EA P M B Screen Title Frame10 No 10 J Protect key mapping on common sheet screen Switch to the lowest security level when screen closed Screen Attributes Keyboard Securty Level 0 Position M Background Color x 0 Yo Background Color J Pattem Color A sad0lg U89IDS Z y Perform the offline test and press the function key the displayed effect is shown as below NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 51 3 Functions of NB Designer e When the transparency is 80 Perform the offline test and the e
291. d to The advantages of Oscillograph are as follows The user can monitor several waveforms that don t need to be recorded for the long period and no background communication burden will be brought Meanwhile the user can use the Sampling Rate function provided by the Oscillograph the combination with the PLC allows to change the frequency of sampling point instead of only being limited on the frequency of 1s sampling point Process of adding one Oscillograph component 1 Press the Oscillograph component icon drag it to the screen then the Basic Properties dialog box of the Oscillograph component will pop up Priority Normal Read Address Port COM1 C E Change Station No 0 Area Variable LW Data Word Fema BIN para Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 Use Variable Use index 3 160 Basic Property Scope Chart Channel Extended Property Display Setting Address 0 l System Memory Write Address PT HMIO 0 Port COM1 Change Station No 0 Area Vanable LW Address 0 l System Memory Data gy Word Format Length Use Variable Use index NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer Read Address Refers to the word address of PLC corresponding to the 1st graph And the word address corresponding to the 2nd graph is Read Address 1 and the 3rd graph is Read Address 2 and so
292. ddress of the value displayed by the component Address Refers to the first address of the word address corresponding to the Analog Meter component Word Length 1 and 2 are available for the read address NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 139 3 Functions of NB Designer 2 Switch to the Analog Meter tab Basic Property Analog Meter Analog Meter Ectended Property Graphics Display Setting Basic Froperty Dial Shape Pie 2 Hand Color Color Hand Color Hand 40 H Width 8 HH nN nN non Phys th Scale Color A Scale Color V Show Scale Frame Number of Main Scales 4 H Length of Main Scales Number of Minor Scales 2 H Length of Minor Scales Ais Width Asis Color Wo isco Descriptions of Analog Meter Component Properties Dial Shape Includes Pie Circularity up pointer and Circularity down pointer Hand Color Selects the color of the hand of the Analog Meter component Length Sets the length of the hand of the Analog Meter component The maximum length cannot be longer than the radius of the meter Width Sets the width of the hand of the Analog Meter component Hand Style Sets the style of the hand of the Analog Meter component Use Scale Check in the check box to use the scale Scale Color Selects the color of the display scale of the Analog Meter component Show Scale Frame Checking it means the scale frame needs to be displayed E E es L e s PA 0 Ss Nag PS a
293. decoded NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 7 9 7 PictBridge Printing 7 6 Recommended Printer Models ee Brand Model CANON PIXMA iP4980 EPSON Colorio PX G5300 HP HP 8500A HP 8500A Plus 7 10 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 Appendices pe A 1 List of Models acs due ded nd oe See es te ie a Se ee ee ee Sa ee ee A 2 A 2 NB Designer Function List 0 cc es A 6 A 3 List of memories supported by OMRON PLC A 11 NB Series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 A 1 Appendices A 1 List of Models NB Unit USB Models Resolution Communication Equivalent of USB 2 0 Full Speed NB10W TW01B 10 1 inches Host Slave l PLC Series Connectable to NB Series through Host Link PLC Series Specifications CP Series Connecting through the RS 232C optional communication board CP1W CIF01 with a RS 232C cable C200HE HG HX Series With a connector for RS 232C connection switch 9 pin type CQM1H Series With a connector for RS 232C connection 9 pin type CPM1A Series Connecting through the RS 232C adaptor CPM1 CIF01 with a RS 232C cable CPM2A Series With a connector for RS 232C connection 9 pin type CPM2C Series Connect to the branched RS 232C connector through a conversion cable CPM2C CN1171 type CS Series With a connector for RS 232C connection 9 pin type CJ1 CJ2 Series With a connector for RS 232C
294. dialog box pop up z o o y 5 Name 3 FT PLC No 0 Memory Type Bit Area LB Address 0 Data Format BIN Format Range DDDD 0 9999 OK Cancel Name Inputs the name of this variable PT Selects the No of PT corresponding to this variable PLC No Selects the No of PLC corresponding to this variable Memory Type Selects the memory type corresponding to this address from Bit or Word Area Selects the area corresponding to this variable from the internal memory of the PT and the memory of the PLC Address Specify the address corresponding to the adding address Data Format Select the data format of the adding address from BIN or BCD Format Range Displays the address format the address range of this variable NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 241 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 Input the above mentioned items respectively and click OK then the variable will appear in the library Name PTNo PLCNo Stat Area Variable LB 0 add1 HMIO PLCO 0 Bit number HMIO PLCO 0 Word LW 200 Neccsssseesessssseseeesessenes 4 Later you can use it in the other places as shown below Basic Property Bit Button Label Graphics Control Setting Display Setting Priority Normal Read Address Write Address PIC x a PLC a PT HMIO iis 0 PT HMIO No 0 Port CO
295. e 3 Press the OK button to complete the setup and adjust the position and the size of the Direct Screen component The size of the screen will limit the display area The pop up screen area that goes beyond the Direct Screen edge will not be displayed Function keys can be used to move or minimize the screens Please refer to the contents related to the function key such as Pop up screen title bar and Minimize etc in 3 7 2 Function Key Page 3 197 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 147 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 6 18 Alarm a Alarm The Alarm component will display all the alarm information enabled in the set area The content it displays is the same as that displayed by the Alarm Display and both of them are about the alarm information of a certain node switch bit address When the bit address which worked as alarm trigger is released the alarm display will be removed The alarm information displayed by the alarm is necessarily registered by Alarm Setting When multiple alarms occur the alarms will be displayed in the order descending to the newer the top is the oldest and the bottom is the newest Process of adding one Alarm component 1 Press the Alarm component icon drag it to the screen then the Basic Properties dialog box of the Alarm component will pop up Basic Property Alarm Display Setting Prionty Normal Read Address gt White Address
296. e 1 lt N lt 16 the Word Length will be N 3 151 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer 2 Go to the Trend Graphics tab and set the parameters related to the Data Log aq nranertu a LOG Droopi i g propert iiini A 3 152 Basic Property Trend Graphics Channel Extended Property Save Data History Display Setting Type Single pag Property Startfrom Left Sampling Mode Continu Save Time Sampling Method Periodic sampling gt Cycle 1 x 1s ka Sampling Foints 10 Fage No 1 Channel 1 Control Memory Setting Trager Memory Setting Hh gt z T HMIO No PT Pause Clear ClearAddr PauseAddr 1 Hmo PLO o No Area Wanable LB x Use Variable Format Range DDDD 0 3999 1 Use Variable Format Range DDDD 01 9999 PT Hmo PL g Mo Area Vanable LWW Address 0 BIN Data Fomat BIN Word Length 12 Use Variable Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 Word Length 3 7 Use Variable Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 OK Cancel Descriptions of Data Log Properties Only the data change information of the sampling data in the current page is displayed and extension of Data Log is not allowed In this style the data which data log was updated and scrolled to be removed from the screen cannot be retained The extension of the data log is impossible The extension of Data Log is possible In this way when the Data Log is scrol
297. e Online Simulation File Path pkg c program files omron nb designer project car car pkg Communication Type NULL IP NULL PORT NULL COM NULL BPS NULL Select the PT No to be tested and the COM No of PC to be connected to the PLC then click the Start button to start the direct online test NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 347 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 14 3 Indirect Online test The indirect online test is a method to obtain the data from the PLC through the PT and to test the operations of PT The indirect online test can obtain the data from the PLC dynamically and the operating environment is the same as that after the downloading except that the inconvenience of downloading each time is avoided thus it is quick and convenient but it can t be used independently without the PT After the screen data is compiled press the fis button then the following dialog box will pop up NBSimulator PT Test PT Station Cancel Serial Fort PT Part FPC Port PT Part PE Part COM2 COMI sz COMT COMI Information Test Type Indirect Online Test File Pathi pkg c program files ormron nb designer project car car pkg Communication Type USB port IF NULL PORT NULL COM NULL BPS NULL Select the PT to be tested and click the Start button to start the test NB Unit performs the indirect online test through the USB Ethernet or serial
298. e name of group the operation method is the same as that mentioned above And you just need to select group in the Group Components location in Edit Group Components Library dialog box as the path to save it 2 Usage of Keyboard NB Designer provides 21 default keyboards in Group Components Library and the keyboards are as follows 3 small keyboards with different styles HEX Keyboard HEX_S_T1 to HEX_S_T3 NUM Keyboard decimal NUMERAL_S_T1 to NUMERAL_S_T3 and ASCII Keyboard ASCII_S_T1 to ASCII_S_T3 which are applicable to the small PT with the resolution not more than 320x240 3 middle keyboards with different styles HEX Keyboard HEX_M_T1 to HEX_M_T3 NUM Keyboard decimal NUMERAL_M_T1 to NUMERAL_M_T3 and ASCII Keyboard ASCII_M_T1 to ASCII_M_T3 which are applicable to the large PT with the resolution not less than 640x480 3 small grey decimal NUM Keyboards with different styles NUMERAL_S_L1 to NUMERAL_S_L3 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 381 3 Functions of NB Designer How to call the keyboard in the group components library is described as follows 1 Click Use Group Components in Group components in Draw menu or right click the mouse in the blank area in the window to select Group Components Use Group Components then select keyboard from Group Components in Edit Group Components Library finally select NUMERAL_S_T1 from Preview Group and click the
299. e x OISP_BAROS vg a w wil S DISP_BARO06 vg Bit Button Baa Lamp E R Dashedvg a jE ENTEROS vg N T E ENTERIONg a m meen Is KEYOOTvg E Bit Switch Direct Screen ix Lamp2seatel 00 vg is oo vg J SH iu Project Work Space x gt Command Word Lemp ie Button a i P Gi h x F Ready Mouse x 503 y 325 4 Go back to the Edit Window and select one component as shown below 5 Check Vector Graphics in the Graphics tab of Bit Button Property dialog box and find the name of the graphics created just now in the list and then you can check the graphics at the specific status each p p o1 F Q e O s Fap o xe 2 O Basic Property Bit Button Label Graphics Control Setting Display Setting V Vector Graphics Middle vg DISP_BARO DISP_BARO down vg ENTER005 vg ENTERO10 vg 4 i KEY007 vg ay Middle vg UP vg Bitmap Use Q Siz se Ungindl size Save to System Graphics Library Graphics for Each NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 61 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 62 6 Click the OK button to exit from this dialog box and this component will be displayed as the selected Vector Graphics and placed in the screen All the Vector Graphics imported into the project will be displayed in the Project File Window If you want to modify any Vector Graphics or bitmap you just need to find the graphics to be modi
300. e Group Components button will delete the components in the group components library opened currently Once group components are deleted they cannot be recovered Do you continue Note Delete Library Delete Group Components and Delete All Group Components will directly delete the related files in the usrlib folder under the installation path of the NB Designer Place Group Components Clicking the Place Group Components button will place the selected components in the group components library opened currently into the screen edited currently For example How to add group components to a new created group components library is described as follows 1 Click Use Group Components in Group components in Draw menu and click New Library after the Edit Group Components Library pops up and input group as the name of the group components library in the Group component library name dialog box as shown below r Please enter group name of component library NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 379 3 Functions of NB Designer Click the OK button to create an empty group components library as shown below Preview Group Preview Group Group Components group z Group Operation l S ave Group Components Export Library Place Group Components Import library Delete Group Component
301. e Seo SN ee ee Kee tae Ge eRe 3 45 3 4 1 SOG WWOCS 6 dae hee A ee ee eA eee SS ete ee 2 a eee 3 45 3 4 2 Screen Property 22440 ccnt eek se dence eke eee eben meebo eee snes ee 3 48 3 4 3 Screen Creation 0 0 0c eens 3 52 3 4 4 Screen Opening 0i0niseeeed ase aneenbe kee ea beet ee eee eben aes 3 52 3 4 5 Screen Deletion 2 6 esteeceeebbtbu needed badder eddie iinws sos 3 53 3 4 6 Components Related to Screen 1 es 3 53 3 5 Basic Design Method esc eit eee vee howe Ee ewe eee eee eee ex 3 54 3 5 1 Designing Components 20 6 4s5e2e05eh400 beer seeta wbeetiabha ohese2 3 54 3 5 2 ADOUTID NO 2 225 gs dus ot been doen baw es beet GhuGs bbe bGee Gece es 3 55 3 5 3 Additional Comments Descriptions 0 0 0 0 eee eee 3 56 3 5 4 Read Write Address for PLC 0 ce eee 3 57 39 9 WeECIOMORADING casos cue tice ene 6 Torranan E eee ecue coed E oe HRS 3 58 3 5 6 BMAD 5625546 aeauee 22s eng sen bs RSE cae Oe Ge eee ee een eet 3 63 3 5 7 Creating Label o 2 5 eh eteoees abe 04k eee Peet eae deseadeeeeoses 3 66 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 1 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 7 3 8 3 5 8 Task Bar and Operation Buttons 2 0 ce ee 3 68 3 5 9 POMS sacks foes tunes temas ae heen oat eee eee ee eee ce ease 3 70 3 5 10 Basic Properties of Component 0 0 0 eee 3 73 3 5 11 Control Setting of Component 2216 54 454e eevs wees eevecedee ade 3 74
302. e can be modified dynamically Animation Draw the component with the specified track in the PT and this position is determined by the value of the preset path and the communication addresses Number Input Display the specified value of the communication address Also Entering number by pop up keyboard and pressing ENTER allow the communication address modified Number Display Display the value of the specified communication address Text Input Set the value of the specified communication address to text string data The input data is saved to a consecutive memory with the Read Address as the first address Text Display Display the value of the specified communication address as text string Level Meter Display the value of the specified communications address in a bar chart percentage style according to the set maximum and minimum values Analog Meter Display the value of the specified communication address by means of a Analog Meter diagram Indirect Screen Display the screen of the specified screen No in pop up screen Direct Screen Display the specified screen in pop up screen Alarm Display the occurred alarm information in the specified area The content displayed by the Alarm Display component is the same as that displayed by the Alarm component Data Log Obtain the values of periodically specified communications address and display them in the graphic chart The background communication still continues to do whe
303. e display area for the font rightward with the unit of pixel point Font adjustment 6 pixal HEHEHE wo oOo U rt r n Font adjustment 60 pixals HHEH 4 Switch to the Keyboard Setting tab and make Keyboard Setting for the pop up keyboard type and check Use Input Order ra Number Input property Basic Property Numeric Data Font Keyboard Setting Graphics Control Setting Display Setting Keyboard Setting ndu JoqUNN OL 9 Default Keyboard Specify Keyboard 3 NUM Keyboard Keyboard Pop up Position fi PT Screen Position as 6 Default Keyboard Refers to the keyboard used by the Common Sheet all of the Number Input components will call the 3 NUM keyboard The default setting of Number Input is Use Default Keyboard Specified Keyboard One specified keyboard will be called and only after checking in the Screen Attribute check box of the Screen Property dialog box for the page set by function keys and others and setting Keyboard for Screen Property the keyboard can be displayed in the dropdown list of the Specify Keyboard Keyboard Pop up Position 9 positions can be adjusted Other Input Methods Function Key etc Using the function keys the keyboard is specified when entering numbers NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 117 3 Functions of NB Designer Use Input Order In the order of number input of Inpu
304. e displayed on the top Background Sets the Background Color Title Bar Background Color Frame Color and Frame Width for the Color Operation Log table Operation Log Query by File Name When it is checked the value of specified memory being 0 means to Query call out today s or the latest operational records and the value of specified memory being 1 means to call out the operational records made on the previous day and so on For example With two operation log files 20110621 csv and 20110624 csv stored in the external memory when the value of specified memory is 0 the operation logs saved on June 24th 2011 can be called out while the operational records saved on June 21th 2011 can be called out and displayed when the value of specified memory is 1 Query by Date When it is checked the date will be input into the specified memory and the operation logs corresponding to this date will be called out The date format is yyyymmdd where yyyy mm and dd refer to year month and date respectively For example Inputting 20110624 into the specified memory can call out and display the operation logs saved on June 24th 2011 Border Setting Sets the Border Color Style and Width for each row or each column and the Row Spacing and Column Spacing with the unit of pixel Checking Horizontal Line means the separator will be displayed horizontally and checking Vertical Line means the separator will be displayed vertically Title
305. e eee 3 346 3 14 1 Offline test nnana ee eee nena 3 346 3 14 2 Direct Online teSt 2 cacvevdend steer send O2bee eee decg tee ked occas 3 347 3 14 3 Indirect Online N Sl 22s e sa tdewseeed beeen ode Gaedeadegede baad ses 3 348 JTI DOWMOAG 6b evacaed cess ete rd pees te cen oe ed eae ed bebe ec we 3 349 3 15 1 Transmission Setting sn lt didecteesdicesuses Cheech dws bee faye ea 3 349 3 15 2 Download via USB Memory 0 000 ee eee ees 3 351 3 15 3 Specification of Downloading Contents 0 000 c eee eee 3 351 3 16 Other Functions 2 0c82ceunedceatewecaseceeeedeeee eee en ed 3 355 O 17 RecipeE dilo 212522022 es reprene Enn EnEn EENE ETER ESENS 3 397 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 3 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 1 User Screen The displayed contents in the screen are shown as below when the NB Designer is running You can also right click View Toolbar or toolbar to see each toolbar shown as below Title Menu Components Took Gption Window Heb 47 Ao TEEF ks HBoOoun WoesaA nEs Ea Bie J F Toolbar a e e H IE Pe BiHa jah SS cu Oa a De gt Ee H m gN a Moea BL oe DEn j Ad TN YG Sd BRE ae be SS Project file window Project Library window Edit window Project Work Space a Hest Write Write Address We Functional address Output window Component list window Status bar Mousefx Ga2 y 10 Title Project Work S
306. e index Finally place one Bit Button component to perform user logout with the address of LB9166 type of Set and the label content of Logout User Login uias uossIiWwJ d JOS 9 OL Write Address PT HMIO Port Port COM1 O Change Change 0 Station No Station No Area Vanable LE Area Variable LB9166 Userlogout Se Address 5155 V System Memory Data Format Format Range DDDD 0 3393 BIN Use Variable Use Variable T Use index l Use index NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 305 3 Functions of NB Designer Perform the offline test and the effect is as shown below Input Engineer in User Name and 222222 in Password respectively then click Login Current User None User Login Current User Engineer 16 06 Run Down 16 06 Operate power 3 306 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer Add Delete User Permission Place one User Information component in Add Delete User Screen to display the user information of the current system The Table Property in the User Information Property dialog can be edited according to the requirement User Manager xX Froject fil O y i da a la a k r oy lt Gi er D 3 U D D 3 D r T Message window ompilation Done Warning 0 Er Buiy s uossIiW
307. e maximum width cannot be wider than the radius of the meter Axis Color Sets the color of the dial axis of the Analog Meter component 3 Switch to the Analog Meter Component Extended Property tab Analogue Meter property Ex Jae Bojeuy G 9 Basic Property Analog Meter Analog Meter Ecttended Property Graphics Display Setting Maximum and Minimum Minimum 0 Maximum 100 dq Indirect Max Min Reference PT HMIO NS 0 DataFomat BIN WordLlengh 2 Port COM1 Use Variable E Change Station No 0 Fomat Range DDDDD 0 10255 Area Variable LW ba Address 1 E Waming T Max Value L Color Min Value Color F Normal I Color g Meter Sector 55 A Meter Sector Etemal 74 Min Value 25 Max Value 75 Indirect Mag Min Reference ee PT HMO Ja 0 Sisk Ee Wodliew amp 3 Port COM1 Use Variable Ir Change Station No 0 Fomat Range DDDDD 0 10255 Area Variable LW bi Address 3 Descriptions of Analog Meter Component Extended Property Maximum and Sets the display range of the Analog Meter component to the constants Minimum Indirect Max Min The upper limit value and lower limit value of displaying range for the analog meter will Reference be read from the value of specified address Warning Checking it means the meter component displays by the color specifying the normal ran
308. e of the memory for the specified word JOG one way increase automatically by the increment at the interval of each Execution Cycle and makes it stop at the upper limit value after the upper limit value is reached oy P Fi D 3 D Periodic Bounce This mode makes the address value of the memory for the specified word repeating after increase automatically by the step at the interval of each Execution Cycle reaching until to the upper limit value and then makes it decrease by the step at the interval of Execution Cycle until to the lower limit value and later makes it increase again thus making the cycle repeated again and again Step up loop This mode makes the address value of the memory for the specified word increase automatically by the step at the interval of each Execution Cycle until to the upper limit value and makes it increase again after being reset to the lower limit value Step down loop This mode makes the address value of the memory for the specified word decrease automatically by the step at the interval of each Execution Cycle until to the lower limit value and makes it decrease again after being reset to the upper limit value Constant Setting The preset constant value will be written to the address of the memory for the specified word after the Execution Cycle is reached NB series Progr
309. e offline test And when LWO 0 MO can be operated and when LWO0 50 MO can t be operated and the invalid mark will be displayed The effect is shown as below enu Task Bar Menu Task Bar Cursor Color Sets the cursor color for the component with the cursor such as Number Input component and Text Input component etc NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 295 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 10 4 System Information Setting Print Setting COM1 Setting COM2 Setting ExtemalMemory PT Task Bar PT Extended Property System Information Setting Security Level Setting User Pemission Setting Event History Setting 0 System Eror z m User Defined System Information MV Use User Defined System Information Font Type C Vector Font Bitmap Font m Font Attribute Font DFHEI5 aat Size 16 Position Left id Color Color Language Engish usa ttalic Bold The message in default can be changed to the required text Enter the System Information Setting tab in PT Property select the Use User Defined System Information option to enter the corresponding text to the item of selected system information in the text box This text supports Vector Font and Bitmap Font as shown above Example Change PLC No Response to No Response 1 Enter the System Information Setting tab in PT Property 2 Select 2 PLC No Response in the dro
310. e range for r g and b is 0 255 The system will convert the value of RGB r g b according to the color parameters of PT screen c Point Structure Point The parameter of point structure is simpler x represents the X axis coordinate and y represents the Y axis coordinate for the point suondosaq 1 4 O P 6 1 Drawing Function a Rectangle DrawRect x y w h pen brh The description of the parameter is as follows Parameter Descriptions xX X axis coordinate of the upper left corner of the rectangle Unit pixel y Int Y axis coordinate of the upper left corner of the rectangle Unit pixel W Int Rectangle width Unit pixel h Int Rectangle height Unit pixel pen Rectangular border pen brh Rectangular filling brush b Rounded Rectangle DrawRndRect x y w h radius pen brh The description of the parameter is as follows Parameter Descriptions X X axis coordinate of the upper left corner of the rectangle Unit pixel y Y axis coordinate of the upper left corner of the rectangle Unit pixel Ww Int Rectangle width Unit pixel h Int Rectangle height Unit pixel radius Int Rounded radius Unit pixel pen Rounded rectangle border brush brh Rounded rectangle filling brush NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 279 3 Functions of NB Designer c Ellipse DrawE clips x y w h pen brh The description of the parameter is as follows Para
311. e related communication parameters Save Selects it to save the screenshot to the external memory This function only applicable to the PT Screenshot to with the external memory External Memory Description Enters the descriptions of current PT It will be displayed during the downloading and test thus making the differentiation among several PTs by the user conveniently NB Series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 6 11 6 Descriptions of New Functions Added into NBLILI TW01B 6 2 2 PT Extended Properties 6 12 System Information Setting Security Level Setting User Permission Setting Event History Setting Print Setting COM1 Setting COM2 Setting ExtemalMemory PT Task Bar PT Extended Property MV Backlight 10 mins VideoMode PAL Auto backlight during alarm event Screen Saver 0 mins Screen Saver Screen 0 Frame0 V Retum to Original Screen When Screen Saver Ends Number of Languages 8 V Allow Upload Password 888888 Default Language 1 V Allow Decompilation Password 888888 Language Setting Chinese Font Box Height 24 Operation Log Storage Setting System Scroll Bar Width 20 Storage Device USB DISK1 Use Macro when loading project Subfolder Fanmi macro_0 c Use Buzzer em a e Extenel Glock Buffer Storage Defaut Saveasms V Vector Font Smooth Display Storage Period 0 Day ba Flip Screen Display Note no limit when storage period is zero Cursor Color 7 I Unable
312. e status value of the value specified for each status value and send the value to the specified address The status value is changed by increasing or decreasing for each touch operation or by selecting from the list When changing the status the mapping value specified for each status will be sent to the specified memory The statuses can be set up to 256 Process of adding one Word Switch component 1 Drag the Word Switch icon after it is pressed will make the Basic Properties of Word Switch component pop up Basic Property Word Switch Label Graphics Control Setting Display Setting Priority Normal J Make Read Address and Write Address the Same Read Address v Write Address PLC PLC PT eo Ea HMO a oO Port COM1 Port COM1 Change zz Change a Station No 0 Station No 0 Area Variable LW z Area Vanable LW v Address 0 J System Memory Address 0 System Memory Data Word Data Word 3 BIN i i 1 kaa BIN 1 Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 Use Variable Use Variable Use index l Use index 2 Switch to the Word Switch tab and set the State No and the value corresponding to each state for the component You can set the state from 1 to 256 in the dropdown box corresponding to State No Basic Property Word Switch Label Graphics Control Setting Display Setting Type Add J Unloop 3 94 NB series Programmable Termin
313. e the time when the latest sampling point is performed Time option in Control memory Setting is valid only when the Save Time is checked The default memory is LW and the Word Length is 12 wv Time PT Hmo PL o No Area Varable LYVV Address 70 Data Format BIN Word Length 12 Use Variable Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 As shown above when the specified address is LW70 each data is stored as below e The sampling time of the oldest data within the displayed page Second LW70 Minute LW71 Hour LW72 Day LW73 Month LW74 Year LW75 e The sampling time of the newest data within the displayed page Second LW76 Minute LW77 Hour LW78 Day LW79 Month LW80 Year LW81 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 Switch to the Channel tab and set the parameters related to each track line Basic Property Trend Graphics Channel Extended Property Save Data History Display Setting Indirect Maxc Min Reference CS aX 16 bit signed 16 bit unsigned 32 bit signed 32 bit unsigned float double W ez V few a 4 607 eed 6L 9 Color Specifies the color for each track line Line Width Refers to the thickness of the line and 8 kinds of line width are available here Storage Format Sets the data type used by the user and 6 kinds are available Y Min Y Max Sets the minimum value
314. ect you want as shown below paR SY SS 7 TERBEN YN YNZ II M PIII IIT LI IIS TTI TT TS TTT PT PP ee ee 8 OLE LAA A AAA AAAS ASAP PAPI PP PP OEEEOs CARA AAA AAA ASAE I IO PSPSPS OSES LRA AA AA AAAS ASP A PPPS IEEE SFP EEE Os CAAA AAA AAA AAAS AAA AAA ASSES SSS EEEEOSs RRA AA AA AAA AAPA AAAI PPP PP OEEOOs LAA A AAA AA AAAS P AAO EEO SSP EEEEOs RRR RRA AAAA AAA AAAS AAA AAA PPP PIECE Os JELET CRRA RRR RRR ERRAR ERER RRRA ERRAR RRRA CRRA 2509 244444444443444444444444444444244444444 LRRARAARAAR AAR AAA AAA APPA POOPOO PPO P EO CRRAAAAA AAR AAA AAA AAA AAAS PAIS LRRARAARAAR AAR AAAS AAAAA PAPO OOOO ECPEE RRAAAAAA AAAS AAAS AAA AAA PAPO PIE PEA LRRARAARAARA AR AAA AAAI APOIO POOP EOPEE CRRA AAR AAA AAA AAA APOIO PPAs CRAARAARAARA AAA AAAS APOIO PEPE LRAAAAARAAR AAR AA AAPA POO POOPEOPEOP EO LRRARAARAARAAR AAA AAAS EPEPEPE LRRARAARAAR AAR AAA AAA AAAI APO POOPEOPEO LRRAAAARAARAARA ARRAS OAPI PEA CRAAAAAR AAR AAR AAA AAA AAPA POOPEOEPO PEO LRRAAAARAARA ARRAS OPP PEA 244444444444444444444444444244444444444 RRR RRRRR RRRA PLD DSSS PPPs In order to add fill effect to the shapes select the shape to add fill effect and select the fill effect The procedure to set the fill effect is the same as the one for adding fill effect to the PT But when setting the fill effect to the components Pattern Color is applied to the outline color and Background color is applied to the component s color The parameters set to the
315. ecyecanconaviisueatasiinndenwe seenenacennstiectameboexeacttend samencnendobendecwecenstt 3 318 stia LocalWord LW encens E E A E ee neg earner 3 322 3 11 3 Nonvolatile Local Word LW10000 10255 ii wacoscossteucessseceueess ccbaneinst coumotactdaunecsstdsiancdsbestoasuies 3 325 3 11 4 System Information Table ccccccccccsssccecseseeececeseeecceseececeusseecseeseeesssseecessseeessegesesseaseeeees 3 327 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 9 Sec 4 3 12 3 15 3 16 3 17 Sec 5 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 7 Sec 6 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 10 6 1 ROCD DA ii a E eee ee ee eee eee 3 329 3 12 1 Process of Creating One Recipe Data Transmission Component ccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 329 S122 Rebe MMO y sear AAE E E EE A REEE ANN 3 331 3 12 3 Upload Download of Recipe Data between PT and PLC ccccccccseeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeesneeeeeens 3 335 Securty LGV ON sssi aa AANE a a aa iaia 3 340 MS eases T E E E ees 3 346 ee E MTC NOE E O A E OE E E AE A EE T AI AE E 3 346 3 14 2 DirectOnliNne tesi cronni ase ean K EAE EAEE ERE eee ee ene ee 3 347 3 14 3 Indirect Online test ccc cccccccsseecceseceeeeeeeseececeueesseueecsueeesseeeseueescueeesseeessueessausesseaseessagees 3 348 DOWO I aa E E ES EE EA E EERE 3 349 EUS Tansmission SCM aa a Eaa EAE AEE 3 349 3 15 2 Download via USB Memory isicccceacccenconsicccdieonsausedacscestessaasmetesaieecntnesiceata
316. ed 16 bit Hexadecimal Supported 32 bit Hexadecimal Supported Single precision float number Not supported Double precision float number Not supported String Data Not supported 3 Data Types rcp frp and csv rcp format This is the recipe file format which can be identified by PT The recipe file in this format can be uploaded or downloaded with NBManager The size of this file is limited by the recipe memory in PT device frp format This is the file format to be stored in Flash memory of PT csv format The data can be edited by Excel JEg RecipeEditor C Program Files OMRON NB Designer project car new csv _ XxX File View File Merge Help Da hi oO F Read Address Setting otat Address Humber of records read Current record length Refresh Data Data format TestDataFormat Add data format Delete current data format Current data format details Legh 16 bit signed n Desch 3 408 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 Functions of NBManager St is This section describes the NBManager 4 1 Introduction of NBManager 000 eee eae 4 2 Download Operation 0 0 0 cee es 4 2 1 Communication Setting 2 as4s4ueh 4 0c ceva ned aes aee ead 4 2 2 Select Data vice dss seek Sean enh Seen Seeded hs Oke 4 2 3 LOGO Setting lt 4 ces26u g5ee ebucsucdturecs hina d 62 4 2 4 Clear Data 1 0 cc ees 4 3 Upload Operation
317. ed by Text Input component in PLC Address Refers to the first address of the word address corresponding to the Text Input component Word Length 1 16 are available for the Read Write Address 2 Switch to the Font tab and fill in the Properties of displayed data referring to that for the Number Input component Text Input property Basic Property Font Keyboard Setting Graphics Control Setting Display Setting Font Type Vector font only ASCII is Bitmap Font supported Font Attribute Font DFNB EN Size 16 Position Left Color Color kalic Bald Display Position Indent Right Side Indent Pixels Example NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 Switch to the Keyboard Setting tab and select the keyboard type OT ees a cee rt meee eran aor reer rer Ext INPUT Property i Basic Property Font Keyboard Setting Graphics Control Setting Display Setting r Keyboard Setting Default Keyboard Specify Keyboard FASCI Keyboard Keyboard Pop up Position PT Screen Position W ez V few a Other Input Methods Function Keys etc Use Input Order Input Order 1 D Group 1 i yndu X8L ZL 9 4 Switch to Graphics tab and select the Vector Graphics or bitmap representing the touching area and touching state Switch to the
318. ed in the Output Window Right click the mouse in the Output Window the following menu will pop up MOpUIM INdINO y g E Clear Message All the information in the Output Window will be removed Export Message All the contents in the Output Window are exported to the folder which contains the current project forming a file named log txt NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 43 3 Functions of NB Designer If the Component List Window is selected from the View menu the Component list window will pop up ni Write Address Wo Functional address Functio a LB 9061 1 This window displays all the component information used by the project including PT No Screen Component s Name Read PLC Read Address Write Address Functional Address etc Double click an item to reveal the Properties of the selected component and the Edit Window will skip to the screen where this component locates 3 44 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 4 Screen Concept 3 4 1 Screen Types The project of the NB Designer is composed of multiple screens There are 3 types of screen i e Base Screen Common Sheet and Menu Screen The Base Screen after its size is changed can also be used as Pop up Screen All the screen can be used as the Sheet Screen Base Screen This is the common type screen When Base Screen is switched by
319. ed to the current Base Screen so when the current screen is closed or switched to the other Base Screen the attached Pop up Screen will be closed In this case if the screen is switched back to this Base Screen you will find that the Pop up Screens originally attached to this Base Screen still exist Otherwise there are commands sent to close them 5 Base Screen must cover the whole screen 6 Every Pop up Screen belongs to the screen where the component ejecting them locates and master slave relationship is between them Therefore the screen opened by the component in Common Sheet will always be displayed until Common Sheet closes it again NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 47 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 4 2 Screen Property 3 48 The methods to change the screen property e Double click the area in which no components are arranged in the screen e Do not click the components in the screen and click the 4 icons of tool bar Screen property Ea Title No 0 Protect key mapping on common sheet screen Switch to the lowest security level when screen closed Screen Attributes Keyboard Securty Level 0 z Position Background Color x0 Yo Background Color L Pattem Color Width 800 Height 480 Transparency 0 F Title Assign the unique name for each screen for convenient differentiation Of course the screen title can be changed Screen No The valid screen No ranges f
320. eeesessases 6 9 6 1 9 Change Of System LAN GQUAG C isiiiicccccindescndenetethsasiebxnsassweindswexeeledevneledebvehadewsexeeaieteiaddbaadeaeteesncetes 6 10 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 6 1 10 Usage of Forced Address BM sae ccssanracansechuscentachuennnsteseace secdaeeceaaesamereaiaatuncenshaabesaneneasaedacncoersened 6 10 6 2 System Parameters cai csvecsccsnctswesiccnnteseecdeticcccicasecsecennnticebenddeweseitencescueesesddncsveddesiccdevececeseacace 6 11 6 2 1 P a des tees emcee pc aia sgh abine setae anideina eu seuteeee seed asaisee eos aaeseane cena Diauecuaeaassees 6 11 6 2 2 PT Extended pal 8 91 gt st ae eee ei ee eee er eer eee ee 6 12 6 2 3 Event History SeN eee nee one een ee ee ee eee ec cae ce eee en eee net eee 6 13 6 2 4 External Memory Yee essed wcenccctandeccsanncereawsaseteucanceecunssenuseianeoandsennisto aneteueanantsyoeeucsdaeivesdauierenneusese 6 14 6 2 5 Communication Setting se sone at ee ores ate to sen ese eeeae seedaceens voncestcee Aa NEEE EENEN E FEANEN EdE EE REEE ES 6 14 6 3 Component Improvement ccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeceeeeeaneeaaeseaneeaneseaaseaassaneeeaessenssenesoensoaaes 6 15 6 3 1 Function KEY csc eect oe a ennie rre cine sure ence eee SaaS Ea wen ienr RE Eiet 6 15 6 3 2 Event Event History Display and Event Display cccccsssceccesseeeeceseeeesseeeeeceeeesesessseeeess 6 18 6 3 3 Data History Data Log and XY Gia DIN eset ceece
321. een Display Setting Priority Normal 3 144 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer Read Address It defines a display area and is able to display screen contents The screen of the No supporting the stored address specified to the read address will be displayed as pop up screen For example if the value turns to 20 screen 20 will pop up However this screen must be created already while when the value turns to 0 the Pop up Screen will be closed If the pop up screen is closed using the function key the value of the address specified to the read address cannot be updated When closing the pop up screen set 0 to the read address Address Specifies the word memory address storing the Indirect Screen No Word Length Displays the data length of the read address which is 1 by default 2 Switch to the Indirect Screen tab and specify the displaying position of the screen which is displayed in the pop up screen specified by the Indirect Screen and check Indirect Reference of Display Position for the Indirect Screen Indirect Reference of Display Position Checking it means the position coordinates of the popup Indirect Screen are read by the specified memories and Not checking means the position coordinates of the popup Indirect Screen will depend on where the component is placed in the screen X coordinate and Y coordinate are controlled by the s
322. egulations may vary depending on the configuration of the control panel used other devices connected to the control panel wiring and other conditions You must therefore confirm that the overall machine or equipment complies with EC Directives 4 This is a Class A product Product for industry purpose It may cause radio interference in residential areas in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures to reduce interference 22 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 Related Manuals The related manuals are as follows Devices and Software Manual Name NB series NB Series NB Designer Operation Manual This manual NB Series Setup Manual NB Series Host Connection Manual NB Series Startup Guide PLC SYSMAC CP Series CP1L CPU Unit Operation Manual SYSMAC CP Series CP1H L CPU Unit Programming Manual SYSMAC CP Series CP1H CPU Unit Operation Manual SYSMAC CP Series CP1E CPU Unit Hardware USER S Manual SYSMAC CP Series CP1E CPU Unit Software USER S Manual SYSMAC C200HX HG HE E ZE Installation Guide SYSMAC C200HX HG HE Operation Manual SYSMAC C200HX HG HE ZE Operation Manual SYSMAC CPM1A Operation Manual SYSMAC CPM2A Operation Manual SYSMAC CPM1 CPM1A CPM2A CPM2C SRM1 V2 Programming Manual SYSMAC CPM2C Operation Manual SYSMAC CS1 Series CS1G H Operation Manual SYSMAC CS CJ Series Serial Communications Boards and Serial Communications Units Operation Manual SYSMAC
323. emory with the word length up to 16 NB Series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 6 Descriptions of New Functions Added into NBLILI TW01B 6 3 4 Operation Log a Operation Log The Operation Log component can be used to record or display the operations made by the users to the PT in the table form The operation log will be stored into the external memory in CSV format 11 06 24 11 22 45 Start Running Note 1 The Read Address for the Operation Log component is the memory address used for searching the operation logs The default Word Length is 2 2 The Operation Log component can display the operated results of Bit Button Number Input and Text Input components etc 3 The Operation Log component is only applicable to the PT with USB HOST ih oo O fe 3 D 5 D r 3 3 fe lt 3 D rr Descriptions of Table Properties Vertical Line Title Bar 6o07 uonessdO 9 emee nne me ene Re mee men namne dean me mee temen Re RR Re Re ee a Ge ee ee Row Spacing we mee wae comes woe comes woe Do amen toe comes nee m pl wee eebes coe coe mem rummrmienmmnene somes ae x oum v r i Horizontal Line i Background System Scroll Bar Note When the information in vertical and or horizontal direction contained in the Operation Log component can not be displayed completely the system will automatically display the scroll bar for the user to convenient
324. en Draw Components Took O 3 Rect A O Round Rect PolyLine Project Library Window x Wl Polygon a e PT Elips d Sector PLC 2 Parts A Text Bit Button a e Add Graphics a aanp Import Graphics Bit Switch SS Group components j i Command Button Load Graphic 3 Click Import Graphics icon in the toolbar to enter the Graphics Library window Graphics Library System Graphics Library Type All images g bg User Defined Library Path Graphics for Each State 3 368 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer There are 2 methods for selecting the Graphics Library 1 System Graphics Library It is the graphics library provided by the software it is under the bg_vg_lib folder in the installation folder of the software D B Double click BG or vg folder amp amp YG and then the bitmap images or vector graphics installed by default will be displayed The display area is divided into two parts And all the graphics in the graphics library will be displayed in the upper part while each state of the selected graphics will be displayed in the lower part as shown below C Program Files OMRON NB Designer bg_vg_lib BG button button 01 bg a Graphics Library System Graphics Library ype All images vg bg C User Defined Library Path 0 a oo J i l Sasse hook y Aeth button1 00 bg Shien es buttoni 02 bg butto
325. ent History Setting Print Setting COM1 Setting COM2 Setting and External Memory They will be described in the later one by one NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 283 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 10 1 PT System Information Setting Security Level Setting User Permission Setting Event History Setting Vertical J Save Screenshot to Extemal Memory a COM1 Setting COM2 Setting Extemal Memory PT Task Bar PT Extended Property IP Address 192 168 250 1 TEEF Subnet Mask a ee e R FTP Password Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 83383838 Horizontal l Display mode Field Bus Setting USB1 Network Setting Refers to the network information such as IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway and Display Setting etc Display Setting Refers to the current display of PT Horizontal or Vertical Horizontal Vertical display is selected at dragging PT once it is selected it will not be switched again Save Screen Shots to External Memory Check in the check box to save screen shots to the external memory Description Refers to the description for this PT And the description will be displayed in PT description box at the downloading and test etc thus making the differentiation among several PTs conveniently 3 284 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer 3
326. eparate industry or government regulations e Systems machines and equipment that could present a risk to life or property Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to the products NEVER USE THE PRODUCTS FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR PROPERTY WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO ADDRESS THE RISKS AND THAT THE OMRON PRODUCTS ARE PROPERLY RATED AND INSTALLED FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM PROGRAMMABLE PRODUCTS OMRON shall not be responsible for the user s programming of a programmable product or any consequence thereof 14 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 Disclaimers CHANGE IN SPECIFICATIONS Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other reasons It is our practice to change model numbers when published ratings or features are changed or when significant construction changes are made However some specifications of the products may be changed without any notice When in doubt special model numbers may be assigned to fix or establish key specifications for your application on your request Please consult with your OMRON representative at any time to confirm actual specifications of purchased products DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS Dimensions and weights are nominal and are not to be used for manufacturing purposes even when tolerances are s
327. er Process of adding Data Transmission Drag the Data Transmission icon to the screen after it being pressed then the Data Transmission Property dialog box will pop up Data Transmission Trigger Address Label Graphics Control Setting Display Setting Memory Type Data Length 4 Bit Data Transmission Source Address Destination Address PT Hmo PLCNo PT HMIO PLCNo Part COM1 Port COMI Change Station Number T O Change Station Number frea Variable jp Address p Area Variable 1p Address Data Format pi D Use Variable Data Format BIN D Use Variable Format Range DDDD 0 9999 Format Range DDDD 0 9999 3 Indirect Reference Destination l Data Length PT Hmo FPLC No 0 Port COM1 _ Change Station No O Memory Type Wag WordLlength 9 Area Variable Lwy Data Format piy Address p Use Variable Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 Memory Type The Memory Type which is transmitted should be selected among Bit bit data or Word word data Data Length The number of data transferred by the Data Transmission component When the Memory Type is Bit or Word the units are bit or word respectively Source Address Sets the source address of the transferred data Destination Address Sets the destination address of the data transmission Indirect Reference Set this parameter when setting indirectly the source address destination address and data length Take the following se
328. er Page 6 6 After setting of the Communication Setting move to the settings of Select Data NB Series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 4 Functions of NBManager 4 2 2 Select Data The operation is the same as the one of edit window For details refer to 3 15 Download Page 3 349 Download Project Files Refers to download the edited project files pkg to the PT Click the Download Project Files button A NBManager E amp es Communication Setting Communication kethad Serial port Upload Operation ai IP NULL Pot NULL i J System Operation i ii Port Ho COM Set Get Version L Download Operati Select Data 0c b ee pen Look in Wd car e HMD _ carpkg image m sound m tar di temp vg T N O fe oO D 2 O D D a Decompile Operatior Download Froject Files er E ere Pass Through Communication Download LOGO Download Recipe Download FRM Data 4 File name Recipe Editor EYE 99S Cc c V Select the generated pkg file after compiling the edited project file then click the Open button to make the following dialog box pop up Select PT Select Data Project Data LI Recipe File O LOGO File L Clear Recipe Clear Event O History OI Clear Data History O Clear ERW Data Download Project c program files orron nb designersproject car
329. er Area T 0000 4095 DDDD xe Counter Area C 0000 4095 DDDD o Data Memory D 00000 32767 DDDDD a Index memory Area e IR 00 15 DD p Data memory Area Se DR 00 15 DD 3 Task Flag Area pa TK 00 127 DDD z v O C_FORCED_RELASE DDDD 0000 4095 NB Series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 A 13 gt O O Appendices A 14 Device CIO Area Work Area Auxiliary Area Holding Area Timer Completion Flag Counter Completion Flag Data Memory Counter Release Forced Status Area Timer Release Forced Status Area Holding Release Forced Status Area Work Release Forced Status Area CIO Release Forced Status Area Holding Set Reset Forced Release Area Holding Forced Set Reset Area Work Set Reset Forced Release Area Work Forced Set Reset Area CIO Set Reset Forced Release Area CIO Forced Set Reset Area Task Flag Area Counter Set Reset Forced Release Area Counter Forced Set Reset Area Timer Set Reset Forced Release Area Timer Forced Set Reset Area CIO Area Work Area Auxiliary Area Holding Area Timer Area Counter Area Data Memory Index memory Area Data memory Area Task Flag Area OMRON CP Series Ethernet UDP Slave Format W_bit 000 00 511 15 DDD DD T_FLAG 0000 4095 DDDD C_FLAG 0000 4095 DDDD D_bit 00000 00 32767 15 DDDDD DD C_RELEASE_STATUS DDDD 0000 4095 T_RELEASE_STATUS DDDD 0000 4095 H_RELEASE_STATUS DDD
330. eriodically OFF ON trigger sampling Only when the state of the specified bit address turns ON from OFF the sampling is triggered Only when the state of the specified bit address turns OFF from ON the sampling is triggered ON gt OFF trigger sampling OFF lt ON trigger sampling Only when the state of the specified bit address changes the sampling is triggered OFF ON reset trigger sampling Only the state of the specified bit address turns ON from OFF the sampling is triggered and the state of the specified bit address will be reset automatically after the triggering Only the state of the specified bit address turns OFF from ON the sampling is triggered and the state of the specified bit address will be reset automatically after the triggering ON OFF reset trigger sampling Cycle Refers to the interval between the sampling points each 2 pages with the unit of s or 100 ms NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 99 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 100 DrawType Includes Standard Track and Trend The sampling methods vary with the types Draw Type Descriptions Standard Multiple points are sampled each time and X and Y components are included Track Trend Basic Property XY Graph Channel Extended Property Save Data History Display Setting Number of the occupied memory depends on the number of channel and sampling points For example if there are
331. ermission Setting of User 0 Check the Enabled option and set the User Name to Administrator Password to 666666 and Logout Time to 1 minute Assign 4 Authorities i e Operation Permission Process Permission System Config Permission and Add Delete User Permission respectively for the Administrator User 0 Print Setting COM1Setting COM2 Setting ExtemalMemory PT Task Bar PT Extended Property System Information Setting Security Level Setting User Pemission Setting Event History Setting Print Setting COM1 Setting COM2 Setting ExtemalMemory PT Task Bar PT Extended Property System Infomation Setting Security Level Setting User Permission Setting Event History Setting m User Permission Setting MV Enabled User Permission Setting MV Enabled User Name Administrator User Name Engineer Password 222222 Password 666666 Y oy lt Gi er D 3 a 9 D 3 D er D T Logout Time 10 Minutes Logout Time 1 Minutes Pen 0 eae 0 Process Permission a Process Permission System Config Permission System Config Permission Add Delete User Permission Add Delete User Permission y oon DO amp Wh oon DO amp WH JOOOOOOOR8AS IO0OOOOO0O0080 a i tO ont t O perepea be uias UOISSIWI9dq JOS 9 OL 2 For User Permission Setting of User 1
332. ernal memory into the PT For the operation procedures refer to Import Project To PT Export Recipe From PT Exports the recipe file rcp from the PT into the external memory For the operation procedures refer to Export Project From PT NB Series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 6 17 6 Descriptions of New Functions Added into NBLILI TW01B 6 3 2 Event Event History Display and Event Display Saving Event Event History Display and Event Display into the external memory The Event Event History Display and Event Display can be stored in the external memory by check ing the Save to External Memory option in the Event History Setting tab in the PT Property dia log box as shown below Print Setting COM1 Setting COM2 Setting ExtemalMemoy PT Task Bar PT Extended Property System Information Setting Security Level Setting User Permission Setting Event History Setting T Save to Recipe Data Field gt Iv Save to Etemal Memory Number of Event 9 Storage Device USB DISKI V Restoration during outages Start Address 0 V Export to CSV File 7 Save as ms End Address sg oo Event Storage Type X Addr Fomat DDDDDD Buffer Storage Default Event Length 16 Words Storage Period 0 Day Note data saved in recipe data field are effectively only for event display elements Note no limit when storage period is zero Event History Display Event History
333. ers CS1G CS1H CS1G H CS1H H CJ1G CJ1M CJ2M CJ2H Indicates the following OMRON SYSMAC NJ Series of Programmable Controllers NJ501 NJ301 Indicates the following products in the OMRON C Series of Programmable Controllers C200HX Z C200HG Z C2Z00HE Z CQM1 CQM1H CPM1A CPM2A CPM2C Indicates a Serial Communication Unit for an OMRON SYSMAC CS CJ Series PLC Indicates a Serial Communication Board for an OMRON SYSMAC CS CJ Series PLC Indicates a Communication Board for an OMRON C200HX HG HE Z PLC Indicates a CPU Unit in the OMRON CP CS CJ or SYSMAC C Series of Programmable Controllers Indicates the OMRON NB Designer Indicates the PLC and other units functioning as the control devices for NB Series Units Indicates an OMRON Programmable Terminal NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 CONTENTS C VETO CUI eita p PEE E E E EEEE EE EEEE EE EE ER 1 NB S6ries V1 AN Cll S seccina a aa a a a ae aaia 2 Manual Structure aaanannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn mnnn nnmnnn 4 WRI LOGY cesses ia EEEa REES 5 sale Precautions ipie EE EEE i 16 Precautions for Safe USC ccccccccccececsceccecceccncecececeneeceneeaeeeseeaeeneaesaeaeeeeaeeneaneneaaeas 19 Precautions TOF Correct USC a icgecs cc decdcce tie chccedaccduedticadcadedwececdecewincueedeetecseesadavacisececd 21
334. es nor Cancel the Confirmation Screen will disappear automatically fire you sure you wont to do this operat ion Tes Example of Notifications Example Set LWO to the address of number input component Set After Written Notice as LB10 is ON after writing the address Basic Property Numeric Data Font Keyboard Setting Graphics Control Setting Display Setting Touch Enabling Setting Enable Input Disable Input Conditional Enabling IW Write Notice Notice Before Written Notice After Written Written Value Bit On Of Word Notice Memory PT HMIQ PLC No 0 Pot COMI Use Variable Change Station No 0 Area Variable LB Address 10 Data Format BIN Word Length 1 Formiat Range DDDD 10 9999 l Use index NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 77 g O U D o O o amp D r 0 2 JUBUOUWOYD Jo Bulljas jOujUOD p 1 SG F 3 Functions of NB Designer Perform the offline test And when no data is written into the number input component LWO LB10 is Off as shown in the following left graphics When the data is written into the number input component LB10 is On as shown in the following right graphics 3 5 12 Display Setting of Component Display Setting for Component Lock Position Checking this option means the component is locked Once the component is locked it can t be moved by the mouse
335. es and product names in this document are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies NB series NB3Q TWLILIB NB5Q TWLILIB NB7W TWLILIB NB10W TW01B Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual Revised April 2013 Introduction Thank you for purchasing an NB series Programmable Terminal NB Series Programmable Terminals PTs are designed to handle information generated in FA production sites Be sure to understand the functions and performances etc thoroughly before using PT correctly Intended Audience This manual is intended for the following personnel who must also have knowledge of electrical systems an electrical engineer or the equivalent e Personnel in charge of introducing FA systems into production facilities e Personnel in charge of designing FA systems e Personnel in charge of installing and connecting FA facilities e Personnel in charge of managing FA systems and facilities General Precautions e The user must operate the product according to the performance specifications described in the operation manuals e Do not use the PT touch switch input functions for applications where danger to human life or serious property damage is possible or for emergency switch applications e Before using the product under conditions which are not described in the manual or applying the product to nuclear control systems railroad systems aviation systems vehicles combustion systems
336. es used by the Scroll Bar It includes Not Used Vector Graphics and Bitmap If Vector Graphics or Bitmap is selected you can select the Vector Graphics or bitmap you want to use in Image and you can also select the State Number corresponding to the Vector Graphics or bitmap mentioned above NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 165 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 Go to the Scroll Bar Extended Properties tab and set the Slider Width and Indirect Max Min Reference _ EE Basic Property Scroll Bar Scroll Bar Extended Property Control Setting Display Setting M Slider Width 10 be Max Min Value Setting Min Indirect MaxMin Reference HMIO PLC 0 No LW Address 1 Data Format BIN Use Variable Word Length 2 Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 Min Value LW 1 Max Value LW 2 Slider Width Checking it means the slider width will be set by manual and Not checking it means the slider width is 10 pixels by default Max Min Value Setting Min The lower limit of the Scroll Bar component is the starting browsing index value 2147483648 to 2147483647 available Max The upper limit of the Scroll Bar component is the maximum browsing index value 2147483648 to 2147483647 available Indirect Max Min Reference Checking it means the starting browsing index value and the maximum browsing index value of t
337. escribes how to install and start the NB Designer This section describes the functions of NB Designer This section describes the functions of NBManager This section describes the maintenance and check to prevent the abnormality occurrence and the handling of the abnormalities occurred in NB Unit This section describes the new functions added into NBOO TW01B the system Properties and the component Properties This section describes the PictBridge printing function The appendices provide lists of the NB Units the Communication Units the applicable PLCs the memories sapported by PLC and the list of NB Designer functions L Programmable Terminals Setup Manual Cat No V107 Section Contents Section 1 Part Names and Functions This section describes the names and functions of the various parts of Section 2 Installing the NB Unit and Connecting Peripheral Devices Section 3 System Setting Mode Section 4 Calibrate Mode Appendices an NB Unit This section describes the methods used to install the NB Unit and connect peripheral devices This section describes the System Setting Mode This section describes the Calibrate Mode The appendices provide information on specifications dimensions wirings and lists of the NB Units the applicable PLCs and options NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 fl Programmable Terminals Host Connection Manual Cat No V108 Section Section 1
338. ets the data type used by the user and 6 kinds are available Y Min Y Max Sets the minimum value and maximum value of the data corresponding to each track line in Y direction Indirect Max Min Reference Sets the display range of channel track to variable and specifies the memory address for reading range value For the multiple channels the memory can be specified independently and The Specified Indirect memory Address is Y Min and The Specified Indirect memory Address 1 is Y Max 4 Press the OK button and then adjust the position and size of the Oscillograph component NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 163 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 6 22 Scroll Bar F wl Scroll Bar Scroll Bar is used to change the value in the specified word memory by pressing the slider Process of adding one Scroll Bar component 1 Press the Scroll Bar component icon drag it to the screen then the Basic Properties dialog box of the Scroll Bar component will pop up Basic Property Scroll Bar Scroll Bar Extended Property Control Setting Display Setting Priority Nomal Read Address _____ Write Address m gt PME z NI PLC E PT HMIO w E PT A a 9 Fort COM1 Port COM1 Change z Change Station No 0 E Station No 0 Areay Variable LW j Area Vanable LWW k Address l D System Memory Address 0 l System Memory Data py Word Data gn Word Format sai Length Format
339. f current browsed points for channel 1 will be stored to LW9210 and that for channel 2 will be stored to LW9211 Descriptions T T U yF D O a Example of checking the operation result of sampling point information The following shows the checking of sampling point information after the Data Log with 2 channel data is Zoomed in sempling 2012Y 09M 210 12H 40M 50 S E Sampling si j Point Value tar i Channel 1 3 Channel 2 3 Sampling a Point Value hannel 1 5 hannel 2 1 zeal NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 159 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 6 20 Recipe ae Recipe component can realize the data transmission from the recipe memory of PT to PLC or vice versa For details refer to 3 12 Recipe Data Page 3 329 3 6 21 Oscillograph Oscillograph The Oscillograph functions similarly to the Data Log and the difference between them is as follows For the Data Log the background communication still continue to do when the current screen where the Data Log locates is closed the sampling information before the switching can be obtained when the Data Log is switched to at any time But the data sampling of the Oscillograph is valid only in the current page which means the Oscillograph data will not be read but be lost each time when the page Is switched and the data sampling will start from the beginning when the Oscillograph screen is switche
340. f modifying or editing 3 If the encrypted file is modified by someone intentionally the error prompt will appear during the Decom pile operation in NB Manager making the damage of source file informed to the user 4 The components supporting Data Encryption function are Data Log XY Graph and Data History compo nents Take the setting method of Data Encryption for sampling data file of the Data Log as example 1 Check the Data Encryption option after the Save to External Device option is checked in the 1 1 1 op Save Data History tab in the Data Log Property dialog box E Z 9 gt k j gt Basic Property Trend Graphics Channel Edended Property Save Data History Display Setting Save to Recipe Data Field Save to Ecemal Memory f Start Address 0 Storage Device USB DISK 7 na Restoration during outages Data Encryption fe End Address F M Export to CSV File Save as ms ae Subfolder History Trend Storage Type Daily file hi Buffer Storage Default Storage Period 0 Day Note 1 No limit when storage period is zero 2 Subfolder name must be unique ne 1 N O fas n a o m J Q s lt xe O gt NB Series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 6 7 6 Descriptions of New Functions Added into NBLILI TW01B 2 The illegible characters will be displayed in the generated CSV file after the encryption if it is directly opened Usi
341. f when the component is released NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 81 3 Functions of NB Designer Type Set On when Screen Open Set Off when Screen Open Set On when Screen Close Set Off when Screen Close Set On when Screen Maximized Set Off when Screen Maximized Set On when Screen Minimized Set Off when Screen Minimized Set On when Backlight Off Set Off when Backlight Off Set On when Input Success Set Off when Input Success Descriptions The specified bit address will turn On when the screen containing the Bit Button component is opened The specified bit address will turn Off when the screen containing the Bit Button component is opened The specified bit address will turn On when the screen containing the Bit Button component is closed The specified bit address will turn Off when the screen containing the Bit Button component is closed The specified bit address will turn On when the screen containing the Bit Button component is maximized The specified bit address will turn Off when the screen containing the Bit Button component is maximized The specified bit address will turn On when the screen containing the Bit Button component is minimized The specified bit address will turn Off when the screen containing the Bit Button component is minimized The specified bit address will turn On when the screen containing the Bit Button component is displayed in the screen and
342. ffect is as shown below 3 4 3 Screen Creation Clicking the Ege icon in Screen Toolbar can create a new screen Eas Be SE 1O Frame10 os Oe 2 3 4 4 Screen Opening After the screen is created the previous screen can be displayed by selecting it in the pull down menu in Screen Toolbar or by clicking the jg amp icon and the next screen can be displayed by clicking the icon If the mouse with the roller is used the screen No can be changed directly by using the roller O Framed 11 Common window Fast Selection me NUM Reyboard ee ASC Keyboard fee oF le List Window Qe E Password Window BE Confirm Acton Window me SHES Keyboard 3 52 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 4 5 Screen Deletion In Project Work Space select the screen No to be deleted and press the Delete key in the keyboard or click the icon in Screen Toolbar When the Confirm Screen pops up select Yes to delete this screen and all the components in this screen will be deleted and can t be restored Please be careful when you use this function Tree View H E 1 Common Window jE 2 Fast Selection H 3 NUM Keyboard H LASCI Keyboard H 5 File List Window H 6 Password Window H E 7 Confirm Action Window m i 8 HEX Keyboard H E 9 Login Window oe H E 11 0pen o FN ey O D 5 O O D pe r Note Frame 0 Frame
343. ffset NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 137 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 138 e Rectangle and Circle Bar Shape Rectangle Circle Comparison of display effects between the Rectangle and Circle Rectangle Circle Spe Nom Savant Saimin Jesu Reta oo tems gt ony amaso Gae ore G50 Meter Width 10 Start Angle 0 End Angle 360 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 6 15 Analog Meter Analog Meter Analog Meter can display the data in the specified memory by means of a Analog Meter diagram Process of adding one Analog Meter component 1 Press the Analog Meter component icon drag it to the screen then the Basic Properties dialog box of the Analog Meter component will pop up o oa V fen r 7 Basic Property Analog Meter Analog Meter Extended Property Graphics Display Setting Priority Nomal oO Read Address __ White Address L o1 PLC z T m PLC z PT Gn a 9 PT HMIO w 5 Port COMI Port COMI amp Change Change z O Station No o Station No 0 Area Vanable LW k Area Vanable LWV Address U System Memory Address U System Memory Data n Word E Data Vy Word E Format BIN am Fomat PM Length Format Range DDDODD 0 10255 Use Variable l Use Variable T Use index T Use index Conca Read Address Refers to the word a
344. fied in the Vector Graphic in the Project File Window and double click it to open the Edit Window of this graphics where you can modify the graphics drawn by yourself G File Edit View Screen Draw Components Tools Option Window Help f X t eS i amp Ba Pe E x gt fii F z 8d 4e win y Gle Sit mh w H El oo l HE B D C O 000A z GHRHe BENNA Jinkee BAA ARRARA Z E Qim pos EFEFEF D NG SZ ll ik IE Y BINI 18 Ovnwees moO W Project Library Window x Project File Window x Connector a Graphics PT BlueFrame vg PLC Le Buttonl 93 vg Button3 50 vg Parts i CLOSEO01 vg a tA oan CONFIRM vg as CTRL_BAROOL vg Bit Button Bit Lamp es CTRL_BAR009 vg DISP_BAROO1 vg DISP_BAR002 vg E DISP_BAR005 vg Bit Switch Direct Screen ven DISP_BARO06 vg Dashed vg oH I Project Work Space x Command Word Lamp Button EO HMO ee ET wii E H 1 Common Window IA 2 Fast Selection Function Parts f M Kevboa Project Database Output Window x Ready Mouse x 60 y 96 _ Note 1 When the new graphics was created the project should be saved to keep the contents Otherwise the con tent will be lost 2 No text can be added to the Vector Graphics NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 5 6 Bitmap One bitmap includes 256 kinds of states and the c
345. fied time system will use the previous sampled values Extended Properties Descriptions Channel Properties Select the channel to be edited The optional channel depends on the channel number set in Data Log Property tab And the set the Line Style and Line Width of track line corresponding to the channel Display Style Dot LINE NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 101 3 Functions of NB Designer Extended Properties Connect Type Marker Properties Marker Size Marker Color Use Grid Indirect Reference of Sampling Cycle Indirect Reference of Number of Sampling Points Descriptions X axis projection Y axis projection Select the Marker graphics from the 7 available graphics AMOALJI5 Sets the size of Marker Sets the color of Marker Checking this option means the Data Log will use the background and grid effect provided by the system and the lines and columns of the grid to be displayed and the color width and type of grid line etc can be set respectively When periodical sampling is used the sampling time will be read from the specified memory The sampling points will be read from the specified address 5 Switch to the Save Data History tab and set information to be saved Start Address End Address Addr Format T Save to Recipe Data Field mM Saveto Extemal Device Po easeeeeeeccessessensccesscsesssccsscessseecees
346. from PLC to the Recipe memory ERW Transmit from ERW to PLC Transmit the data from the Recipe memory ERW of PT to PLC Upload from PLC to FRW Transfers the data from PLC to the recipe memory FRW of PT Download from FRW to PLC Transfers the data from the recipe memory FRW of PT to PLC Data Length Refers to the word length of the data to be transferred Switch to the Label tab and add the different displayed texts corresponding to the different states Switch to the Graphics tab and select the Vector Graphics or Bitmap to display the graphics corresponding to the state of the Recipe Data component Switch to the Control Setting tab and make the Security Setting and set the Triggering action oOo Qa A Q Press the OK button and adjust the position and size of the component 3 330 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 12 2 Recipe Memory The recipe memory stores in a flash ROM and even if power interruption occurs the data can be retained The recipe memory space of NB3Q NB5Q TWLILIB model is 128K Word and for that of NB7W NB10W TWLILIB model it is 256K Word There are 2 indication methods for the recipe memory i e RW represents the absolute address while RWI represents the index address The data in LW9000 is the offset of the index address For example when the data in LW9000 is 50 the index address RWIO will point to the data in add
347. g Keyboard Setting C Default Keyboard Specify Keyboard 3 NUM Keyboard Switch to the Graphics tab and select the Vector Graphics or bitmap representing the touching area and touching state Switch to the Control Setting tab and make the Security Setting and set the Triggering action Press the OK button to complete the setup of the Number Input component Storage Format 1 Decimal System signed int unsigned int The data is displayed in decimal 0 9 The data is displayed according to the instructions for the digits after the decimal point and the data will be arranged from the digits after the decimal point For example the digits after the decimal point is 2 then 14561 will be displayed as 145 61 Data after Proportional Conversion The value of the communication addresses set is converted proportionally before displaying The conversion formula is as follows Gases _ Minimum x Maximum Value after Minimum Value after Value after Minimum Value after Value Input Value Proportion Conversion Proportion Conversion Proportion Conversion Proportion Conversion Maximum Input Value Minimum Input Value NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer The converted value will display the data according to the digits before the decimal point and the digits after the decimal point For example the value to be converted is 123 456 but
348. g 3 Chinese Font Box Height 24 Operation Log Storage Setting macro_0 c Storage T Daily file Use Buzzer ype Daily Use Extemal Clock Buffer Storage Defaut Saveasms Vector Font Smooth Display Storage Pedod 0 Day ri Flip Screen Display Note no limit when storage period is zero i Cursor Color a I Unableto input Display Color D Common Sheet Screen Display below base screen x Pop up Screen Attributes Display in foreground z initial Screen 10 Wait ee 5 File List Window Common Sheet 1 Common Window Confirmation Screen 7 Confirm Action Windo Menu Screen 2 Fast Selection Login Window X Login Screen Note 1 16 pop up screens can be opened simultaneously 2 More than two of the same screens cannot be called from one screen simultaneously Therefore you can t open the same screen by using 2 direct indirect screens in the Base Screen 3 The screens closed by the function keys can t close the Direct Screen or Indirect Screen because the opening or closing of Direct Screen is related to the ON OFF status of bit address that controls the Direct Screen while the opening and closing of Indirect Screen is just related to the data content of the word address that controls the Indirect screen The screen closed by the function keys can t change the values of these bits words addresses so it can t close these screens mentioned above 4 All the Pop up Screens are attach
349. ge Screen function of the Function Key Their difference is the respect whether function is operated by touching the screen or it is performed by the PLC memory control When the value of Read Address is modified to an available screen No the current screen will be closed and the screen specified with the Read Address will be displayed Then the content of the Read Address in written in the Read Address 1 This operations can be executed only when the Read Address is modified 2 Write Data Current Base Screen No into PLC The number of the base screen currently displayed will be notified to the PLC PLC Control PT HMIO Area Variable Ly Data Format BIN Word Length 1 PT Executing PLC Control HMIO z PLCNo 0 7 Address 0 _ Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 Use Variable Function Mode Aea ea elt gia ated a Pasta a ce When there is a PLC Control with the settings shown as above word address LWO will store the No of the current base screen 3 General PLC Control The data transmission between the PLC and the PT can be controlled It can be divided into 4 types according to the direction of data transmission a PLCRW Recipe Data Memory type code 1 b PLC LW Local Data memory of PT type code 2 c RW Recipe Data memory gt PLC type code 3 d LW Local Data memory of PT gt PLC type code 4 The specific instructions are as follows Select General PLC Control as Contro
350. ge and warning range the range exceeds the upper limit value and the range falls the lower limit value NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 141 3 Functions of NB Designer Descriptions of Analog Meter Component Extended Property Meter Sector Sets the thickness of the alarm range and the thickness of the fan block The maximum thickness can t exceed the radius of the actual circle formed by the Analog Meter component but must be equivalent to or less than Meter Sector External Meter Sector External Sets the radius of the fan block The maximum radius can t exceed the radius of the actual circle formed by the Analog Meter component but must be equivalent to or greater than the Meter Sector m Waming Max Value J Color Min Value Color Noma B Color Meter Sector 55 Meter Sector Extemal 74 Min Value 25 Max Value 75 1 Meter Sector 2 Meter Sector External Max Value Min Value Sets the normal range of the Analog Meter component to constants Indirect Max Min Sets the normal range of the Analog Meter component to variables and specifies the Reference memory address for reading data Switch to the Graphics tab and select the Vector Graphics or bitmap representing the touching area and touching state Press the OK button to complete the setup of the Analog Meter component 3 142 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of
351. greater than 1 the addresses corresponding to the 2nd channel are as follows read address 2 x sampling points for X axis and read address 2 x Address Refers to the first address of the word address corresponding to XY Graph Write Address j PT HMIO Fort COM1 m Change Station No o Area Wariable LW Address U System Memory Data b Format BIN a Word Length l Use Variable l Use index sampling point 1 for Y axis and so on Data Format Includes BIN or BCD Word Length It is determined by the channel number sampling points and the type of selected type of storing The word length cannot be changed manually 3 98 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 wir jrapl 7 z rn y rh Basic Property XY Graph Channel Extended Property Save Data History Display Setting Type Single pag Property Horizontal Sampling Method Periodic sampling Sampling Paints 10 Page No 1 Control Memory Setting M Trigger Memory Setting PT Hmo PLE og No Area Varable LB Address 0 Data Format BIN g Word Length 1 I Use Variable Format Range DDDD 0 9999 Drawing method Standar Save Time Cycle 1 KX 1s Channel 1 T A Pause Clear ClearAddr PauseAddr 1 PLC No o Area Vanable LB g IPT HMIQ r Address 0 Data Format BIN s Word Length 2 Use Variable
352. ground Color Selects the Background Color and Pattern Color 2 Press the OK button to complete the setup and adjust the position and size of the Notepad component 3 216 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer The combined use of Notepad with Function Keys After the Notepad is placed well you can set the Function Pen Color Pen Size and Clear after the Notepad is selected in the Function Key tab as shown below AMETION A p op I Function Key Label Graphics Control Setting Display Setting Switch Screens Change screen 0 FrameQ Key Button Unicode a Map Key ss Execute Macro hi N Map Keyboard Disable S Touch Calibration Save Screenshot to Ectemal Memory a e Clear Event Import Export Import Project to PT gt Notepad N Function Pen a Pen Color Pen Size 3 Clear a Function Pen After selecting the pen you can leave messages or make drawings in the Notepad P T N zZ O a D D Q Eraser Clears the contents in the Notepad Clear Block Clears the contents in the selected area of the Notepad b Pen Color Sets the pen color as shown below Function Pen 7 PenColor E Pen Color Pen Size Default Color C Gear BEEBE eBEeEee EEEE EEEE Print ETE E TE E BS i 7 Black and White Reverse Color
353. h can be retained when the power is OFF Even if the battery is dead in PT the data stored in the recipe memory will not be lost RWI Refers to the index address saved in the recipe memory that is stored in the flash memory which can be retained when the power is OFF Even if the battery is dead in PT the data stored in the recipe memory will not be lost FRW Refers to the absolute address of word address saved in Flash which can be retained when the power is OFF When the battery is dead in PT the data saved in Flash will not be affected but the number of write operations in Flash is limited FRWI Refers to the index address of word address saved in Flash which can be retained when the power is OFF When the battery is dead in PT the data saved in the Flash will not be affected but the number of write operations in Flash is limited Note RB and RW point to the same area For example RB5 0 to RB5 F and RW5 map the same area i e RB5 0 is the BitO of RW5 But LB and LW map different areas and the addresses pointed by them in the memory are different NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 317 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 11 1 Local Bit LB 3 318 9000 9009 9010 9011 9012 9013 9014 9015 9017 9018 9019 9020 9021 9022 9030 9031 9032 9040 9041 9042 9043 Initialization setup is ON These bits can be used to make some components turn ON when the s
354. han the Lower When Ignore Delay Time is checked the Subtrahend will be added to the value of the specified word address immediately each time the component is pressed If this component is pressed for a long time the Subtrahend will be added to the value of the specified word address at the interval of JOG Speed time until the Lower is reached JOG Circle Everytime command button is pressed for the time longer than the time to be specified Delay Time the value set to Addend is added to the value of the write address with the interval set to JOG Speed Until the Upper is reached and then it will increase from the Lower again JOG Circle Everytime command button is pressed for the time longer than the time to be specified Delay Time the value set to Subtrahend is subtracted from the value of the write address with the interval set to JOG Speed Until the Lower is reached and then it will decrease from the Upper again Indirect Reference Refers to the variables that can be used by the setting or the upper lower limit etc For example a When Setting Mode is Set Value Assuming the write address of the Command Button component is LWO with the Type of Set Value check Indirect Reference and select LW10 as the address of variable parameter SET niet J ssa os x f wr 1 Command Button property
355. he LB1 is displayed in Event component 1 and the other event with the format type of ON and the trigger for the LB2 is displayed in Event component 2 Pressure is excessive NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 247 seqezeq p fold 8 3 Buiyjes wely 8 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 8 4 Event Setting oe Event Setting The information logged in Event component will be displayed in the Event component To display the information in the Event component the information must be logged in the Event Setting database in advance One bit or word address controls one piece of information When the logged bit or word address is triggered i e It is ON OFF or the restricted value is triggered the corresponding information will be displayed in the Event component This component is only responsible for the event log and the display needs to be done by Event component Process of Adding Modifying Event Setting iri 1 Clicking the zl icon located in Database Toolbar or Event Setting in the Project Database allow Event Setting dialog box pops up No Type PTNo Address inform Address Trigger__ Condition _ Messag 4 mW Add Delete DeleteAl Modify Import Expot OK 3 248 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer 2 Select the Add button to add
356. he Moving Component can move along X axis and Y axis and the Read Address the Read Address 1 and the Read Address 2 are used to store the component state X axis position and Y axis position respectively X Scaling When this option is selected the Moving Component can only move horizontally along X axis but the relative moving position can be set through the input value and proportional value For example when the value of PLC to be read ranges from 0 to 1000 but the relative position to be moved in the PT ranges from 0 to 640 the minimum values and maximum values of proportion value and input value are 0 amp 640 and 0 amp 1000 respectively and the Read Address and the Read Address 1 can be used to store the component state and the position respectively ow U st r n Y Scaling When this option is selected the Moving Component can only move vertically along Y axis but the relative moving position can be set through the input value and proportional value For example when the value of PLC to be read ranges from 0 to 1000 but the relative position to be moved in the PT ranges from 0 to 480 the minimum values and maximum values of proportion value and input value are 0 amp 480 and 0 amp 1000 respectively and the Read Address and the Read Address 1 can be used to store the component state and the position respectively X Reverse This option functions are similar with X Scaling but the component moves toward
357. he PLC is 6400 32000 while the range desired to be displayed on the PT is 0 00 2 00 This can be realized with settings shown below r Basic Property Numeric Data Font Keyboard Setting Graphics Control Setting Display Setting Storage Format Unsigned integer Datalength WORD Integer 3 Decimal 2 X Max Min Value Setting Over Max Max 37000 Min 6400 T indirect Max Min Reference a oe PT umo PLCNo go a E Pot COM1 I Use Variable Change Station No 0 a en i Color FT Fash Address 0 Data Format BIN Word Length 2 Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 V Proportional Conversion 3 122 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 6 12 Text Input Eo Text Input Text Input component can modify or display the data in the specified word memory which is analyzed through the standard ASCII character table as default settings The input data is saved to a consecutive memory with the Registered Address as the first address Low byte character codes are displayed on the left while high byte character codes are displayed on the right Enable the touching area and enter the input state ao V few a 7 Input from the keyboard Process of adding one Text Input component ndu X8L ZL 9 1 Press the Text Input component icon drag it to the window then the Basic Properties dialog box of the Text Input component
358. he Scroll Bar use the variables Assuming the address of the index memory is LW1 the addresses of the starting browsing index value and the maximum browsing index value will be LW1 and LW2 respectively 4 Press the OK button to complete the setup and adjust the position and size of the Scroll Bar component 3 166 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 6 23 Event event Event component is used to display the event information registered in Event Setting and whose current state satisfying the triggering conditions The Event component will display triggered event information one by one according to the time sequence of the triggered event If the accurate time needs to be displayed the RTC must be used or the Time must be read from the PLC When the event should be stored to the external memory refer to 6 2 3 Event History Setting Page 6 13 W ez V few a 7 Process of adding one Event component 1 Press the Event component icon drag it to the screen then the Basic Properties dialog box of the Event component will pop up Basic Property Event Setting Display Setting Priority Nomal JUSAZ EC 9 E Read Address Write Address PT HMIO da 0 PT HMIO Port COMI Port COMI Change 0 p Change 0 Station No Station No Area Variable LWW T Area Vanable LWW Address 0 System Memory Address 0 D System Memory
359. he completion of setup the Macro Variable Table macro_0 c window is shown as below Macro Variable Table macro_0 c WeIBOJd oen BIGWIIS e 3219 1 6 E Storage For i signed short LWO_R LW 0 1 Read Write No signed short LWIR LW 1 1 Read No double LW W LW 2 4 Read Write Wo After defining the variables we should write the following Macro int MacroEntry LWO is divided by LW1and LW2 is obtained LW2_W LWO0_R LW1_R return 0 Once it is saved the simple Macro is completed At this time go to the Edit Window to make the editions as shown below Place 2 Number Input components corresponding to LWO and LW1 respectively Place 1 text component and enter to represent division Place 1 Number Display component corresponding to LW2 and set the Storage Format to double i e double precision floating point and both the Integer and Decimal to 4 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 263 3 Functions of NB Designer Place 1 Function Key to execute Macro and select macro_0 c in the drop down menu as below and in the label 9 input Function Key Label Graphics Control Setting Display Setting Switch Screens Change screen O Frmel i Key Button Enter a Map Key Execute Macro macro Oc Perform the offline test input 5 into LWO and 2 into LW1 and you will see the result as shown below The result should be 2 5000
360. he following dialog box pop up K m eee bei E ro Yara ec i Yoliaqvie F aaa Storage Format bit z PLE No O Area LE Address 0 Data Format BIN _ Fomat A ange DOCO 0 3335 Word Length 1 F Aray Variable Aaa Read Write gt Array Length Firstly specify the variable name There are 3 kinds of variables Read variable Write variable and Read Write variable Read variable means Macro will obtain the value of the variable from the specified address Write variable means the result after the Macro executed will be written into the specified address and Read Write variable incorporates the features of the Read variable and the Write variable Therefore Read Write and Read Write are the 3 different variables for the same address It is recommended to use _R _W and _RW to differentiate the variables when you specify their names In the following example LWO and LW1 are Read variables and LW2 is Write variable so we name them as follows LWO_R LW1_R and LW2_W Please note that the regulations for the variable names are consistent with that for C language and the special attention must be paid to the following points 1 The variable name is case sensitive 2 The variable name can t be the number or begin with the number or include some special characters such as space slashes etc 3 The variable name can t be any reserved words of C language 4 Specify the array length in the range from 2 to 1024 The arr
361. he packaging part of the circuit board with your bare hands Discharge any static electricity from your body before handling the board e When using the No 6 pin of the serial communication port COM1 connector for a voltage of DC 5V make sure the supply equipment s current capacity is below 250mA before using it The DC 5V voltage output of the NB unit is 5V 5 and the maximum current is 250mA The serial communication port COM1 of NB3Q TWOOB and NB3Q TW01B is unable to output the current e Turn OFF the power supply before connecting or disconnecting cables e Always keep the connector screws firmly tightened after the communication cable is connected e The maximum tensile load for cables is 30 N Do not apply loads greater than this e Confirm the safety of the system before turning ON or OFF the power supply or pressing the reset button e The whole system may stop depending on how the power supply is turned ON or OFF Turn ON OFF the power supply according to the specified procedure e Reset by pressing the reset button or restart the power supply once the DIP switch settings are changed e To ensure the system s safety make sure to incorporate a program that can confirm the normal functionality of the NB Unit before running the system e Start actual system application only after sufficiently checking screen data macros and the operation of the program at the host side e Do not press the touch panel with a force greater
362. heck box Save to Recipe Data Field in the PT Property is checked the system stores the Event History information of executed Event to the Recipe Data Field Since the system automatically performs the storing the user does not have to care about the method to store the Event History information The destination to store the data will be specified from the address set in Start Address of the system parameters The default address is 0 The data stored to the Recipe Data includes Event Log management information and Event History information The Event Log management information occupies 30 words and the information will be stored at the starting address which was set in Starting Address by the user To the address in which the Event Log management information was stored Event History information will be stored The Event History information occupies 20 words The example of size calculation to store the Event Log is shown as below The data which was stored in the Recipe Data cannot be exported to external memory An example when the starting address of the data to 100 in Event History Setting of PT Property Print Setting COM1 Setting COM2 Setting Extemal Memory PT Task Bar PT Extended Property System Information Setting Security Level Setting User Permission Setting Event History Setting if Save to Recipe Data Field if Save to Edemal Memory Number of Event 500 SEE Dee USB DISKI W Restoration during outage
363. hen the PT needs to be replaced you can select the PT by right clicking it in the Configuration and Setup Window and select Change PT Model in the pop up menu ae ee oe ee pr viy s A 444 KERKREG E a a ah Cut Ctri X a Copy Ctrl C Delete Paste Ctrl V 4 Repeat Change PLC Model Edit Logo Screen Import Recipe Edit sJ Property NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 41 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 42 The following dialog box will pop up automatically Change PT Model Current PT Mew PT PT Type NEA TOT 6 PT Type NBSQ TW4O1B Screen Size flach Resolution 800480 Color 65536 True Color Touch Panel 4 wire precision resist Rey None Printer Hone Recipe Size 256K Words Video Mone Audio Mone SO Memory Cardone USB Host 1 USB Slave Ethernet res COM1 R5232 COM AS2s AS465 A542 Screen Size 5 6lnch Resolution 320x234 Color 65536 True Color Touch Panel 4 wire precision resiste Rey Mone Printer None Recipe Size 120K Words Video None Audio None SO Memory Card None USB Host 1 USB Slave Ethernet yes COM1 AS232 COM RS232 A5S465 AbS4e2 pecial screen setting Use default menu screen on new PT Fast Selection Use default common sheet screen on new PT 1 Coramon window Use default Nun keyboard screen on new PT SNUM Keyboard Use default ASCII keyboard screen on new PT FASCI Keyboard Use defaul
364. his authority 3 302 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer Login Screen for User Permission Place one Bit Button component with the address LBO and the Set format and pop up the input screen of the user permission password specifying the Direct Screen Basic Property Bit Button Label Graphics Control Setting Display Setting y Priority Normal gt N lt o Read Address S PT HMio e go A fe Port COM1 S TE sea 0 T Station No a Area Variable LB Address 0 T System Memory 3 sa i P T O C n D S a d pa 3 io o O gt oo D Priority Nomal Write Address PT Hmo PH o No Port COMI Change 0 a Station No lage wind hics Lik Area Varnable LE T compile Address 0 System Memory NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 303 3 Functions of NB Designer User Login t pro Exi Create a new screen as the user permission password input screen Firstly place one Text Input component for inputting the user name with the address of LW9486 and the maximum word length up to 16 Here it is 10 Basic Property Font Keyboard Setting Graphics Control Setting Display Setting Password a Priorty Normal 7 Swap high byte and low byte I Unicode Login Login Out V Make Read Address and Write Address the Same Extended ASCII
365. his function And it d better to use it after the time is adjusted well 3 292 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer Vector Font Smooth Display The characters can be made smooth beautiful and no alias by using Vector Font Smooth Display But using this function can increase the computations of the PT and may affect the processing speed of the PT with the slower speed of refreshing of the PT Therefore if the user doesn t have the higher requirements for the vector font display but have the requirements for the faster refreshing speed of the PT please do not check this option The default is checking Vector Font Smooth Display This function doesn t support Event Setting Event Alarm Alarm List List Drop down List Data P History components and Operation Log component D lt The comparison effect of checking and not checking the Vector Font Smooth Display is shown as g below ie The effect of checking Vector Font Smooth Display The effect of not checking Vector Font Smooth g Display D p It is obvious that the edges after being handled are more smooth and no alias Flip Screen Display The optimal visual angle for the screen of the PT is front view If the screen needs to be seen by the overlooking method i e from top to bottom in some special occasions the display effect will become poor and the Flip Screen Display is added
366. his function is almost the same as that of All time When screen is Function operation will be triggered once when the screen where the unloading timer component locates is closed NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 209 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 210 Trigger Mode Execution Cycle Response Mode Trigger State Repeat Count Trigger Address Descriptions of Timer Properties Trigger Address When the address specified at Trigger Address matches to the status specified at Trigger State the triggering operates If Repeat Count is set to 0 the triggering operation is consecutively repeated until the trigger condition is released After the trigger condition is cleared once followed by the trigger is operated for the number of times specified at Repeat Count the timer will be stopped automatically It refers to the timing cycle of the timer with the unit of 100 ms The timer will perform functional operation once at each interval of timing cycle Immediate When the triggering condition is met the function will be executed immediately Delay When the triggering condition is met the function will be executed after one cycle is delayed When Trigger Address is selected the triggering state of the memory is On or Off It refers to the times of repeated execution after the timer is triggered When it is O the function will always be execute
367. hown PERFORMANCE DATA Performance data given in this manual is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitability and does not constitute a warranty It may represent the result of OMRON s test conditions and the users must correlate it to actual application requirements Actual performance is subject to the OMRON Warranty and Limitations of Liability ERRORS AND OMISSIONS The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate however no responsibility is assumed for clerical typographical or proofreading errors or omissions NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 15 Safety Precautions Notation Used for Safety Information The following notation is used in this manual to provide precautions required to ensure safe usage of the product The safety precautions that are provided are extremely important to safety Always read and heed the information provided in all safety precautions Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which if not avoided will result in death or serious injury Additionally there may be severe property damage Precautions for Safe Use Indicates precautions on what to do and what not to do to ensure using the product safely Wj Precautions for Correct Use Indicates precautions on what to do and what not to do to ensure proper operation and performance Note Indicates suggestive information and precautio
368. ht of the area where the button locates Font Size Refers to the font size of the texts in the Menu Button and the Task Bar Button NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 10 3 PT Extended Properties System Information Setting Security Level Setting User Permission Setting Event History Setting Print Setting COM1 Setting COM2 Setting ExtemalMemoy PT Task Bar PT Extended Property Y V Backlight 10 mins Video Mode PAL S J Auto backlight during alam event Screen Saver 0 mins Screen Saver Screen O Frame0 D V Retum to Original Screen When Screen Saver Ends Number of Languages 8 I Allow Upload Password 888888 Default Language 1 S Allow Decompilation Password 888888 _Language Setting Z Chinese Font Box Height 24 Operation Log Storage Setting a System Scroll Bar Width 20 Storage Device USB DISK Use Macro when loading project Subfolder Era macro_0 c s Use Buzzer eee Only fe 4 7 Use Edemal Clock Buffer Storage Defaut Saveasms V Vector Font Smooth Display Storage Period 0 Day _ Rip Screen Display i Note no limit when storage period is zero Cursor Color X Hs Unable to nput Display Color Common Sheet Screen Attributes Display below base screen X Pop up Screen Attributes Display in foreground h File Browser m Initial Screen 0 Frame0 5 5 File List Window Common Sheet 1 Common Window Confirmation Scree
369. i e top alignment bottom alignment left alignment right alignment etc the size cascading combination and flip methods 5 Line Width Toolbar Adjusts the width of the line in the figure 6 Line Style Toolbar Add or delete the arrow head replace solid line with broken line in the figures System Toolbar Performs the compilation downloading and test of the project 8 Database Toolbar Includes text library alarm information Variable Table PLC control and event information 9 Code Edit Toolbar The icon to edit macro is displayed 10 Pattern Toolbar Select the filling style of screen background or the closed space such as rectangle ellipse sector etc 1 1 Label Component Edit Toolbar Performs the alignments of the label such as label aligning to the left border right border top border or bottom border of the component label locating in the vertical center or horizontal center of the component 12 State Switch Toolbar Simulates the switching of the various states of each component in the current screen and languages 13 Font Toolbar Sets dot matrix vector graphics mode font and font size of various kinds of texts displayed in the screen NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 5 3 Functions of NB Designer 14 Status Bar Toolbar Displays the information such as the current mouse position the width height of the destination object and the editing state etc
370. icating Unable to Input isn t displayed as shown in the following right graphics Example of Security Setting Example Set LWO to the address of number input component check Operator Comfirm and select 10 s for wait s TE b ee me ee ig eee ere nber Input property Basic Property Numeric Data Font Keyboard Setting Graphics Control Setting Display Setting r Touch Enabling Setting Enable Input W Show Unable to Input Disable Input Confirm Operatio Conditional Enabling Operation Log C Security Level Min Interval seconds Triggering action Macro Write Notice Use Pemission Control I Indirect Reference Bit Word Indirect Reference PT Hmo PLENo o Fort COMI Use Variable I Change Station No 0 Area Variable LB Address 10 Data Format BIN Word Length 1 Format Range DDDD 0 3999 C Use index 3 76 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer Perform the offline test Operate the number input component and the Confirm Screen will pop up during the confirmation operation In this case press Yes to input the data successfully press Cancel to cancel the input If 10 seconds pass without pressing Y
371. ies Sampling Mode Continu Cycle 1 X Is Cycle m Control Memory Setting Trigger Memory Setting 1c Pause PLC z oe PLC PT HMIO No 0 PT HMIO No 0 Area Variable LE Area Variable LE 0 fat Address 0 Address 0 ri Data Format BIN X Data Format BIN X Word Length 1 Use Variable Word Length 1 Use Variable Format Range DDDD 0 9999 Format Range DDDD 0 9999 3 p P N U mPp D T D mp S mm lt Descriptions of Background Property Sampling Method Periodic sampling The data is sampled timely OFF ON trigger Only when the state of the specified bit address turns ON from OFF sampling the sampling is triggered ON OFF trigger Only when the state of the specified bit address turns OFF from ON sampling the sampling is triggered OFF lt gt ON trigger Only when the state of the specified bit address changes the sampling sampling is triggered OFF ON reset trigger sampling Only the state of the specified bit address turns ON from OFF the sampling is triggered and the state of the specified bit address will be reset automatically after the triggering Only the state of the specified bit address turns OFF from ON the sampling is triggered and the state of the specified bit address will be reset automatically after the triggering ON gt OFF reset trigger sampling Cycle Sampling Mode Sampling Points Trigger memory Sett
372. ight clicking Repeat in the corresponding menu after the component being selected as shown below Copy Type Offset Address From start poini ncrease Decease f From end point Note Address auto change is invalid for variable s N F Copy Quantity Word Address Auto Change r Bit Position Auto Change 5 amp Cut Ctrl x M Direction 4 Address Change _ Address Change a Ea Copy Ctrl C Delete W Direction f gt Direction Z f gt Direction Z i Paste Ctrl V eee ae M Interval between components Y Direction IA Y Direction JA Select All CtritA amp Direction J Interval 1 Interval A Find Replace Ctrl F Y Direction a wo Refresh in i Lock Position lt D Z Copy Type Selecting From start point the copied component to be arranged according to the upper left top of the component as the reference point Selecting From end point the copied component to be arranged according to the lower right top of the component as the reference point Copy Quantity The number of the copied component in each line and each column Interval between components Specifying the horizontal interval and vertical interval between the two of the copied components Offset Address The address of the copied component increases decreases in X Y directions Word Address Auto Change The word address of the copied component increases decreases in X Y directions Bit Position Auto Ch
373. ill be displayed according to the set vector font List and Drop down List List and drop down list options are available for selection in the Word Switch component and in such state the label for the component is listed as the list Similarly fonts can be set for each language and each state Alarm and Event Information Alarm and event information component can also set different vector fonts for each piece of alarm information and for each language When the text library is used respectively b The software provides the toolbar for convenient font operation When you select one or more components you can use the font toolbar to change the font Properties of the related components Please pay attention to the following conditions The font attributes set through the toolbar for the current state and current language If the attributes of other states and languages need to be changed you can do it through the component dialog box or by changing the current state or the current language of the project as shown below Hi a ae a zs F Etat Canai h pee Iba Y State Switch Li oolba ir etoile a Pe L i DE 2 3 State 0 Language 5 When multiple components are selected if the component doesn t support a certain font attribute the attribute of this component will not be affected by using the font toolbar to set the font attribute Notes for Using Vector Font Based on the special realizi
374. imum value x100 Indirect Sets the upper lower limit values and offset value of the Level Meter display area to be read Max Min from the specified memories Reference Alarm Upper Sets the range of the alarm area When the value of the specified memory falls below the Alarm Alarm Lower Lower or exceeds the Alarm Upper the filled area will be displayed in the specified color Alarm Under Min fil Normal berm Over Max Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Alam Under 20 Alam Over 80 100 100 100 80 80 80 50 50 50 eO ica 20 se 20 0 0 0 D100 10 D100 40 D100 80 Indirect Alarm Sets the upper and lower limit values of the alarm area in the Level Meter display area to be Over Alarm read from the specified memories Upper Reference 3 Switch to the Scale tab and make settings as shown below Basic Property Color Shape Scale Graphics Display Setting T Use Scale Show Scale Frame Scale Color Scale Color Number of Main Scales 5 lt a Length of Main Scale 20 Number of Minor Scales 2 E Length of Minor Scale 12 Scale display position Left of the bar Right of the bar Display Numbers on Scale Font Font Integer 3 Decimal 0 a 3 132 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer Scale Properties Use Scale Scale Color Sets the scale color of the Level Meter Show Scale Frame Determines whether to show the scale f
375. ing Pause Clear Refers to the interval between 2 sampling points with the unit of s or 100 ms Continue When all the sampling points end the sampling still continues Once When all the sampling points end the sampling will stop which means sampling is only performed once When the sampling method is Once the sampling will stop after the set Sampling Points is finished When the Trigger memory Setting is used for the sampling method the memory address to be read will be specified The default Word Length is 2 Pause function can stop the data sampling operation temporarily In addition the Clear function here is invalid for the Data History component NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 193 3 Functions of NB Designer 4 Switch to the Channel Properties tab and set the display information for each channel Title Bar Properties Basic Property Display Properties Channel Froperties Save Data History Title Bar Properties Save to Recipe Data Field Save to Extemal Device Start Address 0 Storage Device USB DISKI Restoration during outages 7 Data Encryption End Address T l Export to CSV File Save as ms Addr Format DDDDDD Eo TEN FE Storage Type Daily file Buffer Storage Default Storage Period 0 Note 1 No limit when storage period is zero 2 Subfolder name must be unique Indirect Subfolder Reference PT Hmo PE o Area Variable jy
376. ing Cycle 1 X is z Sampling Points 2 Page No 1 Channel 1 Read Address Write Address Control Memory Setting PT Hmo MC o PT m FIC go Trigger Memory Setting T Pause Clear ClearAddr PauseAddr 1 o n v PLC n X U Y PLC PT HMIO 0 PT HMIO 0 Port COM1 Port COM1 No No Change Change 5 Avea Varnable LB z Area Varable LB F Station No Station No Address 0 Address 0 W pineal 7 Data Fomat BIN Data Fomat BIN Address System Memory Address 0 System Memory Word Length 1 Use Variable Word Length 2 Use Variable Format Range DDDD 0 9999 Format DDDD 0 9999 Dein hon Cy Word ye Otay Word i i i i i i Format Length Format Length Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 T Scroll T Time PT HMO PLC 9g PT Humo PLC p 7 Use Variabl 7 Use Variabl ss Use Variable Use Variable i j Area Variable LW Area Variable LW M Use index Use index ee eran 0 Data Format BIN X Data Fomat BIN X Word Length 3 7 Use Variable Word Length 12 JF Use Variable Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 Cancel NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 105 3 Functions of NB Designer XY Graph property S Basic Property XY Graph Channel Extended Property Save Data History Display Setting JV Indirect Max Min Reference Memory address order is Y Min Y Max X Min X Max Indirect Max Min Refer HMIO0 LW 20 Y coordinate min
377. ing one Level Meter component 1 Press the Level Meter component icon drag it to the window then the Basic Properties dialog box of the Level Meter component will pop up Basic Property Color Shape Scale Graphics Display Setting W ez V eS r 7 Priority Nomal Read Address W Write Address a PLC E z PLC PT A y o PT HMIO No E Port COMI Fort COMI gt Change m Change m Station No o z Station No o Q 49 Area Variable LWW Area Variable LWW z o Address 0 System Memory Address l System Memory Data Wod J Data I Word Fandi BIN leih 1 ani BIN Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 Use Variable l Use Variable l Use index Use index Read Address Refers to the first address of the word address corresponding to the Level Meter component Word Length Displays the data length of the read address supporting sing word and double word NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 129 3 Functions of NB Designer 2 Switch to the Color Shape tab and make settings as shown below Basic Property Color Shape Scale Graphics Display Setting 3 130 Bar Type Normal Display direction Bottomtotop Bar Shape Rectangle Target Value V Frame V Background l Hash Over Max Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Indirect Max Min Reference PLC PT HMIO No D PLC Connection Port COMI l
378. instead of 2 0000 LWO_R and LW1_R are signed short so that the division of one variable by another variable both in integer type results in the variable also in integer type In order to resolve this problem the variable to perform the division is necessary to be casted in double as follows LW2_W double LW0_R LW1_R 3 264 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer After editing the Macro in the procedure as the above perform the test again Then the result as follows should be out p D Q c 5 O ct 5 Now the basic specification is completed However the Macro still have a problem When entering 0 into LW1 and executing the Macro an error occurs and the error can affect the normal operation of the system In this case a check should be entered into the operand Change the codes shown as below int MacroEntry Judge whether LW1 is O or not in order to prevent Divide by zero overflow if LW1_R 0 LWO divides LW1and LW2 is obtained LW2_W double LWO_R LW1_R return O Execute it again If the divisor is 0 the Macro will not execute division Therefore the program safety will be improved WeIBOJd oeny BIGWIS e 3319 1 G E NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 265 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 266 Macro Optimization Create the new Macro with the optional name test
379. ion 2 Click the OK button to make the following editing box appear and select Load Graphic after right clicking the mouse in the black editing box Select the graphics gt A Open Look in E My Documents Ctrl X Cirle Ctrl V Lock Position Load Graphic Load Graphic from External Memory File name 390 4 jpa Open Files of type Graphic File bmp gif jpg png 3 372 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer The successful import of graphics is as shown below p O O r gt D T c O ct fe 5 D 3 After saving the project quit from the graphic edit window and enter the edit window 4 Place one Bitmap component and check Use Original Size Vector Graphics 5 When the offline simulation is performed and the effect is as shown below gt 3 373 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer 1 Save as Vector Graphics Storing the graphics created from multiple graphic components allows the diversion to the other screens The operation is as follows 1 Draw a rectangle and a circle then select these two components and right click the mouse to select Save as Vector Graphics Ctrl Ctrl C Cut Copy Delete Paste Ctr4v Repeat Select All CtrleA Find Replace Ctrl F Refresh Proper
380. ion Key to execute the Macro After the Save and Compile operations are performed then execute the Macro After the LB100 and LB101 are turned ON when the Macro is executed you can see the LB102 and LB103 are turned ON LB100 LB101 LB102 LB103 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 10 System Parameters Specifications related to the NB units are performed in the PT Property The PT Property can specify the procedure to display the PT screens and the system specifications of the PT units as well as the communications settings P Double clicking PT in Configuration and Setup Window can make system parameter dialog box pop up p n D Exe 3 System Information Setting Securty Level Setting User Permission Setting Event History Setting N Print Setting COM1 Setting COM2 Setting ExtemalMemory D PT Task Bar PT Extended Property 3 D Network Setting ri IP Address 192 168 250 1 Communication Setting Subnet Mask a 0 05 0 e Pasewod Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 28888 Display Setting Display mode Horizontal onzonta Field Bus Setting Vertical Save Screenshot to Bemal Memory USBI There are 11 tabs related to the communication PT Task Bar PT Extended Properties System Information Setting User Permission Setting Security Level Setting Ev
381. ion in the Pop up Screen screen which is effective for Pop up Screen Indirect Screen and Direct Screen p T c 5 O as fe S aa 9 er Z e o A EN Title Bar _ Frame 0 HR bs Minimize After the Function Key is pressed the Pop up Screen will minimize to the Taskbar Pressing this icon will make the screen return to its original position This function is effective for Pop up Screen Indirect Screen and Direct Screen Frame 0 Frame 0 Frame 0 Asy uonouny Z Z Example Screen switching function 1 Create a new project and save it 2 Create each of Fast select window 2 Common window 1 Basic window 4 Fast select window 5 Common window 6 Pop up window 7 The Fast select window 2 and the Fast select window 5 are the same size 100 220 in this case and the Pop up window 7 is the smaller that other screens it is 200 150 in this case 3 Create three function keys in the Fast select window 2 Three function keys such as Change Screen function key ti switch to Basic window O Change Screen function key to switch Basic window 4 and Change Menu Screen function key to switch to Fast select window 5 to switch the Base Screen shown as below 4 Place one text component displaying Common window 1 displayed in Common window 1 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 199 3 Functions of NB Designer 5 Place one text display compo
382. irection When the read value is greater than the maximum value or less than the minimum value only the maximum value or minimum value will be displayed in the XY Graph X Min X Max Sets the minimum value and maximum value of the data corresponding to each track line in X direction When the read value is greater than the maximum value or less than the minimum value only the maximum value or minimum value will be displayed in the XY Graph W ez V fen or a 4 Switch to the Extended Properties tab and set Channel Properties Grid Properties and Variable Period etc fo Basic Property XY Graph Channel Extended Property Save Data History Display Setting Channel Properties Channel g p Display Style Line Style E D I Display Style LINE Line Width gt x lt lt m Marker Properties O 2 Y Marker NULLS Marker Size 1 X A Marker Color 5 E V Use Grid Lines 3 Columns 2 E BackgroundColor Gid Line Width J Grid Line Style 7 Grid Line Color Indirect Reference of Sampling Cycle rT Indirect Reference of Number of Sampling Points PT HMI PLC No 0 Use Variable PT wp PLCNo 0 J Use Variable Area Variable wy Area Vanable jw Address 0 Address 0 Data Format BIN WordLength 2 Data Fomat BIN WordLength 4 Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 When sampling cycle is referenced indirectly and sampling cannot be camied out in speci
383. is read the file s specification should be corresponded to the data type specified to the file If the file is specified the different data type the contents of the file cannot be read correctly The available file format to be edited by Recipe file are rcp frp and csv When RecipeEditor is opened for the first time clicking i New icon will make 4 displayed in the title bar while Save As dialog box will pop up if clicking CI New icon after the creation of recipe file Therefore create another recipe file only Jo pyedioey ZL after the previous created file is saved When opening the Recipe file if File Open is selected in the state of the file is already opened Save as dialog box will be opened and Open file dialog box will be displayed For the already saved files the complete file path will appear in the title bar ee 4 E poole panine BEA E 3 Data type and changing data For example double click the mouse at the red box during the edition to make the Record Edit Dialog pop up and then change Storage Format from 16 bit signed number as the lower left graphics shown to 16 bit Hexadecimal as the lower right graphics shown a 1 Refresh Data 16 bit signed numbe TesOateFomet u Wl ols an w amp wl nl Re Ss j o 1D Length w Storage Format _ Descriptio m 0 1 16 bit signed n Desc1 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer
384. isplay component with the address of LW5 When LW15 is 10 and LW16 is 100 LW5 will increase by 10 each time when Set is pressed until the upper limit i e 100 is reached and then stop increase Perform the offline test and the effect is shown as below Switch to the Label tab and add the text describing the state Switch to the Graphics tab and select Vector Graphics or bitmap to display the bit address state and represent the touching area Switch to the Control Setting tab and make the Security Setting and set the Triggering action on AQ Press the OK button to complete the setup of the Command Button component 3 6 5 Word Lamp M DAUS Word Lamp is the component which will switch the display information according to the value of the specified word address 3 92 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer Process of adding one Word Lamp component 1 Drag the Word Lamp component icon after it is pressed will make the Basic Properties of Word Lamp component pop up Basic Property Word Lamp Label Graphics Display Setting Priority Normal Read Address e Write Address AIR PLC z PLC PT ba No 9 PT HMIO No 2 m Port COM1 Port COM1 Change Change i U m Station No 0 Station No 0 f Area Varnable LW v Area Var able LW Address 0 System Memory Address 0 System Memory Data Word Data Word gt
385. isplayed on the Chinese character display screen then the process of inputting Chinese character is completed Triggering the blank area of the Chinese character display screen can realize the movement of this screen which is similar to the screen console of the function key If the Pinyin needs to be modified during the input the function keys of Back Space or Clear can be used to realize this operation NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer Back Space and Clear functions of Function Key is prior to the input Pinyin characters i e when the Pinyin characters are input currently the object operated by the Back Space and Clear function is the Pinyin characters instead of the other characters in the text input area Note When the font size is 8 24 48 72 or 96 the Pinyin input method is invalid LSB Type LSB type is applicable to the Command Button component Word Lamp component and Word Neon Lamp component If the Bit Button component is operated the text string to display in neon lamp and others can be controlled LSB is the acronym of Least Significant Bit This encoding type first converts the data in the buffer to binary data and then determines the current state of the component based on the number of consecutive 0 at the least significant bits of the binary data p O O r gt D a c 3 O ct fe 5 D Ex
386. ission USER LEVEL LOGIN PASSWORD pencecocesd Input box for password of user level a How to set the Auto show login screen Select Touch Enabling Setting in Control Setting tab in Properties dialog box of control component Once Security Level or Use Permission Control is checked Auto show login screen option will appear and the Auto show login screen check box is checked the login screen will pop up automatically NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 389 3 Functions of NB Designer Touch Enabling Setting Enable Input l Show Unable o Input Disable Input Conditional Enabling M Security Level Lowest level 0 I User Permission Control Select ob Pennission b Method to specify a screen as Login Screen Setting the corresponding Login Screen in PT Property PT Extended Properties can make the set screen as the login screen shown automatically when the Security Level or Permission Control function is used System Information Setting Security Level Setting User Permission Setting Event History Setting COM1Seting COM2Setting M Ratum to Original Screen When Screen Saver Ends Number ot Languages M Allow Upload Password 888688 Default Language 1 Allow Decompilation Password 888888 Language Setting System Scroll Bar Width 20 Storage Device USB DISKI Use Macro when loading project macro Oc Storage T file 7
387. ith the fonts should be increased in the project b Text library or some component labels do not support the graphic font Vector Font The characters used for labels or supposed to be used in future are abstracted through specified fonts by NB Designer Only the abstracted characters are stored as True Type font ttf style and can be used by the NB Designer units Using vector font in NB Designer can avoid the disadvantages of Bitmap Font and graphic font Vector font has the following advantages NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer a It supports a large variety of vector fonts The TrueType font only the font in ttf format installed in the operating system can be used b You can save the capacity of project file It adopts the method of intercepting the matrix from the font file thus reducing the capacity of the font file For the same character in the same font only one matrix needs to be intercepted regardless of the size color bold italic styles c Rich font styles are available Bold and italic styles are available for each kind of font d The font size can be set freely without any deformation You can set the consecutive font sizes without any projections e It supports powerful multiple languages You can use it to set fonts for each state and each kind of language of the text f The vector font can be used in the text library go ol WO
388. itting the value of the specified communication address to the other communications address Data Transmission can be triggered by the manual touching method or the state change of the specified address FreePlotting Draw the graphics with the pixel based on the consecutive data stored in the specified communications addresses NB Series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 A 7 Appendices Descriptions of Function Function Date Time Used to display the value of the RTC clock inside the PT in the set format Parts Indirect Shape Modifying the specified communications addresses allows the specifying rectangle ellipse location and size of the lines to draw the shape User Information Used to display the related information of the current login user in the table form Multifunction Used to incorporate the Bit Button component and Command Button component into one component thus making the user realize the Bit Set and Word Set operations through only one key Event Display Display the event information with Event Setting matching to the specified trigger condition File List The File List is used to display the file information of the external memory This component is divided into three parts the left part displays the information on the folder under the current folder the upper right part displays the information on the file under the current folder and the lower right part displays the PT information
389. l Arc and Circularity one eee kilisi Wey hwy oh bre S No of Equal Set the number of equal division for the graphics between 2 and 255 Line Length Set the length of the scale between 1 and 24 Start Angle End Angle The start angle and the end angle of the arc between 0 and 360 degree 2 Press the OK button to complete the setup NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 196 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 7 2 Function Key rh Function Key Function Key provides functions such as Switch Screens Keyboard Function Execute Macro Touch Calibration Clear Event and Message Board etc The function key is not controlled by the memory address so the execution of specified function needs to be activated by touching this component Process of adding one Function Key 1 Drag the Function Key icon after it is pressed and display Function Key Property In Function Key tab allocate functions such as Switch Screens Key Button Execute Macro Touch Calibration Clear Event Notepad for each function key The NB Series does not support Print currently Execute Macro Map Keyboard Disable Touch Calibration Save Screenshot to Btemal Memory Gear Event Import Export Import Project to PT Note Pad Function Pen a Pen Color i Pen Color z Pen Size 1 C Clear O hat Mode f Black
390. l Events Storage Storage Devices Restoration during outages Export to CSV File Save as ms Subfolder Storage Type Buffer Storage Storage Period USB 1 When the NB unit is restarted by the power interruption if this option is checked 1024 items of the event history which were archived until the power interruption can be displayed in the Event Exports the Event History information in CSV format to the external memory The path for storing this CSV file is event subfolder name file name Makes the data sampling time accurate to the millisecond and records it into the CSV file Sets the subfolder name of the external memory where the CSV file will be stored Although the default name is Event the user can modify it Daily File Stores the Event History information by day and records them into the CSV file named in yyyy mmdd format Single File Stores the Event History information by the piece and records them into the CSV file with the name of Subfolder Name When the data size written to the external memory reaches to the specified buffer size the writing is performed only once Default means unbuffered i e the writing operation will immediately be performed once the data is generated Sets the upper limit for the event history with the unit of Day for Daily File and Record for Single File When the Daily File is selected the file will be named in yyyy mmdd form and the
391. l Type in PLC Control setting dialog box and select the data area and the address of the data transmitted by the Read Address Please note that the unit must be word and the system automatically allocate 4 continuous addresses which are used as the controlling addresses of the data transmission And the specific meanings and usage methods are as follows 1 Read Address Select the 4 types of execution type codes When new value is written to the memory the system execute the corresponding transmission function After the transmission is completed the memory will be reset to 0 2 Read Address 1 Specify the size of the data transmitted The number of the word specified at this moment will be transmitted 3 254 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 Read Address 2 Specify the offset of the transmitted data address of the PLC side The offset is specified from the address of Specified Read Address 4 For example if the Read Address set in the PLC General Control is LW100 and the data contained in memory LW102 is 4 The starting address of the transmitted PLC data is LW108 100 4 4 4 Read Address 3 Specify the offset of the transmitted data address at the sides of local memory LW of the PT or Recipe data memory RW In the example listed above if the data contained in LW103 is 100 the starting address of N the transmitted PT da
392. l V106 Functions of NB Designer This section describes the functions of NB Designer O71 User Sce 22oeceu orc dreine teenies etree lo tease eee oe tec ke 3 4 O 2 WIGNUS 2225 cates vec ieee beste inpe enner nr chee eee ee oh oe ee 3 7 3 2 1 PISMENU ednenatecedaecedustegnesdee seenerdveeenaeeceeeeene 3 7 S22 EdLMENU oun ogea cetera obs on Seen Seen ewe eee cause eae 3 10 3 2 3 View Men sc ceeds os becue Sobesdeue redd tuanai mew seGdsckecs ook 3 15 3 2 4 Screen Menu 0 cc eee e eens 3 26 3 2 5 Draw MEMI tec 4e5s doer os eee coe ey oc ee Soke os pees whee sees coe 3 29 3 2 6 Components Menu 0 ccc eens 3 29 o2 f TOOls MENU cccctebavemcseedac teed Gah Re bos rs ee OS he ease oes 3 30 3 2 8 Option Menu pe 2 6 ngs nce owe Oboe OER Re eee eR oe ee et ee ee a est 3 30 3 2 9 Window Menu 22530255265 60tcb eet et ebhio4 ood ose eee eho eae 3 31 3 2 10 Help Menu 6 64 eu d oxo 56 e065 eae Se ae eee oS ORS SEU ese 3 32 3 3 NB Designer Software Window 000 eee ees 3 33 3 3 1 Project Library VWWINGOW 34122424 oddntedudseeusedend seve ioe ed eaux 3 33 3 3 2 Project Pile VVWMGOW sas ees ob dati reena na See ee oe ee oe ok ee 3 37 3 3 3 Project Work Space 2 os ct0 e8 4454 54deutbertbeava evs 65 aa hemes 3 37 3 3 4 Output Window cu c b2e bee oe bad hance Sak Ge Pudew See b Bea Oe oes 3 43 3 3 5 Component List Window 2 2 aasa aoaaa 2 ceedecustadedeecnt adedeedak 3 44 3 4 Screen Concept cx tanoe 6 hp soho s
393. l V106 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 6 2 Bit Lamp ee palais Bit Lamp displays the On Off state of bit address inside a specified PT or of PLC device If the state is 0 the graphics with state of 0 will be displayed If the state is 1 the graphics with state of 1 will be displayed If Transport Font is checked the Label values corresponding to the different states can be set and displayed Process of adding one Bit Lamp W ez V few a 4 1 Drag the Bit Lamp icon after it is pressed then the Basic Properties dialog box for Bit Lamp component will pop up Basic Property Bit Lamp Label Graphics Display Setting Priority Nomal P T N Read Address Write Address zy D _ PLC _ PLC PT HMIO No 0 PT HMIO No 0 3 Port COM1 Port COM1 Change z Change a a Station No 0 Station No 0 Area Variable LB X Area Var able LB z Address 0 System Memory Address 0 System Memory Data Word z Data Word Rei BIN 1 Ta BIN i i 1 Format Range DDDD 0 9999 Use Variable Use Variable Use index Use index Read Address Refers to the bit address controlling the displayed information such as the state graphics label and so on of the lamp Address Refers to the bit address corresponding to the lamp 2 Switch to the Bit Lamp tab Basic Property Bit Lamp Label Graphics Display Setting Type Noma Oe O Normal Value 1blinking at
394. le To create a Vector Graphics with the name of Middle and the state No of 2 and click OK then the following dialog box will appear Project Library Window x Connector PT PLC Parts ux Bit Button Bit Lamp Bit Switch E Direct Screen 23 Command Button IL Word Lamp Gti Word Switch 9 Scroll Bar Se Moving Component e Animation statel m If you think the Vector Graphics states added just now are not enough you can use the following methods to make addition Drag the mouse into State Preview Window of the Vector Graphics select one state such as state0 then click E icon in the toolbar to create a new state And the states that can be created are up to 256 kinds D phbr oa Bre oly AR xa ui a er fe A statc0 state 3 60 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 Create the graphics displayed in these two statuses and then save the project Fe Est View Screen Drw Components Too Qoton Window Help ox Sow 2 e MA ic a v z a E E as 3 amp 4 p g Db O O O amp Gag z P LRBGHhe BH D a pun ee GEE GRQr zro Z QW A SRY RENZIII Weve BR 1 sOonyooago e Project Library Window x Project File Window x Connector s CONFIRM vg E ow S CTRL_BAROOL vg oO IE CTRL BARDO vg S x DISP_BAROOL vg g Pats ig DISP BAROO wg N a 2 n
395. le On will be displayed when the state is 1 Alignment Three methods are available as shown below Left The input content is put in the left side of the graphics 3 84 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer Right The input content is put in the right side of the graphics Center The input content is put in the center of the graphics Font Size Displays the size of the font used by the content input to Message and the following types are available Sed 9 3 Color Displays the colors of fonts used by the content input to Message and the user can use Custom Color to specify the desired colors 4 Switch to the Graphics tab and select Vector Graphics or bitmap to represent the graphics corresponding to the On and Off states of the bit address dwe ig Z 9 Basic Property Bit Lamp Label Graphics Display Setting M ee E O me CLOSE001 vg CONFIRM vg CTRL_BAR CTRL_BAR DISP_BARO oo oH nicer manmn nicer mann MIn Nann recrrnnonr racrrnnodin Bitmap Use Original Size Save to System Graphics Library Graphics for Each Import Graphics 0 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 85 3 Functions of NB Designer 5 Switch to the Display Setting tab and adjust the position and size of the lamp component Basic Property Bit Lamp L
396. le Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 335 3 Functions of NB Designer Firstly create a new project and select the MODBUS RTU as the PLC in Project Library Window 1 Create one Text Input component with Word Length of 4 to display and change the name of each group of recipes 2 Create one Number Input component to display and change each group of recipe data Basic Property Font Keyboard Setting Graphics Control Setting Display Setting Basic Property Numeric Data Font Keyboard Setting Graphics Control Setting Display Setting Priority Normal Swap high byte and low byte Unicode Priority Normal IV Make Read Address and Write Address the Same Extended ASCII V Make Read Address and Write Address the Same Read Address Write Address Read Address Write Address P mmo RC o Hmo PC o gt PT Hmo NC o PT Hmo fC ge Port COM1 Port COM1 Port COM1 Port COM1 Change Change E Change m E Station No 0 x Sean te 0 i m Station No 0 E Station No 0 Area Variable RWI ba Area Va able LW gt Area Variable RWI z Area Variable LW Sa Address 100 System Memory Address 0 7 System Memory Address 4 I System Memory Address 0 I System Memory Data Word Data Word a Wod 4 Data BIN Wod 4 cea BN eo Format BIN 1 Format Range DDDDDD 0 261000 Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 Format Range DDDDDD 0 261000 Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 I Use Variable I Use Varia
397. le Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 35 T w T O D o 3 D n 9 r D a MOpUIM Aleiqi yO8lOld L 3 Functions of NB Designer In the Project Library Window you can right click select and use Small Icon as shown below 5 Function Parts These include Scale Function Key Alarm Display Timer etc For details refer to 3 7 Function Parts Page 3 196 6 Project Database This contains Text Library Variable Table Alarm Information Event Information and PLC Control For details refer to 3 8 Project Database Page 3 234 So 3 36 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 3 2 Project File Window The Project File Window is intended for displaying information about the PT Macro Recipe and Vector Graphic etc contained in a project If this project uses 1 PT only one HMIO whe will appear below the PT if 3 PTs are involved HMIO whe HMI1 whe HMI2 whe will appear accordingly The rest can be deducted from this See the following diagram T a Z T O D o 3 D n 2 er D 2 fe z BlueFrame vq i CLOSEOO1 vg i CONFIRM vg CTRL_BAROOL vg CTRL_BARO09 vg i DISP_BAROO1 vg i DISP_BAROO2 vg s Ei DISP_BARO05 vg gt a DISP_BARO06 vg 3 z Dashed vg E ENTEROOS vg T ENTEROLO vg lt 2 KEYOO7 vq I O Z EE
398. lects the multiple components including the locked component to perform the operation of movement etc this locked component will have no response to this operation Please note that there will be one lock shape mark on its original icon as shown above Multiple Copy of Component Single Copy When the user selects one component to perform single copy he just needs to click the component while pressing the Ctrl key which is equivalent to the operation of Copy Paste Repeat It is intended for the multiple copy of a certain component and the software can automatically increase or decrease the component address and set the interval after the component copy operation Right click the component to be copied and select Repeat from the Context menu then the following dialog box will pop up The user can make settings according to the requirement Repeat Copy Type Offset Address f From start poini f Increase 0 Decrease f From end point Note Address auto change ts invalid for variable Copy Quantity Word Address Auto Change Bit Position Auto Change W X Direction 5 M Address Change T Address Change if Direction 4 fe 4 Direction FA f x Direction FA E Y Direct F Directic Interval between components UNS a LA p Enee Al Direction J z Interval 1 Interval 1 Y Direction a z ai 3 356 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer p O O
399. led forward the data displayed previously will be retained The historical data is stored in the memory for the reference in future Type Single page Multiple pages Property Start from Left Start from Right NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer Descriptions of Data Log Properties Property Start from Top o gt Y X Start from Bottom X g ez UV D zi O o Y Sampling Periodic sampling The data is sampled periodically Methods OFF ON trigger When the state of the specified bit memory address turns ON from OFF the sampling sampling is triggered ON OFF trigger When the state of the specified bit memory address turns OFF from ON the sampling sampling is triggered OFF lt gt ONtrigger When the state of the specified bit memory address changes the sampling is sampling triggered OFF ON reset When the state of the specified bit memory address turns ON from OFF the trigger sampling sampling is triggered and the state of the specified bit memory will be set automatically to be turned OFF after the triggering ON OFF reset When the state of the specified bit memory address turns OFF from ON the trigger sampling sampling is triggered and the state of the specified bit memory will be set automatically to be turned ON after the triggering T e U D pmp D O Cycle Setting the interval to perform sampling with the unit of s
400. ll Macro Code Error xxxx Programming problems endless loop or execution timeout exist in Macro Please Macro No check the Marco The number in the later position is the Macro No System error It is system error which means the error occurs inside the PT 5 6 NB Series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 5 Maintenance and Abnormality Handling Solutions for PLC no response and PLC response error PLC no response Check whether the type and settings of the PLC are correct or not Check if the PLC Type used currently and the one for the PLC on the project are correct Refer to Appendix 4 Fabrication of the Connec tion Cable in NB series Setup Manual Check whether the baud rate parity bit data bit stop bit are correct or not the communication type is RS232 or RS485 Refer to Appendix 4 Fabrication of the Connection Cable in NB series Setup Manual Check whether the cable is wired correctly or not Yes heck whether the communi cation setting is correct or not Check whether PLC station Refer to Appendix 4 Fabrication of the Connec no is correct or not tion Cable in NB series Setup Manual Check whether the PLC area and range are correct or not Check the content of the variable table Check whether the PLC address Refer to the relevant PLC document upports the write operation p oo gt o gt e 3 2
401. loopy moving way and it supports the label contents corresponding to State 0 and State 1 in the loopy moving way Touch Trigger This function allows the multiple components operated all at once When the communications addresses specified to the Touch Trigger component are satisfied to the trigger conditions the components placed in the valid area for the Touch Trigger component can be triggered to act Table Used to make the selection type of Select by row Select by column and 3 tk 3 tk Select by cell The user can set the Row Column Select Color Background Color Border Color and write the selected Row No and Column No into the specified communication address Data History Read the consecutive addresses of the memory periodically with the top of the specified communications address and display in the table format Event History It can be used to search or display the event history information which is Display recorded in the Event Setting database and whose current state meets the triggering conditions in the table form And this component works only together with the external memory Operation Log It can be used to record or display the PT operations in the table form The operation log will be stored into the external memory in CSV format This component works only together with the external memory Function Scale Draw the scale for the shapes such as portrait lands
402. lows e Shape Ellipse e top address of Indirect Reference of Upper left Corner LWO e top address of Indirect Reference of Width Height LW2 Storing the values as follows the effect is shown as below e LWO Coordinate position of X in upper left corner 0 e LW1 Coordinate position of Y in upper left corner O e LW2 Width 100 e LW3 Height 100 n c 5 O ct 5 mi 9 er T dey P pul L Z Indirect shape property Indirect Shape Position Display Setting i Indirect Reference of Upperteft Comer i Indirect Reference of WidthHeight Position x LW 0 Width LW 2 Position X LW 1 Height LW 3 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 227 3 Functions of NB Designer 2 Set and place Indirect Shape Rectangle components as follows e Shape Rectangle e top address of Indirect Reference of Upper left Corner LWO e top address of Indirect Reference of Width Height LW2 Storing the values as follows the effect is shown as below e LWO Coordinate position of X in upper left corner 50 e LW1 Coordinate position of Y in upper left corner 80 e LW2 Width 200 e LW3 Height 100 Indirect shape property Indirect Shape Position Display Setting W Indirect Reference of Upperdeft Comer i Indirect Reference of Width Height Position X LW 0 Width LW 2 Position X LW 1 Height LW 3 3 228 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer O
403. ly view the operational records by scrolling up and down The System Scroll Bar Width can be set to the value ranging from 20 to 120 pixel in the PT Extended Properties tab in PT Property dialog box NB Series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 6 21 6 Descriptions of New Functions Added into NBLILI TW01B Descriptions of Table Display Properties Display Item Time Checking it means the operation time will be displayed and the time format can be selected There are 3 time formats available Such as HH MM SS HH MM and HH MM SS MS and HH MM SS and MS refer to the hour minute second and millisecond respectively Date Checking it means the operation date will be displayed and the date format can be selected There are 3 time formats available Such as DD MM YY MM DD YY YY MM DD and YY MM and DD refer to the year month and date respectively Date Separator Three characters of delimiter are available i e 11 06 24 Sequence Number Checking it means the sequence number of each operation record will be displayed User Name Checking it means to the information on the user performing the current operation will be displayed Ascending When it is checked the operation logs will be displayed in the ascending order i e the latest operation log will be displayed on the bottom When it is not checked the operation logs will be displayed in the descending order i e the latest operation log will b
404. ly along X axis and Y axis and the relative position to Reverse be moved can be set and the component can move along the opposite direction of Y axis Scaling When the value of Y axis is increased the moving component moves upward and when the value of Y axis is decreased it moves downward X Reverse The Moving Component moves horizontally along X axis and Y axis and the relative position to Scaling Y be moved can be set and the component can move along the opposite direction of X axis Scaling When the value of X axis is increased the Moving Component moves leftward and when the value of X axis in decreased it moves rightward NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 109 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 110 X Reverse The Moving Component moves horizontally along X axis and Y axis and the relative position to Scaling Y be moved can be set and the component can move along the opposite directions of X axis and Reverse Y axis When the value of X axis is increased the Moving Component moves leftward and Scaling when the value is decreased it moves rightward When the value of Y axis is increased it moves upward and when the value is decreased it moves downward When the Scaling is selected the relation is as shown below Ge i Minimum x Maximum i Minimum Value Input Value Proportianal Value Proportianal Value Maximum Input Value Minimum Input Value Display Position Current Position
405. m channels and n sampling points number of the occupied memory is mxnx2 One point is sampled each time and X and Y components are included Number of the occupied memory depends on the number of channel For example if there are m channels and n sampling points the number of occupied memory is mx2 Multiple points are sample each time and only Y component instead of X component is included Number of the occupied memory depends on the number of channel and sampling points For example if there are m channels and n sampling points number of the occupied memory is mxn Sampling Points Refers to the number of the sampling point displayed in the screen PageNum When Multiple pages is selected in Type this option is valid And it ranges from 1 to 32767 Channel Refers to the number of track line to be displayed and it corresponds to the word length of read address to be set And 2 word addresses correspond to one track line The channel ranges from 1 to 16 Pause Clear Set the bit address to control the pause of creating a line graph or the clear of creating a graph Clear bit address Pause bit address 1 When Clear bit is ON the sampling data will be cleared and when the bit turns OFF again the sampling will continue and the changes in XY Graph will be displayed dynamically Scroll The address specified by this bit is used in combination with the scroll components i e the XY Graph can be viewed b
406. mable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 396 How to clear RW area for recipe saving Clear the address by system memory related RW memory 1 Set the Read Address to LW9260 and input the starting address objected of clearing RW area to the Number Input component which is specified the word length to DWORD 2 Set the Read Address to LW9262 and input the word length objected of clearing RW area to the Number Input component which is specified the word length to DWORD 3 Set LB9130 PT system memory to ON and clear the content of RW area How to clear values of RW at a time 1 Specify this parameter using the Clear system memory related to RW memory method In order to clear the stored values in RW memory specify the longest word length of RW memory to the range from LW9262 to LW 9263 2 Select Clear Recipe in Select Section for downloading the NB Manager and click Execute 3 Check in the Clear Recipe check box during the download eE Select PT m Select Data PT Information Project Data HMIO rises a O LOGO File a E O hitoy O Clear Data History Clear ERW Dat Download Project c car car pkg C Clear ata O Clear FRW Data Download to Ose Communication Method USB port IP NULL PORT NULL Download Pot NULL pps NULL Exit NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V10
407. matically for updated driver software Windows will search your computer and the Internet for the latest driver software for your device unless you ve disabled this feature in your device installation Browse my computer for driver software Locate and install driver software manually 2 6 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 2 Installation and Startup of NB Designer 2 The following dialog box is displayed Select Include subfolders and click the Browse button to specify the folder Specify the driver folder under NB Designer installation directly and click Next button Browse for driver software on your computer Search for driver software in this location C Program Files OMRON NB Designer driver z F Include subfolders a A 5 m r D m O gt o h c 7 U w 3 lt D j Lae z U gt Let me pick from a list of device drivers on my computer This list will show installed driver software compatible with the device and all driver software in the same category as the device USB driver is being installed Installing driver software NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 2 7 2 Installation and Startup of NB Designer 4 After the completion of installation the following dialog box will appear Click the Close button Windows has successfully updated your driver software Windows has finished in
408. me startup vvindow Mho ME Mute o Fj Enable Printer Function ao i yh US8 S0 HMI USR SO HMI RGP Brightness Set the DIP switches SW1 and SW2 both to OFF and restart the NB unit to enter the User Project Mode Use the USB cable to connect the USB Slave port on the back side of NB Unit with the printer for printing 7 4 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 7 PictBridge Printing Note 1 The USB slave port on NB Unit is used for the upload download and commissioning of program by default but in the User Project Mode it will shift to a USB port only supporting the printing function instead of other functions when the Enable Print option in the System Setting Mode is checked 2 Inthe Downloader Mode or System Setting Mode the function of using USB Slave port to download always works properly without the influence of the above settings 3 If the printer cannot work normally as a result of the NB Unit power on reset or other operations please restart the printer 4 When the printing function cannot be used refer to 6 3 1 are r beinthe eriles ar p Gie a_a forthe solution The descriptions of USB Slave port in the User Project Mode Enable Print set in the NB Designer Setting Items Checked Unchecked USB slave port is only for printing Since the project is not set in Enable Printer Checked printing mode printing is not Function set available in
409. meter Descriptions xX Int X axis coordinate of the upper left corner of the circumscribed rectangle of ellipse Unit pixel y Int Y axis coordinate of the upper left corner of the circumscribed rectangle of ellipse Unit pixel W Int Width of the circumscribed rectangle of ellipse Unit pixel h Int Height of the circumscribed rectangle of ellipse Unit pixel pen PenParam Ellipse border pen brh BrushParam Ellipse filling brush d Line DrawLine The description of the parameter is as follows x1 y1 x2 y2 pen Parameter Descriptions x1 X axis coordinate of line origin Unit pixel y1 Y axis coordinate of line origin Unit pixel x2 X axis coordinate of line end Unit pixel y2 Int Y axis coordinate of line end Unit pixel pen Line brush e Polygon DrawPolyg pts n pen brh The description of the parameter is as follows Parameter Descriptions pts The first address of vertex coordinate data for polygon n Int Vertex data of the polygon pen Polygon border pen brh Polygon filling brush f Arc DrawArc x y w h start end pen gt D Q D 04 O O pom O gt O R g D O 9 3 D pn D T 09 a O 09 Parameter Descriptions X Int X axis coordinate of the upper left corner of the circumscribed rectangle of arc Unit pixel y Int Y axis coordinate of the upper left corner of the circumscribed rectangle of arc Unit pixel
410. mon Sheet is up to 16 Menu Screen There is only 1 Menu Screen which will appear only after Menu is touched Sheet Screen Up to 3 Sheet Screens can be set for 1 Base Screen Pop up Screen The types are Tracking Modal Clipping and Fixed It can be displayed normally or in the top layer The maximum number of Pop up Screen ejected in 1 Base Screen is up to 16 Direct Screen Up to 16 Direct Screens can be displayed simultaneously in 1 Base Screen It is controlled by the bit Indirect Screen Up to 16 Indirect Screens can be displayed simultaneously in 1 Base Screen It is controlled by word Screen Property Security level of the screen screen attribute background color transparency rate width and color of frame location to place screen size of screen width and height sheet screen allocated to screen three screens at max type of pop up used as pop up can be specified A 8 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 Appendices Descriptions of Function Screen Maximum Screen It is up to 32768 Number Number Screen No It includes 0 and 10 to 32767 Base Screens 1 Common Sheet Default Menu Screen Default NUM Keyboard Default ASCII Keyboard Default File List Screen Reserved by system Password Screen Reserved by system Confirmation Screen Default HEX Keyboard Default 9 Login Screen Default CON ODO OF FB W DN Screen
411. mory area includes the Information Area with the size of 40 bytes i e 20 words and the Time Area with the size of Sampling Pages x Sampling Points Page x 4 words If Save Time is checked and the Data Area with the size of Sampling Pages x Sampling Points Page x Word Length When the multiple historical Data Logs saved into the recipe are used the user must ensure that the memory area of each trend curves will not overlap each other otherwise the data mistakes will occur 5 Press the OK button to adjust the position and size of the Data Log component 3 156 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer Indirect Max Min Reference of Data Log Descriptions LWO represents the variable making sampling for the Y coordinate and the horizontal axis represents the Time Axis And LW1 and LW2 correspond to the minimum value lower limit of Y and the maximum value upper limit of Y respectively CurrentMAX MIN i a itititititititit ES Copy Ctrl C Select All Ctri A Find Replace Ctrl F wo oOo U st er Refresh Property Lock Position Group Ctril G 4 UnGroup Ctrl U Cu rent VAX MA N Group Components j WUU as i A Ss Se Rotate R Line Width gt P e HHHHHH G HHHH E HHHHHH TERA N n paene Arrow Style g 5 Save as Vector Graphics ones NDO LWO Bottom layer oS Data Log propert
412. mpleted Lue Recipe card recipe data RHIG RHI4 OAAAAAAAA BREE O s 1a LW9000 Reduce Bee Superimposed LWO Reduce ie a LVW9000 Plus D Superimposed LWO Plus ananaaaa BEEE x AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA T N A D Q 5 D g D r D LW000 Reduce Superimposed LWO Reduce oor jae d tale ESKWAEACSKICILID SCS Fs a enu Task Bar 9d pue d usemjeq ejeq sdiosy Jo peojumoqd peo d E ZL Input the 10 groups of recipe data into the recipe memory one by one then switch to Group 8 of recipe data to change the name to KKKKKKKk recipe data to 1234 then you will see the data in 4X100 and 4X104 will become KKKKKKKK and 1234 respectively after the Download button is pressed as shown below Lue Recipe card recipe data a LW9000 Reduce Superimposed LWO Reduce l per diel LWO Plus ETOCS y TOO enu Task Bar NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 339 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 13 Security Level 3 340 Security Level is used to set the access authority for different users to enhance the security of the project Only the user having the high level password can access the high level screen thus enhancing the security of the project significantly When setting Screen Property we can see one column of Security Level That s to say we can specify the Security Level for any screen as shown below
413. mponent are satisfied the components in area 1 3 and 4 will be triggered while that in area 2 will not be triggered NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 187 3 Functions of NB Designer Process of adding one Touch Trigger component 1 Press the Touch Trigger component icon drag it to the screen then the Basic Properties dialog box of Touch Trigger component will pop up JET p iy T Basic Property Touch Trigger Display Setting Prionty Normal Write Address PT HMID Fot COM1 Change 0 Station No Area Variable LE Address 0 L System Memory ao 6h ahh pad Lenath Format Range DDDD 0 9999 Use Variable Use Variable C Use index Use index 3 Press the OK button to complete the setup of the Touch Trigger component 3 188 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 6 28 Table Table The Table component can make the selection type of Select by row Select by Column and Select by cell The user can set the Row Column Color when Selected Background Color Border Color and write the selected Row No and Column No into the specified memory Process of adding one Table component 1 Press the Table component icon drag it to the screen then the Basic Properties dialog box of the Table component will pop up Table propert
414. n V Switch to the lowest security level when screen closed Screen Attribute Keyboard Security Level 0 Position T Background Color x0 Yo Background Color E Pattem Color Width 800 Height 480 ae 0 z Sheet Screen 1 n a X 3 n a Frame e Pop up screen Type 0 F aE V Tracking l Modal NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 345 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 14 Test 3 14 1 Offline test NB Designer supports the offline test function Since the users can review the operation of the screen data on creation without downloading the screen data to PT the Offline Test can improve efficiency of the screen creating Select Offline test in Tools menu or press icon then the following dialog box will pop up Faj NBSimulator PT Test PT Station PT Information Cancel 4 lo Serial Port PT Part PC Port PT Part PE Part COM2 COMI COM1 COMI Information Test Type Offline Test File Pathi pkg c program filestomroninb designerprojecthecareca pka Communication Type IF NULL PORT NULL COM NULL BPS NULL Click the Start button after selecting the PT to be simulated then you will see the offline test window 3 346 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 14 2 Direct Online test NB Designer supports online test operation The online test provides the res
415. n 7 Confirm Action Windo Menu Screen 2 Fast Selection Login Screen 9 Login Window pP a oO U m gt x lt mp D Q D Qa U O O D D n Backlight How long minute the backlight will be closed when the screen is not touched Auto backlight during alarm event When it is checked the backlight will automatically turn ON when the alarm event occurs Screen Saver The duration until the screen saver is started after the inactivity Screen Saver Screen After the screen saver is checked a certain screen can be selected as Screensaver Screen Return to Original Screen when Screensavers Ends When it is checked the screen will return to the Original Screen after the screensaver ends Allow Upload Since the respects of the information disclosure remove the check in the check box when prohibiting the upload Allow Decompilation Allows the user to decompile and modify the PKG files generated by configuration compilation after it is checked Number of Languages Specify the number of the languages used in the project The languages used by the component of the PT is generally less than or equal to the maximum language number For example the maximum language number is 7 and the number of used languages is 5 the components in PT can only use 5 kinds of languages For the details refer to 3 8 1 Text Library Page 3 234 Default Language Refers to the default language when the project is opened o
416. n Manual V106 3 257 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 258 9 General purpose PLC Control Expansion General PLC Control Extend is similar to General PLC Control but the occupied address is different i e General PLC Control occupies 4 words while General PLC Control Extend occupies 6 words extending word to double word Refer to the section of General purpose PLC Control for the details The method is as follows 1 Read Address Similar to General purpose PLC Control 2 Read Address 1 Similar to General purpose PLC Control 3 Read Address 2 Refers to the address offset of the data memory of PLC during the transmission and it occupies 2 words Please note that this offset is specified from the address memory with Read Address 6 4 Read Address 4 Refers to 2 words occupation Address inform PLC Address Control event HMIO PLCO 0 Law 100 General purpose PLC cont 0 HMIO PLOO 0 Li 500 General purpose PLE conti PT Executing PLC Control HMD PT HMO PLONo 0 AreafVariable Lw Address 100 _ Format Range DODDD 0 10255 Data Format Word Length Use Variable Function Mode PT Executing PLC Control HID hi FT HMD PLC No O 3 Area anabe Liw Address 500 Data Format BIN _ Pormat Fange ODODD 0 10255 Word Length 6 Use Variable Function Mode NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of
417. n Time Out Determines the time that the PT needs to wait for the PLC response When the delay time of communication between PLC and the PT exceeds the time expressed by the timeout constant the system information PLC No Response will be displayed in the PT Generally the timeout constant is set automatically during the PLC model selection and doesn t need to be modified by the user Protocol Time Out Refers to the protocol timeout which is set automatically during the PLC selection and doesn t need to be modified Max interval of word block pack Max interval of bit block pack Max size of word block package and Max size of bit block package The PT will automatically collect all the PLC data with the consecutive addresses and send one read command to read these data thus improving communication efficiency and reducing the response time substantially Max size of word block package and Max size of bit block package set the maximum numbers of bit memory and word memory that can be read consecutively These numbers are generally set automatically during the PLC selection and don t need to be modified by the user If these PLC data without the consecutive addresses the PT will send the separate commands to read them i e a lot of read commands are needed to read these data Therefore we allow to modify the intervals through the Max interval of word block pack and Max interval of bit block pack When the 2 address intervals exceed the
418. n can include Common Sheet Base Screen and Menu Screen while one Common Sheet or Base Screen can include many pop up screens And the relationship between them is shown as below gt D e n O D _ N o gt oe uaalos dn dog 92 ey D r n O D N 9 Z u Is dn dOod When the screen switching command is executed the PT will clear the current screen the pop up screen attached on the current screen etc included and switch to the screen to be displayed but Common Sheet will always be displayed in the screen The original contents of Base Screen can t be changed by the pop up screen that called by the direct screen or indirect screen and the pop up screen is just attached to Base Screen In addition up to 3 sheet screens can be set for each screen in screen property setup When one Base Screen Screen No is 0 or ranges from 10 to 32767 is called out all the components in this screen will be displayed in the PT If Base Screen has the Sheet Screen all the components defined in its Sheet Screen will be displayed All of the Touch Trigger components such as Bit Button Function Key etc defined in the Sheet Screen are valid in the current screen If there are display components in Common Sheet they will be displayed in the current screen And all the Touch Trigger components defined in Common Sheet are valid Each project includes 32768 screens max Base Screen Comm
419. n describes the manual structure takes NB7W as an example to introduce the operation procedures of the NB system This section describes how to install and wire the NB Unit This section describes how to create a demonstration project through NB Designer This section describes how to start running at the Host side and prepare to send screen data to NB7W This section describes the maintenance and inspection methods for preventing errors occurring and troubleshooting measures when errors occur Failure to read and understand the information provided in this manual may result in personal injury or death damage to the product or product failure Please read each section in its entirety and be sure you understand the information provided in the section and related sections before attempting any of the procedures or operations given NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 Manual Structure Page Structure and Icons The following page structure and icons are used in this manual 2 Installing the NB Unit and Connecting Peripheral Devices Level 1 heading Level 2 heading Level 3 heading Level 3 heading 2 1 2 Installation onto the Operation Panel Install the NB Unit by embedding it into the operation panel Gives the current headings Use the metal kit and tool a crosshead screwdriver supplied with the Unit for installation Proceed the installation following the procedures below S
420. n outline of the NB Series PTs including their functions features connection types and communication methods 1 1 Functions and Structure of NB Series PTs 0 0 cee eens 1 2 1 1 1 How NB Series PTs Work at FA Production Sites 005 1 2 1 1 2 Operations of NB Series PTS 0 0 0 ccc ee 1 2 1 2 Communicating with the Host 0 0 cc es 1 4 1 2 1 What s the Host Link 1 0 0 eens 1 4 1 2 2 Connecting Methods i sec vicaeks oats oud a binik ke me pode reais Rectan 1 5 1 2 3 Communicating with the PLC Manufactured by Other Companies 1 6 1 3 System Configuration 0 0 0 ccc es 1 7 1 3 1 Connectable Peripheral Devices 0 00 0 eee 1 7 1 4 Procedures for NB Series PTs Operation 0 0000 0 euee 1 8 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 1 1 1 Introduction 1 1 Functions and Structure of NB Series PTs The NB Series Programmable Terminals PTs are sophisticated operator interfaces that can indicate information and perform operations as required at FA production sites This section provides a brief of the roles and performances of the NB Series PTs for beginning users 1 1 1 How NB Series PTs Work at FA Production Sites e Monitoring Line Operating Status The device and operation status of the system can be displayed in real time Using graphic charts or other allows display data in easy to understand format e Instructing
421. n the PLC to the Project Work Space After finishing selection of the PLC PT and Connector carry out connection The connection method is as follows move the locations of PT and PLC accordingly or click one end of the connection line and drag it to the vicinity of the COM port of the PLC or the PT then bring the connection port close to either end of the connection line and a successful connection can be completed Note Ifthe PLC or PT is not dragged into the Project Work Space both of the Project File Window and Project Work Space will be empty as shown below GJ File Edt View Screen Draw Components Tools Option Window Help Bee saRae A Ga nROR BHR He BEAD S jinek Gm Bg Y Y gt i BER BA B PT and PLC is empty p Mouse x 85 y 19 sf d i 3 34 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer Once the PLC and PT are dragged in the Project File Window and Project Work Space will be filled with appropriate content as shown below r E C Program Files OMRON NB Designer Projects test test nbp test nbp o fem E File Edit View Screen Draw Components Tools Option Window Help P X Vee ET EE 4 MA E E sa E E E E dt E et ea E a r E Be BEAD ASB huke BEng m JBZEB224 z Project Library Window x a Project File Window Connector F PT PT with appropriate an a conte
422. n the current screen where the Data Log locates is closed Even after the switching the screen in which the Data Log component located to another screen if the screen in which Data Log component located is refreshed the sampling data which was obtained until switching the screen can be displayed Recipe Used to transfer the data from the recipe memory of PT to PLC or PLC data to the PT Recipe memory Oscillograph The Oscillograph functions similarly to the Data Log But the data sampling of the Oscillograph is valid only during the screen in which the Oscillograph is located is displayed which means that each time the screen is switched the sampling data will be deleted and a new sampling will be started A 6 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 Appendices Descriptions of Function Parts Scroll Bar Move the slider to modify the value of the specified communications address Event Used to make the event information logged in Event Information and meeting the current triggering conditions displayed Note Book Used to modify or display the value of the specified communications address The input data is saved to a consecutive memory with the Read Address as the first address Word Neon Lamp _ Used to display the label contents in loopy moving way and it supports the label contents corresponding to 256 max states in the loopy moving way Bit Neon Lamp Used to display the label contents in
423. ncbioandeendieieanediuesenenaende 3 351 3 15 3 Specification of Downloading Content cccccseececesseeeeeceeeeeeeaeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeessaeeeeees 3 351 Other FUNCUONS rosea es csc ae ee ee ace see eee eee nce sete 3 355 RECIPCEUI OT aceite casera tec E E E 3 397 Functions of NBManager ccccscceseeceeeeneeeeeeneeeeesenesenes 4 1 Introduction OF NBManager sasssnsnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nenn nnnn nennen 4 2 Download DST AU ON so scarssicreseeas ose ewase ieee es sate cesvasesnsn te aainenataessbessesascustsnecnonedunesseacnaceunvesaeaedesnees 4 3 4 2 1 CommMUnmcalo n oe MN 2 meee nett inet ter tite Sete ante rte teeters nme te er rere eee ene ener eee ene 4 3 4 2 2 SS A in EEIE ETE acerca sts E E seers nett euiec Hee seme E EE E E AN TE T E 4 5 4 2 3 BEE SES iia MA E A A A E E E E A A A E 4 8 4 2 4 eD a E E E E E EE 4 9 Upload QOPEratiON sssiserss aaae ee eee ee ee 4 11 System Operaatio sosi a eee ee ee ee ee 4 14 OPL VL SUN acetates etree et ae ee ee aes ee see oh oa erence eee ee eeepc esses EE 4 15 Decompile Operation sia siseccicicesairecsateincpesiccoa este saasioncacysisaciendewaanessieaesncteosseansiatsausatinearcetesacsnesadiecenten 4 16 Pass Through Communication sox sect vcseecaccea cecal avec seccenscncnedeeenenenencebeuaseeectencucsaccesdececseecensoee 4 17 Maintenance and Abnormality Handling cc0ceee 5 1 BO AMEND ANG oases estan eae a a E EE
424. nction Keys FK4 FK5 and FK6 to be the Pen Colors of Red Green and Blue respectively and select the Function Keys FK7 FK8 FK9 and FK10 to be the Pen Sizes of 2 4 6 and 8 respectively as shown below Note Pad 3 218 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer 5 Save and Compile the project files and execute Offline Test and result in the display as follows Note Pad p T c 5 O ot fe S X 9 er a The system reserves the following areas for the system memory e LB9020 to LB9032 Pen Eraser Clear Block e LB9030 to LB9032 pen size e LW9006 operation mode of Notepad e LW9007 pen size e LW9008 color of pen selecting among 256 colors For the details refer to 3 11 Address of System Memory Page 3 317 Note 1 Each PT can only use one Notepad component If there are more than one Notepad components an error occurs at the compilation 2 The data in the Notepad will not be saved i e be lost when the power of PT is OFF uoIssilusuel ejeq 9 J 3 7 8 Data Transmission Ta Data Transmission Data Transmission component can make the data in the specified memory address transferred to the other memory address Data Transmission can be triggered by the manual touching method or the state change of the specified address NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 219 3 Functions of NB Design
425. nd Background Color The selected Pattern Color is applied as outline color and the selected Background Color is applied as ground color For details refer to the descriptions of Fill Style Toolbar in 3 2 3 View Menu Page 3 15 In the default settings the Pattern style is set to 0 so that only the background color is displayed by this setting Pop up Screen Type The types are Tracking Modal Clipping and Fixed o FN wn a D 5 O fe O D pe r The above parameters show the relationship between one Pop up Screen and its adjacent screen If one Pop up Screen features Modal the location of parent screen will be frozen after it pops up and the pop up screen will always be displayed in the Top layer If one Pop up Screen features Clipping the border of this screen will be restricted by its parent screen i e the part displayed out of the border of its parent screen will be cut off If one Pop up Screen features Tracking it will move together when its parent screen moves Note If Clipping is selected Tracking must be selected simultaneously The following Screen A and Screen B are both attached to the Base Screen Generally Screen A will be displayed in the Top layer when it is touched But if Fixed is selected for Screen A it will not be displayed in the Top layer even if it is touched but it will always be attached to its parent screen
426. nection wire while multiple station numbers can be set during the editing thus it is the same effect as the connection with multiple PLCs HpiN Priority Normal Read Address ie te PT HMIO No 0 Port COM E 0 Change Station No Area Variable LW Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 I Use Variable Use index Address 10 System Memory Data Word Sos BIN 1 X X X X Basic Property Numeric Data Font Keyboard Setting Graphics Control Setting Display Setting J Make Read Address and Write Address the Same e Write Address PC j PT HMIO No 0 Port COM1 Change 0 Station No Area Variable MW Address 10 I System Memory Data Word aaa BIN 1 Format Range DDDD 0 9999 I Use Variable I Use index 3 392 Basic Property Numeric Data Font Keyboard Setting Graphics Control Setting Display Setting Priority Normal IV Make Read Address and Write Address the Same Read Address Write Address PIG lt PLC PT HMIO No 0 PT HMIO No 0 Port COM1 Change Change g ation No Station No 0 Area Varable L Area Varnable MW X Address 10 Address 10 l System Memory Data Data Word oe BIN Fami BIN 1 Fomat Range DDD Format Range DDDD 0 9999 I Use Variable I Use Variable 7 Use index NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functi
427. nector jUtton property Bit Button Label Graphics Control Setting Display Setting ic Property Transport Font Use Text Library one Text Library Language Language 1 z Font Message Bit Button ki Copy Text to All State Font Type O Vector Font Bitmap Font 22 Overall Modify Font Select all the components to be modified and click each icon in Font Toolbar and Text Position Toolbar to overall modify the properties PT PLC 2 Repeat Offset Address C From start poi f ncrease Decrease From end point Mote Address auto change is invalid for variable Copy Quantity Word Address Auto Change Bit Position Auto Change if Direction 5 Address Change Address Change iM Direction 4 z f i Direction Z f s Direction Z CY Direction Al C Y Direction JA Interval between components 2 Direction 4 z Interval Interval r Y Direction 4 Cancel NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer Difference between From start point and From end point From end point specifies the top in the lower right border of the component to the starting point to copy Make the right border as the start point O na Copy Type Offset Address z CC From start pain f ncrease Decrease T gt Note Address auto change ts invalid For S Copy Quantity Wand Address Auto Change Bit N W Direction 5 z
428. nent to display Basic window 0 in the Basic window 0 as below Also place Pop up Screen function key to display Pop up window 7 and Backward function key in the Basic window 0 6 Place one Text Display component to display Basic window 4 and Backward function key in the Basic window 4 7 Create three Function Keys in the Fast select window 5 Three Function keys such as a Change Common Sheet Function Key to switch Common Sheet into Common window 1 a Change Common Sheet Function Key to switch Common Sheet into Common window 6 and Change Menu Screen Function Key to switch Menu Screen into Fast select window 2 as follows 8 Place one Text Display component to display Common window 6 in the Common window 6 9 Place three Function Keys in Pop up Screen in Pop up window 7 Three Function Keys such as one Title bar on Pop up Screen Function Key to display Pop up window 7 a Minimize Function Key and one Close Screen Function Key 10 After the completion of setup saving the project file and executing the off line test after the compilation the project is displayed as below Basic window 0 Common window 1 Ba ie vindow 0 T Common window 1 Task Bar T Menu Task Bar Wind 11 When switching the Basic window 0 into Basic window 4 by the button in Menu Screen pressing Back button allows the screen returned to Basic window 0 and then pressing
429. ner Operation Manual V106 3 271 3 Functions of NB Designer nRegs refers to number of words That s to say the program will read 2 word data beginning from LW200 and then write 2 words to LW202 In order to confirm this code segment will be executed successfully you should place 4 Number Input components and 1 Function Key to execute the Macro in the Edit window as shown below Perform the offline test Make LW200 1 and LW201 2 then click the Macro button and you will find LW202 1 and LW203 2 The Macro is executed normally 4 Import variable Export variable functions are provided for user to copy Macro variables and Macro Right click Macro Variable Table directaccesslocaladdr c you will see the Import variables option and you will see the Export variables option is also valid after you have created a new variable Macro Variable Table directaccesslocaladdr c Storage For Name PLC No Area Address Word R W Array Array length Add Variable Delete Variable Modify Variable Export variables Import variables Macro Variable Table directaccesslocaladdr c i Storage For Name PLC No Area Address Word RAW Array Array length bit Param LB 0 1 Read Write Ves Add Variable Delete Variable Modify Variable Export variables Import variables 3 272 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer First click the Expor
430. ng Basic Property Numeric Data Font Graphics Display Setting p O O r gt D T c 3 O ct fe 5 D Prioety Namal Priority Normal WV Make Read Address anc White Address the Same PT PAE z PC j HMIO PT HMIQ No 0 PT HMIQ iia 0 Port COMI Pot COM1 Pot COM1 Change Change r Change E F Zaton No m Station No 0 Station No 0 Arvoa Vedable LW Area Va able LW z Area Varable LW ki Address 10 Address 100 System Memory Address 0 System Memory Data Word Data Word Data Word Fomaat BIN ae BIN 1 TE BIN I 1 Foemat Range DDDDD 0 19A Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 Uts Vane Use Ver Formal Range DDDOD 0 10255 Use Variable Use Variable W Line inder I Use index Cancel X jc The settings of Number Input components NI2 to NI4 are the same as that of NI1 and their addresses are LW10 LW20 and LW40 respectively 2 Perform the offline test When the value of index memory is 10 the addresses of NI3 and NIO are the same NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 391 3 Functions of NB Designer Station Num Index Function When the value of index memory is 30 the addresses of NI4 and NIO are the same Jer Regisiertl W100 index Aegister LWt0 Lw20 Lwao Task Bar Station number index function is invalid for the background components and Macros Only one PLC can be connected with the con
431. ng method for the vector font the following conditions should be paid attention to when the vector font is used If the font which is not supported for text to be displayed is used the font cannot be displayed correctly For example if you want to display four characters 242 E using Arial font but because these four characters are not included in the Arial character set so four square boxes will be displayed in this case as shown below Therefore you must select the fonts supporting text to be displayed See NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer 2 Use the vector font as much as possible if the smaller capacity of project file is preferable Because the Bitmap Font and graphic font have many disadvantages in the storage space and resizing etc therefore use the vector font as much as possible 3 The types of the vector font can be reduced when the screen can meet the requirements If too many types of vector fonts e g dozens or more are used by the user the number of font files will be too many thus affecting the compilation speed downloading speed and screen switching speed 4 Install the same fonts for all the PC environments to edit text strings If a certain project uses Microsoft Elegant Black font when it is edited on PC and when it is transferred to another PC where no Microsoft Elegant Black font exists for editing then all the
432. ng the Data Encryption function Not using the Data Encryption function 3 The procedure of decompiling the CSV file by using the Decompile function of NB Manager is as shown below File name 20110185 cev Pies of type Data Fies csv Cancel T Open as madony 6 8 NB Series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 6 Descriptions of New Functions Added into NBLILI TW01B The following dialog box will pop up after the successful decryption _ 10 57 40 110257741 T 10 57 42 3 10 57 43 I Z gt a Q D a TI c 5 O a O 3 o 6 1 8 New Added Addresses for System memories LB9154 Used for setting Remove the USB1 safely When the Read Write USB1 is inserted it will turn ON automatically and it should be turned OFF before removal to ensure the safe removal of USB1 LB9157 Used for clearance of the folders in USB1 All the folders Write generated by PT in the USB1 will be cleared LW9470 LW9485 Specify the prefix text to name the files generated by the Read Write screen shot s lJow w WU w s S JO S sSs Jppy PEPPY M N 8 1 9 NB Series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 6 9 6 Descriptions of New Functions Added into NBLILI TW01B 6 1 9 Change of System Language The system language for NB Designer can be selected from the pop up Change System Language window after the Change
433. ni 03 bg buttoni 04 bg buttoni 05 bg buttoni 06 bg buttoni 0OF bg OOD B a d wd a m button1 08 bg buttoni 09 bg buttoni 10 bg buttonl 11 bg buttonl 12 bg buttoni 13 bg buttoni 14 bg buttoni 15 bg button1 16 bg Be E o button2 00 bg button2 01 bg button2 02 bg button2 03 bg button2 04 bg button2 05 bg button2 06 bg button2 07 bg button2 08 bg l E Lm eel i Graphics for Each State State 0 State 1 State 0 Refresh Import Exit 2 User Defined Library Path The folder is specified by the user to store the graphics library With this option graphics in the other projects can be imported The graphics used in each project is saved in vg file for the project Clicking na can reveal the file path The method of importing graphics is as follows Select one graphics then click the Import button to import the graphics in the Graphics Library to the project Each time only one graphics instead of many can be imported to the project 3 369 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 p O r gt D zi c 3 O ct fe 5 D 3 Functions of NB Designer The method of using graphics Right click the mouse on the selected component and select Property in the pop up menu then go to Graphics tab to check Vector Graphics or Bitmap The Vector Graphics is checked by default When Vector Graphics is checked all
434. nient for the users to call it during the import or export of project file or recipe file The specified pop up File Browser Screen can be set in the PT Extended Properties tab in the PT Property dialog box Initial Screen 0 FrameO Browser Common Sheet 1 Common Window Confirmation Screen Confim Action Windo Menu Screen 2 Fast Selection Login Screen 9 Login Window 6 26 NB Series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 PictBridge Printing pO This section describes the PictBridge printing function 7 1 PictBridge Function 000 e eee ee 7 2 Setting Method for Using Printing Function 7 3 Components Related to Printing and Setup Descriptions 7 3 1 PEG CONTON si xe aat deste Green en ps te Ge ce oe we Ge WR ge A we ee a 7 4 List of System memories Related to Printing 7 5 List of Error Codes for Printing 00005 7 6 Recommended Printer Models 0 0000 eee ee een ween wees NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 7 1 7 PictBridge Printing 7 1 PictBridge Function PictBridge is the industry standard for direct printing with the device and a printer directly connected This standard enables digital images from the device to be printed directly by a printer eliminating the need of connecting the device to a PC thus greatly facilitating the printing process in various conditions The NB series to
435. ns on operation of the product Symbols e Prohibition Indicates a general prohibition e Caution Indicates general cautionary warning or danger level information 16 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 Do not attempt to take the product apart and do not touch the product inside while the power is being supplied Otherwise it may result in electric shock Always ensure that the personnel in charge confirm that installation inspection and maintenance were properly performed for the NB Unit Personnel in charge refers to individuals qualified and responsible for ensuring safety during machine design installation operation maintenance and disposal Ensure that installation and post installation checks are performed by personnel in charge who possess a thorough understanding of the machinery to be installed that involve human life in applications that may result in serious injury or for emergency stop switches Do not attempt to disassemble repair or modify the NB Unit Otherwise it may impair the safety functions Never press more than two points on the touch panel of the NB Unit at a time Otherwise it may activate a switch somewhere between the two points Do not use the input functions of the touch switch etc of the NB Unit in applications S NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 17 Precaution NWARNING Wiring In the
436. nt recipe addresses These 2 recipe files can be merged into 1 file after they are edited separately then the 1 merged file can be downloaded into PT as the lower left graphics shown EE RecipeFile Merge Setting pro r Merged file Type ack hel Record Edit Param of first file 3 Data Type Address in Merged file 0 words Single data C Array data Select path l a Description Desch T A D o 5 D m 2 File length Bytes Storage Format Read starting address words string Data Saving length words Length d Param of second file Param of second il integer and Decimal Address in Merged file 0 words Select path Integer Decimal U Data Format BIN File length Bytes Read starting address words saving length words Path for Merged file Cancel Cancel Unicode can be checked for String Data As the above right graphics shown Unicode can be checked for String Data NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 407 3 Functions of NB Designer Part of data type supports Binary Browser Binary Browser is one special function provided by RecipeEditor which is convenient for the user to check the data which is shown as Supported as shown below Data Type Supported or Not 16 bit signed number Supported 32 bit signed number Supported 16 bit unsigned number Supported 32 bit unsigned number Support
437. ntains up to 16 words each of which contains 2 ASCII codes NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 127 3 Functions of NB Designer Address Refers to the first address of the word address corresponding to the Text Display component Word Length Displays the data length of the read address with 1 to 16 available 2 Switch to the Font tab and set the font size alignment and color of the text to be displayed Basic Property Font Graphics Display Setting m Font Type Vector font ony ASCllis Bitmap Font supported Font Attribute Font DFNB EN Size 16 Position Left Can L Color T talic l Bold Display Fosition Indent Right Side Indent 3 Switch to the Graphics tab and select the Vector Graphics or bitmap representing the touching area and touching state 4 Switch to the Control Setting tab and make the Security Setting and set the Triggering action 5 Press the OK button to complete the setup of the Text Display component 3 6 14 Level Meter The value specified of the communication address is displayed in level picture based on the upper limit value and the lower limit value set by Level Meter Property 3 128 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer As shown as below the user can customize Level Meter with any desired shape O m e Process of add
438. ntal Center This function is used to make the multiple selected components or graphics located in the horizontal center of the Edit Window Firstly select the components or graphics to be operated and then select Align Horizontal Center in the Edit menu or press icon as shown below Align Vertical Center This function is used to make the multiple selected components or graphics located in the vertical center of the Edit Window Firstly select the graphics to be operated and then select Align Vertical Center in the Edit menu or press icon Flip Only shapes such as line circle polygon etc drawn by drawing tools rather than other components can be flipped Firstly select the graphics to be operated and then select Flip Horizontally Flip Vertically Rotate 90 Degree in the Edit menu or select the corresponding ikh a r icons to flip the components 3 14 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 Reset Toolbars 3 Functions of NB Designer When the toolbar is moved to the other position it can be restored to the default position by clicking this option as shown below 3 2 3 View KHAAA al Edit View Screen Draw Undo Ctrl4Z sj 4 Redo Ctrl Fy amp Find Replace hF G GR SE O Fremed Cut Ctri X IBE Copy Crit ee Paste Ctrl V Nudge gt Alignment b Size gt E Order b uy Group Ctrl G Ti UnGroup Ctrl U H Hori
439. nts am 75 as CLOSEO01 vg H z CONFIRM oe ey E Paice laila gt CTRL_BARO09 vg i DISP_BAROO1L vg _ OMRON C OMRON Series CJ_CS Series OMRON OMRON CPIH L E CJ CS NJS Project Work Space x Tree View Krees kes ee ae ee OY Ee OP ere a eS TE PT and PLC with SE IF 2 Fast Selectio vee p ene A A z 7 s A i k appropriate contents a 3 NUM Keybo _ TEED Tre gt oo ag ee PS eee BRR ot Rhee bn ee et Claes ge Ta H E 4 ASCI Keybo E E E E T E a ee T N a rea a IE 5 File List Win ee es ee es a ee en ee ES 6 Password W Function Parts 1 r Output Window x Ready Mouse x 263 y 3 4 Parts These include various editing components as shown below Parts Bit Button BitLamp BitSwitch DirectScreen Command Word Lamp Word Switch Scroll Bar Moving Button f f wh S amp S amp Alarm Datalog XY Graph LevelMeter Analog Recipe Event Indirect Meter Screen aoe amp a yy mem OT Number Tet Display Number Text Input Oscillograph NoteBook Word Neon Bit Neon Touch input Lamp Lamp Trigger m gl E Table Data History Operation Ewent History Log Display When a project is created and the Edit Window is entered it just needs to drag the required components to the Edit Window As to the usage methods of the components refer to 3 6 Parts Page 3 80 NB series Programmab
440. nyin Indicating mode of the data log Reading Macro memory Writing Macro memory Macro operation instruction Executing to clear RW memory Trigger Number Input automatically Cursor lock Filter PLC communication without response Endian Display Text Display Component Mask text characters Comments The bit turns ON when the screen is displayed and the bit turns OFF when the screen is closed Read The bit turns ON when the screen is displayed and the bit turns OFF when the screen is closed Read The bit turns ON when the screen is displayed and the bit turns OFF when the screen is closed Read When the bit turns ON the function to increase the brightness will be executed After completing the processing the bit turns OFF read write When the bit turns ON the function to decrease the brightness will be executed After completing the processing the bit turns OFF read write When the LB9100 is ON it will switch to Pinyin input mode and when LB9100 is OFF it will switch to English input mode read write Only when LB9110 is ON the zoom and view functions can be activated otherwise the traditional default view method of Data Log will be used read write This bit will be set to ON during the reading memory and to OFF after the reading is completed read This bit will be set to ON during the writing memory and to OFF after the writing is completed read This bit will be set to
441. o Type PTNo Address inform Alarm Message T HMI0 PLCO 0 LB 0 HRIO PLCO 0 LE 1 Sued uonouny J 3 4 iT i t Ae dsiq wiely 2 Alarm Display Display Setting Moving Step Pixel Refresh Rate 10 x100 ms Display Range To 255 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 207 3 Functions of NB Designer 4 Add two Bit Switches to control the ON OFF of LBO and LB1 respectively then switch the ON OFF state of the LBO and LB1 the alarm setting which was registered by the procedure 2 can be switched between display and non display by the alarm display Basic Property Bit Button Label Graphics Control Setting Display Setting Basic Property Bit Button Label Graphics Control Setting Display Setting P i TEENA Type Altemate Read Address Write Address PT ee ee Pt wmo He og E Port COM1 Port COM1 Change m Change Station No 0 a Station No 0 Area Varable LB 7 Area Varable LB X Address 0 System Memory Address 0 I System Memory Data Word 5 Data Word Smit BIN 1 Sa BIN 1 Format Range DDDD 0 9999 I Use Variable I Use Variable T Use index Use index 5 When saving the project files and executing the offline test after the compilation the result will be displayed as follows 3 208 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 7 4 Time
442. o 1 and the Type of the LB2 is specified to 2 Address inform Address Trigger Condition Messaq HMIO PLCO 0 LB 0 Temper HMIO PLCO 0 LB 1 Water HMIO PLCO 0 LB 2 Pressun 3 246 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 Place two Event components with the addresses of LWO in the Edit Window and the settings are as shown below Basic Property Event Setting Display Setting Display Range 0 To Event display component 1 Row 5 Display Column 5 Check Click Time of Occur C Time of Cancel C Checked Time C Extended Time Format D H M Short Time Format H M C Short Time Format H M C Precise Time Format H M S MS C Extended Date Format Y M D C Date or Occur M D C Time ascending Order Display C Show only ongoing events Checked E Canceled Basic Property Event Setting Display Setting Display Range To 2 Event display component 2 C Extended Time Format D H M Short Time Format H M C Short Time Format H M C Precise Time Format H M S MS C Extended Date Format Y M D C Date or Occur M D C Time ascending Order Display C Show only ongoing events 4 When the offline test is performed the event with the format type 0 of ON and the trigger for the LBO and the format type 1 of ON and the trigger for t
443. oe odes wpe Deses EE 3 148 3 6 19 Data Log 2s core e be es ce bine ee eo e tee ee eee shane ee 3 150 6 0 2420 RECP 4 cect eects sec bagatedee ben ntt Gack eat eeaedeoateeuee Sa 3 160 3GA OSCINOOhADI oxic couee uw Sea doenees beer ened one s nes ee eo ene 3 160 S022 ScolllBals iste oea hu coed ees have ees e hee oe sueeheweeeseesuatde 3 164 JGA Evet 222524250266 040 See sd poe beaded weed bese nese EEEa eaei hae 3 167 3 6 24 Note BOOK 2 22 dece ceded eres dt bbls abe deeeeeekidtaiw dene edt asses 3 174 3 6 25 Word Neon Lamp 222122224 cade2eetesed Se ebiened d didara tana iia 3 185 3 6 26 Bit Neon Lamp 22224 oe eed Bee dees oe Se Gad bombs oes bond sea eas 3 186 3 6 27 Touch Trigger sce nee cen end anetd ote caneedhs os baeeee eee net 3 187 JED TaDO seers ca eos See ee Bo ees eee ee ees ee eee Sees 3 189 3 6 29 Data MISION cesis teeta eee sence e bead pene se eee wens se eee 3 190 PUNCUON PariS sesede roaa a ia cet ao E bees ee bend bose beds ox 3 196 3 7 1 DCG EEEREN EEE E E E opener he pears daa ene ee eae ee 3 196 3 7 2 FONCION KOV oi bees eee eee ooo eee eats one eee eke 3 197 3 7 3 Alarm Display 2 4222 ed0860ee be ee eee ee be Se oe os eee Eh SE DE od 3 205 Of IMG ee ete ahah ond oeees E 3 209 3 7 5 DIMM lt 22c ecnreednctecueedrer sensed dueete are wars eanueasuse 3 214 drO Vector GAPNI lt 2 5562H eee ceedaneueceed Ghedten ed odode 2ee sed lt 3 215 3 7 7 NOIGD OG s gee raes beget ee ee eben eeoes eer arose bee ae eek ee Hee be
444. of NB Designer Storage Format Unsigned integer Indirect Max Min Reference PT wumio PLCNo Pot COM1 7 Change Station No Area Vanable LW Address 0 Data Format BIN Word Length 2 Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 b d Integer 4 Decimal Max Min Value Setting Max 100 Min 0 0 0 vr Use Variable sP hd Basic Property Numeric Data Font Keyboard Setting Graphics Control Setting Display Setting Data Length WORD V Proportional Conversion 3 Switch to the Font tab and set the font size color and alignment method etc for the displayed value m Font Type Vector Font Basic Property Numeric Data Font Keyboard Setting Graphics Control Setting Display Setting Bitmap Font Font Attribute Font DFNB EN Size Color I coer 7 Italic 16 7 T Bold Display Position Indent Position Left Right Side Indent Font Size Sets the size of the font Position Sets the displayed position of the value For example set Integer Decimal and the input value to 5 0 and 23 respectively then the formats as shown below will be displayed 3 116 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer 23 left 23 Bara 00025 BECCM 23 center Display Position Indent Increases the width of th
445. on Sheet and Menu Screen etc included and only one screen can be used as Menu Screen But you can use Change Menu Screen function key to make the screen switch to the specified screen as Menu Screen For details refer to 3 7 2 Function Key Page 3 197 Each new project has a default initial screen and the default screen No is O If you want to change it you just need to make changes in PT Property in project editing screen The valid screen No ranges from 0 to 32767 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer The default Common Sheet and Menu Screen for the project are Frame 1 and Frame 2 If you want to change the default Menu Screen and Common Sheet you just need to double click PT to modify PT Extended Property as shown below System Scroll Bar Width 20 Use Macro when loading project Print Setting COM1 Setting PT Task Bar System Information Setting Security Level Setting User Permission Setting Event History Setting COM2Setting Extemal Memory PT Extended Property V Backlight 10 mins Video Mode PAL Storage Devices USB DISK1 x Subfolder Record Auto backlight during alam event 2 Screen Saver 0 mins Screen Saver Screen O FrameO o V Retum to Original Screen When Screen Saver Ends Number of Languages 8 I Allow Upload Password 888888 Default Language 1 O 7 Allow Decompilation Password 888888 Language Settin
446. on conditions in applications where the PT is subject to contact with oil or water The rubber packing will deteriorate shrink or harden depending on the operating environ ment Inspect the rubber packing periodically In order to replace the battery the NB units are also necessary to be replaced Although it is restricted to NB10W 01B the battery replacement is available to be dealt as a repair NB Series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 5 5 g N O gt D O A gt iV gt 2 D Q 5 gt 5 Maintenance and Abnormality Handling 5 3 Abnormality Handling a This section describes the handling methods for the abnormalities During abnormality occurrence When the abnormality occurred during the operation of PT unit the following information will prompt WARNING Do not attempt to disassemble repair or modify the NB Unit Otherwise it may impair the safety functions Precautions for Safe Use Confirm the safety of the system before turning ON or OFF the power supply or pressing the reset button Information Descriptions PLC no response cc pp d PLC No Response the 3 group of numbers following PLC No Response represent the PT No PLC Station No and Serial Port No respectively PLC response error PLC response error PLC responses one piece of unexpected information which may caused by the read or write command Please check if the device functions we
447. on is optional only when Enable Input or Conditional Enabling is Input checked and touching invalid color can be set in PT Property PT Extended Properties Security ON Delay When the current component is pressed consecutively for this set time the state value can be Setting written only to the controller The minimum unit is 100 ms When this option is 0 this function is invalid Confirm Checking this option means the Confirmation Screen will pop up automatically when the Operation current component is touched and the state value can be written into the controller when YES is clicked while the operation will be cancelled automatically when the user have clicked Cancel or haven t confirmed YES after the set wait s is exceeded Operation Checking this option means the operation event will be recorded and displayed through the Log operation log element and the file in CSV format will be saved into the external memory Min Inteval Refers to the minimum interval between 2 operations for the same component or different components The minimum unit is second When this option is 0 the minimum interval is invalid Triggering Macro Checking in this check box allows the macro which was specified before the current operation action was completed will be triggered and executed Write Word Notice Before Writes the write value into the specified address before the Notice Written current operation is performed
448. onent being selected and then drag it by using the mouse Note The white dots displayed on the component mean that the text is selected If you should change the size of component click the area without a text to select whole the component Fill Component and Frame To change the frame or the background color of the shapes it just needs to click the small arrow behind the 7 Frame Color icon after the component being selected to change the frame color and to click the small arrow displayed in the right to the Background Color icon change the background color of the shapes as shown below no Frame aan oon E EO BREOEEEAE BB BREUBBEAL Custom Color NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 21 3 Functions of NB Designer Text After the text icon A being pressed the text dialog box will pop up as shown below Message C Graphic Font Font we Text Library id Currently Displayed Language 7 Language 1 7 4 p Font Type Vector font Bitmap font Font Attribute Font DFNB EN X Size 16 v Position Left z Color Language Engish USA I talic l Bold Copy Font Attribute To All Languages Message Enter the text which will be displayed on the component You can use the Enter key to break the input text Graphic Font The font and its size and style etc can be modified in this mode The Modify dialog box as shown below can be entered
449. ons e Host link in the NB Series Setup Manual See Section2 Installation and See 2 4 Communication Connections in the NB Series Setup Manual e Connect to other company s PLC See NB Series Host Connection Manual Power connections Screen creation See 2 1 3 Connecting the Power Supply in the NB Series Setup Manual Power ON 1 NB Designer See Section3 Functions of NB Designer Kernel and Rootfs installation 2 See Section4 Functions of NB Manager Transferring to system setting mode 3 See Section3 System Setting Mode in the NB Series Setup Manual Tranferring to user project mode See 3 15 Download Settings com check PT connections Programming System maintenance 4 1 The system will enter RUN mode after the screen data is input 2 System program is installed only under special circumstances such as when the system program is transformed or repaired 3 The system setting mode can be entered by using the DIP SW on the back side 4 When the abnormalities occur during the operation the operations such as checking input output and confirming the setting state etc can be performed as required 1 8 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 Installation and Startup of NB Designer Sis The NB Designer software needs to be installed on your computer when you use it for the first time NB Designer is a kind of application
450. ons of NB Designer eenn etn itti HHEH Test of Mask Station No 9264 9279 Mask code of PLC Each bit corresponds to one Station No of COM 2 i e 9264 0 Station No COM 2 corresponds to Station No 0 and 9279 F corresponds to Station No 255 When the bit is turned ON the communication corresponding to Station No will be masked read write Bit Switch property Basic Property Bit Switch Label Graphics Control Setting Display Setting Priority Nomal lf Make Read Address and Write Address the Same Read Address Write Address PT Hmo PE o PT Hmo P No No Fort COM1 Port COMI Change n y Change n E Station No E Station Na Area Vanable LWW B Area Vanable LE Address 92641 D System Memory Address 0 System Daa opin Wod 4 Data gy Word Format Length Format Length Fomat Range DDDDD_H 0 0 10255 F Fomat Range DDDD 0 9993 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 393 p O O r gt D si c O ct fe 5 D 3 Functions of NB Designer Station No use the special memories LW9416 to LW9431 When the special memories are used the Station No is determined by the value of the memory Number put sroperty x aa Basic Property Numeric Data Font Keyboard Setting Graphics Control Setting Display Setting Priority Normal V Make Read Address and Write
451. op layer NU NW M IA c Send to Back To send the component to bottom layer Bring Forward To bring the selected component to previous layer Send Backward To send the selected component to next layer Group To make the multiple components combined together UnGroup To cancel the combination of the multiple components Horizontal Even Spacing Arranging the multiple components in a horizontal row with equal interval each by the middle point as reference point Vertical Even Spacing Arranging the multiple components in a vertical row with equal interval each by the middle point as reference point Align Horizontal Center To make the center s of one component or multiple components located in the horizontal center of the PT Edit area Align Vertical Center To make the center s of one component or multiple components located in the vertical center of the PT Edit area Flip Horizontally To perform horizontal flip Flip Vertically To perform vertical flip Rotate 90 Degree To rotate the component 90 degree clockwise Lock Position To lock the position of the component Label Component Edit Toolbar E a AA gE Click the component and then click the label displayed later to select it Later when you see the label is not gray any more you can set the position of the label as required e g Left Label Right Label Top Label Bottom Label Vertical Middle Label and Horizontal Middle Label NB series
452. operty dialog box as shown below NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer Pot Senmg COMiSemg COM2Semmg Brema Mamoy z PT be S N eis Basic Property Numeric Data Font Graphics Display Setting Sytem bicemation Seting Securty Level Setting User Penramscn Seling Evert Hetiory Setting Number of Ssourty Levele 3 OPaseword MULL 1 Password mi 2Pessword 888808 19497 AyLindas EL 3 LW9042 reserved by the system is used to indicate the security level of the current Base Screen Create one Number Display component and place it into Frame 0 to display the current security level as shown below The project is shown as the lower left graphics and the effect is as shown in the lower right graphics after Save Compile and Offline test operations are done Because no password is input the security level at initial state should be 0 Then specify the security level to Common 1 in Screen Property of Frame 10 as below Screen Title Frame0 No 0 7 Protect key mapping on common sheet screen Switch to the lowest security level when screen closed Background Color wT NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 341 3 Functions of NB Designer Create one Function Key in Frame 0 with the Properties as follows TT ion Kev property Function Key Label Graphics Control Setting
453. or bitmap 32 color bitmap or in JPG BMP GIF and PNG format Every vector graphics or bitmap can create 256 statuses The created Vector Graphics and bitmap are in Graphics in Project File Window as shown below Project File Window x Graphics a Z BlueFrame wg Button1 93 vg wee Button3 50 vq statel E CONFIRM vg CTRL_BAROO1 vg i CTRL_BARO09 vg ie DISP_BAROOL vg DISP_BAROO2 vg E E DISP_BAROOS vg E DISP_BAROO6 vg Ge Dashed vq oo ENTEROO5 vg lt ENTEROLO vg ee KEYOO vg B E Lamp2Statel 00 vg z Middle vg 3 58 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer Of course you can use the graphics library provided by the system When you click the E Import Graphics icon in the toolbar the following dialog box will pop up Graphics Library System Graphics Library Type All images vg bg C User Defined Library Path CP Be BB Yg vr poy w ubisag sIseg S 3 m Graphics for Each State State z Refresh alydeIg JOINS G G The system graphics library is located in bg_vg_lib VG directory in which the NB Designer was installed and all the graphics are stored in the folders for each item Select the Vector Graphics to be imported and click Import then the Vector Graphics will be copied into the vg file of the current project Importing multiple Vector
454. or the installation process M a n u a n a m e NB series Programmable Terminals Setup Manual V107 This illustration is provided only as a sample and may not literally appear in this manual Special Information Special information in this manual is classified as follows Precautions for Safe Use Precautions on what to do and what not to do to ensure using the product safely 14 Precautions for Correct Use Precautions on what to do and what not to do to ensure proper operation and performance EN Additional Information Additional information to increase understanding or make operation easier 4 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 Terminology The following terminology is used in this manual Terms NB Unit NB Series PLC CP Series CS CJ Series NJ Series C Series Serial Communication Unit Serial Communication Board Communication Board CPU Unit NB Designer Host PT Descriptions Indicates the main Unit of the products in the OMRON NB Series of Programmable Terminal Indicates products in the OMRON NBUOIO Series of Programmable Terminal In this manual unless otherwise specified NBLJO Series is taken as the subject concerned Indicates a Programmable Controller Indicates the following products in the OMRON CP Series of Programmable Controllers CP1H CP1L CP1E Indicates the following products in the OMRON CS CJ Series of Programmable Controll
455. ot S X 9 ex Z UONOUNJHINAL EL L 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 7 14 Event Display 3 232 event Displ Y Event Display is used to make the event information logged in Event Setting database and meeting the current triggering conditions displayed scrolling from the right to the left Event Display Property 1 Event Setting tab Event Setting Display Setting Display Range 0 Moving Step 10 Refresh Rate 10 C Sequence number Ll Time of Occur L Time of Cancel Cl Checked Time C Edended Time Format D H M Short Time Format H M Cl Short Time Format H M C Precise Time Format H M 5 MS C Etended Date Format M D C Date or Occur M D L Time ascending Order Display Cl Show only ongoing events Note Event component shows occuring event only and does not support sequence number checked time and canceled time Display Range Specify the range of displaying types formats of the event Moving Step The pixel point of the width to display the event information in loopy way in units of pixel Refresh Rate The period to refresh the display of the event information in loopy way in units of 100ms Display The contents are as follows For the displayed format of event information all the selected format information will be displayed before the event information Date of Time of Event Occur Occur content P 1602 10582 28 Abnoranl Tome Time of Occur The time when
456. ote Book Notepad File List Date Time Display J Table K Data History Operation Log Event History Display User Info 3 29 snudll Z 3 nuay MeJg S Z 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 2 Tools Menu For the corresponding contents in the Tools menu shown as below refer to 3 12 Recipe Data Page 3 329 3 14 Test Page 3 346 and 3 15 Download Page 3 349 Compile Ctrl F7 Recompile Clear Compiled Result Ctr e Download Ctrl D Transmission Setting Alt F Offline Test F5 Indirect Online Test Shift F5 Direct Online Test Ctrl F5 fh QP iia ia System Manager PT Version Setting Recipe Editor Upload Manager DownLoad Manager Upload Logo Screen Download Logo Screen Upload Ik Decompile 3 2 8 Option Menu The corresponding contents in Option menu shown as below have been described in 3 2 3 View Menu Page 3 15 Option Project Path Alt F8 Compress graphic Alt F Communication Setting Macro Import Recipe Text Library Variable Table Sound Library Change System Language Change System Language used for changing the system language of the software tool 3 30 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 2 9 Window Menu The corresponding contents in the Window menu are as follows Window Cascade Tile Horizontally Tile Vertically Configuration and Setup Window Edit Window Close All Windows p N
457. ou want to remove the external memory from the PT the special system memory LB9154 USB1 must be turned OFF before removal If the external memory is removed without the procedure the data will be corrupted lost Data history property Sampling property Display Setting Display Properties Title Bar Properties Basic Froperty Channel Froperties Save Data History l Save to Recipe Data Field T Save to Etemal Memory Storage Device USE DISK I Restoration during outages Data Encryption Stat Address End Address Save as ms HistroyData Daily file Default lv Export to CSV File Addr Format Subfolder Storage Type Buffer Storage Storage Period 0 Note 1 No limit when storage period is zero 2 Subfolder name must be unique Descriptions of Save Historical Data Storage Device USB 1 Restoration When the NB units restarts because of the power interruption checking in this option allows during outages resetting the event information to the previous status of the power interruption Export to CSV Export the data information in CSV format to the external memory The path for storing this File CSV file is trend subfolder name file name Save as ms Makes the data sampling time accurate to the millisecond and records it into the CSV file Subfolder Sets the subfolder name of CSV file saved to the external memory The users can change the Storage Type Buffer Storage Storage Pe
458. p down box of the system information and check the Use User Defined System Information option and input No Response in the text input box 3 Use the Vector Font with the following settings i e AR PL UMing CN the size of 16 red and Bold 3 296 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer PT property Print Setting COMI Setting COM2 Setting ExtemalMemory PT l l Task Bar PT Extended Property system Information Setting Security Level Setting User Permission Setting Event History Setting 2 PLC No Response User Defined System Information if Use User Defined System Information No Response Y U lt Gi r D 3 9 D 3 D er D T Font Type f Vector Font t Bitmap Font Font Attribute Font DFHEIS X Size 16 Position Left ki Color Color Language English USA kalic W Bold Bulnes uoewozuj waiyshS p OL F OK Cancel When the PT can t perform communications with PLC No Response will be displayed Menu Task Bar NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 297 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 10 5 Security Levels Setting The security level is classified into 16 levels 0 to 15 in the NB Designer One 8 digit number password can be set for each level at the request of the users and the greater the level number the higher the level 15 level is the highest
459. pace Project File Window Output Window Component List Window Language State Zoom Reset Size to Normal Display Component s Name Property Col A V Corl Ait C Ctrl Alt F Ctrl Alt M COrl Alt E Common Toolbar Draw Toolbar Screen Toolbar Component Edit Toolbar Line Width Toolbar Line Style Toolbar System Toolbar Database Toolbar Code Edit Toolbar Pattern Toolbar Text Position Toolbar State Switch Toolbar Font Toolbar Status bar Editing project file name and others are displayed Menu Col Alt s COrl Alt G Ctrl Alt P Ctrl Alr A Cor AlE L COr Alt Cor Ale T Ctrl Alt B8 Ctrl AK D Ctrl Alr H Corl Alt Col Alt k Corl At 0 Ctrl Alt 1 Selects the various kinds of command menus of NB Designer After these menus being selected the corresponding pull down menu will pop up Each pull down menu corresponds to one command operation 3 4 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer Toolbar 1 Common Toolbar 7 19 Includes some basic tools such as New Open Cut and Copy etc 2 Draw Toolbar Each image of figure drawing is displayed in icons The available drawing tools include Line Rectangle Ellipse Sector Polygon Text etc 3 Screen Toolbar Performs Up Down operation of the screen oo I C N D O D D gt 4 Component Edit Toolbar Adjusts the position of the component
460. pe isthe string of LW LB etc i eel HMI0 whe 10 ii i i address is the Operation address T o 0 11 i i mRegs isthe length of read or write ak E Macro _V c 12 i i buf is the buffer which store the reading or writing data Graphics a 13 flag is 0 then codetype is BIN is 1 then codetype is BCD Button6 15 vg F 14 return value 1 Operation success HS z 15 ii i i i i i 0 Operation fail m Button6 17 vg d the value of local lw200 and write it to the lw202 with the codetype BIN te AS eg read the value of local Iw and write it to the lw202 wi e codetype a 18 i The code is E 2 CONFIRM vg 19 i CTRL_BAROO1 vg 20 short buf 2 0 CTRL BAR009 21 ReadLocal LW 200 2 void buf 0 2 vg 22 WriteLocal LW 202 2 void buf 0 DISP_BAROO1 vg 23 0 DISP_BAROO2 vg 24 int MacroEntry 25 DISP_BARO05 vg e return 0 Project Work Space x 28 d Tree View 4 mW p Macro Variable Table macro_0 c x Storage For Name PLC No Area Address Word R W pi Screens Preview NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 261 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 262 Before writing the Macro please predefine the I O variables Right click the mouse in the Macro Variable Table macro_0 c window to make the following menu Add Variable Delete Variable Modify Variable Export variables Import variables a Select Add Variable to make t
461. pecified address and the specified address 1 respectively 3 Press the OK button and properly adjust the position and the size of the Indirect Screen component The size of the Indirect Screen limits the display area of the pop up screens The pop up screen area that goes beyond the Indirect Screen edge will not be displayed Related function keys can be added to move or minimize the screens Refer to the Pop up screen title bar and Minimize in 3 7 2 Function Key Page 3 197 Task Bar If the pop up screen comes with the Pop up screen title bar and Minimize function keys each time a screen pops up a small icon supporting the pop up screen will be reserved for this screen in the task bar Pressing the small icon for this screen will push the corresponding screen to the top of the screen Pressing the icon for the second time will minimize the screen and another click will restore it to its initial state NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 145 W ez V fen a 7 UBBIOS PsIPU 9 9 3 Functions of NB Designer Direct Screen can make a specified screen pop up onto the current screen The pop up screen will be displayed within the area of the Direct Screen Normally the Direct Screen size should be set to same as that of the pop up screen There is no absolute limitation on the number of Direct Screen However a maximum of 16 Direct Screens can be displayed
462. peration Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 7 12 User Information User Information When the system uses User Permission function the related information of the current login user can be displayed in the table form by using the User Information component The User Information component must be used in combination with the User Permission otherwise it will not work Refer to 3 10 6 User Permission Setting Page 3 300 for the details 3 7 13 Multifunction amp Multi Pad The component which is unified the Bit Button and the Word Switch can operate the both the bit set and the word set through one key The Multifunction component can be created by using the mouse to click Components Button Switch Multifunction or dragging Multifunction component from Project Library Window Function Parts to the Edit Window The number of Actions which can be set by the Multifunction is 16 at max Action List edit by right click Write Address PT PLC No Port Change Station Numbe l System memory Use Variable Area Variable Address Data Format Word Length Type Type Est when execution fails T Use index Process of adding Multifunction component Right click the mouse in the blank box located in the left side of Basic Properties tab in the Multifunction Property screen to add the Bit Set or Word Set in the procedure as follows 1 Add the actions Bit Set and Word Set
463. ph Channel Extended Property Save Data History Display Setting V Indirect Max Min Reference Memory address order is Y Min Y Max X Min X Max No Lin Storage Format___ indirect Max Min Refer Color _ 0 1 16bit signed HMIO LW 20 Sa Y coordinate min LW20 Y coordinate max LW21 X coordinate min LW22 X coordinate max LW23 Example When the maximum value and the minimum value of a line graph Drawing method Trend are specified indirectly Descriptions The position coordinate is allocated as below There are 2 sampling points corresponding to y1 LW10 and y2 LW11 and LW20 and LW21 correspond to the minimum lower limit of Y and the maximum value upper limit of Y respectively m m eed oe ee eg W ez V e a 7 Ar Plot Trend gt gt gt o Refresh Po SEEEN SS Lock ra Groupia Ctrl G Groups Rotation Line Width ydely AX L 9 Line Style Arrow Style mY LE LYV1O 4 Bottom layer Mli2f Lio LYY10 3 BC LYW11 Lii gi LW21 LWel B NIL i masi Lw20 Lw20 Nt XY Graph property me XY Graph property m Basic Property xy Graph Channel Extended Property Save Data History Display Setting Basic Property XY Graph Channel Extended Property Save Data History Display Setting Type Single pag Property Horizontal Drawing method Trend ff Save Time Priority Normal hai Sampling Method Periodic sampl
464. pports single step Undo Redo operation Cut Copy Paste and Delete After selecting one component or more you can cut copy paste it or them etc and the corresponding icons are shownas B a 3 Nudge The component position can be adjusted by Nudge method after it is selected The component movement can be realized by using direction key or the corresponding Nudge icons Each time the Nudge button is pressed the component will move a pixel distance accordingly The corresponding icons are shown as H 4j and they are Left Right Up Down corresponding one to one with the contents of Nudge in the Edit menu The simple nudge method is to use the arrow keys on the keyboard which realizes the easy component movement Alignment Size E Order 4 Group Ctrl G 4 UnGroup Ctrl U NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 g N D 5 o nus HPA C C 3 Functions of NB Designer Alignment Makes the selected component realize the Left Right Top Bottom Vertical Midline or Horizontal Midline alignment The corresponding icons are shown as Here Sj m ut a amp only take Left as an example with the effect shown as below Alignment Size t Sl Right Order d Top Group Ctrl 6 Bottom 4 UnGroup Ctrl U Vertical Midline I Horizontal Even Spacing Ctr R Horizontal Midline Vertical Even
465. project Copy Paste Open 2 NB Designers Open 2 projects with different names and then copy or paste the current screen by using shortcuts CTRL C and CTRL V or selecting Edit Copy Paste Use Notifications Function to Notify Word memory Notifications to word memories are added in Control Setting tab for the Bit Button component Bit Switch component and Number Input component etc Makes the write value written into the specified word memory before the signal of touch component is input into the controller successfully Notice Before Written Makes the write value written into the specified word memory after the signal of touch component is input into the controller successfully Notice After Written Triggering action Macro i Write Notice Notice Before Written Notice After Written Written Value Bit 0 r Notice Memory PT HMO PLC No 0 i Pot COMI Use Variable Change Station No 0 Area Varable LWW Address 0 Data Format BIN Word Length 1 7 Format Range DDDOD 0 10255 Use index For example Number Input component LWO notifies LW10 to write 100 after notification Set Triggering action in Control Setting as shown below NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer Triggering action Macro I Write Notice Notice Before Witten Written Value Bt Word 100 Notice Memory PT HMIO PLC
466. putting the password again NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 Appendices A 3 List of memories supported by OMRON PLC Omron C Series Counter Completion Flag C_FLAGO 514000 fm DDD Omron CJ_CS Series g Auxiliary Area Holding Area Timer Completion Flag Counter Completion Flag Data Memory Extension Data Memory Area E0 E18 DDDDD DD DDDD DD DDDD A_bit 000 00 11535 15 H_bit 000 00 1535 15 T_Flag 0000 4095 C_Flag 0000 4095 DDDD D_bit 00000 00 32767 15 E0_bit 0 00 32767 15 DDDDD DD DDDDD DD E18_bit 0 00 32767 15 Extension Data EO 0 32767 DDDDD Memory E0 E18 a E18 0 32767 CIO Area CIO 0000 6143 DDDD Work Area W 000 511 DDD Auxiliary Area A 000 11535 DDDDD Holding Area H 000 1535 DDDD Timer Area T 0000 4095 DDDD Counter Area C 0000 4095 DDDD Data Memory Index memory Area Data memory Area D 00000 32767 DDDDD IR 00 15 DD DR 00 15 DD NB Series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 A 11 gt O O Appendices A 12 Omron CP1H L E Hold Area H_bit 0 00 1535 15 ST DDDD DD Counter C_Flag 0 00 4095 00 DDDD DD Completion Flag Timer T_Flag 0 00 4095 00 aan DDDD DD Completion Flag OMRON CJ CS NJ Series Ethernet UDP Slave Timer T_FLAG 0000 4095 DDDD Completion Flag Counter Completion Flag Data Memory Extension Data Memory Area E0O E18 Counter Release Forced Status
467. r Timer Timer is a kind of component performing the timing When the timing is over it will play the other corresponding functions such as periodical Macro instruction execution parameter setting and data transmission etc Process of adding the Timer 1 First press the Timer icon before dragging it into the screen and go to Timer tab after the Timer Property dialog box pops up p T c 5 O as fe S aa 9 er Z Timer Timer Function Display Setting Basic Property s Trigger Address Trigger Mode PT HMIO Execution Cycle 30 x100ms PLC No 0 gt Response Mode immediate 5 Port COM1 iN Change 0 z 4 Trigger State OFF Reset Station No 5 a 0 Area LB gt D Zero means Always Execute Address 0 Format Range DDDD 0 9999 Descriptions of Timer Properties Trigger Always With this triggering mode the timer will be triggered once it is Mode initialized The timer will be operated when displaying the screen in the timer was loaded to and the timer will be stopped automatically and will not be triggered any more when the number of the timer trigger operations reaches to the value specified at Repeat Count When screen is The timer will be operated when the timer is placed in the screen and loading the number of the timer trigger operations it will stop automatically after the value set in Repeat Count being reached and will not be triggered any more The effect of t
468. r gt D si c O ct fe 5 D The effect of repeat is shown as above Find Replace Select Find Replace in the drop down menu of the Edit menu or press the Find Replace icon then the following dialog box will pop up Find Replace Find Range Curent project 7 Screen amp Macro Find Replace f Memory klemo Memor Type Bit PT pmo PLENo gp PT Hho PLONo p Area LE Area LE Address T FomatiA angel DODD 0 9999 FomatA ange DODD 0 9999 Rane O Keep Offset C Message Message Case Sensitive Full Match Find Replace Replace All Mo Location Title No Location Title ta Re NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 357 3 Functions of NB Designer Find Range Refers to the content of the edit screen in NB Designer to be searched and it is classified into 4 kinds as shown below Descriptions of Find Range Find Range Current Project All the Screens Macros and background database in PT will be searched Background Only the background components such as Event Setting Alarm Setting and Data Database Log etc will be searched All PT Screens and All the Screens and Macros in the current project will be Macros searched All Screens All the Screens in the current project will be searched All Macros All the Macros in the current project will be searched Current PT Screens and All the Screens and Macros in the selected PT will be
469. r Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer Example When the value of LWO is 0 only MO Bit Switch can be operated When the value of LWO isn t O MO Bit Switch canot be operated and the invalid mark E will be displayed in the color which was specified 1 Setting of Unable to Input Display Color Double click PT Property and enter PT Extended Property tab to select red as the Unable to Input Display Color 2 Place one Bit Switch i e MO and set the enable conditions in the Control Setting tab for it p and then select Conditional Enabling Word LWO 0 and select Show Unable to Input gt Eit Switch property a Basic Property Bit Switch Label Graphics Control Setting Display Setting x Touch Enabling Setting Securty Setting g C Enable Input M Show Unable o Input ON Delay lt 100ms 0 t Disable Input Confirm Operation 7 Conditional Enabling Operation Log SWO Security Level Min Interval seconds 0 User Pennission Control Triggering action Macro W Indirect Reference Write Notice Value Range Min 0 Max 0 Indirect Reference PT HMI PLC No 0 Fort COMI Use Variable Change Station No 0 p p on oo U m x mp D a D o U me z Ti O Area Varable LWW Address 0 Data Format BIN WordLength 1 Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 Use index OK Cancel 3 Place one Number Input component LWO 4 Perform th
470. r details about the single precision floating point value and double precision floating point value refer to IEEE 754 Standard NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 119 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 6 11 Number Display mt Display The Number Display component is used to display the data in the specified word memory Process of adding one Number Display component 1 Press the Number Display component icon drag it to the window then the Basic Properties dialog box of the Number Display component will pop up Basic Property Numeric Data Fort Graphics Display Setting Priority Normal Read Address PT HMIO PLE 9 Na Part COM1 m anae o Change Station No Station No Area Variable LW Data Word Pand BIN pr 1 Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 Use Variable Use index Area Variable LWW Address 0 L System Memor Data Word Pa BIN length 1 Use Variable T Use index Read Address Refers to the word address displayed by the Number Display component Address Refers to the first address of the word address corresponding to the Number Display component Word Length Displays the data length of the read address NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 120 3 Functions of NB Designer 2 Refer to the relevant contents of the Number Input component and fill in the contents in the Numeric Data tab Basic P
471. r is started for the second time the project operated last time will be opened automatically e During the first launch of NB Designer the following screen will be displayed i File Edit View Screen Draw Components Tools Option Window Help TE AIERT R Ea A Ga u og RAR Ha BEAD A Jiho TEAN iBE2B2A To quit the NB Designer can be realized by using any one of the following methods e Select Exit in the File menu e Click the button in the upper right corner of the main window e Double click the NB Designer icon in the upper left corner of the main window e Click the NB Designer icon in the upper left corner of the main window and select Close from the displayed control menu bar e Press the Alt key and F4 key simultaneously Note When the edited data in the file is not saved Save the Current Project dialog box will pop up 2 4 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 2 Installation and Startup of NB Designer 2 4 Installation of USB Driver for NB Install the USB driver for NB on PC After the installation the data transmission between the PC and the NB Unit is available via USB Because the USB driver included in the NB Designer is certified by Microsoft it will be installed automatically accompanying with the software installation so there is no need to install the USB driver by manual again y A 5 m r D ct O gt o h c 7 u w
472. r the rectangle and ellipse NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 225 3 Functions of NB Designer 2 Position Indirect Shape Position Display Setting Indirect Reference of Upperteft Comer Position X LW 1 Position X LW 2 PT HMIO Pot COMI Change Station Number Area LW Address 1 Data Format BIN Word Length 9 Format Range DDDDD 010255 Indirect Reference of Width Height Width LW 20 Height LW 21 PT mo PLCNo g Fot COMI Change Station Number ni LW Address 20 Data Format IN Word Length gt Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 The descriptions of the specific Properties are as follows Indirect Reference of Unchecked Position X and Position Y of the Indirect Shapeics are the Upper left Corner constants Checked Position X and Position Y of the Indirect Shapeics are the indirect reference Position X First address of the set memory Position Y First address of the set memory 1 Indirect Reference of Unchecked The Width and Height of the Indirect Shapeics are the Width Hight constants Checked The Width and Height of the Indirect Shapeics are the indirect reference Width First address of the set memory Height First address of the set memory 1 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer Example of creating Indirect Shape 1 Set and place Indirect Shape ellipse components as fol
473. ram cccsecccceessececesseeeeceuscececesececseseeeeceuseecseeseeessesseesssaeees 3 260 3 9 2 Macro and Specification of Operation with Read Write Variables cccccccccsseeeeseeeeeeeeees 3 267 3 9 3 Macro TOG Ob NO sa E EARE ERARA 3 268 3 9 4 Other Descriptions eee ne Pee terns Oe rene ee ee eee een eee es 3 270 3 10 System Parameters acincscscccaseecs cccgaccesncoecnateececenexecceneecunenesnnecuehoeennesdentekcamacdedentiandecearaceadterdecs 3 283 IO PT a E T E E ee ene enn ee eee 3 284 FW T RB ee E E EA E ANE 3 285 3 10 3 PT Extended Properties cccccccccccssecccsececsseeceueeeceececceusessseessueeccuasessesessueeessueeessusessagss 3 287 3 10 4 System Information SOMA ao Gectscais a chacee ca Geearcba ancdockesdeceeen ci awe denies Geveasachenieesinctendsoeuas ance rene 3 296 3 10 5 Security Levels Setting ayes cater caratencetenenecessenoncenasuncuumeacaesaaeceseeaueceatadueneaiaeeteorsecseaceauanstabate 3 298 3 10 6 User Permission Setting sxgececcdosscsdcsistadvietnecasetedestnedindsbnedbieleenacbiabenbduedsdsswdaieieduwecdieedeunetedendees 3 300 3 10 7 Event History Setting sees tes acetates ace c senentes denen meee saaes Secedne aseceseuenesteceneneucesacessuceeeresccnaneee 3 314 J106 CONT COM Z Sei esasen Ea a aa aa a 3 315 3 11 Address of System Memory avsssdsnsinedsveddswnvneisscscdvaneuadieetadssuicanitessasddnnnssenuveoedhiacssecteanssenssetas 3 317 3 11 14 Local Bit LB wiscrccnteseneecxncowsxemertensaenieo
474. rame 0 50 100 0 50 100 an E Disable Enable Number of Main Sets the main scale number to be displayed Scales Length of Main Sets the length of the main scale with the unit of pixel point m Scale O Number of Minor Sets the minor scale number to be displayed y Scales 2 Length of Minor Sets the length of the minor scale with the unit of pixel point Scale Scale display Left of the bar Right of the bar Top of the bar Bottom of the bar position 100 100 50 E 0 50 100 0 Display Font Sets scale font Properties Number on Integer Refers to the integer places displayed by the scale which can t be Scale changed by the user himself and is decided by the number of digits specified by the decimal Decimal Refers to the decimal places displayed by the scale which can be changed by the user himself p D h D Ja 49 lt Oo m om Ql Note When the Level Meter is of a Circle shape scale display is not supported NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 133 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 134 4 Switch to the Graphics tab and make settings as shown below Level Meter property Bitmap Use Original Size Save to System Graphics Graphics for Each State Basic Property Color Shape Scale Graphics Display Setting Import Graphics Library Select proper graphics for the Bar Picture to improve the display effect 5 Press the OK button
475. raph Channel Extended Property Save Data History Display Setting Type Single pag Property Horizontal Drawing method Track ff Save Time Priority Normal Sampling Method Periodic sampling v Cycle 1 X is F Sampling Points 2 Page No 1 Channel 1 Read Address Write Address Control Memory Setting PT HMIO ig 0 PT HMIO tag 0 lt Trigger Memory Setting J7 Pause Clear ClearAddr PauseAddr 1 i PT Hmo PLC o PT Hmo PLC o Port COM1 Port COM1 No No Change i Change j z Area Variable LB Area Variable LB Station No Station No lad 0 Ackcress D m LW x feon Vetabic CW z Data Format BIN X Data Format BIN X Address T System Memory Address 0 7 System Memory Word Length 1 T Use Variable Word Length 2 IT Use Variable Format DDDD 0 9999 Format DDDD 0 9999 Data a Daa E Woi Format Range ormat Range Format Length Format Length Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 T Scroll I Time PT HMO PLC o PT Hmo PLC I Use V a a No No Use Variable l Use Variable Area Variable LW X Area Varable LW z Use index Use index T Use index C ind lad 0 Ad 0 Data Format BIN Data Format BIN Word Lenath 3 Use Variable Word Length 12 Use Variable Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 3 104 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer XY Graph property Basic Property XY Gra
476. raphics library will be displayed in the upper part while each state of the selected graphics will be displayed in the lower part Bitmap and Vector Graphics are supported Bitmap in bg format is made of images in bmp gif jpg or png formats or pictures Using too many bitmaps will affect the operation speed of PT Therefore it is recommended to use the Vector Graphics to replace the bitmaps as much as possible The Vector Graphics in vg format is drawn by the NB Designer using the point line and circle etc There are 3 methods to enter the Graphics Library window 1 Click Import Graphics in the Graphics tab in the component Property dialog box to enter the grapchics library window As shown below take the Bit Switch component as example and the other components are similar Bit Switch property Basic Property Bit Switch Label Graphics Control Setting Display Setting if VectorGraphics CTRL_BARODSvg BlueFrame vg Button1 93 vg Button3 50 vg CLOSEO01vg CONFIRM vg m CTRL_BAR Bitmap WREN Dashedvg ODISP_BARO DISP_BARD z Use Original Siz e Orginal Size i Ganka Save to System Graphics Library Graphics for Each State State 0 State 1 OK Cancel NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 367 3 Functions of NB Designer 2 Select Import Graphics in Draw menu to enter the Graphics Library window File Edit View Scre
477. ration a Pass Through ere Communication Select Data Download Project Files Download LOGO a HMI image m sound J Ji temp wy Download FRM Data File name aae oe l a Open as read only 4 6 NB Series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 4 Functions of NBManager Download FRW Data Click the Download FRW Data button and select the edited project i e the file with the suffix of frp in PT folder under car folder and then click the Open button to perform the download NBManz E c fe e i Communication Setting w Download Operat l Communication Method Serial port Upload Operation Sr j i IF NULL Port NULL Se Port Ho COM Sat HPE Get Version O EE eee Select Data ib Decompile Operatior Download Project Files Communicate or ere Ni Download LOGO Download Recipe Download FAW Data gt N w O O 2 O 5 D ie ct O gt Files of type Recipe Files frp Open as read only Eyed Pa9l9S C c v Recipe Editor Clicking the Recipe Editor button will open the RecipeEditor RecipeEditor xX File View FileMerge Help Dah amp Start Address Number of records read Current record length Data format TestDataFormat Add data format Delete current data for Current data format details ID _ Length w Storage Format Description
478. rding to the different parameters assigned to them on the industrial production line Now we can save this group of data in the specific format in the recipe memory then we can call them out directly thus enhancing productivity Example of how to call several recipe data conveniently It is assumed that we have 10 groups of recipes each group is made of 5 words recipe name occupying 4 words and recipe data occupying 1 word Then we configure the recipe from RWO as shown below Recipe No Recipe Data 1 word We hope each group of recipe in the above table can perform data swap with 4X100 memory of our PLC conveniently through design First let s see the following created project to obtain the general understanding RWIO and RWI4 in the project display the data in Group 0 and pressing the Download button can download the recipe data to 4X100 while pressing the Upload button can upload the data in 4X100 to the recipe memory The Up button on the right is used to modify the Recipe No to a level smaller which is convenient to change or transfer the recipe data and the Down button on the right side is used to modify the Recipe No to a level larger N A D Q 5 D O D r D gd pue Id usemjeq ezeq Sdioey Jo peojumoqd peojd E ZL LW9000 Reduce Superimposed LWO Reduce LWY9000 Plus Superimposed LWO Pius X E PTA ia EE INL ENT EIN 412 peel bn Tey a i enu Task Bar NB series Programmab
479. re set if the Find button in the dialog box is clicked the search of address meeting the condition will be performed the screen locating in the Find Range If the component is found then No Location Name and Data will be displayed in the bottom white box When the components displayed in the search result is double clicked the window will be switched to the screen placed the matched components and Property dialog box will be displayed Clicking Replace or Replace All means the found component meeting the conditions will be replaced by the component with the address type and address set in the Replace part If the Replace All dialog box shown as below is clicked the Write Read Address of all component which are specified to MWO in the current project are replaced to MWO 3 358 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer Find Replace s Find Range Curent project Spereen Macro Find Replace Memory Memory Memory Type Word lt 4 PT Hmo PLCNo p z PT Hmo PLCNo p Area Mw A Area Mw Address 10 w FormatfRangetDDDD 0 9999 Fommat RangetDDDD 0 3999 D O na oe F gt Range O NB Mesigner i C Message c A Replaced successfully z r pz Lace tiwe 2 N Find Replace All 1 Scteen_HMI0_FrameO NIO_Read Write memory Mw_10 Y 2 Screen_HMI0_Frame NIO_Read Write memory MWw_10 Y About the overlay of component O
480. reated bitmap can be used in the Edit Window The bitmap is mainly applicable to graphic area i e external graphics addition Note The operations such as line drawing drawing text addition etc for the bitmaps can t be made in the Graphics Edit Window and only the external graphics addition can be done Procedure of bitmap addition 1 Select Add Graphics in the Draw menu or click icon and then the following dialog box will appear g a U D o O J D o To D r 0 2 Mame pic State Ho Type f Bitmap Width C Vector Graphics Height File Name CANBProjecthcarwyg dewyig 9 G Description 2 Select Bitmap in the Type and input State No and Name then click OK If you think the bitmap state added just now is not enough you can use the following methods to make addition Drag the mouse into State Preview Window of the bitmap select one state such as state0 then click 4 icon in the toolbar to create a new state And the states that can be created are up to 256 kinds NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 63 3 Functions of NB Designer Ege Ee soe 1 T ae 100 i stateD 3 Click Draw Toolbar icon find the needed graphics and click it to open it Only the pictures can be input into bitmap and the tools such as Line can t be used in the bitmap as shown below BO
481. rend Curve 3 The current sample value Timeline Current sampling time 9 Trend Curive variable cycle The current sample value Se A ee eee a Hi a la EO R ee j i Ja foe rr he ae Ee a S a a 4 0D 4 h 0 Timeline Current sampling time i Timeline Current sampling time TE Timeline Current sampling time HEHHE XY Plot variable cycle NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 363 3 Functions of NB Designer The effect of test is as shown below e The current sample value e The current sample value Timeline Current sampling time i 4 Timeline Current sampling time Trend Curve Oscillograph ee i The current sample value The current sample value Timeline Current sampling time y 4 Timeline Current sampling time Trend Curve variable cycle Trend Curive variable cycle Trend Curive variable cycle mij o gt The current sample value The current sample value The current sample value gt Timeline Current sampling time Timeline Current sampling time Timeline Current sampling time XY Plot variable cycle 1 XY Plot variable cycle XY Plot variable cycle 1 1 Use Input Order The Number Input component Text Input component and Note Book component have this function 3 364 NB series
482. ress RW50 In this case if we change the data in LW9000 to 51 then the index address RWIO will point to the data in address RW51 as shown below p N A D Q D D O D r D LW9000 50 LW9000 51 For example we specify one project and select MODBUS RTU as the PLC Type in system parameters The function of transferring the 5 word text beginning from address 200 with the address type of 4X to the address of recipe memory RW300 is as shown below Jowan edioey Z Z Before uploading After uploading RW300 RW300 RW301 RW301 Create a new project and select MODBUS RTU as the PLC type in Project Library Window Firstly create a component to upload the recipe data with the Area Variable of 4X Address of 200 Function of Upload Word Length of 5 and Transport Font being checked and the Label of Upload as shown below NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 331 3 Functions of NB Designer Recipe property Recipe property mm Basic Property Recipe Label Graphics Control Setting Display Setting Basic Property Recipe Label Graphics Control Setting Display Setting T Upload from PLC to Recipe Priority Normal a Data Length 5 Word Read Address Write Address coe AE z g mA PIE PT HMIO No 0 PT HMIO No 0 Port COM1 Port COM1 Change A E Change E Station No E Station No Area Va able LW x Area Varable 4X Address 0 System Memory Addres
483. ress when the number or text is not input successfully Each time this component is pressed the value of the specified word address will be increased by the Addend once and its result will not exceed the Upper Each time this component is pressed the value of the specified word address will subtract the Subtrahend and its result will not be less than the Upper NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 89 W ez V fen r 7 uong puewwop p 9 3 Functions of NB Designer Type Descriptions JOG Everytime command button is pressed for the time longer than the time to be specified Delay Time the value set to Addend is added to the value of the write address with the interval set to JOG Speed The result will not exceed the Upper When Ignore Delay Time is checked the Addend will be added to the value of the specified word address immediately each time the component is pressed If this component is pressed for a long time the Addend will be added to the value of the specified word address at the interval of JOG Speed time until the Upper is reached JOG Everytime command button is pressed for the time longer than the time to be specified Delay Time the value set to Subtrahend is subtracted from the value of the write address with the interval set to JOG Speed The result will not be less t
484. retee deroeeece avoctaesneinseeeapeulnetetaneeimeckeauieeeecnctneseeeselteead 6 20 6 3 4 operon oat E E E E E E E A 6 21 6 3 5 PRS CNS e e E E A S E E A E E 6 24 6 3 6 PEC COOU O eee E E E E ence seenecessuaceeeae 6 25 6 3 7 29 U2 E EE er E IE M E ET EE E NE M E ee SEE EA TT 6 26 GCC F FNCU Printing csocsi en E E EN 7 1 I1 PictBridge FUNCUON scissors aaa a aaa eaa adani eiia 7 2 7 2 Setting Method for Using Printing Function a ssasssssnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnna 7 4 7 3 Components Related to Printing and Setup Descriptions ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeees 7 6 7 3 1 PEG CONVO erneer EE E EAE EEE E EEEE EE 7 6 7 4 List of System memories Related to Printing cccsceceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeseeeeseeneesaneesaeeeseneenes 7 8 o Listof Error Codes for Printing access cesses dececccdenscscni cece ieii a iaiaaeaia 7 9 7 6 Recommended Printer Models cccccccccsseeeeeeeeceeeceeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeesenseeeeneeansenasensseneaanees 7 10 SCCA lt 0 01 19 6 01 gt ocen E E eee re A 1 PT Cistof MOGEIS sessiciicsciczasucececcatacecncsnnivecscecvancpeansanacstevacansaseuvsnataaecadaneapedenseaseatonteancnsavenanpaescitunsesat A 2 A 2 NB Designer Function Listers aae eaaa A ARE REEERE A 6 A 3 List of memories supported by OMRON PLC aasssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nenne A 11 FS CVISION HISTOTY siecenscseetnecanseanecncncnecatecanaoneesnscanecanosneesneseiau
485. return to the factory settings and the screen data will be removed Note that point when you perform the operation NB Series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 4 Functions of NBManager 4 5 Get Version Get Version Clicking the Get Version can obtain the Production ID of NB Unit Hardware Version Kernel Ver sion Rootfs Version GUI Version GUI Data Version Comserver Version and Servo Version Communication Setting Download Operation Communication Method USB pot Upload Operation j IF NULL Por NULL System Operation e a pa oi e D r f o fe 5 Decompile Operatior Production ID GUI Version Pass Through Hardware version GUI Data version Communication Kernel Version Comserver Version Roots version Servo Version NB Series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 4 15 4 Functions of NBManager 4 6 Decompile Operation Decompile Operation Convert PKG file to the format which can be handled with the NB Designer 1 Select one pkg file 2 Set the folder of Select Target Project Folder to Decompile ee ors lt fies of type User Date Fies pko Open as readonly Click the Decompile button and input the decompile password then click the OK button When the decomplie is completed Decompilation success dialog box will pop up PEG decompiling now
486. rigger matches to the condition specified with Trigger Type the graphics are updated SUIT B EQ OL L 3 7 10 Date Time yd The Date Time component can display the value of the internal RTC clock of the PT in the set format Year 4 digit Display Zero Suppress for Month and Day Display Day of Week Display Time HH MM SS 12 hour System AM PM e g August 8 2008 Friday 20 00 08 08 08 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 223 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 224 Date Time Component Property Descriptions of Date Time Component Property Display Date Sets whether to display the date or not Date Format There are four formats available where DD MM and YY refer to the date month and year respectively Date Separator Three formats are available e g 2011 06 24 Year 4 digit Display Displays 4 digit included in the year after this option being selected For example 2011 Year will be displayed as 2011 or 11 after this option is checked or not checked respectively Zero Suppress for Clears zero included in the date and month after this option being Month and Day selected For example June will be displayed as 6 or 06 after this option is checked or not checked respectively Display Day of Sets whether to display the week or not Week Display Time Sets whether to display the time or not Time Format There are
487. riginally NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 287 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 288 Ko gress oo ae eronert _ System information Setting Securty Level Setting User Permission Setting Event History Setting Pint Setting COMiSeting COM2Seting Etena Memory PT Task Ber PT Edanded Property F Backlight 10 mins VideoMode PAL T Anto beckight duning alam event J Screen Saver D mins Soren Saver Screen 0 Fravme0 F Ratum to Onginal Screen When Screan Saver Ende Nunberoflenqueyes B D Mow Upload Paceword RRERRR Defaut Language 1 RJ kna fiannia Docume BEARER _ Vector Font Font Attribute Font Size B DISKI r DFHEI5 16 System Scroll Bar Width Refers to the component with the scroll bar such as operation log component The width of the scroll bar can be set with this option and the width range is from 20 to 120 pixel point When the spacing is 4 i e 20 24 28 and so on the scroll bar can be displayed effectively System Information Setting Security Level Setting User Pemnission Setting Event History Setting Print Setting COM1 Setting COM2 Setting ExtemalMemoryy PT Task Bar PT Extended Property IV Backlight 10 mins Video Mode PAL Auto backlight during alam event Screen Saver 0 mins Screen Saver Screen O Frame0 V Retum to Original Screen When Screen Saver Ends Number of Langu
488. ring lines and columns Check Includes the Click or Double click Checked Refers to the color after the event is confirmed Canceled Refers to the color after the event is released Select Area Indicates the color of the dotted line representing the selected area Display Refers to the format of the Event Information Display All the added contents such as Sequence No and Event Trigger Time are displayed in the front of the event information Format Content Sequence Number Time of Occur Checked Time Time of Cancel Extended Time Format Short Time Format Standard Time Format Precise Time Format Extended Date Format Date of Occur Time ascending Order Display Show only ongoing events Descriptions Refers to the Event No beginning from 0 The time when the event is triggered The time when the event is confirmed The time when the event is released i e returns to normal The time format is displayed as Day Hour Minute The time format is displayed as Hour Minute The time format is displayed as Hour Minute Second The time format is displayed as Hour Minute Second Millisecond The data format is displayed as Year Month Date The data format is displayed as Month Date The event is displayed in the ascending order Only the event that is trigged is displayed here And the released event will not be displayed in the Event list If this option isn t checked the events occurred before but return to
489. rint Page Current Page Landscape Change Page To Print Portrait Print Content Print Text Print All Bitmap T Print Analog Mete Print All Vector Map Print Data Log Print Background Colors Poccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccces Open Variable T able i OK Cancel E 7 6 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 7 PictBridge Printing Custom Print Options Properties Description Custom Print Options Properties Details Printer Color Black and White Only color printers support printer color change Color Black and White Prints the monochrome in reverse color Reverse Color Magnification It can be selected from 0 1 to 5 0 Zoom Out printing may cause distortion thus is not recommended Print Page Current Page Print the current screen Landscape print the content with landscape orientation Portrait print the content with portrait orientation Print Content Print Text Prints the static texts and label characters on the current screen Print Analog Meter Prints the Analog Meter components on the current screen Print Trend Graph Prints the Trend Graph on the current screen Print All Bitmap Prints all the Bitmaps on the current screen Print All The Vector Map Prints all the Vector Graphics on the current screen Print Background Colors Prints the background color of the current screen Default Magnification based on standard A4 paper PT Model
490. rint modes will be invalid when this bit is ON LB9132 Printer state Read only ON Busy OFF Idle LB9133 Pretreat for improve print effect Read Write ON Pretreat OFF Direct Printing LB9143 USB printer connection status Read only ON Connect OFF Disconnect Local Word LW Address Function description Property LW9054 Printout format Read Write BitO Text 0 not print 1 print Bit1 Analog Meter 0 not print 1 print Bit2 trend graph O not print 1 print Bit3 all bitmaps 0 not print 1 print Bit4 all vector Map O not print 1 print Bits Background Color O not print 1 print LW9055 Printout format Read Write BitO Bit7 1 50 show magnification 0 1 5 0 Bit8 Printer Color 0 Color 1 Black and White Bit9 Print Page 0 current page 1 System Reserved Bit10 Printer Directing 0 Landscape 1 Portrait Bit12 Reverse Color Enable 0 Normal 1 Reverse LW9800 amp LW9801 Current Error Codes Read Write 7 8 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 7 PictBridge Printing 7 5 List of Error Codes for Printing When the printing has some problems error will occur in the system with the error codes displayed The error codes displayed include the following codes The error codes will be displayed the PT screen and stored in the system memory lower words and LW9801 higher words Codes Value Description 0x73000000 Normal status default Ox7300FFF9 Printer not ready
491. riod Indirect Subfolder Reference default subfolder name of Data History component by themselves to History Data that of Data Log component to History Trend and that of XY Graph to XY_CHART Stores the sampling data by day and records them into the CSV file named in yyyy mmdd form Single File Stores the sampling data by the number of records and records them into the CSV file with the name of Subfolder Name Provides a kind of buffer storage mechanism When the data written into the external memory amounts to the set size of the buffers the writing is only performed once Default means no buffering i e the writing operation will immediately be performed once the data is generated Daily File Sets the upper limit for the storage amount of data history with the unit of Day for Daily File and Record for Single File When the Daily File is selected the file will be named in yyyy mmdd form and the Storage Period is the upper limits of the number of CSV files in this path if the Storage Period is exceeded the oldest file will be deleted If the Single File is selected the file will be named in Subfolder Name form the Storage Period is the upper limit of the records archived in the file if the archived records are reached to the Storage Period the storage will not be continued yyyymmdd refers to the execution date Sets the name of subfolder read from the specified m
492. rn to Normal Use Sound select Sound l Return to Normal Use Sound Select Sound Play Stop Play Stop Open Text Library Open Variable Table OK Cancel Open Text Library Open Variable Table OK Cancel Triggered PT Type Address Attribute Descriptions of Event Information Properties Select one PT to specify the Event Setting when multiple PTs were registered to the project Classifies the events and the available type is from 0 to 255 Event Display tab of the Event Display component can restrict the displayed event type Specify the register working as the trigger of the event The type of memory can be changed into Bit or Word through Data Type Bit ON When the state of the bit address is turn from OFF to ON one specified event record will be displayed OFF When the state of the bit address is turn from ON to OFF one specified event record will be displayed NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 249 P o 2 D O r O D r D o D m D Bunjas u43 9 3 Functions of NB Designer Descriptions of Event Information Properties Attribute Word When the value of the specified word address is less than the specified value one specified event record will be displayed When the value of the specified word address is greater than the specified value one specified event record will be displayed When the value of the specified word address is equal to
493. rnet communication i e to configure the Ethernet communication protocol and set some related communication parameters Device Type PT PLE Eiht EMR SRR ERE PLC Communication Type Device No F PLC Communication Time Out s Eidin 799 i 0 Protocol Time Dut rms Protocol Time Out 2 raz Port Ho 502 Mas interval of word block pack Max interval of bit black pack Max size of word block package i Max size of bit block package Comm Protocol Modbus TCP Slave gt Station number Use Defaull Setting Ad Dete Delteal 6 14 NB Series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 6 Descriptions of New Functions Added into NBLILI TW01B 6 3 Component Improvement 6 3 1 Function Key Save Screenshot to external memory When the component is touched the content of the current screen will be stored into the external memory in the form of bmp picture Using the this function allows the PT screen stored as the graphics Function Key Label Graphics Control Setting Display Setting Switch Screens Change screen Framef Key Button Enter Map Key Execute Macro macro O c Map Keyboard Disable Touch Calibration Save Screenshot to Exttemal Memory Cear Event Import Export Import Froject to PT Note 1 Save Screenshot to Extended Memory is only applicable to the PT with USB HOST 2 Function of Save S
494. ro Variable Table Delete Bookmark Next Bookmark To check the next bookmark New Bookmark S Next Bookmark Previous Bookmark New Bookmark To create a new bookmark Previous Bookmark To check the previous bookmark Delete Bookmark To delete the bookmark Macro Variable Table To open or close the Macro Variable Table Status Bar Toolbar Ready Mouse x 60 y 25 tebe Te Displays the information such as the current mouse position the width height of the destination object and editing state etc Pattern Toolbar KY SYNZ MSCs 4 Select one fill effect among various styles as above to set to the drawing components or Edit Window 3 24 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer In order to set the fill effect to the displayed window double click the window and check Use Background Color in the displayed Screen Property as shown below _ 0 Protect key mapping on common sheet screen Switch to the lowest security level when screen closed Screen Attributes Keyboard Position x0 Yo Background Color B Pettem Color Width 800 Height 480 Transparency os 1 n a 2 n a 3 n a Fame ______ Pop up screen Type I Tracking Modal Width E Frame Color 7 Clipping M Fe Then select the pattern color and the background color as well as the fill eff
495. rom 0 to 32767 Screen No is assigned by the system when the new screen is created and it can t be changed by the user Due to the deletion or addition of the screen so the screen No can be inconsecutive Position When the screen is the screen ejected by using Pop up Screen function of the function key the vertex in the upper left of the screen will be displayed in this position Width and Height Width and height can be set for the Pop up Screen and if it is the Base Screen it must be set to the default size i e the size of the full screen Screen Attribute Keyboard page determines whether to set the screen as Keyboard Screen Print page can be used to set the size of this screen regardless of the limitation of the actual resolution of the PT The NB Series does not support Print page Protect key mapping on common sheet screen The NB Series does not support this function Switching to the lowest security level when screen closed If the security level is set for one screen to realize the function i e the password will be cleared automatically when the screen is closed and the password needs to be input again when the screen is entered again the security level will become 0 only if the screen is closed NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer Background Color If the filling effects for the screen are needed select this option Pattern Color a
496. roperty Numeric Data Font Keyboard Setting Graphics Control Setting Display Setting Storage Format Unsigned integer DataLength WORD Integer 4 Decimal 0 Max Min Value Setting Max 9999 Min T Indirect Max Min Reference PT Hmo PLCNo o Pot COMI l Use Variable W U oD Z l Change Station No D Area Variable LW Address T Data Format BIN Word Length J Format Range DDDDD 0 102255 Ae dsiq Joqunn 9 3 Basic Property Numeric Data Fort Graphics Display Setting Font Type Vector Font Bitmap Font Font Attribute Font DFNB EN Size 16 7 E cae l talie T Bold NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 121 3 Functions of NB Designer 4 Press the OK button to complete the setup and place the Number Display component in a proper position How to use the Proportional Conversion in the Numeric Data tab in Number Display Component Property dialog box Quite a number of PLCs or other controllers don t support decimals or negatives and in many cases the actual values registered in PLCs or other controllers are different from the values the users want to display on the PT thus Proportional Conversion is required For example the actual frequency of an inverter is O 5000 while what is expected on the PT is 0 50 HZ and in this case Proportional Conversion can be used Another example the range of values sampled from t
497. rror occurred during the connection with the PLC and others Check if the devices function normally 9296 Macro Code Error xxxx An error occurred during executing a Macro The Macro No description enclosed by the parenthesis is the Macro No 7 Print Error Printing error It is followed by the error code Refer to 7 5 List of Error Codes for Printing Page 7 9 in NB Designer Operation Manual for details 8 Send Package Error Message transmission fails Memory Shortage Memory is not enough jqe UOHeWJOJU W JS S p L 10 11 MacroCode Timeout xxxx A timeout occurred during executing a Macro The Macro No description enclosed by the parenthesis is the Macro No BCD Transform Overflow BCD conversion overflows 12 Reserved by system 13 4 15 Reserved by system RW Area Access Overflow RW area access exceeds the limits Waiting to Print It indicates waiting for print 9297 Server Not Ready The data in server is not ready Reserved by system Transmit Data Failed The data transmission failed Data Input Failed The number input failed Device Error Failure occurs in the device Copying File The file is being copied This is the normal prompt during the project export or screenshot operation Copy File Failed The file copy failed during exporting the project or performing screen shot Invalid File The files objected of importing are invalid Password Error The password is invalid Rese
498. rt Export OK Note In order to perform the communications effectively specifying the continuous address is recommended as read address of the Event Setting For example when you specify the continuous addresses from M100 to M199 whole the addresses from M100 to M199 can be read in the communications only once NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 251 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 8 5 PLC Control PLC Control When the corresponding control is triggered PLC Control component can activate one specific operation PLC Control component is a powerful component group which can realize a large variety of functions because it is more powerful than the general component And its functions are as follows 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Switch Screens Changes the current screen Write data current base screen number into PLC Transfers the current Screen No to the PLC General purpose PLC control Realizes the data transmission between the PLC address and LW RW Backlight Off Turns off the backlight Backlight Off Write Back Turn OFF the back light The control bit will be reset Execute Macro Executes the corresponding Macro number when the condition is met Backlight On Turns on the backlight Backlight On Write Back Turn ON the back light The control bit will be reset General PLC Control Expansion 10 Change Screen Ignore screen 0 Process of creating one
499. rved by system USB Disk1 Full USB memory 1 is full already Reserved by system 10 11 12 15 Reserved by system NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 327 3 Functions of NB Designer Address Descriptions Word Bit j 9298 9299 3 328 0 RTC Device Error An error occurred in RTC clock The user name is invalid The input user name is invalid during the user login or user addition deletion operations Operation Complete It indicates the operation is successful This is the correct prompt displayed after user addition deletion or password modification Print Busy It indicates printing Reserved by system Reserved by system NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 12 Recipe Data The component of the Recipe transmits the data with consecutive memories And the data can be downloaded from the recipe memory to the PLC or uploaded from the PLC to the recipe memory The size of the data to be transferred can be set For the NB Unit the recipe memory with 128K word can be selected for recipe data storage 3 12 1 Process of Creating One Recipe Component i ee and then fill the contents in Basic 1 Drag the icon of Recipe to the Edit Window Properties tab a Recipe property Basic Property Recipe Label Graphics Control Setting Display Setting Priority Nomal Read Address Write Address PLC PLC PT
500. ry Data Word Format Length 2 Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 Use Variable l Use index NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer 2 Switch to the Display Setting tab Basic Property Display Setting Font Keyboard Setting Graphics Control Setting Display Setting Number of Total Lines 3 Number of Lines to Display 1 Word Memory Assignment Per Line 4 Each word memory can hold two ASCII characters or one Chinese character W ez V few a 4 yoog 3JON VZ2 9 Descriptions of Note Book Number of Total Lines Refers to the total lines of the text that can be input Number of Display Lines Refers to the lines in the display area Word Memory Refers to the maximum data length displayed in each line with the unit of Assignment Per Line word It is one byte for ASCII character and two bytes for one word 3 175 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 Switch to the Font tab Basic Property Display Setting Font Keyboard Setting Graphics Control Setting Display Setting Font DFNB EN Size 16 z Color E Color T_ talie T Bold Display Position Indent Right Side Indent 4 Switch to the Keyboard Setting tab Basic Property Display Setting Font Keyboard Setting Graphics Control Setting Display Setting Keyboard Setting FASCI Keybo
501. s Start Address 100 W Expotto CSV File Save as ms End Address 2100 Sirin Event Storage Type i R Addr Format DDDDDD pi dle Buffer Storage Default Event Length 16 Words Storage Period 0 Day Note data saved in recipe data field are T effectively only for Sal eek eee Note no limit when storage period is zero In order to store the Even Log Data the system automatically reserves a memory area starting from RW100 in the Recipe Data Field For example the Event Log management information and 200 of Event History information are stored as below Recipe Data Field address Data RW100 Event Log management information RW130 1st Historical Event RW150 2nd Historical Event RW170 3rd Historical Event RW4090 199th Historical Event RW4110 200th Historical Event The size of the stored memory is 200 x 20 30 4030 words The address of Recipe Data Field is read only area If writing is performed to the area it may result in unpredicted condition Although the user can specify the starting address freely pay attentions to the following points 1 The specified addresses cannot be specified overlapped with other components and others 2 Since the addresses after RW60000 are reserved by the system the memory area exceeds RW60000 cannot be specified 3 314 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 10 8 COM1 COM2 Setting Fm tiran t PT property me
502. s Data Format Word Length 1 Format Range DDDD 0 9999 3 230 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer The Bit Set support the Types of Set Reset and Alternate only Action List edit by right click Write Address PT HMD PLE No 0 Port COM1 Change Station Number T 7 System memory l Use Variable Area Variable Lw Address D Data Format Word Length 1 Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 Set values L Eit when execution fails 0 Use index The Word Set support the Types of Value Setting Add Value and Subtraction Value only Set values Fe Set values Add value Subtract value 5 If the function specified according to the Action List order ascending order is failed to execute normally set the executing operations of the Multifunction by the Exit when execution fails checking box e Checking in the check box When executing the function in the order of the Action List if the specified function cannot be executed the execution of the Multifunction is quit at the moment and the Action on the List is not executed e Removing the check in the check box Even if the specified function cannot be executed when executing the function in the order of the Action List the next Action on the List will be executed NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 231 p T c 5 O
503. s E New Library Delete All Group components Delete Library 2 Place 3 rectangles in the screen as shown below RCTO Select these 3 rectangles and right click the mouse to select Group Components Save Group Components and then click the Save Group Components button in the Edit Group Components Library dialog box to make the following dialog box pop up Edit Group Components Library Preview Group 3 380 Preview Group Enter Group component name OK Cancel Save Group Components Export Library Place Group Components Import library Delete Group Components New Library Delete Library Delete All Group components NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 Input graph 1 in the Part Group Name dialog box and then click the Ok button then these 3 rectangles with the name of graph 1 will be added into the new created group components library with the name of group as shown below Edit Group Components Library Preview Group Preview Group p O O r gt D si c O ct fe 5 D Group Components group Group Operation Save Group Components Export Library Place Group Components Import library Delete Group Components New Library Delete All Group components Delete Library 4 If there are other group components to be added into the group components library with th
504. s Cable with connectors NB Unit lt gt PLC Models Cable Length Object Unit Communications methods Specifications XW2Z 200T Units with 9 pin connectors Host Link 9 pin lt 9 pin NB RSEXT 2M 2m RS 422 485 Host Link 9 pin lt gt 5 wire Communication Units by RS 422 PLC manufactures NB Series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 A 5 Appendices A 2 NB Designer Function List items Descriptions of Function Parts Bit Button Operations such as the touch input allow the specified bit address turned ON OFF Bit Lamp Indicates the specified ON OFF state of one bit address Bit Switch Operations such as touch input allow the specified bit address turned ON OFF Specify the Read Write addresses separately to operate them as the lamp Command Button Function Component performs several processing such as transmission of constant value Word Lamp Function Component switches the display status according to the change with value of the communications address Word Switch Function Component performs increase and decrease of the value or transmission of the value selected from the list XY Graph Describing a continuum from the value of the communications addresses as each point of coordinates in the component area The shape can be modified dynamically Moving Describing the vector graphics or the bit map from the value of the Component communications addresses as point of coordinates The shap
505. s Specifies the addresses of the devices performing the PLC control operations Data Format Includes BIN or BCD Function Mode Specifies the operation types of the setting There are 12 types available and their functions will be described later in details Macro Sets the No of Macro program to be executed when the Function is Execute Macro 4 Press the OK button to exit from the PLC Control dialog box 5 Repress the OK button to exit from the list of PLC Control NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 253 3 Functions of NB Designer Function Mode 1 Switch Screens This operation needs 2 consecutive word addresses When the Read Address is switched to a valid screen No the current screen will be closed and the specified screen will appear Specify the number in the destination screen in the Read Address The number after switching will be written in Read Address 1 Read Address Read Address 1 For screen switching control No of the destination screen For example set the address to LWO Data Format to BCD and the current screen to Frame 0 If LWO is changed to 10 the current screen will be switched to Frame 10 and 10 will be returned to LW71 Note Each time the Change Screen Function Key is pressed the current screens is closed and the destination screen is displayed The function of Switch Screens of the PLC control is similar to the Chan
506. s 200 System Memory Data Word 5 Data Word Format BIN Length Format BIN 1 Format Range DDDDD 1 65535 Use Variable Use Variable Use index Use index Then place the component in the screen Now the recipe data transmission component is created but it can only specify to transfer the 5 words beginning from address of 4X200 to the recipe memory instead of the specific position of the recipe memory Set the LW9000 to 300 and press Upload button then the 5 words beginning from 4X200 will be transferred to the 5 word addresses after the start address of RW300 If you want to transfer the 5 words beginning from the address of 4X200 to RW100 again then you just need to set LW9000 to 100 and then press Upload button to complete the data transmission Place 3 Text Input components to modify display the data 1 4X200 Area Variable of 4X Address of 200 and Word Length of 5 2 RWIO Area Variable of RWI Address of 0 and Word Length of 5 3 RW300 Area Variable of RW Address of 300 and Word Length of 5 Then create one Number Input component to modify the data of LW9000 Specify LW for Area Variable and 9000 for Address 3 332 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer After Save Compile operations perform the offline test for the project Firstly change LW9000 to 300 because LVW9000 represents the offset of the index address RWIO
507. s NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer Read Address Assignment The word address specifying the position on the path which was set previously is set automatically to Read Address 1 Read Address States of Vector Graphics or bitmap Read Address 1 Position No in the preset path Address Refers to the first address of the word address corresponding to the Animation component Word Length Displays the data length of the read address which is fixed to 2 4 Switch to the Animation tab fa gt g o l y Basic Property Animation Label Graphics Display Setting 9 er 7 Moving Node List uoewiUy 6 9 State No Selects the total states displayed by the Animation component It determines the number of states of the Vector Graphics or bitmap displayed in the preset path Add Node Adds one moving node in the end of the preset path Insert Node Inserts one moving node after the moving node pointed by the mouse Delete Node Deletes one moving node Move Up Moves the moving node pointed by the mouse into the place before the previous node Move Down Moves the moving node pointed by the mouse into the place after the next node Graphics Size Width Height This is the size of Animation Components displayed on the path On all moving nodes vector graphics or bitmap are displayed in the state which was resized with the parameter specified by this item Moving
508. s for each level of security level 1 to 15 PT property Print Setting COM1 Setting COM2 Setting Extemal Memory PT Task Bar PT Extended Property System Infomation Setting Security Level Setting User Permission Setting Event History Setting ow _ Number of Security Levels E _ oO lt 5 A OPassword NULL S 7 3 1 Password 1 g 9 D 2 Password 2 10 z 11 3Password 3 12 3 13 o 4 Password 4 14 15 5Passwod 5 ie Id 6 Password 6 7 Password 7 8 Password 8 9 Password 9 s I 10 Password 10 S cn 11 Password 11 09 12 Password 12 2 an 13Password 13 14 Password 14 D lt 15 Password 15 z ep a z 2 Use a double word Number Input component with address of LW9040 as Frame 0 for inputting the password LW9042 is used to display the security level and LW9043 is used to switch the security level forcefully The 15 Function Keys are used to switch Frame 8 to Frame 22 respectively NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 299 3 Functions of NB Designer Set the screen security levels and make Frame 10 correspond to Security Level 1 Frame 11 correspond to Security Level 2 and Frame 24 correspond to Security Level 15 Title Frame11 No 11 Protect key mapping on common sheet screen Switch to the lowest security level when screen closed Screen Attribute Keyboard Securty Level 1 7 Position Background Color x0 70 Background
509. s relative to the original position X axis and Y axis represent abscissa and ordinate respectively Number of Read 2 words 2 words 3 words Address Read Address States of Vector Graphics States of Vector Graphics States of Vector Graphics or bitmap or bitmap or bitmap X axis displacement Y axis displacement X axis displacement The Type includes the items as follows Read Address 1 Read Address 2 Basic Property Moving Component Label Graphics Display Setting X ris Ony O OOOO O Scaling Maximum of 3Y Scaling Reverse Scaling a4 Y Reverse Scaling SE X Scaling Y Scaling d Scaling Y Reverse Scaling A Reverse Scaling Y Scaling Reverse Scaling Y Reverse Scaling NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer The descriptions of the Type are as follows X Axis Only When this option is selected the Moving Component can only move horizontally along X axis and the input maximum minimum value is invalid and the Read Address and the Read Address 1 are used to store the component state and position respectively in this case Y Axis Only When this option is selected the Moving Component can only move vertically along Y axis and the input maximum minimum value is invalid and the Read Address and the Read Address 1 are used to store the component state and position respectively in this case X amp Y Axis When this option is selected t
510. sable to write the return value of PLC Control Switch Screens Operation at disconnection PLC Operation at disconnection touch control Keyboard display bits being displayed in the right of the screen Keyboard display bit Keyboard is displayed from the component placed the upper left of the screen Keyboard display bit Keyboard is displayed from the component placed the lower left of the screen Keyboard Display bits Keyboard is displayed in the left of the screen Keyboard display bit Keyboard is displayed from the component located in the upper right of the screen Keyboard display bit Keyboard is displayed from the component located in the lower right of the screen 3 Functions of NB Designer Comments Set it to ON to perform this function and write the communication parameters of LW10000 area back to EE for saving Only writing the communication parameters back to EE can ensure the settings are valid at the next startup read write Restart PT Set it to ON to perform this function read write Promote security level This bit will be turned ON when we enter the higher security level from the lower security level read Set it to ON to perform this function and the system will save the default global settings in the downloaded data file to LW10000 system parameter area and will automatically clear this bit to zero after successful download read write Setting it to ON can disenable the
511. same name with that in the existing Text Library of the system the selection dialog box will pop up In this case you can select Yes or No according to the circumstances Q The same item exists in text library Do you replace it Notes for Import amp Export 1 The text strings such as Text Lib Name and Status included in the csv file can t be changed otherwise import will be impossible Meanwhile the value of Status must be consistent with the actual status lines as shown below i e when Status is 2 the two statuses contained in the text can only be 0 and 1 P o 2 D O r O D r D o D m D J13 sl Text Lib 2 Name 3 status Aseiqr X9L 8 Text Lib B D Bee otatus a o4 Language Language Languages Languages 0 OFF fis R 1 ON F 2 df tv NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 239 3 Functions of NB Designer Bs 3 Status 1 4 Language Language Lanquages Language 5 0 OFF 6 o If line break is needed in spreadsheet software file it just needs to input _Blank_ or _enter_ 3 Even after editing the CSV file by spreadsheet software select Unicode Text txt for Type of Document to save the file and then quit the used application and finally rename the filename extension to csv The other file format canno
512. ser Manager b Delete User Delete User screen contains User Name Password Password Confirm Delete User Operation etc a a j ea f Ea C pa Delete Usel The settings of User Name Password and Password Confirm are similar to that of Add User Delete User Operation Confirmation Place one Bit Button component and specify the address to LW9168 and the switch format to Set Note Delete user permission operation is only valid for the users added to the PT The users set in the NB Designer can t be deleted 3 312 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer Perform the offline test and the effect is as shown below Click Delete User to make Delete User dialog box pop up r AS Vlanager User Home Administrator 7 oy lt Gi r D 3 9 D 3 D er T l Delete User Menu Task Bar Input the User Name to be deleted the Password and Password Confirm for this user then click Delete to complete the operation of deleting users User Manager BuINaS uossIWwJ d I SN 9 OL fin liser Home R Administrator 1 Eng i neer add User 2 treat Delete User NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 313 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 10 7 Event History Setting Event History information is stored in the Recipe Data Field When the c
513. settings they will be divided into 2 data packages to be read otherwise they will be combined into 1 package Doing this allows reducing the number of the communications package and improving the communications efficiency NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 315 3 Functions of NB Designer For example As shown below for the reading of data stored in D20 to D29 when the PLC data package is set to 0 the system will use 3 read commands to read these data respectively While when Max interval of word block pack is set to 1 it just needs 1 command to read these data Generally speaking the time spent for reading extra 2 addresses D23 and D25 is far less than the time spent for reading 2 data package thus reducing the time needed for the communication significantly 3 316 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 11 Address of System Memory The system reserves some addresses of Local Word LW Local Bit LB Nonvolatile Local Word LW for the special purposes and the user must use these memory addresses according to the related descriptions e Local Bit LB The reserved range is from LB9000 to LB9999 e Local Word LW The reserved range is from LW9000 to LW9999 e Nonvolatile Local Word The reserved range is from LW10000 to LW10255 Descriptions of internal BIT memory w a gt a 2 on o o 9 lt m
514. shape is reflected as below NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 25 g N D 5 0 NU NW M IA c 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 2 4 Screen Menu The corresponding contents in the Screen menu shown as below have been described in 3 2 3 View Menu here only the function of Copy Delete Screen is described in details Screen Ede Add Screen Ee Delete Screen Screen Property Copy Delete Screen rs Click Screen gt Copy Delete Screen and the following dialog box will be displayed Copy Delete Screen m Operation Type f Copy screen amount 1 gt Delete Screen m Source Screen Copy Single Screen f Copy Multi Screens From g Frametl To O FrameQ m Destination Screen Cancel Operation Type 1 Copy Screen It can be one or more and its range is between 1 and 999 e Copy Single Screen When the number is 1 both the starting source screen ID and the starting destination screen ID can be set which means the screen and Properties of the source screen will be copied into the destination screen If the destination screen doesn t exist the screen with a specified number will be created automatically after the copy operation And if the destination screen exists already Copy error the destination screen ID already exists will prompt When the number is greater than 1 both the
515. short but 2 WriteLocalf Liw 202 2 void buf 0 0 Readlocall Liw 200 2 void ibuf 0 WriteLocall Liw 202 2 void ibuf 0 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer 2 After the Macro creation you can rename the Macro BO test Se PT HMI0 whe dq 4 Edit Logo Screen BO Graphics T Import Recipe Right click the Macro name and you can see the options of Rename Macro and Delete and input the new name after the dialog box pops up after clicking Rename Macro W 5 A E uoun y oJen 6 3 D O Yes 3 0 O 2 Ge test gt ee PT D cl HMO whe 7 directaddresslocaladdr c fe macro_l c L Graphics 3 It supports the direct access to the local address of the PT without defining the variables 20 short buf 2 0 21 ReadLocal Lw 200 2 void buf 0 22 i WriteLocal LW 202 2 void buf 0 235 ia J 24 int MacroEntry ki Irr Macro Variable Table directaccesslocaladdr c PLC No As shown above even if no variables are defined in the Macro the direct access to the local address of the PT i e reading or writing the local address int ReadLocal const char type int addr int nRegs void buf int flag int WriteLocal const char type int addr int nRegs void buf int flag NB series Programmable Terminals NB Desig
516. smission At the same time with the transmission the specified address will be turned OFF ON gt OFF Reset When the state of the specified address is switched from ON to OFF the Data Transmission component will be triggered to perform the transmission At the same time with the transmission the specified address will be turned ON NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 221 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 Make settings in the Label Graphics and Control Setting tabs by using the similar method for the components mentioned above 4 Press the OK button to complete the setup and adjust the position and size of the Data Transmission component 3 7 9 Freeplotting M Freeplotting The Freeplotting component is based on the data in the memory and you can use it to draw the corresponding graphics by the pixel point in the PT Freeplotting Component Property 1 When selecting Solid Color for the Type drawing graphics using the bit memory Set the component size to 50x50 the memory address to LBO the pattern color to red and the values of 2500 memories i e LBO to LB2499 to be read by PT Then when the memory value is 1 the pixel point of the component corresponding to the communication address which stored the values will be applied by red color Freeplotting Graphics Display Setting Type Solid Color X Refresh Cycle 10 X100ms Pattem Color Data Address Trigger
517. software running in Windows XP Vista 7 developed by Microsoft Corporation 2 1 Before Installation 0000 ce eee es 2 2 Installation Uninstallation 008 2 2 1 Installation Procedure 00005 2 2 2 Uninstallation Procedure 04 2 3 Startup amp Quit aasan anaana a anaana 2 3 1 Starting Method 0 0 00 cee eee 2 3 2 Quitting Method 005 2 4 Installation of USB Driver for NB NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 2 1 2 Installation and Startup of NB Designer 2 1 Before Installation The system environment to run the NB Designer is as follows System Configuration Items Minimum Configurations Operating System OS Microsoft Windows XP SP3 or higher Microsoft Windows Vista 32 bit or 64 bit edition Microsoft Windows 7 32 bit or 64 bit edition CPU Intel Pentium II or higher Memory 512 MB or more Hard Disk 2 5 GB or more with the disk space more than 800 MB at least Display Supports the display with resolution of 800x600 and 16 bit high color 1024x768 and 32 bit true color are recommended RS 232C COM Port One port or more is kept for the serial communication used by the touch panel USB Port USB 1 1 or higher CD ROM Drive 4x or higher 2 2 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 2 Installation and Startup of NB Designer 2 2 Installation Uninstallation
518. splay screen read NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 323 w n gt a 2 on o o O lt O r D 3 D O lt MI PION 12907 Z LL 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 324 Adresses Comments 9152 9167 Display Pinyin character input currently Read when using Pinyin 9170 Page up down of Note Book component The value of this LW means the start line of input area 9180 9187 Text display of maximum value of Read Number Input 9190 9197 Text display of minimum value of Number Read Input 9200 9205 Time value of browsing point of Data Log These six words are used to display second minute hour day month and year respectively in BIN code read 9210 Display values of each channel during The current value of each channel is displayed one by referencing one according to the bit width of the browsed Data Log read 9260 9261 Start address for RW clearing operation Sets the start address for RW clearing operation triggered by LB9130 read write 9262 9263 Word length of RW clearing operation Sets the word length for RW clearing operation triggered by LB9130 read write 9264 9279 Mask code of PLC Station No COM 2 Each bit corresponds to one Station No of COM 2 i e 9264 0 corresponds to Station No 0 and 9279 F corresponds to Station No 255 When the bit is turned ON the communication corresponding to
519. splay can restrict the types of the displayed events respectively For example if the display type of Event Component is specified from 0 to 3 in the Event Setting tab of Event Properties only the contents of event ranging from Type 0 to Type 3 will be displayed This option is used to select the type of the alarm and event displayed currently NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 245 3 Functions of NB Designer Example To create an event log with the type of each event being different 1 Click the Event Setting of the Project Database and open the Event Setting dialog box Click the Add and add a new event setting as below Triggered PT HMIO 7 Type Address Function PT Execute Macro macro Oc PLC No 0 Pop up Screen O Framedl f Confirm Dialog Trigger Dialog White Value T Memon Type Bit Area arable LE ee q PT HMId FOE No Format A ange DODD 0 9999 Atea Variable LE Address 0 Use Variable Format Rangel ODOD 0 9999 Data Format BIN Use Variable Use Buzzer Buzzing Time 1 Attribute Detection Pattern On Off Condition Use Test Library Value Range Min alue Language Languagel Max Value l Use Vector Font Print f On Trigger Sound Return to Normal T Use Sound Select Sound 2 Create the event triggered by the LB1 and LB2 in the same procedure as the LBO s The Type of the LB1 is specified t
520. ss is as follows Select one component as the reference then perform Width Height or Size modifications If you use the Shift key to select then the component firstly selected should be as the reference while the component at the leftmost should be used as the reference during the selection made by dragging the mouse The selected mark for the reference is indicated by the solid rectangle while the selected mark for the other components is indicated by the hollow rectangle p O O r gt D a c 3 O ct fe 5 D 2 Proportionally zoom multiple components simultaneously When the multiple components in the editing screen are selected together selected area will appear and the user resize the multiple components simultaneously dragging by mouse each point on the corners ETT EE T Resize the multiple components simultaneously dragging by mouse each point on the corners Above the selected area is pink NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 355 3 Functions of NB Designer Lock Component NB Designer provides one function of Lock Position as shown below Right click the component and select the Lock Position and the effect is as shown below Cut ctrlex Copy Ctrl C Delete Paste Ctrlev Repeat Select All Ctr A Find Replace Ctrl F Refresh Property Lock Position Group Components Rotate Line Width When the user se
521. ss of the word address controlling the displayed information such as the state graphics label and so on of the Moving Component in PLC Address Refers to the first address of the word address corresponding to the Moving Component Word Length Displays the data length of the read address which is fixed to 3 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 107 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 108 2 Switch to the Moving Component tab and set the Type State Number the Minimum of X Maximum of X Minimum of Y and Maximum of Y COMIpOrer property Basic Property Moving Component Label Graphics Display Setting Type X Axis Only State No 1 MA Indirect Max Min Reference PT HMO NC o Maximum of X 1 l Pot COM1 re 0 Minimum of X Change Station No 0 X Toan ai a Area Variable LW Proportional Min of X 0 Add 1 Word Maximum of Y 1 Data BIN Length 4 D M Use Variable dY Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 Proportional Max of Y 1 Proportional Min of Y Type and Function Tables NB Designer can assign up to 256 kinds of different states to the components When State Number is set to 1 in the tab Moving Component make sure that the stored value specified to the Read Address is 0 Otherwise the components will not be displayed States 1 to 256 correspond to the internal values of 0 to 255 The position control is as shown below and its position i
522. ssceseeeeeeeeeeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeaneseeneseeeessaanes 1 8 Sec 2 Installation and Startup of NB Designevt c ce 2 1 2 1 Before Installation ccccccececececececececcecececececencecacececeaeeeaeceaeaceneneeeaeaeaeeeeaeaeeeeeacaauaeaeeeneananeaeaes 2 2 2 2 Installation Uninstallation cccccececeececscceccceceececenceceaeaeeneneaceneaueaeneaneueaneaeneaneneaeeaeneanenennens 2 3 2 2 1 Installation Procedure iiiccscic 52s cscaswan ncatcaybcnewdccsaneeadvesessaxtsadeysanitenctaneed aevewanskaudbensaxeeasGansecadsbencsenessoen 2 3 2 2 2 Uninstallation PGC DUS ose siwacsccesscandccevenacstansncd lt canuy dienntiecdutenseeuwetgendeeicovent tna bvenasennlbedasdsmatecoaeees 2 3 2 3 Startup amp ll sapeiseanccccetatsmannecsties seeaetiaussepeceeateneccaanscaaadasionescsaucsauteaseacouesvacteceasaaccnaseaccaanecuateseeins 2 4 2 3 1 arning WIS OG eaea E E AE 2 4 2 3 2 N NE dg ete eea E E E E E eee 2 4 2 4 Installation of USB Driver for NB ccccccccecececececececcececccecececeecceeescneeeuaeneeeneenaneaeeaeeeananeneass 2 5 Sec 3 Functions of NB DeSIQNeL ccccccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneceeeees 3 1 3 1 User SCl GG aeceitierednmn munien a Ea aa aaiae 3 4 sO T E E E EA A A AE E A A E E S 3 7 3 2 1 ERE a E A EE E N EA EEE E A 3 7 3 2 2 LeS DIU MEE E re cece EE AE ec A A A EEE E oh ates ie 3 10 3 2 3 View Menur sarean e e a E E 3 15 3 2 4 Screen MenU ecco cece cccccaace sex dececee ad ucuceccnticecan cene w
523. stalling the driver software for this device OMRON HMI USB You can check whether the USB driver is installed successfully by selecting Computer Manage Hardware Device Manager Universal Serial Bus controllers location as shown below b gi Computer 4 System Tools gt Disk drives gt Task Scheduler gt Mi Display adapters gt f Event Viewer gt lt 3 DVD CD ROM drives More Actions gt Shared Folders gt el Floppy disk drives gt Local Users and Groups D Floppy drive controllers gt amp Performance D 65 Human Interface Devices g Device Manager gt qq IDE ATA ATAPI controllers 4 amp Storage gt lt gt Keyboards f Disk Management D P Mice and other pointing devices gt E Services and Applications gt Monitors D amp P Network adapters gt Ports COM amp LPT gt 2 Processors gt A Sound video and game controllers D gt Storage controllers 5 4 fe Intel R ICH8 Family USB Universal Host Controller Intel R ICH8 Family USB Universal Host Controller Intel R ICH8 Family USB Universal Host Controller Intel R ICH8 Family USB Universal Host Controller Intel R ICH8 Family USB Universal Host Controller 7 Intel R ICH8 Family USB2 Enhanced Host Controller 2836 USB Root Hub USB Root Hub USB Root Hub USB Root Hub USB Root Hub 2 8 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manua
524. state 0 Value O represents State 0 Value 1 blinking at State 1 Value O represents State 0 Value 1 is switched to blink at State 0 or 1 Value 0 represents State o Value 0 blinks at State 0 Value 1 e State 0 Value 0 blinking at State 1 Value 1 represents Value 0 is switched to blink at State 0 or 1 Voie 1 represents NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 83 3 Functions of NB Designer Function Blinking rate is set in Cycle box with the unit of 100 ms If the rate is set to 500 ms both ON time and OFF time of the Bit Lamp are 500 ms Address State of Bit to Be Read Function ON value 1 OFF value 0 Bink 0B Noteink OB masm OSC sinc fo netic 1 1 0 1 Oloj olol Oo OO COO N OD A BI OI NJ gt _ Not Blink Not Blink Switching between 0 and 1 N 3 Switch to the Label tab and add the texts corresponding to the On and Off states Basic Property Bit Lamp Label Graphics Display Setting V Transport Font M Use Text Library Text Library a Language Languagel l Graphic Font Font Label List Copy Text to All State Font type Vector Font Bitmap Font Font Attribute Font DFNB EN Sze 16 Postion Color Color Langu Right E guage Psal Italic Bold Copy Font Attribute to State Language All State Off will be displayed when the lamp state is 0 whi
525. switch the other screen as the current Common Sheet but only one screen can be used as the current Common Sheet Sheet Screen 3 Sheet Screens max can be set for the screen in Screen Property dialog box Sheet Screen is generally used to put some common components such as background graphics charts and titles and so on for the multiple components Each screen can be set as Sheet Screen G5 Title No 0 Protect key mapping on common sheet screen Switch to the lowest security level when screen closed Screen Attributes Keyboard Securty Level 0 z Position T Background Color x0 0 Background Color is Pattem Color Width 800 Height 480 Transparency 0 z 1 n a X 2 n a x 3 n a X Frame Pop up screen Type V Tracking Modal 0 i Width F Frame Color Z Clipping Fred NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 45 rm FN wn a D 5 O fe O D o r sadA usesl0S p 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 46 As shown above Sheet Screen can be selected directly from the Sheet Screen option Sheet Screen is different from the general screen The components in Sheet Screen will be inserted into the general screen during the running and in fact Sheet Screen isn t displayed at all but the display and control of its components are similar to that of the components in the general screen The Relationship of Screen One scree
526. t Process of adding one Text Display component 1 Press the Text Display component icon drag it to the window then the Basic Properties dialog box of the Text Display component will pop up Text Display property O Basic Property Font Graphics Display Setting w U st r n Priority Normal Swap high byte and low byte Unicode oO T Extended ASCII yi Read Address Write Address T PLC PLC T PT HMiO_ 2 o 0 7 PT E a Oe z Port COM1 Port COM1 A Change n z Change z D n Station No z z Station No 0 lt Area Variable LW bi Area Var able LW X Address 0 System Memory Address 0 System Memory Data Word Data IN Word z ae BIN 1 a BIN h 1 Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 Use Variable Use Variable Use index Use index Swap high byte and low byte Refers to the interchange of the high byte and the low byte for the same byte as shown below Not use Swap high byte and low byte Use Swap high byte and low byte Unicode If you check in the check box for this function the specified data is dealt as Unicode Extended ASCII Checking this option can display the extended ASCII characters between 0x80 and Oxff in the ASCII codes When it is checked Chinese can t be displayed in the Text Input component Text Display component and Note Book component Only one of Unicode or ASCII can be selected Read Address Refers to word address memory of PLC to be displayed It co
527. t Order specified to number input text input or Note book numbers and text strings can be entered continuously Touching Enter during data entry allows to move the cursor among input components in the order of the numbers of Input Order which were specified by Use Input Order Ascending order 1 gt 2 gt gt last No gt 1 gt In this settings the keyboard will not be closed automatically and will be kept to be displayed on the screen until touching to X closing component displayed on the keyboard Group is used to classify the multi group of components needing consecutive inputs The components with the same group number belong to the same group and the cursor will be cyclic in the same group of components When the Enter is pressed the keyboard will not be closed automatically but will always be displayed in the screen until the close button X in the keyboard is touched Setting of Use Input Order Go to Keyboard Setting Property tabs for the Number Input component Text Input component and Note Book component respectively and check the Use Input Order Basic Property Numeric Data Font Keyboard Setting Graphics Control Setting Display Setting Keyboard Setting C Default Keyboard Specify Keyboard Keyboard Pop up Position 3 118 3 NUM Keyboard e o Basic Property Numeric Data Font Keyboard Setting Graphics Control Setting Display Settin
528. t be recognized as available file to import 4 The Import amp Export are only applicable to the whole Text Library rather than the single text item contained in the Text Library 9 Change of State Number of Text Library The change method of states number of Text Library is to select one state and right click the mouse as shown below T E t Lik Tite Languaget Language3 Larguaget Language Language Insert State Delete State Edit State 4 Tt h Add Delete Delete Al Language Import ol Export 3 8 2 Variable Table Variable Table Variable Table is a useful address logon library which prevents the inconvenience resulting from repeated input of address thus saving a lot of time Check in the Use Variable check box in setting items for each component to use the address which was registered to the Variable Table with the settings for each component 3 240 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer 1 Clicking aa icon or entering Variable Table in the Project Database allows Variable Table to pop up Name PTNo PLCNo Stat Area Variable P o 2 D O r O D r D o D m D Add Delete ail Delete All Modify Import Expot OK a e N 2 a l S Click Add to make the following small
529. t hes keyboard screen on new PT SHEX Keyboard Use default file list screen on new PT E File List Window Use default password screen an new PT G Pazzword window et i i Oa ai O Use default confirmation screen on new PT 7 Contirm Action Wit 4 Use default login screen on new PT 9 Login Window Note keyboard screen is normally used with common sheet screen when you select default keyboard screen default common sheet screen is also chosen Cancel Here the name and descriptions of the Current PT cannot be altered while the pull down box of the New PT lists all the supported PT type and the descriptions displayed at the lower part will be updated automatically according to the type selected by the user After being confirmed the PT will be replaced and all the size of graphics in the PT will Zoom automatically according to the resolution of the screen After the PT is replaced the original user edit screen will be adjusted by related scales according to the difference of the resolution of various types All the components with screen display will adjust automatically For example all the components such as the bitmaps Vector Graphics button and lamp etc with location and size adjustments can all change their sizes automatically However note that there are a few exceptions as the font size of text strings and label can t be changed the components using text strings and label will be restricted to mainly displa
530. t to All State Font type Vector Font Bitmap Font Font Attribute Font DENB EN E Size 16 7 Position Left coor language ESA Italic l Bold Copy Font Attribute to State Language All NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer 4 Perform the test and select 33333 in the list component and 3 will be displayed in the State No 3333 Poe ay an hy TT ke d o oa V eS a Dropdown List When this component is touched one list will pop up under this component All the options are available in this list and it will automatically disappear when one option is selected For example 1 Create one Word Switch with read address and write address both of LWO and one Number Display component with the address of LWO 2 Set the Control Mode and State No to Dropdown List and 6 respectively 3 Set the label contents to 00000 to 55555 4 When performing the offline test and selecting the list the status will be displayed with a list shown in the following figure on the right yIMS PIOM 9 9 0000 11111 22222 5 Touch this component and the list option will pop up as the above right graphics shown 6 After one option is selected the list will disappear automatically 3 97 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer
531. t variables option to make Save As dialog box and input the file name t with the extension as MPL then save it into the optional folder File name EMPL Save as type MPL Filet mpl uoun oJen 6 Clicking the Delete Variable option and the Import Variables option allows the importing variables Such operation can be made among the different projects Select the code which should be copied if it is a program and right click the Copy followed by pasting the code to the intended location 3 Na Daram raia Storage For th Add Variable Modify Variable Export variables Import variables SUONdIDS9G JEUIO P 6 24 int MacroEntry 23 1 om 122 5h hae Pray Weed gf ae are P TiTi Fo r 7 ris short a fj LS e iee A oah E Arar SERSA ul a ear l 5 AS Ta e mi ETE Redo Copy Paste Delete Select All NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 273 3 Functions of NB Designer It supports the array variables in bit format a4 int MacroEntry 25 f 26 inti 0 27 short buf 2 0 28 ReadLocal Lw 200 2 void buf 0 29 WriteLocal LW 202 2 void buf 0 30 0 1 lt 16 1 31 Param i 1 32 return D a Wt E Macro Variable Table directaccesslocaladdr c H Storage For PLC No Area Address Word RAW Array Array length bit LB
532. ta operated during the transmission is RW LW 100 0 100 5 O PT Executing PLC Control HMIO io PT HMIO PLCNo 0 X F Area Variable Lw Address 0 j DataFomat BIN Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 WordLength 4 Use Variable Function Mode Etter aaaea of Mere gtr Here is the procedure which uses the PLC control to transmit the data includes 30 words starting from D100 to the data block of the same size starting from RW200 in the Recipe Data memory of the PLC 1 Firstly specify the PLC control component set with General purpose PLC Control for the control select and D10 for Read Address 2 Secondly specify the size of the data and the offset address of the controlling data D11 is specified to 30 it means the number of transmitted words is 30 words D12 is specified to 86 the starting address is DM100 14 86 in the PLC and D13 is specified to 200 the destination address is RW200 0 200 respectively 3 Finally specifying the execute type code according to the direction of the data transmission allows the data transmission If D10 is specified to 1 the number of the specified data will be transmitted from the starting address of the PLC to the Recipe Data memory of the PT If D13 is specified to 3 the direction to transmit the data will be reversed The other transmission to two destinations are performed in the same procedure as above T ri on U om O O O 5 o 4 Backlight off
533. tain lithium primary batteries When exporting products containing this kind of batteries to or delivering them through California USA label all the product packages as well as the appropriate delivery packages Do not use benzene paint thinner or other volatile solvents and do not use chemically treated cloths Do not dispose the Units together with general waste at waste yards When disposing them follow the related local ordinances or rules Cannot replace the backlight lamp inside the NB Unit Deterioration over time can cause the touch points to move Calibrate the touch panel periodically Water and oil resistance will be lost if the front sheet is torn or is peeling off Do not use the Unit if the front sheet is torn or is peeling off The rubber packing will deteriorate shrink or harden depending on the operating environment Inspect the rubber packing periodically The communication cables of the COM1 and COM2 connectors are not interchangeable Confirm the pins of the ports before carrying out communications NB3Q TW00B and NB3Q TW01B only has COM1 Periodically check the installation conditions in applications where the PT is subject to contact with oil or water Do not perform the following operations during the communication of the USB memory e Turning off the power supply of the NB Unit e Pressing the Reset button on the NB Unit e Removing the USB memory Do not use the USB memory in the environment subject to s
534. tarting destination screen ID can be set and the end destination screen ID will increase automatically according to the copied number and the number of the source screen which means the screens and properties of the screens between the starting source screen and the end source screen will be copied in order and as specified number into the screens between the starting destination screen and the end destination screen respectively Nus US8INS p Z F Note The destination screen ID must be a new screen ID because the existing screen ID doesn t support the screen copy 2 Delete Screen Supports single screen deletion or multiple screen deletion e Delete Single Screen The starting screen ID can be set which means to delete the screen with this ID e Delete Multi Screens Both the starting screen ID and the end screen ID can be set which means to delete the screens with the ID between the starting ID and the end ID NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 27 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 28 From Frame To O Frame Operation Type c Copy screen amount 1 a Delete Screen Delete Screen Delete Single Screen From 0 Frametl To O Frame Cancel The following example is only for the multiple screen copying We want to copy Frame 6 Frame 7 and Frame 8 into Frame 11 Frame 12 and Frame 13 Operation Type f Copy screen amount 1 B Delete Screen Source
535. tate Setting Mode Periodic Toggle v Memory Type Bi l Ph os 1 Destination Address PT pmo PLCNo Port COM1 Use Variable Change Station Number Area Variable Address Data Format BIN Format Range DDDD 0 9999 PT Hmo PLCNo g Port COM1 Use Variable Change Station Number Area Vanable p lt Address 0 Data Format BIN Word Length 4 H Format Range DDDD 0 9999 Cancel PLC clock EEn Eca E EUI M E E E E Menu Task Bar NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 Little deviation 3 291 Y U lt Gi r D 3 9 D 3 D er D T s doJId P8PUS XFZ ld Ol 3 Functions of NB Designer After creating a new Event Setting place 1 Event component then perform the indirect online test and the effect is as shown below PLC time e M gt Menu Task Bar T PA Event property Basic Property Event Setting Display Setting Display Range 0 lo 255 Row Spacing 5 Display Column Spacing 9 Sequence number Check Click Time of Oecur Checked Time Time of Cancel C Etended Time Format D H M C Short Time Format H M Standard Time Format H M S J Precise Time Format H M S MS Extended Date Format M D Date of Occur M D O Time ascending Order Display O Show only ongoing events Checked Checked Time refers to the PT time therefore we must pay attention to it when using t
536. te as shown below Basic Property Command Button Label Graphics Control Setting Display Setting Basic Property Command Button Label Graphics Control Setting Display Setting Type Add value Priority Normal Addend 1 Max Value 9 Read Address gt Write Address PEC ae lE ey PT HMIO No 0 PT HMIO No 0 Port COM1 Port COM1 T Indirect Reference Change Change PLC Station No 0 E Station No 0 PT HMIO No 0 a Area Variable LW i Area Variable LW X Port COM1 I Change Station No 0 z Address 0 I System Memory Address 0 I System Memory Area Variable LW X Data v Word x Data X Word a BIN Faun BIN l 1 Add 0 Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 Data Fi BIN x I Use Variable Use Variable Word Length 2 is I Use index Use index Use Variable Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 3 338 Basic Property Command Button Label Graphics Control Setting Display Setting Type Subtract value m Subtrahend 1 Min Value 0 M Indirect Reference PLC PT HMIO No 0 Port COM1 I Change Station No 0 z Area Variable LW X Address 0 Data Fomat BIN Word Length 2 T Use Variable Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer 7 Place another keyboard in the screen and add some texts for decoration then the project is thoroughly co
537. te Book in the page turning way Basic Property Display Setting Font Keyboard Setting Graphics Control Setting Display Setting Number of Total Lines 6 Number of Lines to Display 3 Word Memory Assignment Per Line Each word memory can hold two ASCII characters or one Chinese character NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 177 W V o or 490g 3JON Z2 9 3 Functions of NB Designer The offline test effect of the Note Book is as shown below Example of using Text Input component to realize PinYin Input The edited effect is as shown below PinYin Input Window Please input your name The specific operation is as follows 1 Make PinYin Input Window as the screen title and place one Text component as shown below 2 Place another function key with the Property Switch Screen of pop up screen title bar which overlaps above the Text component i e PinYin Input Window Message Display Setting Function Key Label Graphics Control Setting Display Setting Switch Screens 0 Frame0 X Message E Key Button a Map Key 5 orcas E m PinYin Input Window r Graphic Font Font Execute Macro M e Transport Font Map Keyboard i v C Teni T C Touch Calibration oea mf Save Screenshot to Extemal Memory Clear Event rimi 6 Import Export Import Project to PT Currently Displayed Language Note
538. tems added into NBLJILJI TWO1B 6 1 New Added Functions 0 00 c eee 6 2 6 1 1 Using Graphics From External Memory 00 cee eee eens 6 2 6 1 2 System Reserved memory 00 cc cece eee ee eens 6 3 6 1 3 ROODE A 2 oas eee a oor oe ees eee ee eee a oe ee ee eee eda oes 6 3 6 1 4 Download through Ethernet 0 0 0 cc cee eee eee 6 4 6 1 5 Download O USBI ss425 62a Reesor Ges RNAI rE RPA REE 6 5 6 1 6 NBManager 2260 25 6255 56 eehds den be oon teed eeeGedeneeeehetceese 6 6 6 1 7 Data Eney plo tant ee oh he eee eae ata ne oe eet he Pee ee 6 7 6 1 8 New Added Addresses for System memories 000 0c eee eee 6 9 6 1 9 Change of System Language 2 cece eee 6 10 6 1 10 Usage of Forced Address Bit 0 000 0 6 10 6 2 System Parameters 2 0 ccc es 6 11 6 2 1 PY sesaegees sere c bewemn sae ees oo ae oe obsess tee e be E 6 11 6 2 2 PT Extended Properties 0 cc eens 6 12 6 2 3 Event History Setting occ see ed ae ee eed ener dene Senet awe eo wae 6 13 6 2 4 External MEMO 34 4 006ee405 bu5 eenedk Suse eins Paa Eiaeai Paaris 6 14 6 2 5 Communication Setting naasa aeaaee 6 14 6 3 Component Improvement 0 0 eee ees 6 15 6 3 1 PUINCION KEY tcc cera een e tats Bec ae tenuis eens haw eases 6 15 6 3 2 Event Event History Display and Event Display 6 18 6 3 3 Data History Data Log and XY Graph 2 2 0 0 cc ee 6 20 6
539. tent of Increase water temperature 7 Add one Command Button component with the settings as shown below Basic Property Command Button Label Graphics Control Setting Display Setting Basic Property Command Button Label Graphics Control Setting Display Setting Priority Nomal sued 9 3 JUSAZ EC 9 E Finally the screen 0 is shown as below NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 171 3 Functions of NB Designer 8 Create screen 4 with one Text component and one Bit Switch component controlling the LB10 as shown below Basic Property Bit Button Label Graphics Control Setting Display Setting Priority Normal Read Address Write Address PT HMIO 0 PT HMIO ag 0 Port COM1 Port COM1 Change z Change z m Station No 0 E Station No 0 Area Variable LB Avea Variable LB X Address 0 I7 System Memory Address 10 I System Memory ee ee Oe ee Format Range DDDD 0 9999 Use Variable I Use Variable J Use index 7 Use index Type Altemate 5 Basic Property Bit Button Label Graphics Control Setting Display Setting Basic Property Command Button Label Graphics Control Setting Display Setting Priority Normal Read Address Write Address PCG D a PLC i PT HMIO No 0 PT HMIO No 0 Port COM1 Port COM1 Change z Ch
540. tep In a proced u re 1 Panel cutout with dimensions is shown below Fit the NB Unit into the panel from the front side yun AN y Buezsul L Z Indicates a step in a procedure Page tab Gives the number of the section Opening dimensions Models Opening Dimension W H mm NB3Q TW00B TW01B 119 0 0 5 0 93 0 0 5 0 NB5Q TW00B TW01B 172 4 0 5 0 131 0 0 5 0 NB7W TW00B TW01B 191 0 0 5 0 137 0 0 5 0 NB10W TW01B 258 0 0 5 0 200 0 0 5 0 jeued uoneiado y OJUO uonellesul Z Z As follows insert panel fixators at the locations indicated by red box around the back of the NB Unit Insert the hooks of positioners into the square holes on the Unit to hold the fixators properly and tighten the screws firmly with the screwdriver NB5Q NB7W TWOOB Special Information See below Icons are used to indicate precautions and additional information amp a EN Precautions for Safe Use e When operating on the operation panel make sure to keep metal particles from entering the Unit The mounting panel must be between 1 6 and 4 8 mm thick The NB Unit must be installed in a control panel For the sake of waterproof and dustproof all the fixators must be evenly tightened to a torque of 0 5 0 6 Nm If the tightening torque exceeds the specified value or the tightening is not even deformation of the front panel may occur Make sure that the operation panel is clean unbent and strong enough f
541. tery is dead in PT the data stored in the recipe memory will not be lost gt O O LW B Refers to the bit address corresponding to the local word address of PT which can t be retained when the power is OFF FRB Refers to the bit address to be stored in the flash memory even when the PT turns OFF the stored data can be retained When the battery is dead in PT the data saved in Flash will not be affected FRBI Refers to the index address of bit address saved in Flash which can be retained when the power of PT turns OFF When the battery is dead in PT the data saved in Flash will not be affected LW Refers to the local word address of PT which can t be retained when power is OFF RW Refers to the absolute address saved in the recipe data that is stored in the flash memory which can be retained when the power of PT turns OFF Even if the battery is dead in PT the data stored in the recipe memory will not be lost RWI Refers to the index address saved in the recipe data that is stored in the flash memory which can be saved when the power is OFF Even if the battery is dead in PT the stored data in the flash memory can be retained FRW Refers to the word address stored in the flash memory which can be retained when the power of PT turns OFF When the battery is dead in PT the data saved in Flash will not be affected NB Series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 A 9 Appendices A 10 Intern
542. text in CSV format Exporting the registered text to the Text Library to the one in CSV format allows edition by the spreadsheet software Also importing the edited file can be taken in the NB Designer NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 237 3 Functions of NB Designer Export Text Library 1 The following dialog box will pop up after Export is clicked Text Library Name C NBProject car TextLib csv ee pgp OK Add Dete Dekteal Language impot Ewo J ok 2 Click OK to export the file In order to change the destination to save the file and the filename click gt gt and specify the destination to save the file to and the filename 3 If the exporting is completed the message saying The file is exported successfully will be pop up The opened export file in csv format is as shown below 4 Language Language Languages Languages el 0 OFF E 1 ON FF Import Text Library 1 The following dialog box will pop up after Import is clicked 2 After confirming the CSV file supposed to be imported is not opened by other software select the CSV file and click Open 3 If Import file successfully pops up it means the import is successful 3 238 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer 4 If the imported file in csv format has the items having the
543. th Click Import Library and select the required group components library in the path corresponding to the saved group components library then click Open to add this group components library to the group components library of the current project New Library Clicking the New Library button will make the following dialog box pop up and the user can input the name of this new created group components library in it The default path to save the group components library is the usrlib folder under the installation path of the software Group components library name Please enter group name of component library OF Cancel NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer Delete Library Clicking the Delete Library button will delete the group components library opened currently a Deleted group component library cannot be recovered Do you continue Clicking Yes will delete the current group components library from this project while clicking No will ignore the operation done just now p O r gt D zi c 3 O ct fe 5 D Delete All Group Components Clicking the Delete All Group Components button will delete all the components in the group components library opened currently Once all group components are deleted they cannot be recovered Do you continue zn Delete Group Components Clicking the Delet
544. th of read or write i buf is the buffer which store the reading or writing data flag is O then codetyp eis BIN is 1 then codetype is BCD 1 Operation success O Operation fail eg read the value of local lw200 and write it to the lw202 with the codetype BIN The code ts short bufl 2 0 Readlocal Liw 200 2 yvoid buf 0 w int MacroEntry return QO F WriteLocalf Liv 202 2 ivoid ibuf 03 If the entity part of the Macro program is copied and pasted in the following figure you can see that the color of the keywords is changed The short void are colored in blue and the LW is colored in red The part enclosed by and is the comment include macrotypedef h include math h oft Read Write Local address function Int ReadLocall const char type int addr int nRegs void buf int flag 3 Int WriteLocall const char type int addr int nRegs void buf int flag Parameter return value type is the string of Lw LBE etc address is the Operation address nRegs isthe length of read or write but is the buffer which store the reading or writing data flag is O then codetyp eis BIN is 1 then codetype is BCD 1 Operation success 0 Operation fail eg read the value of local lw200 and write it to the lw202 with the codetype BIN The code is short buf z 0 Readlocal Lw 200 2 void ibuf 0 int MacroEntryt af i
545. than 30 N e Do not use hard or pointed objects to operate or scrub the screen otherwise the surface of the screen may be damaged e Confirm the safety of the system before pressing the touch panel e Signals from the touch switches may not be input if the touch switches are pressed consecutively at high speed Confirm each input before proceeding to the next one e Do not accidentally press the touch panel when the backlight is not lit or when the display does not appear Make sure of the safety of the system before pressing the touch panel e To use numeric input functions safely always make maximum and minimum limit settings e Before initializing screen data confirm that existing data is backed up at the NB Designer NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 19 20 When changing the password with the screen do not reset or turn OFF the power supply until writing is finished Failure to save the password may cause the screen to fail to function When using an equipment monitor confirm the safety of the system before carrying out the following operations e Changing monitor data e Changing operation mode e Forced set reset e Changing the current value or the set value Do not connect a USB connector to any device that is not applicable When connecting the equipment with the USB HOST connector make sure the supply equipment s current capacity is below 150mA before using it The DC 5V voltage output
546. the Notepad It is used to judge whether the eraser is under selected state currently read write Clear Block Turn ON under clear block It is one function of the Notepad state It is used to judge whether the block is under clear block state currently read write Pen size of 1 pixel point It is one function of the Notepad which can set the pen size to 1 pixel point read write Pen size of 2 pixel points It is one function of the Notepad which can set the pen size to 2 pixel points read write Pen size of 3 pixel points It is one function of the Notepad which can set the pen size to 3 pixel points read write Hide Show Menu Screen Set it to ON OFF to hide show the Menu Screen read write Hide Show task bar Set it to ON OFF to hide show the task bar read write Hide Show operation button Set it to ON OFF to hide show the operation button read write Hide show all Menu Screen task bar Set it to ON OFF to hide show all the Menu Screens operation button task bars and operation buttons read write NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 Save communication settings to system 9044 9045 9046 9050 9051 9052 9053 9055 9056 9060 9061 9062 9063 9064 9065 9066 9067 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 Return to factory settings Control the execution of touch operation when the backlight is off Di
547. the Text Library Use Text Library can t be checked and is always grayed out until you have added the text into the Text Library Multi language Switching The switching among the multiple languages can be realized by modifying the value of special register system memory LW9130 As long as the value of LW9130 is changed in any one of screens the displayed text will switch to the text language corresponding to the value being changed to and the language of the whole system will be changed regardless of the condition of the current screen Only resetting the value of LW9130 can make the language switched again It is based on the system special memory LW9130 to realize the multi language switching in the Text Library That s to say When LW9130 is 0 the contents corresponding to Language 1 in Text Library will be displayed When LW9130 is 1 the contents corresponding to Language 2 in Text Library will be displayed When LW9130 is 2 the contents corresponding to Language 3 in Text Library will be displayed and so on When LW9130 is 31 the contents corresponding to Language 32 in Text Library will be displayed When LW9130 is greater than 31 the contents corresponding to Language 1 in Text Library will be displayed Number of Language in PT Property PT Extended Properties can restrict the number of Language s displayed in Text Library When the Text Library is used for the first time the default Number of Lang
548. the backlight is Off The specified bit address will turn Off when the screen containing the Bit Button component is displayed in the screen and the backlight is Off The specified bit address will turn On when the input using one Number Input component in the screen containing the Bit Button component is successful The specified bit address will turn Off when the input using one Number Input component in the screen containing the Bit Button component is successful 3 Switch to the Label and add the text corresponding to the state 4 Switch to Graphics tab and select the Vector Graphics or bitmap representing the touching area and touching state 5 Switch to the Control Setting tab and make the Security Setting and set the Triggering action Min Interval Seconds Refers to the interval between 2 valid touching operations for the same component and the default is 0 s ae on proper tage Touch Enabling Setting Enable Input Disable Input Conditional Enabling Basic Property Bit Button Label Graphics Control Setting Display Setting Security Setting ON Delay X100ms C Confim Operation 7 Operation Log i Min Interval seconds 0 6 Switch to the Display Setting tab and adjust the position and size for the Bit Button component 7 Press the OK button to complete the setup of Bit Button component 3 82 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manua
549. the higher security level LW9040 to LW9041 reserved by the system are used to input the security level passwords Then place another Number Input component with the Storage Format of password in Frame 0 as shown below 3 342 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer Priority Normal r Read Address AC ea HMIO No 0 Port COM1 Data Word BIN 1 Format Range DDDDD 1 65535 I Use Variable Use index MV Make Read Address and Write Address the Same Write Address Basic Property Numeric Data Font Keyboard Setting Graphics Control Setting Display Setting Port COM1 Change Station No 0 Address 0 Data Format Format Range DDDDD 1 65535 Word BIN Length Use Variable I Use index PIC PT HMIO No 0 I System Memory 1 Max Min Value Setting Max 9999 Min J7 Indirect Max Min Reference Er HMIO PLCNo Pot COM1 T Change Station No Area Variable LW Address 0 Data Format BIN Word Length 4 Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 0 0 X I Use Variable Y Y DWORD m Over Max MB Color I Fash rm Under Min i Color D Fash l Proportional Conversion Min Value 0 Max Value 9999 Note Since the system memories from LW9040 to LW9041 are used because of password input the word length should be set to 2
550. the information or select the Modify button to modify the existing information ng nt Setting Triggered PT MUM Typ O Triggered PT GMM Type O Address Function Address Function PT HMIO x Execute Macro macro_0 c PT HMIO z Execute Macro macro_0 c K PLC No 0 r Pop up Screen 0 FrameO PLC No 0 zs Pop up Screen 0 FrameO gt C Co n 1 alot CS gge alpi C Co n DAIO D gge alpi Hano Tios Bit Confirm Dialog Trigger Dialog Merce iine sn Word Confirm Dialog Trigger Dialog Write Value 0 F Write Value 0 rea varable LB E rea variable LW PT HMIO PLCNo D X PT HMIO PLENo 2 v Address 0 j Address 30 z i oy 0 i oy 0 Format Range DDDD 0 9999 Area Variable LB Address L Format Range DDDDD Area Variable LE Address Use Variable 0 10255 Use Variable Format Range DDDD 0 9999 Format Range DDDD 0 9999 Data Format BIN X Data Format BIN z I Use Variable Use Buzzer I Use Variable Use Buzzer Buzzing Time 1 Sec Buzzing Time 1 Sec Attribute Attribute Message E Message Detection Patten On Detection Patten On LBO ON please check r 7 Temperature above 0 degrees r Off Off Condition a Condition 4 gt Tu 4 p Use Text Library z Use Text Library z Value Range Value Range Minvalue 0 Language Languagel Font ees G Language Languagel Font 0 0 Max Value Use Vector Font Font Max Value Use Vector Font Font Print On Trigger Sound Print On Trigger Sound Retu
551. the screen switching read NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer Addresses Descriptions Comments 9140 Caps Lock When this bit is set to ON the alphabets will be input in capital form read write 9141 Turning OFF the current beep When this bit is set to ON the current beeping is stopped and the bit turns OFF read write 9142 Trigger the input component of pop up When this bit is set to ON the input component located screen on the top of the pop up screen will be executed read write 9144 Hide component with communication When this bit is set to ON the components with the failure communication failure will not be displayed read write 9145 Restart automatically after system When this bit is set to ON the PT will restart collapse automatically 5 seconds after PT collapse read write w a gt a 2 a oO o O lt m r D 3 D O lt 9150 Execute project recipe import export When this bit is set to ON the import export operation function of project or recipe will be executed read write 9151 Protection bit for project export This bit will be set to OFF after the upload password is input correctly during the project export otherwise it will be set to ON read write 9152 Switch between tree folder and list folder ON is for tree folder and OFF is for list folder read write respectively gq Wg 12907 L LL 9
552. the specified value one specified event record will be displayed Value Range When the value of the specified word address is within the specified range one event record will be generated As shown below check Value Range with Min Value amp Max Value set to 5 and 10 respectively if the value which is represented as N of the specified word address is larger than 5 and smaller than 10 one specified event record will be displayed a Attribute Detection Patten On orf Condition al W Value Range Min ahe 9 Max Value 5 When the value of the specified word address is not equal to the specified value one specified event record will be displayed As shown below check Value Range with Min Value amp Max Value set to 15 and 30 respectively if the value which is represented as N of the specified word address is less than 15 or larger than 30 one specified event record will be displayed Attribute Detection Pattem On f Off Condition o ae i Value Range Min Value 15 Max Value 30 When the value of the specified word address is less than or equal to the specified value one specified event record will be displayed When the value of the specified word address is greater than or equal to the specified value one specified event record will be displayed Function When event occurs the selected Macro will be executed Macro Pop up Confirm
553. tion read 9060 9075 Display of number input or text input Displays the data input by Number Input or Text Input process component in real time and clears it after completion of input If input component is set to 1 word only LW9075 is used while LW9074 and LW9075 are both used if input component is set to 2 words and so on Read 9091 Project compilation year Records the project compilation time year read 9092 Project compilation month Records the project compilation time month read 9093 Project compilation day Records the project compilation time day read 9100 Modify dynamically the address in the 9100 is the Screen No The 9101 is the offset 9101 screen internal address read write When LW9100 is set to 11 and LW9101 is set to 20 the PLC addresses of all the component in the screen 11 will be modified dynamically to the addresses in which the offset are added i e D10 will become D30 and the offset of 20x16 320 will be added to all bit addresses i e M20 will become M340 9130 Dynamic modification of Text Library The value of this LW represents the index of Text Library read write 9140 Display brightness level Displays the brightness level for NB Unit with the range from 0 completely dark to 32 completely bright read write 9150 Character code displayed in the current The value of LW9150 is the No of Chinese characters screen when using Pinyin displayed in the current Chinese character di
554. to input Display Color Common Sheet Screen Attributes Display below base screen z Pop up Screen Attributes Display in foreground v File Browser a Initial Screen 0 Frame0 S 5 File List Window Common Sheet 1 Common Window Confirmation Screen 7 Confirm Action Windo Menu Screen 2 Fast Selection 7 Login Screen 9 Login Window z Descriptions of Operation Log Storage Setting Storage Devices Save as MS Subfolder Storage Type Buffer Storage Storage Period USB1 Makes the data sampling time accurate to the millisecond and records it into the CSV file Sets the subfolder name of the external memory where the CSV file will be stored Although the subfolder name is Record the user can modify it Daily File Stores the operation log by day and records them into the CSV file named in yyyy mmdd form Single File Stores the operation log by the number of records and records them into the CSV file with the name of Subfolder Name Provides a kind of buffer storage mechanism When the data written into the external memory amounts to the set size of the buffers the writing is only performed once Default means no buffering i e the writing operation will immediately be performed once the data is generated Sets the upper limit for the operation logs amount with the unit of Day for Daily File and Record for Single File When the Daily File is selected the file will be named in yyyy
555. to the Label tab and add the text corresponding to the state 4 Switch to Graphics tab and select Vector Graphics or bitmap to display the memory state and represent the touching area 5 Switch to the Control Setting tab and make the Security Setting and set the Triggering action NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 95 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 96 6 Press the OK button to complete the setup of the Word Switch component List and Dropdown List List Refers to the value of the specified memory corresponding to the state of each option By default the value of specified memory corresponding to the first option is O and the value of specified memory corresponding to the second option is 1 and so on Basic Property Word Switch Label Graphics Control Setting Display Setting Type Dropdown Li State No Line Spacing Data Mapping For example 1 Create a Word Switch in which read address and write address are LWO and a number display component in which address is LWO 2 Set the Control Mode and State No to List and 6 respectively 3 Create the labels with the contents as shown below MV Transport Font V Auto Resize Graphic Font Font Basic Property Word Switch Label Graphics Control Setting Display Setting l Use Text Library Text Library Language Language 1 Copy Tex
556. ton to make the screen switch to the logo edit screen therefore you can make modification or editing the logo screen displayed when the PT is powered on as shown below Project Library Window x Connector PT PLC Bit Button Bit Lamp H Bit Switch DirectScreen m1 Line Style Toolbar Adding or deleting the arrow head or replacing solid line with broken line 3 18 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer Component Edit Toolbar Nudge Left To make the component move left by 1 grid Nudge Right To make the component move right by 1 grid Nudge Up To make the component move up by 1 grid Nudge Down To make the component move down by 1 grid Align Left To make the multiple components left aligned Align Right To make the multiple components right aligned Align Top To make the multiple components top aligned g N D 5 o Align Bottom To make the multiple components bottom aligned Align Horizontal Midline To make the multiple components horizontal midline aligned Align Vertical Midline To make the multiple components vertical midline aligned Equal Width To make the multiple components with the same width Equal Height To make the multiple components with the same height Equal Size To make the multiple components with the same size Bring to Front To bring the component to t
557. touch operation of PT when the backlight is closed read write Set it to ON to disable to write Back function of PLC And it is only applicable to Write Back function of PLC Control Switch Screens The Write Back function is not disenabled when the value of LB9052 is OFF In this case if you want to switch from Base Screen 10 to Base Screen 12 by using PLC Control Switch Screens Read address D20 the switching can be controlled only when the value of D20 is 12 And the PLC will write 12 back to the word address D21 automatically after the screen is switched to the Base Screen 12 If the Write Back function is disenabled 12 will not be written back to D21 read write It turns ON when the screen is touched and it turns OFF when the touching is released read The operation when the PLC is disconnected with NB Unit will be performed according to the contents of LB9055 OFF All the commands written to PLC are invalid ON Operation is normal read write The operation when the PLC is disconnected with NB Unit will be performed according to the contents of LB9056 OFF Enable the touch operation ON Disenable the touch operation read write When the user activates the Number Input Component or Text Input Component located in the left of the screen the bit turns ON automatically and the keyboard is displayed at the same time When the input is completed or canceled the bit turns OFF automatically The keyboard is
558. trl 6 Groups d Rotation Line width b Line Style Arrow Sky le b NIOLSD100 Bottom layer NI1 D101 NIZ SD102 NI3 SD103 NI4 SD104 NIS SD105 NI6 LY 9010 NIF LWOO11 NIS LWOO12 NIG LW9013 NILOE LWOO14 i Because the order of the corresponding addresses is reversed so it needs 6 Data Transmission components and 1 Timer component Daa Tanesin Trager Address Labe Graphics Contre Setting Display Setting Memon Tym Wiad Daa Length 1 Wand Data Transmission Bourne Felden ns iire Data Taimon Tigga Adiera Label Graghici Control Seting Disolay Setting HMig PLCs j FF lee Tig Adi Tagger Tyne OFF ri HMI PLE Me Pat COMI O Changa Staten Number Fomai Parga DDOD M A 7 Formal Range DODDO 15 Aree T Ackchrene E iniret Ariran fanaa DDE 0 Sy Source Dedina M Daa Langh PT HMID Feat COMI Memory ypa Wing Wed Lergh g Area aine y Dea fem Hy Fronmal Plange DODD It 3 290 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer Timer property Timer Timer Function Display Setting Execute Macro macro_0 c C Data Transmission Memory Type p Data Length Source Address PT Hmio PLCNo 9g Port COM1 Use Variable Change Station Number Q Area Variable p Address Data Format BIN v Format Range DDDD 0 9999 S
559. trolling the display condition through the Macro 3 6 29 Data History Oye este i JA es i ii Ki The Data History component can be used to read a series of date in consecutive memories from the specified word memory s inside PT PLC or word memory s of the controller periodically and display them in the table form Note 1 The sampled data must be consecutive When the Save to Recipe Data Field is checked in the Save Data History tab only the saving of a little amount of data is possible for the limited capacity of recipe data field 2 The Read Address for the Data History component is the memory address for data sampling by the 1st channel 3 The Word Length of memory for Data History component is determined by the channel number i e if channel number is m 0 lt m lt 17 the World Length will be m 4 Using the Data History component the user must be check one or both of Save to Recipe Data Field and Save to External Device options in the Save Data History tab in the Data History Component Property dialog box 3 190 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer Process of adding one Data History component 1 Press the Data History component icon drag it to the screen then the Basic Properties dialog box of the Data History component will pop up Read Address Write Address wo PLC amp PT 0 gt PT mo Wo T K Port COM
560. trong vibration NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 Precautions for Correct Use e Do not install the unit in any of the following locations Locations subject to severe changes in temperature Locations subject to temperatures or humidity outside the range specified in the specifications Locations subject to condensation as the result of high humidity Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases Locations subject to strong shock or vibration Locations outdoors subject to direct wind and rain Locations subject to strong ultraviolet light Locations subject to dust Locations subject to direct sunlight Locations subject to splashing oil or chemicals e Take appropriate and sufficient countermeasures when installing systems in the following locations Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise Locations subject to strong electric field or magnetic field Locations close to power supply lines Locations subject to possible exposure to radioactivity e Precautions for software The update restoration uninstall and reinstallation of software in running status is prohibited in order to guarantee the correct use of the product NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 21 Conformance to EC Directives NB Series Programmable Terminals are EMC compliant Concepts OMRON products are electronic devices that are incorporated in machines and manufacturing inst
561. ts QOOWOEP EO 5 2 NB Series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 5 Maintenance and Abnormality Handling Backup of application When the unit needs to be repaired due to the occurrence of some faults or to be replaced by the substitute be sure to make backup of the applications and keep it in a safe location Spare part of Unit It is recommended to prepare the spare part of NB Unit in advance in order to repair the system when the faults occurred in NB Unit or the screen is not clear due to the backlight life expires Replace of battery The lithium battery is used for the backup of the non screen data such as calendar data clock data etc The life of the battery is approximate 5 years at 25 C 1 year 365 days x12 hours day If the battery is used at high temperature its life will be reduced According to the ambient environment after taking back up of the data request for the repair on I 5 r 5 D O D NB Series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 5 3 5 Maintenance and Abnormality Handling 5 2 Checking and Cleaning Please clean and check the NB Series periodically to ensure the NB Series always in the optimal status Cleaning method If the display part is dirty then the screen will hard to see Please perform cleaning periodically according to the following points e During the daily cleaning please use the dry soft cloth
562. ts of the processing by the PLC the host System Features Connection method RS 232C or RS 422A Transmission rate baud rate 4800 9600 14400 19200 38400 56000 57600 115200 and 187500 bps The transmission rates of 14400 56000 and 187500 bps are not supported by the PLC manufactured by OMRON Host monitoring The PC can be used to transfer or read the PLC programs and perform reading and writing of the data area of PLC Error check system Both parity and frame check are performed to estimate the errors occurring during all the communications 1 4 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 1 Introduction S S 1 2 2 Connecting Methods 5 RS 232C x5 RS 232C is a kind of serial physical interface standard formulated by Electric Industry Association EIA RS 232C method is based on 1 1 communication which is applied to the point to point communication within 15 meter distance due to the existence of common ground noise and the unavoidable common mode interference etc f Rs 485 RS 485 uses the differential signal negative logic and the common 2 wire method and the connectable node on the same bus is up to 32 The master slave communication method i e one master communicating with multiple slaves is generally used in the RS 485 communication network _ N N O O 5 5 49 O ot 5 Ko lt i r 5 O O O RS 485 and RS 422A methods can realize 1 N communication i
563. ttings as example i e the source address destination address and data length use the Indirect Reference After setting the source address type to D memory and making the source address offset controlled by the LW100 set the destination address type to LW memory and make the destination address offset and the data length controlled by the LW101 and LW102 respectively NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer Source address is 0 destination address is 0 data length is 1 syed uoljoUuN Z 3 uOoISSsilusuel e eq 9 J Data Transmission Trigger Address Label Graphics Control Setting Display Setting I Use Trigger Address Trigger Type PT PLC No Port COMI Change Station Number g Area LB z Address 9000 Format Riange DDDD 0 9939 OFF gt ON When the state of the specified address is switched from OFF to ON the Data Transmission component will be triggered to perform the transmission ON gt OFF When the state of the specified address is switched from ON to OFF the Data Transmission component will be triggered to perform the transmission OFF gt ON When the state of the specified address is changed the Data Transmission component will be triggered to perform the transmission OFF gt ON Reset When the state of the specified address is switched from OFF to ON the Data Transmission component will be triggered to perform the tran
564. ty Lock Position Group Ctr G Ctr u UnGroup Group Components Rotate Line Width Line Style Arrow Style Save as Vector Graphics RCTO Bottom layer ELPO 2 In the pop up Save Vector Graphics dialog box New is checked by default and the default name is NewVG Click the OK button Save Vector Graphics e Mew C Update KUASI CONFIRM vg CTAL_BAR CTAL_BAR DISP_BARO DISP_BARO DISP_BARO DISP_BARO ENTEROOS vg ENTEROT0 vg ia Graphics of Each State f New State Update Current State O 3 374 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer Then the creation of a new VG graphics with only one state stateO is completed Project File Window f aaaa EE PT H HMI0 whe Elle Graphics E CONFIRM vg CTRL_BAROOL vg CTRL_BAROO9 vg DISP_BAROOL wq i DISP_BAROO2 vg DISP_BAROOS vg DISP_BARO0G6 wg ENTEROOS vg i ENTEROLO vg KREVOO 7 wq p O O r gt D si c O ct fe 5 D METER O1 bg 3 For the addition of a Round rectangle into state1 Draw a Round rectangle and select it then right click the mouse and select Save as Vector Graphics Cut Ctrl x Copy Ctrl C Delete Paste Ctrl V Repeat Select All Ctrl A4 Find Replace Ctrl F Refresh Property Lock Position Group Components Rotate Line Width Background Line Color Line Style Arro
565. uage is 8 Even if LW9130 is greater than 8 the system can only display the contents corresponding to Language 1 to Language 8 If the languages to be displayed are greater than 8 Max No of Languages needs to be increased in Language Setting screen with Number of Language not exceeding Max No of Languages Default Language in PT Property PT Extended Properties refers to the language number to be displayed in the default Text Library For example When Language 2 in the Text Library is English if Default Language is set to 2 the text using the Text Library will be displayed as English on the System Screen after PT is powered ON and be switched to another language until the value of LW9130 is changed NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 Language Setting of Text Library Clicking Language Setting in PT Property PT Extended Properties or clicking Language from the Text Library can open Language Setting dialog box to set the global Property of the text font corresponding to each kind of language w Max No of Languages E hi V 2 Current Lang Language rs 9 m Font Type S Vector Font f Bitmap Font S i m N r Font Attribute Font ODFNB EN Size 16 Position Left ki Color E coo Language English US4 fo Italic Bold Asesqi XOL 8 Max No
566. ual V106 4 Functions of NBManager Uploading user data file ueneenee Cancel Please input password for upload rrr Default password is 888888 Uploading GUI file s eserererereenere D 2 gt c 2 O a O 5 D is ct O Uploading comserrer file sssererererereeneer Select Upload Recipe and select the path to save the recipe and then click the Save button after the file name is input Select Upload LOGO and select the path to save the LOGO then click the Save button after the file name is input Select Upload FRW and select the path to save the FRW and then click the Save button after the File name is input The file name and the path saved during the upload can be selected by the user freely NB Series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 4 13 4 Functions of NBManager 4 4 System Operation 4 14 Mode Settings When executing user projects Specify the destination PT to the User Project Mode When executing system settings Specify the destination PT to the System Setting Mode Operating Update Update Kernel and Rootfs Specify the DIP switch located in the back of the NB unit to Downloader Mode SW1 ON SW2 OFF before the update and restart the NB unit Communication Setting Communication Method LSB part IF Port Ho Note After the updates of the Kernel and Rootfs the NB unit settings will
567. ual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the front cover of the manual Cat No V106 E1 L Revision code Revision code Revised content October 2011 Original production February 2012 Changes related to battery April 2012 Adding descriptions of new functions added into NB5Q NB7W TW01B model and the related contents August 2012 Adding descriptions and functions of NB3Q TWOOB TW01B and NB10W TW01B models October 2012 Manual correction and updating December 2012 Correction related to the backlight lamp rubber packing and battery maintenance e Adding descriptions of the PictBridge printing function December 2012 Adding descriptions of the power supply and wire connection in Precautions for Safe Use e Correcting descriptions of the memories related to printing e Adding contents to the list of error codes for printing 08 April 2013 Changes and corrections 0 0 02 03 4 5 07 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 Revision 1 Revision 2 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 Authorized Distributor
568. uch panel supports the PictBridge protocol and connected to such a printer with the USB Slave port it can perform printing of images and other data In order to use the PictBridge function it is necessary to update the Kernel and Rootfs in NB Designer Ver 1 2 2 or later For the update method referto yse perai Page 1 in esig er pera i a a When downloading project from NB Designer or transferring project from the USB to the NB Unit if the message of Please update the Kernel and Rootfs in the NBManager is displayed it means user should update the NB Kernel and root file system Version information list NB Designer Keme Rootfs Is necessary to update Enable Print Ver 1 10 1317 1337 Necessary Ver 1 20 1317 1389 n Ver 1 21 1317 1389 Checked by default Ver 1 22 1458 1517 Checked by default Ver 1 23 1458 1548 Determined by the Unchecked by user project default Ifthe printing function is not required the user should uncheck the Enable Printing before opening the previous project with the NB Designer version 1 23 Then recompile and download the project 7 2 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 7 PictBridge Printing The printing function updates flow chart S print functio Disable Printer L System Setting Mode disabled Function I ee oe T Download Project uoljoun4 abpligyld L Z Enable Printer Function 7
569. uld be stored in the external memory refer to 6 3 3 Data History Data Log and XY Graph Page 6 20 3 150 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer Process of adding one Data Log component 1 Press the Data Log component icon drag it to the screen then the Basic Properties dialog box of the Data Log component will pop up Basic Property Trend Graphics Channel Extended Property Save Data History Display Setting Priority Normal Read Address Write Address PT gt p PT HMO Pot COMI Pot COMI Change 0 Change 0 Station No Station No n w I Q mi Area Varable LW Area Variable LW Address 0 System Memory Address l D System Memory Word Dia py Wo Data BIN pas Format Length Format Fomat Range DDDDD 0 10255 Use Variable Use Variable T Use index T Use index 607 eed 6L 9 Read Address Refers to the word address of PLC corresponding to the 1st line data And the word address corresponding to the 2nd line is Read Address 1 and the 3rd line is Read Address 2 and so on Address Refers to the first address of the word address corresponding to the Data Log Word Length It is determined by the sampling channels and the storage format for each channel When the stored style of all the channel is signed 16 bit if the channel number is N wher
570. ult which is equivalent with the operation executed after downloading to PT and it allows to test directly on PC Using the online test during debugging can save a lot of time taken by the repeated downloading The online test is classified into direct online test and indirect online test which are described as follows Direct online test is a test method that directly connects the PLC with the serial port of PC to test the operation Obtaining the dynamic PLC data without need to connect the PT is its advantage but the communication between the PC and the PLC can support only RS 232 communications During debugging of PLC with RS 485 port the adaptor that can convert RS 232 to RS 485 422 must be used Note 1 The test time of direct online test is 15 minutes When 15 minutes is exceeded the following prompt infor mation The test time is exceeded please perform the test again will appear Then the window of the test will be closed automatically p j A D n 2 The direct online test can be done only through the RS 232 communication method 3 The wiring method of direct online test is the direct connection of the PLC programming cable with the serial port of PC 4 t does not support the direct connection with the PLC of Ethernet connection type Fi NBSimulator PT Test Stat HMIO Cancel S9 BUIIUD d C VL E Serial Port PT Port PC Port PT Port PC Port COM2 COM COM1 COM1 x Information Test Typ
571. using Screen switching command the current screen will be cleared All the screen rather than Common Sheet and Menu Screen will be cleared and Base Screen to be switched to will be displayed in the current screen When the component in Base Screen calls the pop up screens out the original information in Base Screen will be reserved and the called pop up screen will be attached to the current Base Screen The master slave relationship is between Base Screen and all of related pop up screens When Base Screen N is switched to Base Screen M all of the sub screens of Base Screen N will be closed while Base Screen M and its sub screens will be displayed Base Screen must cover the whole screen Menu Screen Menu Screen is the screen called by pressing the button of Menu Screen while the task bar is displayed and it will be always displayed in the screen until the operation button makes it hidden Therefore it can be used to put screen switching button or some other common components The default Menu Screen is Frame 2 When the other screen is set as Menu Screen the size of that screen must be same as that of Menu Screen Common Sheet Common Sheet will always be displayed in the screen and the components to be displayed forever can be put in Common Sheet In this way you can see the state of this component or operate this component at any time The default Common Sheet is Frame 1 You can use Change Common Sheet function key to
572. ust not be checked as shown below Screen property Title Framed No 0 Protect key mapping on common sheet screen Switch to the lowest security level when screen closed Screen Attribute Keyboard Securty Level 0 X Position Background Color x0 Yo Background Color i Pattem Color Width 320 Height 234 Trmaparency 0 S na Sheet Screen A 7 c gt O m e gt N 2 1 Auto Size Checking in the Auto Size check box in the Label tab when the label is too long or the multiple languages with different sizes allows adjustment the size of the component Auto Size is checked by default After Auto Size is checked when the length of label exceeds the width of the component the component will be extended automatically thus making all the contents of the label displayed completely If Auto Size is not checked when the length of label exceeds the width of the component the component will not be extended automatically thus making part of contents of the label displayed The effect is shown as below M Transport Fori Use Tet Library one 7 Text Library i Auto Resize Language Language Graphic Font Font Label List F Message essage ha F 0 Bit Button Fi Copy Text to All State Font Type C Vector Font Bitmap Font NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 385 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 386 Project Library Window Con
573. ut Hygrometer humidity inside operation condensation panel Without dirt Visual check Oil mist sticking No oil penetrating into the Visual check space between the front panel and Unit box 5 4 NB Series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 5 Maintenance and Abnormality Handling Checking Items Checking Contents Checking Method Installation state Looseness of fixing metal Specified torque Phillips screwdrivers pieces etc Connection state of Inserted fully and without Phillips screwdrivers connector for the cable looseness Looseness of screw for Without looseness Phillips screwdrivers external wiring State of external Without abnormality such Visual check multimeter connection cable as disconnection etc Object with expected life Backlight brightness With enough brightness Visual check Backlight life approx 50 000 hours Typ at room temperature 25 C with 40 brightness Battery 5 years at 25 C NB local time Precautions for Safe Use The back light or rubber packing of NB unit cannot be replaced Deterioration over time can cause the tough points to move If the Calibrate the touch panel periodically Water and oil resistance will be lost if the front sheet is torn or is peeling off Do not use the Unit if the front sheet is torn or is peeling off Dispose of the Units and batteries according to local ordinances as they apply Periodically check the installati
574. vel Meter showing the usage condition of CPU in percentage form If Display CPU Indicator is checked CPU Indicator will be displayed at the right side of the task bar as shown above The CPU Indicator is expressed by P in simulator and the PT Display Alarm Indicator Alarm Indicator is a Level Meter showing the ratio of the current alarm numbers to the total alarm numbers logged in the alarm information If Display Alarm Indicator is checked Alarm Indicator will be displayed at the right side of the task bar as shown above The alarm indicating lamp is expressed by A in simulator and the PT The Alarm Indicator is the bar to display the number in percentage which divides the total number of the alarm the registered to Alarm Settings with the number of the alarm currently occurring Display Menu Button After this option is checked you can use the Menu Screen If this option isn t checked the Menu Screen will not pop up Only Show Menu Button After this option is checked only the Menu Screen button is displayed in the task bar NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 285 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 286 Background Color Determines the background color of the task bar You can select the following colors at Default Colors or select Custom Colors to configure any colors you want m Background Color Default Color EERE EEREEEEE Ang E GEETE E mpna ETEE
575. verlaying the multiple components together can realize many special functions NB Unit supports the overlay of multiple components When these components are triggered the program will perform the corresponding operations according to the layer sequence i e the component on the top layer will be triggered firstly then the component in the 29 layer will be triggered and so on For example if 6 Bit Switch components are overlaid together to control the YO top layer to Y5 bottom layer then when these components are triggered the NB Unit will execute the functions in the following order First execute the command YO Command execution Y 1 Finally command execution Y5 The control process is as follows YO ON OFF gt Y1 ON OFF Step 2 gt Y2 ON OFF Step 3 gt Y5 ON OFF Step 6 However if the overlaid components include the function key of changing screen the screen is changed so that the other component behind the function key by are also unable to be operated by the function Therefore the function key of the changing screen should be arranged at the behind of all the component NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 359 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 360 1st layer First execute the command YO 2nd layer Command execution Y 1 3 layer Change Screen 4th layer 5th layer Ignore all 6th layer Pinyin Input Method NB Designer can be used to input common Chinese characters
576. w Style RCTO Bottom layer NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 375 3 Functions of NB Designer 4 Check in the Update radio button in the Save Vector Graphics dialog box and select a NewVG vg file Then select the state of the graphic to save the file C New Herni CTAL_BAR DISP_LBARO DISP_BARD DISP_BARO DISP_BARO E E E E E ENTERO0S vg ENTEROI0 vg ENTER100 vg ENTERIO vg KEYOOF vg Graphics of Each State New State Update Current State 0 Cancel Update Current State StateO will be replaced Save to System Graphics Library The new created NewVG vg will be saved to the system library for the convenient call of this graphics by the other projects For the method to call graphics refer to the 16 Graphics Library Page 3 367 3 376 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer Method of Save to System Graphics Library Select the NewVG vg in Project File Window then right click the mouse to select Save to System Graphics Library m AIE DE ML en En TW n n n n n an NN Edit Logo Screen Import Recipe Rename Macro Delete Method of deleting the new created NewVG vg Select the NewVG vg in Project File Window then right click the mouse to select Delete m AIML e We n En dnl an an n an n an E A Edit Logo Screen Import Recipe Ren
577. wJ d JOS 9 OL iV ee a Add User Add User AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 307 3 Functions of NB Designer Add User screen contains User Name Password Password Confirm Logout Time and Permission User Name Place one Text Input component for inputting the user name with the address being LW9486 and the maximum word length up to 16 Here it is 10 Add User De Basic Property Font Keyboard Setting Graphics Control Setting Display Setting Priority Normal Swap high byte and low byte Unicode MV Make Read Address and Write Address the Same Extended ASCII Read Address Write Address PT HMIO No 0 Port COM1 Change F StationNo 9 Area Variable LW9486 Used to input Area Varable LW F Address 9486 System Memory Address 0 System Memory Data Word 7 Fai BIN 10 Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 Message window Compilation Done Warning 0 Error 0 Password Place one Number Input component with the address of LW9502 the word length of 2 and the data type of password here Add User lt Basic Property Numeric Data Font Keyboard Setting Graphics Control Setting Display Setting Ee eee J Make Read Address and Write Address the Same s a I Use Variable T Use index Permission Pot COMI X cant Area Variable
578. will pop up it prope Basic Property Font Keyboard Setting Graphics Control Setting Display Setting Priority Normal J Swap high byte and low byte Unicode V Make Read Address and Write Address the Same Extended ASCII Read Address Write Address PLC PLC PT Ee yo OO PT HMO a O Port COM1 Port COM1 Change n a Change z z E Station No 0 Station No 0 Area Var able LW X Area Var able LW i Address 0 System Memory Address 0 System Memory Data lt Word Data Word ae BIN 1 a BIN 1 Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 Use Variable Use Variable Use index Use index NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 123 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 124 Swap high byte and low byte Refers to the interchange of the high byte and the low byte for the same byte as shown below Not use Swap high byte and low byte Unicode If you check in the check box for this function the specified data is dealt as Unicode Extended ASCII Checking this option can display the extended ASCII characters between 0x80 and Oxff in the ASCII codes When it is checked Chinese can t be displayed in the Text Input component Text Display component and Note Book component Only one of Unicode or ASCII can be selected Read Write Address Refers to the word address It contains up to 16 words each of which contains 2 ASCII characters displayed and modifi
579. with the various parameters same as that of PT Unit At the same time set the IP address of PC to the same network segment as that for PT Unit as shown below Lomnunicaton 5 ething Communication Method Ethemet IP 132 168 250 1 Pat 21845 Setting and obtaining IP address and Port In the NBManager dialog box click the System Operate Get IP ddess Port of PT Set IP Address Fort IF i Port 21845 Det Return Setting Return to User Application Status Return to 4pplication Statue Sething Write Setting Get IP Address Port of PT Obtain IP address and port number of PT Set IP Address Port of PT Modify the IP address and Port of PT to the parameters which were set to IP and Port IP Address Port can be updated only when the connection is realized via USB port or serial port 6 6 NB Series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 6 Descriptions of New Functions Added into NBLILI TW01B 6 1 7 Data Encryption For the data stored in the CSV format in the external memory data encryption function can be used to restrict the modification edition and others by the user Note 1 If the Decompile operation is not performed to the CSV file generated for the component using Data Encryption the illegible characters will be displayed in the opened CSV file 2 If the Decompile operation is performed through the NB Designer the CSV file can only be opened for viewing instead o
580. wnload to USB1 When the project is too large it can be directly downloaded to the external memory to operate During the download check the Download to USB1 in Select Section option in the NBDownload dialog box as shown below Select PT Select Data PT Information Project Data O O LOGO File O Clear Recipe Clear Event History O Clear Data History Clear ER Dat Download Project c program filesorron nb designer project stest test pkg I Clear ae O Clear FAW Data Communication Method Ethernet ip 192 168 2501 PORT 21845 Download Port NULL pps NULL Exit Click the Download button and then the project file will be downloaded to the external memory Note 1 Ifthe project file is copied directly to the external memory without using Download the project will not be operated 2 Do not remove the external memory during the operation of the NB The project may not operate correctly 3 Use the recommended device for the external memory NB Series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 6 5 I _ a gt a 2 D a TI 3 O e T LaSN 0 peojumoq G 1 9 6 Descriptions of New Functions Added into NBLILI TW01B 6 1 6 NBManager Settings for using Ethernet In the NBManager dialog box click the Set button in the Communication Setting option and then check the Ethernet in Communication Method option in the Communication Setting dialog box
581. wnload via the Ethernet refer to 6 1 4 Download through Ethernet Page 6 4 After the settings mentioned above click icon to download the screen data The download method is shown as below NBDownload Nee E Select PT Select Data Project Data a ee o O LOGO File 0 Clear Recipe Clear Event 0 History OI Clear Data History Clear ER Dat Download Project c program files sorron nb designersproject car car pkg Lites a O Clear FAW Data Download to O USB1 Communication Method Ethernet p 132 168 250 1 Pont 21845 Download Pot NULL pps NULL E sit NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 15 2 Download via USB Memory For more details of download via USB memory refer to 3 2 Menus Page 3 7 in NB series Setup Manual 3 15 3 Specification of Downloading Contents In the NBDownload dialog box check the required contents in the Select Section option to download the required files T o1 fo Z i ie 2 Select Data i Project Data E O LOGO File C Clear Recipe Clear Event o History C Clear Data History O Clear ER Data Download Project cA carcar pkg C Clear FR Data Download bo o USB1 Communication Method USE port Aiowsy GSN Len peojumog Z S IP NULL PORT NULL Download Pat NULL pes NULL Exit Data File Refers to the data information of all the
582. x Basic Property Command Button Label Graphics Control Setting Display Setting Type Set values Use Variable Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 Set value LW 0 When LW10 is 5 it means the Set Value is 5 In this case clicking Set will write the value of LW10 i e 5 into LWO 3 90 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer Perform the offline test and the effect is shown as below Sed 9 b When Setting Mode is Add value Assuming the write address of the Command Button component is LW5 with Type of Add value check Indirect Reference and select LW15 and 2 as the first address of variable parameter and the default word length respectively The Addend address and the Upper Limit address are set by LW15 and LW16 respectively 3 apace cae i i pasayan ts Co and button prop 7 xa om m g x uong puewwop p 9 Basic Property Command Button Label Graphics Control Setting Display Setting Add value x Addend 0 Max Value 0 Type Data Format Word Length 2 l Use Variable Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 Addend LW 15 Max Value LW 16 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 91 3 Functions of NB Designer In addition place 2 Number Input components with the addresses of LW15 and LW16 respectively as well as 1 Number D
583. x Use index 3 344 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer After the Save Compile and Offline test operations are performed the state is shown as below After 1 is input at Switching Level the current security level will not become 1 because the switching from lower level to higher level is impossible as the lower right graphics shows p W wn D O c 3 r lt aa lt 2 Then input the password 1111 to make the current security level become 1 as the lower left graphics shows At this time pressing the Function Key button can realize the switching to Frame 10 But if O is input at Switching Level the current security level will be switched to 0 then the switching to Frame 10 will be impossible as the lower right graphics shows Designing the project by using the level password properly and giving the users permission with different level each allow the security of application enhanced Switching to the lowest security level when screen closed If the security level is set for one screen to realize the following function the password will be cleared automatically when the screen is closed and the password needs to be input again when the screen is entered again The security level will become O every time the screen is closed The settings are as shown below Title FrameO No 0 Protect key mapping on common sheet scree
584. x height is 24 When the Chinese font box height is 34 Chinese font box height can be adjusted r oy lt Gi er D 3 0 9 D 3 D r D T Esc 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 a 9 o Back gS TELELE ES Use External Clock After it is checked the values in the memory of LW9010 to LW9017 are adopted as the event occurrence time and internal clock of the PT are not adopted Note Using this function needs to use Data Transmission component to transfer the data in the time memory of PLC to LW9010 LW9017 periodically LW9010 Second LW9011 Minute LW9012 hour LW9013 Date LW9014 Month LW9015 Year LW9016 Week unavailable LW9017 Millisecond SolJedoldg pepus xXy ld F Ol In the following example we will use the Data Transmission component to transfer the values in the time memory of PLC to LW9010 LW9017 periodically i e transfer SD100 to LW9015 SD101 to LW9014 SD102 to LW9013 SD103 to LW9012 SD104 to LW9011 and SD105 to LW9010 NIO SD100 Bottom layer E nri s0101 g NI2 50102 NIa SD103 NIA S0104 E wist s0105 NI6 LWSOLD NIFCLW9011 Nee Looe E noc iweo1s 5 NIWO LW9014 i MI11f LW9015 3 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 289 3 Functions of NB Designer PLC clock Cutty Ctrl Copy C Chrl c Delete Select All Components 4 Ctrl 4 Find Replace F Ctrl F Refresh Lock Group C
585. ximum input number The maximum number will be specified when the Number Input component is activated Otherwise the bits will be specified to 0 read 9004 9005 Minimum input number The minimum number will be specified when the Number Input component is activated Otherwise the bits will be specified to 0 read 9006 Notepad operation mode It is one function of the Notepad which can be used to select the operation modes from Pen 0 Eraser 1 and Clear Block 2 read write 9007 Pen Size It is one function of the Notepad which can be used to select different pen size from 1 to 8 pixels with Word Length of 1 read write 9008 Pen Color It is one function of the Notepad which can be used to select the pen color from 0 to 65535 16 bit color read write NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer Addresses Comments 9010 Local time Second Effective value ranges from 0 to 59 read 9011 When the Use External Clock option is Minute Effective value ranges from 0 to 59 read 9012 checked in the PT Extended Properties Hour Effective value ranges from 0 to 23 read 9013 see E la in bared oe Day Effective value ranges from 1 to 31 read 9014 the values from LW9010 to LW9017 Mouth Effective value ranges from 0 to 11 read 9015 Using this function needs to transfer the Year Effective value ranges from 0 to 9999 read 9016 values in the time memories of P
586. y Basic Property Table Control Setting Display Setting Priority Normal W Make Read Address and Write Address the Same Read Address r Write Address PT ag 0 PT HMIO Port COMI Port COMI Change Change E Station No 0 Station No 0 Area Varable LW Area Variable LW Address 0 D System Memory Address l System Memory Data opin Word 7 Data pin e Word a Format Length Format sa Length Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 Use Variable l Use Variable T Use index I Use index Basic Property Table Control Setting Display Setting Type Select by row Select by cell i a an N The related Properties are as follows memory corresponding to Row Firstaddress First address memory corresponding to Column ss Fiirstaddress First address 1 Number of Occupied memories 2 Row 2 Column 2 NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 189 W U o Z SIGeL 8Z 9 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 Switch to the Control Setting tab and make the Security Setting and set the Triggering action 4 Press the OK button to complete the setup of the Table component The test effect of the Table component is as shown below Select by row 2 Select by col 2 Select by cell 2 If required the Table component can also be used in combination with the Number Input component and the Macro thus con
587. y Ea Data Log property Basic Property Trend Graphics Channel Extended Property Save Data History Display Setting Basic Property Trend Graphics Channel Extended Property Save Data History Display Setting ee V Indirect Max Min Reference Memory address order is Y Min Y Max Priority Normal Read Address Write Address PT mmo PC o PT amo PLO o No No Port COM1 Port COM1 Change n z Change n z E Station No z Station No Area Var able LW z Area Varable LW X Address 0 System Memory Address 0 System Memory Data BIN Word 1 n Data BIN Word s Format Length Format Length Format Range DDDDD 0 10255 E Use Variable Use Variable Use index Use index Cancel NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 157 3 Functions of NB Designer Checking and Zooming Functions The zooming function can be enabled or disabled by the special system memory LB9110 i e the zooming function will be valid when the LB9110 is turned ON and invalid when the LB9110 is turned OFF In order to use this function it is necessary to set the Type option to Multiple pages and PageNum option to more than 1 in the Trend Graphics tab respectively With the LB9110 being turned ON zoom out status of the curve can be checked only by double clicking on the Data Log and the zoom in status of selected curve can be checked by clicking at the start point of the curve and
588. y directly moving the scroll bar The scroll address should be set in consistent with the address used by the related scroll bar component For details refer to 3 6 22 Scroll Bar Time When Save Time is checked the below Time option can be selected This option includes 12 words and it is used to save the time for the latest sampling point currently Second minute hour day month year for the starting point and Second minute hour day month year for the end point of the current page are stored in these 12 words respectively and each word represent a point in time Switch to the Channel tab and set the parameters related to each track line Basic Property XY Graph Channel Extended Property Save Data History Display Setting Indirect MaxMin Reference 5 o0 5 EE o 1 16it signed W Indirect Max Min Reference Memory address order is Y Min Y Max A Min X Max hdred Max Min Feler HMIO LW 0 Sas 16 bit unsigned 32 bit signed 32 bit unsigned Toat NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer Color Specifies the color for each track line Line Width Refers to the thickness of the line and 8 kinds of line width are available here Storage Format Sets the data type used by the user and 6 kinds are available Y Min Y Max Sets the minimum value and maximum value of the data corresponding to each track line in Y d
589. y the text in the minimum display area when size changes especially when it becomes smaller as square components like the Analog Meter change sizes in a square way the changed sizes may disrupt the proportion among the component sizes therefore it requires a second fine adjustment by the user By the Special screen settings in the dialog box the special screen which will be replaced to Replace PT is set If the Special screen settings is not used the special screen of the Current PT will continue to be used If the resolutions of the Current PT and New PT are the same no adjustment is required But on the contrary if they are different it will require the user to adjust the fonts and pictures to appropriate sizes NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 3 4 Output Window The Output Window mainly displays compilation information of the project so that the user can precisely pinpoint where errors lie as shown below oT w Z T O o To D ey S r D a fe Pre compile HMIO macro_0 c Macrocode Successfully Waming 0 Eror 0 When the project is opened the Output Window will display the loaded information of the project when the project is compiled the Output Window will display the compilation process and error information Clearance Export of Message The compiled information can be cleared or export
590. ystem starts the initialization read write Download Recipe The user can use this bit address to confirm the process of recipe download Set it to ON under download state and set it to OFF after the download is completed read Upload Recipe The user can use this bit address to confirm the process of recipe upload Set to ON under uploading status and to OFF after the upload is completed read Download Upload Recipe The user can use this bit address to confirm the process of recipe download upload read Touch indicator Set it to ON when touching the Touch indicator read CPU Indicator Set it to ON when touching CPU Indicator read Alarm indicator Set it to ON when touching Alarm Indicator read Printer control ON Enable printer OFF Disable printer Enabling the printing by system parameters is valid read write Enter screen saver state This bit will turn to 1 automatically when the system enters the screen saver state Backlight and turn to 0 when the system exits from the screen saver read Exit from screen saver state This bit will turn to 1 automatically when the system exits from the screen saver state Backlight and turn to O when the system enters the screen saver read Pen Turn ON under selected state It is one function of the Notepad It is used to judge whether the pen is under the selected state currently read write Eraser Turn ON under selected state It is one function of
591. zontal Even Spacing CtrHR Vertical Even Spacing Ctrl L Align Horizontal Center Ctri I Align Vertical Center trl Q Flip Horizontally Ctri B Flip Vertically Ctri K Rotate 90 Degree Ctri J Select All Ctrl A Show Grid W Align with Grid Set Grid Spacing Alt F7 Lock Position Reset Toobars Menu Toolbar Project Library Window Project Work Space Project File Window Output Window Language State Zoom Reset Size to Normal Property Corl A V Cor aAt e Ctrl Alt F Corl Ar o Component List Window Ctr Alt E Display Component s Name Components Tools Option Window Help BH Hs EiQum p of A LN 2 E p w Y Common Toolbar Draw Toolbar Screen Toolbar Component Edit Toolbar Line Width Toolbar Line Style Toolbar System Toolbar Database Toolbar Code Edit Toolbar Pattern Toolbar Text Position Toolbar State Switch Toolbar Font Toolbar Status bar TD ar G o 1 2 3 Statuso Ctr Alt s COH AI G Ctrl Alt P Corl Al A Ctrl Alt L Ctr Alt Corl A T Ctr Alt B8 Corl Alk D COrl Alt H Ctr Alt COrl Alt k Cor aArt o Corl Alt I The options in the View menu are used to control the various kinds of toolbars to be displayed or not NB series Programmable Terminals NB Designer Operation Manual V106 3 15 g N D 5 o NU N M IA c 3 Functions of NB Designer 3 16 Common Toolbar The correspondences of all the items i e

2 - Lakewood Automation

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents